This is a modern-English version of Appletons' Popular Science Monthly, December 1898: Volume LIV, No. 2, December 1898, originally written by Various. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


Established by Edward L. Youmans

Founded by Edward L. Youmans

APPLETONS'
POPULAR SCIENCE
MONTHLY

EDITED BY
WILLIAM JAY YOUMANS

EDITED BY
WILLIAM JAY YOUMANS

VOL. LIV
NOVEMBER, 1898, TO APRIL, 1899

VOL. LIV
NOVEMBER 1898 - APRIL 1899

NEW YORK
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
1899

NEW YORK D. APPLETON AND COMPANY 1899


Copyright, 1899,
By
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.

Copyright, 1899, By D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.


Vol. LIV.Established by Edward L. Youmans.No. 2.

Vol. 54.Founded by Edward L. Youmans.No. 2.

APPLETONS' POPULAR SCIENCE MONTHLY.

Appleton's Popular Science Monthly.

DECEMBER, 1898.

DECEMBER 1898.

EDITED BY WILLIAM JAY YOUMANS.

Edited by William Jay Youmans.


CONTENTS.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

NEW YORK:
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY,
72 FIFTH AVENUE.

Single Number, 50 Cents.Yearly Subscription, $5.00.

NEW YORK:
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY,
72 FIFTH AVENUE.

Single Issue, 50 Cents.Annual Subscription, $5.00.


Copyright, 1898, by D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.
Entered at the Post Office at New York, and admitted for transmission through the mails at second-class rates.

Copyright, 1898, by D. APPLETON AND COMPANY.
Entered at the Post Office in New York and approved for mailing at second-class rates.


CHARLES H. HITCHCOCK.

CHARLES H. HITCHCOCK.


APPLETONS' POPULAR SCIENCE MONTHLY.

APPLETONS' POPULAR SCIENCE MAGAZINE.

DECEMBER, 1898.

DECEMBER 1898.


THE WHEAT-GROWING CAPACITY OF THE UNITED STATES.

By EDWARD ATKINSON.

By Edward Atkinson.

In 1880 it happened to fall to me to make a forecast of the very great reduction in the price of wheat in Great Britain, which could then be predicated on the lessening cost of transportation from Chicago to the seaboard, thence to British ports, which was then sure to be soon followed by a large reduction in the railway charges for bringing the wheat to Chicago from the other Western centers of distribution. I then alleged that the time was not far off when, even if the price of wheat in Mark Lane were reduced from the then existing rate of fifty-two shillings per quarter to thirty-four shillings, it would still yield as full a return to the Western farmer as it had yielded in previous years at fifty shillings and upward. This forecast attracted great attention, and has since been made the subject of very much bitter controversy, especially since the fall in prices was much more rapid than I then thought it could be, and was carried to a much lower point than any one could have then anticipated. It will be remarked that thirty-four shillings in Mark Lane is at the rate of one dollar and three cents per bushel of sixty pounds.

In 1880, I had the opportunity to predict a significant drop in the price of wheat in Great Britain. This was based on the decreasing transportation costs from Chicago to the coast and then to British ports, which would soon be followed by a major cut in railway charges for bringing wheat to Chicago from other Western distribution centers. I claimed that it wouldn’t be long before, even if the price of wheat in Mark Lane dropped from the then-current rate of fifty-two shillings per quarter to thirty-four shillings, it would still provide as good a return to the Western farmer as it had in previous years when it was over fifty shillings. My prediction drew a lot of attention and has since sparked quite a bit of controversy, especially since the price drop was much faster than I initially expected and went much lower than anyone anticipated. It’s worth noting that thirty-four shillings in Mark Lane translates to one dollar and three cents per bushel of sixty pounds.

From time to time I have almost been forced to defend the position then taken, notably when asked to appear before the Royal Commission on Depression in Agriculture at one of their sessions, where I was kept upon the stand for two full days in the effort of the excellent English farmers and landowners to prove that the American farmer had been ruined by the reduction in the price of wheat, which the majority of that commission attributed to the[146] demonetization of silver. The whole tone of that investigation and of a large part of the treatment of the wheat question in Great Britain has been one of complaint and of alleged wrong to British agriculture because the United States had succeeded in supplying the masses of the people of the United Kingdom with cheap bread, with sufficient profit to themselves to keep up the supply.

From time to time, I've almost been forced to defend the position I took back then, especially when I was asked to appear before the Royal Commission on Depression in Agriculture during one of their sessions. I was on the stand for two full days while the excellent English farmers and landowners tried to prove that American farmers had been ruined by the drop in wheat prices, which most of that commission blamed on the[146] demonetization of silver. The overall tone of that investigation and a significant part of the discussion about wheat in Great Britain has been one of complaints and claims of injustice to British agriculture because the United States succeeded in providing the people of the United Kingdom with cheap bread, while still making enough profit to maintain the supply.

Now comes what may be called a cry of alarm from a scientist of highest repute lest England may be deprived even of an adequate supply of wheat, and lest the price should be forced to an exorbitant point. This view of the case was stated at great length by Sir William Crookes when assuming the presidency of the British Association for the Advancement of Science at the recent meeting in Bristol. This address is published in full in the Times of September 8th, the portion devoted to the wheat question filling three out of six columns of closely printed text; the other three are devoted to a complete review of the existing conditions of science. I venture to give a few extracts which will convey to the reader the aspect of the wheat question from this essentially British point of view. Sir William Crookes begins with a sort of apology, which the writer can fully appreciate. He says:

Now comes what can be seen as a warning from a highly respected scientist about the potential shortage of wheat in England and the risk of prices skyrocketing. Sir William Crookes expressed this concern in detail when he took on the presidency of the British Association for the Advancement of Science at the recent meeting in Bristol. His speech was fully published in the Times on September 8th, with the section on the wheat issue taking up three out of six columns of densely printed text; the remaining three columns provide a complete overview of the current state of science. I’d like to share a few excerpts that will give readers insight into the wheat question from this distinctly British perspective. Sir William Crookes starts with a kind of apology, which I can fully understand. He says:

"Statistics are rarely attractive to a listening audience, but they are necessary evils, and those of this evening are unusually doleful.... I am constrained to show that our wheat-producing soil is totally unequal to the strain put upon it. After wearying you with a survey of the universal dearth to be expected, I hope to point a way out of the colossal dilemma. It is the chemist who must come to the rescue of the threatened communities. It is through the laboratory that starvation may ultimately be turned into plenty."

"Statistics are usually not appealing to an audience, but they are necessary evils, and tonight's are particularly grim. I need to demonstrate that our wheat-producing soil is completely incapable of handling the pressure placed on it. After exhausting you with an overview of the widespread shortage we should expect, I hope to provide a solution to this huge problem. It is the chemist who must come to the aid of the threatened communities. Through the laboratory, starvation can ultimately be transformed into abundance."

One of the singular facts which becomes quickly apparent to any one who deals with this subject in Great Britain is the inability of the English farmer to think about agriculture except in terms of wheat. Now we have an example of our English scientist of the highest repute who seems to ignore all other grain and to predict future starvation on an expected deficiency in the supply of wheat. Sir William Crookes proceeds:

One of the obvious facts that anyone dealing with this subject in Great Britain quickly realizes is that the English farmer can only think about agriculture in terms of wheat. We have an example here of our highly respected English scientist who seems to overlook all other grains and predicts future starvation based on an anticipated shortage of wheat. Sir William Crookes goes on:

"The consumption of wheat per head of the population (unit consumption) is over six bushels per annum; and, taking the population at 40,000,000, we require no less than 240,000,000 bushels of wheat, increasing annually by 2,000,000 bushels to supply the increase of population. Of the total amount of wheat consumed in the United Kingdom we grow twenty-five and import seventy-five per cent."

"The average wheat consumption per person is over six bushels a year; with a population of 40 million, we need at least 240 million bushels of wheat, increasing by 2 million bushels each year to accommodate population growth. Of the total wheat consumed in the United Kingdom, we produce twenty-five percent and import seventy-five percent."

He then deals with the impending scarcity, saying:

He then addresses the upcoming shortage, saying:

"To arrest this impending danger it has been proposed that an amount of 64,000,000 bushels of wheat should be purchased by the state and stored in national granaries, not to be opened except to remedy deterioration of grain, or in view of national disaster rendering starvation imminent. This 64,000,000 bushels would add another fourteen weeks' life to the population."

"To tackle this looming threat, it’s been suggested that the state buy 64,000,000 bushels of wheat and store it in national granaries, only to be opened if the grain is at risk of spoiling or in the event of a national disaster that could lead to starvation. This 64,000,000 bushels would provide an additional fourteen weeks of survival for the population."

After dealing with the fact that while it might be possible for the United Kingdom to supply itself with its own wheat at an average of twenty-nine and a half bushels to the acre, he goes on to say that this would require thirteen thousand square miles of British territory, increasing at the rate of one hundred square miles per annum; but he says it would be clearly impossible to assign so large a proportion of the area of the United Kingdom to a single crop without suffering in other matters, adding:

After acknowledging that the United Kingdom could potentially grow its own wheat at an average of twenty-nine and a half bushels per acre, he continues to state that this would need thirteen thousand square miles of British land, increasing by one hundred square miles each year. However, he argues that it would be clearly unfeasible to dedicate such a large portion of the UK’s land to one crop without negatively impacting other areas, adding:

"In any case, owing to our cold, damp climate and capricious weather, the wheat crop is hazardous, and for the present our annual deficit of 180,000,000 bushels must be imported. A permanently higher price for wheat is, I fear, a calamity that ere long must be faced."

"In any case, because of our cold, damp climate and unpredictable weather, the wheat crop is risky, and for now, we need to import our annual shortfall of 180,000,000 bushels. I’m afraid that we will soon have to deal with a permanent increase in wheat prices."

I can imagine with what a relish the Royal Commission on the Depression of Agriculture would have received this prophecy of a permanently higher price for wheat. Sir William Crookes goes on to say:

I can picture how eagerly the Royal Commission on the Depression of Agriculture would have welcomed this prediction of a lasting increase in wheat prices. Sir William Crookes continues:

"Wheat is the most sustaining food grain of the great Caucasian race, which includes the peoples of Europe, United States, British America, the white inhabitants of South Africa, Australasia, parts of South America, and the white population of the European colonies."

"Wheat is the most essential food grain for the Caucasian race, which includes people from Europe, the United States, British America, the white inhabitants of South Africa, Australasia, parts of South America, and the white population of European colonies."

He then points out how rapidly the consumers of wheat have increased, yet failing to attribute this increase in part to the rapid reduction in the cost. He says:

He then notes how quickly the number of wheat consumers has grown, but he doesn't acknowledge that this growth is partly due to the significant drop in prices. He says:

"In 1871 the bread-eaters of the world numbered 371,000,000; in 1881, 416,000,000; in 1891, 472,600,000; and at the present time they number 516,500,000. The augmentation of the world's bread-eating population in a geometrical ratio is evidenced by the fact that the yearly aggregates grow progressively larger.... To supply 516,500,000 bread-eaters, if each bread-eating unit is to have his usual ration, will require a total of 2,324,000,000 bushels for seed and food. According to the best authorities, the total supplies from the 1897-'98 harvest are 1,921,000,000."

"In 1871, the number of people eating bread in the world was 371,000,000; in 1881, it rose to 416,000,000; in 1891, it reached 472,600,000; and now it stands at 516,500,000. The growth of the world's bread-eating population is clear from the fact that the yearly totals are getting larger and larger. To provide for 516,500,000 bread-eaters, if each person is to have their usual portion, we will need a total of 2,324,000,000 bushels for seed and food. According to reliable sources, the total supplies from the 1897-98 harvest are 1,921,000,000."

It will be observed that while the English average consumption is said to be six bushels, the average employed in this computation is four and a half bushels per head. He then remarks upon the large harvests for seven years, saying:

It will be noted that while the average consumption in England is reported to be six bushels, the average used in this calculation is four and a half bushels per person. He then comments on the significant harvests over the past seven years, saying:

"Bread-eaters have almost eaten up the reserves of wheat, and the 1897 harvest being under average, the conditions become serious.... It is clear we are confronted with a colossal problem that must tax the wits of the wisest. Up to recent years the growth of wheat has kept pace with demands. As wheat-eaters increased, the acreage under wheat expanded. We forget that the wheat-growing area is of strictly limited extent, and that a few million acres regularly absorbed soon amount to a formidable number. The present position being so gloomy, let us consider future prospects."

"Bread lovers have nearly consumed all the wheat reserves, and with the 1897 harvest falling short of expectations, the situation is becoming serious.... It’s obvious we are facing a huge problem that will challenge even the smartest people. Until recently, wheat production kept up with demand. As more people started eating wheat, the land used for wheat farming grew. We overlook the fact that the areas suitable for growing wheat are quite limited, and a few million acres can quickly add up to a significant total. Given how bleak things are right now, let’s think about what the future holds."

He then deals successively with the United States, Russia, Canada, and other countries. In regard to the United States he remarks:

He then addresses the United States, Russia, Canada, and other countries one by one. When it comes to the United States, he notes:

"Practically there remains no uncultivated prairie land in the United States suitable for wheat-growing. The virgin land has been rapidly absorbed, until at present there is no land left for wheat without reducing the area for maize, hay, and other necessary crops. It is almost certain that within a generation the ever-increasing population of the United States will consume all the wheat grown within its borders, and will be driven to import, and, like ourselves, will scramble for a lion's share of the wheat crop of the world."

"Almost all uncultivated prairie land in the United States that’s good for growing wheat is now gone. The untouched land has quickly been used up, and now there’s no land left for wheat without cutting back on the space for corn, hay, and other essential crops. It’s nearly certain that within a generation, the growing population of the United States will eat all the wheat produced here and will have to import some, just like we do, competing for a large portion of the world's wheat supply."

It is difficult for a citizen of the United States who has given any attention to the potential of our land to conceive of such views being held by an Englishman of highest scientific intelligence. When I was in England last summer I had a long interview with the editor of one of the papers of widest influence in all Great Britain. I then remarked that there were forces in action in the United States in three or four different directions which would profoundly change all the conditions of British industry, and render the English-speaking people of the United Kingdom and the United States more and more interdependent. It is seldom that one finds more than an occasional half a column in any great English paper devoted to the subject of our economic relations and to the development either of the American iron industry, of its agriculture, or of the cotton production and manufacture. Yet, in all these branches of industry, profound changes of world-wide importance, and yet of greater importance to the people of Great Britain, are now in progress. I may venture to say that this address of Sir William Crookes marks even a more profound ignorance of the forces in action in this country than even I had ever comprehended. Sir William Crookes next submits the following computation:

It's hard for a citizen of the United States who has thought about our land's potential to imagine such views being held by a highly educated Englishman. Last summer, when I was in England, I had a lengthy conversation with the editor of one of the most influential newspapers in all of Great Britain. I pointed out that there are forces at play in the United States in several directions that would significantly change all the conditions of British industry and make the English-speaking people of the UK and the US more interdependent. It's rare to find more than a small section in any major English newspaper dedicated to discussing our economic relations or the development of the American iron industry, agriculture, or cotton production and manufacturing. Yet, in all these areas of industry, significant changes of global importance—and even more critical for the people of Great Britain—are currently taking place. I can confidently say that this address by Sir William Crookes reflects an even greater misunderstanding of the forces at work in this country than I had ever realized. Sir William Crookes then presents the following calculation:

"The rate of consumption for seed and food by the whole world of bread-eaters was 4.15 bushels per unit per annum for the eight[149] years ending 1878, and at the present time is 4.5 bushels.... Should all the wheat-growing countries add to their area to the utmost capacity, on the most careful calculation the yield would give us only an addition of some 100,000,000 acres, supplying at the average world yield of 12.7 bushels to the acre, 1,270,000,000 bushels, just enough to supply the increase of population among bread-eaters till the year 1931. At the present time there exists a deficit in the wheat area of thirty-one thousand square miles.... When provision shall have been made if possible to feed 230,000,000 units likely to be added to the bread-eating populations by 1931, by the complete occupancy of the arable areas of the temperate zone now partially occupied, where can be grown the additional 330,000,000 bushels of wheat required ten years later by a hungry world? If bread fails—not only us, but all the bread-eaters of the world—what are we to do? We are born wheat-eaters. Other races, vastly superior to us in numbers, but differing widely in material and intellectual progress, are eaters of Indian corn, rice, millet, and other grains; but none of these grains have the food value, the concentrated health-sustaining power of wheat, and it is on this account that the accumulated experience of civilized mankind has set wheat apart as the fit and proper food for the development of muscle and brains."

"The average consumption of seed and food by all bread-eaters worldwide was 4.15 bushels per person per year for the eight[149] years ending in 1878, and is currently 4.5 bushels.... If all wheat-growing countries fully expand their arable land, careful estimates suggest that the yield would only add about 100,000,000 acres, producing roughly 1,270,000,000 bushels at the average world yield of 12.7 bushels per acre—just enough to meet the population growth of bread-eaters until 1931. Right now, there's a shortage in the wheat-growing area of thirty-one thousand square miles.... If we manage to adequately feed the additional 230,000,000 people expected to join the bread-eating population by 1931 through the complete utilization of currently partially used arable land in the temperate zone, where will we grow the extra 330,000,000 bushels of wheat needed ten years later for a hungry world? If bread fails—not just for us, but for all bread-eaters globally—what will we do? We are wheat eaters by nature. Other races, significantly larger in numbers yet different in material and intellectual development, consume foods like corn, rice, millet, and other grains; however, none of these options match the nutritional value and concentrated health benefits of wheat. This is why the combined experience of civilized mankind has recognized wheat as the ideal and proper food for developing muscle and intellect."

Sir William then proceeds to deal with the salvation by chemistry. But before taking notes from that part of his address, is it not singular to remark this tendency of the scientist as well as of the English farmer to think only in terms of wheat, wholly ignoring other grains? It may be interesting to point out the exact difference in the nutrients.

Sir William then goes on to discuss salvation through chemistry. But before we take notes on that part of his talk, isn’t it interesting to notice how both scientists and English farmers tend to focus solely on wheat, completely overlooking other grains? It could be worthwhile to highlight the specific differences in their nutrients.

Wheat flour is analyzed in the following statement:

Wheat flour is examined in the following statement:

Water 11.6
Protein11.1
Fats1.1
Carbohydrates75.6
Mineral matters0.6
Total nutrients 88.4
Potential energy in one pound:1,660calories.

Corn or maize meal differs only as follows:

Corn or maize meal only differs in the following ways:

Water 14.5
Protein9.1
Fats3.8
Carbohydrates71.0
Mineral matters1.6
Total nutrients 85.5
Potential energy in one pound:1,650calories.

Oatmeal:

Oatmeal:

Water 7.7
Protein15.1
Fats7.1
Carbohydrates68.1
Mineral matters2.0
Total nutrients 92.3
Potential energy in one pound:1,845calories.

Rye flour:

Rye flour:

Water 13.1
Protein6.7
Fats0.8
Carbohydrates78.7
Mineral matters0.7
Total nutrients 86.9
Potential energy in one pound:1,620calories.

It will be remarked that the difference between maize meal and wheat flour consists only in a slightly larger proportion of fats and a slightly less proportion of protein, a matter very easily balanced by giving consideration to the other kinds of food which may be used by the bread-eater. Again, it is hardly to be supposed that the Scotchmen who listened to Sir William Crookes admitted in their minds that wheat flour possessed any greater potential energy in the development either of muscle or of mind than the oatmeal to which they have been habituated for so many generations. I doubt if any New England Yankee who had been brought up on the diet of corn (maize) bread and baked beans, the latter supplying the protein element in abundance, would admit any greater development of the muscle or brain by exclusive dependence on wheat for the bread of life. It is not, however, my purpose to deal with the relative food values of wheat and other grains; it is simply to take up this extraordinary delusion of Sir William Crookes in respect to the potential of the wheat-producing area of this country. His theory is salvation by chemistry, and he rightfully calls attention to the necessity for obtaining a cheap and abundant supply of nitrogen. All the other elements for fertilizing the soil are relatively abundant at low cost, especially in this country. Our enormous supply of the phosphates of lime and potash gives assurance on this matter, and our one deficiency, or rather the one element heretofore of high cost, has been the necessary proportion of nitrogen required to maintain an even balance in the soil.

It can be noted that the difference between cornmeal and wheat flour is just a slightly higher fat content and a slightly lower protein content, which can easily be balanced by considering other foods that bread eaters might include in their diet. Furthermore, it's unlikely that the Scots who listened to Sir William Crookes believed that wheat flour had any more potential energy for building muscle or brainpower than the oatmeal they've been used to for generations. I doubt that any New Englander raised on a diet of corn bread and baked beans, with the beans providing plenty of protein, would say that exclusive reliance on wheat for sustenance leads to better muscle or brain development. However, my aim isn’t to examine the relative nutritional values of wheat and other grains; instead, I want to address this remarkable misconception of Sir William Crookes regarding the potential of the wheat-growing areas in this country. His theory is one of salvation through chemistry, and he rightly emphasizes the need for a cheap and plentiful supply of nitrogen. All other soil nutrients are relatively plentiful and inexpensive, especially in this country. Our vast supply of phosphates of lime and potash assures us of this, and our only deficiency, which has previously been costly, is the necessary amount of nitrogen needed to maintain a balanced soil.

I am surprised that Sir William Crookes should attribute so little importance to the recent discovery of the influence of bacteria, which living and dying in nodules attached to the stalks of the[151] leguminous plants dissociate the nitrogen of the atmosphere, where the supply is unlimited, converting it to the nutrition of the plant, and thence to the renovation of the soil. Sir William deals only with the renovating qualities of clover, having apparently no comprehension of the existence of the cow-pea vine, the soya bean, the alfalfa, and many other types of legumes by which the partially exhausted soil, especially of the South, is now being renovated with great rapidity at a low cost. Sir William's hopes of nitrogen seem to be based on some method being found to save the sewage of cities, but mainly on the conversion of the water power of Niagara and other great falls to the generation of electricity and thence to the dissociation of the nitrogen of the atmosphere.

I’m surprised that Sir William Crookes doesn’t seem to recognize the significance of the recent discovery regarding the role of bacteria. These bacteria, which live and die in nodules attached to the stalks of the [151] leguminous plants, break down nitrogen from the atmosphere—where it’s abundant—and turn it into nutrition for the plants, which in turn helps rejuvenate the soil. Sir William only focuses on the soil-renewing properties of clover, seemingly unaware of the presence of the cow-pea vine, soybeans, alfalfa, and many other types of legumes that are now quickly restoring the nutrient levels of the depleted soil, especially in the South, and doing so at a low cost. Sir William appears to lean on the idea that nitrogen can be sourced from saving city sewage, but he mainly talks about generating electricity from the water power of Niagara and other major waterfalls to extract nitrogen from the atmosphere.

The point to which I wish to direct attention and inquiry is this alleged nearly complete taking up of the land of the United States capable of producing wheat in paying quantities. The question which Sir William Crookes puts is this: He says there is a deficit in the wheat area of thirty-one thousand square miles which must be converted to wheat-growing in order to keep up with the increasing demand of the world to prevent wheat starvation in less than one generation. It will be observed that the present necessities of the world are computed by Sir William Crookes at 2,324,000,000 bushels, of which this country will supply 600,000,000 to 700,000,000 bushels from an area of land devoted to wheat of 71,000 square miles, a fraction over two per cent of the area of the United States, omitting Alaska.

The point I want to highlight and examine is the claim about the almost total exhaustion of land in the United States that can produce wheat in profitable amounts. The question posed by Sir William Crookes is this: he states that there is a shortage of thirty-one thousand square miles of wheat-growing land that needs to be converted to wheat production to meet the rising global demand and avoid wheat shortages in less than a generation. It's noted that Sir William Crookes estimates the current global need at 2,324,000,000 bushels, of which the U.S. will provide 600,000,000 to 700,000,000 bushels from 71,000 square miles of land used for wheat, which is just over two percent of the total area of the United States, not including Alaska.

The problem may then be stated in these terms: Given a demand of the wheat-consuming population of the world for this whole supply of 2,324,000,000 bushels, this country could supply it at the present average per acre by devoting two hundred and fifty thousand square miles to this crop, or less than ten per cent of the area, omitting Alaska. We could supply the world's present demand, but of course such computations are purely speculative.

The problem can be framed like this: Given the global demand for wheat at 2,324,000,000 bushels, this country could meet that demand by dedicating two hundred and fifty thousand square miles to this crop, which is less than ten percent of the land area, excluding Alaska. We could fulfill the world’s current demand, but obviously, these calculations are just estimates.

I venture to say that if a contract could be entered into by the bread-eaters of the world with the farmers of the United States, giving them an assurance of a price equal to one dollar a bushel in London, or a fraction under thirty-three shillings per quarter of eight bushels of sixty pounds each, which would yield to the American farmer from sixty to eighty cents per bushel on the farm, the land now under cultivation in wheat and not required for any other crop or for pasture would be opened in the United States which would be devoted to this service year by year as fast as the consumption called for it. In fact, there are now fully one hundred thousand square miles of land, 64,000,000 acres, fully suitable to the production of wheat at fifteen bushels to the acre, practically unoccupied in[152] any branch of agriculture, which would be devoted to wheat on an assured price of one dollar a bushel in Mark Lane, yielding 960,000,000 bushels. Or, to limit the question yet more: Sir William Crookes states the needs of the people of the United Kingdom at the present time to be 240,000,000 bushels, increasing at a rate of less than two per cent per annum, of which twenty-five per cent is derived from her own soil. If John Bull, in place of building granaries, could offer thirty-three shillings a quarter, or one dollar a bushel, in London as a permanent price for the next thirty years, would not Uncle Sam accept the offer? and if Uncle Sam should then ask for bids among the States, are there not several single States or Territories that would take the contract each for itself?

I would say that if the bread-eaters of the world could make a deal with the farmers in the United States, guaranteeing them a price of one dollar per bushel in London, or just under thirty-three shillings per quarter of eight bushels of sixty pounds each, which would allow American farmers to earn between sixty and eighty cents per bushel on the farm, then the land currently used for wheat and not needed for any other crops or pasture would be opened up in the United States. This land would be dedicated to wheat production every year as demand required. In fact, there are currently about one hundred thousand square miles of land, 64,000,000 acres, perfectly suited for producing fifteen bushels per acre, that are practically unoccupied by any form of agriculture, which could be used for wheat if there was a guaranteed price of one dollar per bushel in Mark Lane, yielding 960,000,000 bushels. To narrow it down further: Sir William Crookes states that the current needs of the people in the United Kingdom are 240,000,000 bushels, increasing at a rate of less than two percent per year, with twenty-five percent produced from their own land. If John Bull, instead of building granaries, could offer thirty-three shillings per quarter, or one dollar per bushel, in London as a guaranteed price for the next thirty years, wouldn’t Uncle Sam accept the deal? And if Uncle Sam were to ask for bids among the states, wouldn’t there be several individual states or territories willing to take the contract on their own?

Having put that question, I now propose to submit an inquiry in due form in order to sustain my own belief that we can supply the whole present and the increasing demand of Great Britain for the next thirty years with six bushels of wheat per head at a dollar a bushel from land situated wholly in the Indian Territory, not yet open to private entry, but which may soon be open when the Indian titles have all been purchased. Or, again, I undertake to say that the State of Texas can meet this whole demand without impairing in the slightest degree its present products of grain, cotton, wool, and meats, and without appropriating the use of more than a small fraction of the area of that single State which has not yet been fenced in or subjected to the plow to the production of wheat.

Having asked that question, I now want to formally present an inquiry to support my belief that we can meet the entire current and growing demand of Great Britain for the next thirty years with six bushels of wheat per person at a dollar a bushel from land located entirely in the Indian Territory, which isn't yet available for private purchase but may open up soon once all the Indian titles are settled. Alternatively, I assert that the State of Texas can fulfill this entire demand without affecting its current production of grain, cotton, wool, and meat in any significant way, and without using more than a small portion of the area in that single state that hasn't been fenced or used for wheat farming.

Perhaps it would be better to put a more simple proposition in order to bring out what would be perfectly feasible. Let it be assumed that the British public should really become so alarmed as to be willing to put up the granaries which have been suggested for storing fourteen weeks' consumption, or 64,000,000 bushels. That would require a very large capital which would yield no income on which there would be a heavy loss of interest and a considerable risk of damage to the wheat during the period of storage. In place of this a feasible plan would be to put up the capital which would be required for building these granaries, invest it in consols, and pledge it as collateral security for the fulfillment of a contract running for thirty years for the annual purchase of 10,000,000 bushels of wheat per month, or say 128,000,000 bushels a year, or twice the quantity proposed to be stored.

Maybe it would be better to suggest a simpler idea to highlight what is actually possible. Let’s assume that the British public gets really concerned and is willing to set up the granaries proposed for storing enough for fourteen weeks, or 64 million bushels. That would require a huge amount of capital that wouldn't generate any income, leading to a significant loss of interest and a good chance of damage to the wheat while it's being stored. Instead, a practical plan would be to use the capital needed to build these granaries, invest it in consols, and use it as collateral for a thirty-year contract for the annual purchase of 10 million bushels of wheat per month, which totals about 128 million bushels a year—twice the amount suggested for storage.

There are several large dealers in grain and provisions in the United States who would be ready to take this contract and to put up a sufficient sum of capital invested in United States bonds to serve as security for prompt delivery.

There are several major suppliers of grain and provisions in the United States who would be willing to take this contract and invest enough capital in U.S. bonds to serve as security for timely delivery.

An assured supply of 128,000,000 bushels in addition to the[153] ordinary supply might allay the fear of scarcity and high price of bread. It may here be observed that the low average crop per acre of the United States has been due to the inclusion of wheat grown on land partially exhausted by cropping or not well adapted to this grain. The all-wheat as well as the all-cotton and all-tobacco methods of ignorant farming or cropping year after year are now very rapidly giving place to varied crops coupled with an increase of product per acre. No agency has been of such service in this matter as the Agricultural Experiment Stations, now established in almost every State under the supervision of men of the highest capacity. Under this system wheat, which requires a few days of machine work in the spring and autumn, occupying very little time of the farmer himself, is rapidly becoming the surplus or money crop of farms otherwise maintained on the alternate products. Under such cultivation an average crop of twenty bushels to the acre would be assured, in many sections much more. One hundred and twenty-eight million bushels at twenty bushels per acre would require 6,400,000 acres, or ten thousand square miles. As an alternate with other crops in a rotation of four, this would call for only forty thousand square miles in varied farming. In order to satisfy the anxieties of Sir William Crookes lest land should be taken from other necessary work, this area might be divided among several States and Territories, say five thousand square miles among eight. Oklahoma (38,719 square miles) was opened to settlement only seven years since, and has yet a great deal of unoccupied land. It will this year raise 13,000,000 bushels of wheat from 850 square miles devoted to the crop. Give Oklahoma five thousand square miles, the unoccupied Indian Territory (30,272 square miles) would take all the rest as soon as open; but we may only assign five thousand square miles to that area. Five thousand more might be assigned to the limestone section of Virginia, in the valley of the Shenandoah and its tributaries; five thousand each to Kentucky (40,400 square miles) and Tennessee (42,050 square miles), while the great wheat-growing States—Kansas (82,080 square miles), Nebraska (77,510 square miles), Minnesota (83,365 square miles), and the two Dakotas (148,445 square miles)—would compete for the contract each to open a little patch of five thousand square miles, not yet adjacent to railways. We should thus have exhausted the area called for without regard to the instant competition which would come from California (158,360 square miles), Oregon (96,030 square miles), and Washington (69,180 square miles), and probably from Pennsylvania (45,215 square miles) and other Eastern or Southern States. At a dollar per bushel in London no difficulty would be found in placing this contract even without resort to Texas (265,780 square miles),[154] which could take the whole on but a small portion of its area not yet under the plow.

An assured supply of 128,000,000 bushels, plus the[153] regular supply, could help ease concerns about food shortages and the high price of bread. It's worth noting that the low average crop yield per acre in the United States has been due to the use of land that is either partially depleted from constant cropping or not suited for wheat growth. The practices of exclusively growing wheat, cotton, and tobacco year after year are quickly being replaced by more varied crop rotations, which increase productivity per acre. The Agricultural Experiment Stations, established in nearly every state and managed by highly qualified experts, have been instrumental in this shift. With this new approach, wheat—which requires only a few days of machine work in the spring and fall and takes up little of the farmer’s time—is becoming the main money-making crop on farms that previously relied on alternating crops. With this method, an average yield of twenty bushels per acre is achievable, and in many regions, it could be even more. One hundred twenty-eight million bushels, at twenty bushels per acre, would need 6,400,000 acres, or ten thousand square miles. In a four-crop rotation, this would only need forty thousand square miles for diverse farming. To alleviate Sir William Crookes's concerns about taking land from other essential activities, this area could be distributed across several states and territories—say, five thousand square miles among eight. Oklahoma (38,719 square miles), which was opened for settlement just seven years ago, still has substantial unoccupied land. This year, it is expected to produce 13,000,000 bushels of wheat from 850 square miles dedicated to the crop. If we give Oklahoma five thousand square miles, the unoccupied Indian Territory (30,272 square miles) would claim the rest as soon as it opens up, although we can only allocate five thousand square miles there. Another five thousand could go to Virginia's limestone region in the Shenandoah Valley and its tributaries; five thousand each to Kentucky (40,400 square miles) and Tennessee (42,050 square miles), while the major wheat-producing states—Kansas (82,080 square miles), Nebraska (77,510 square miles), Minnesota (83,365 square miles), and the two Dakotas (148,445 square miles)—would compete to open a small patch of five thousand square miles that isn’t close to railways. This way, we would fully utilize the required area without considering the immediate competition that would arise from California (158,360 square miles), Oregon (96,030 square miles), and Washington (69,180 square miles), and possibly from Pennsylvania (45,215 square miles) and other Eastern or Southern states. At a price of a dollar per bushel in London, there wouldn't be any trouble securing this contract, even without including Texas (265,780 square miles),[154] which could handle the entire demand with just a small fraction of its land not yet cultivated.

The only additional measure which would then be required would be one which must come in any event—namely, the neutralization of the ports of export and import of food in the United States and Great Britain and in such other countries as may choose to join, together with the neutralization of a ferry or sea way for the transportation of the food, wherein no hostile shot should be fired and no seizure of private property permitted on the part of any nation, the condition of this understanding being that if any other nation ventured to question or contest this dedication of a neutral way for the conveyance of food to the purposes of peace, the navies of Great Britain and of the United States would be united to force its acceptance, and to sweep from the ocean the fleet of every state or nation which ventured to contest this measure. That would be a suitable measure for beginning to make a right use of navies—for the protection of commerce and for the destruction of every fleet or vessel which did not accept the principle that private property not contraband of war should be exempt from seizure upon the high seas, coupled with a declaration limiting contraband of war so that it may never be made to include customary articles of commerce, especially food, not now contraband.

The only additional measure needed would be one that must happen regardless—specifically, the neutralization of the ports for importing and exporting food in the United States and Great Britain, as well as in any other countries that wish to join. This would also include the neutralization of a ferry or sea route for transporting food, where no shots would be fired and no one country would be allowed to seize private property. The condition of this agreement is that if any other nation tries to question or challenge this dedication of a neutral route for the peaceful transport of food, the navies of Great Britain and the United States would work together to enforce it and eliminate the fleets of any state or nation that dared to contest this action. This would be an appropriate way to start using navies properly—for the protection of trade and for removing any fleet or vessel that doesn’t recognize the principle that private property, unless it's contraband of war, should be safe from seizure on the high seas, along with a statement that limits the definition of contraband so that it never includes commonly traded goods, particularly food, which is not currently considered contraband.


The foregoing text was set in type and one hundred advance proof sheets were supplied, which have been sent by the writer to the Secretaries of Agriculture and the chiefs of the Agricultural Experiment Stations in all the States to which we look for any considerable product of wheat. The replies are so complete and so numerous as to make it impossible to incorporate a full digest of the whole case within the limits of the present article. A supplement will be prepared for a later number of this journal, in which this information will be tabulated. For the present purpose I may avail myself only of a part of the data which have been sent to me.

The previous text was printed and one hundred advance proof copies were provided, which the author sent to the Secretaries of Agriculture and the heads of the Agricultural Experiment Stations in all the states known for significant wheat production. The responses are so thorough and numerous that it’s impossible to include a complete summary in this article. A supplement will be created for a future issue of this journal, where this information will be organized in a table. For now, I can only use a portion of the data that has been sent to me.

1. The evidence suffices to prove that there is not a State named above which could not set apart five thousand square miles for the cultivation of wheat in a rotation of four without trenching in the slightest degree upon any other crop. 2. In previous essays, in which I have dealt with the potential of the agriculture of this country, I have very guardedly computed but one half our total area of three million square miles (omitting Alaska) as being arable land, suitable for the plow. The returns now in my hands would render it suitable to increase that area to two thirds, or two million square miles subject to cultivation. 3. The area now under the plow for the production[155] of our principal crops for the year 1897 is given in the table below. If miscellaneous crops be added to these principal crops, the cultivated land of this country does not now exceed, and in fact does not reach, twenty per cent of the arable land, while from the cultivated portion a progressive increase in product may be expected under the impetus of improved methods of farming on lessening areas in each farm.

1. The evidence is enough to prove that there isn't a state mentioned above that couldn't set aside five thousand square miles for growing wheat in a four-year rotation without impacting any other crops. 2. In earlier essays where I discussed the agricultural potential of this country, I cautiously estimated only half of our total area of three million square miles (excluding Alaska) as being suitable for farming. The data I now have suggests that we could increase that area to two-thirds, or two million square miles, suitable for cultivation. 3. The area currently farmed for our main crops in 1897 is shown in the table below. If we include other crops in addition to these main crops, the cultivated land in this country doesn't exceed, and actually doesn't reach, twenty percent of the arable land, while from the cultivated portion, we can expect a steady increase in output due to better farming methods on increasingly smaller areas of each farm.

 Acreage.Yield.Product.Price.Value.
  Per acre.Bushels.Cents. 
Maize80,095,05123.81,902,967,93326.3$501,072,952
Wheat39,465,06613.4530,149,16880.8428,547,121
Oats25,730,37527.2698,767,80921.2147,974,719
Barley2,719,11624.566,685,12737.725,142,139
Rye1,703,56116.127,363,32444.712,239,647
Buckwheat717,83620.914,997,45142.16,319,188
All grain150,431,005 3,240,930,812 $1,121,295,766
Hay42,426,7701.4360,664,8766.62401,390,728
Cotton23,273,209 8,532,7056.78291,811,564
 216,130,984   $1,814,498,058
Maize125,150squaremiles;
Wheat61,660""
Oats40,200""
Barley4,250""
Rye2,660""
Buckwheat1,120""
 235,040""
Hay66,290""
Cotton36,520""
 337,850""

The area under wheat in 1897 was a fraction under forty million acres, or a little less than sixty-two thousand square miles. The high price secured for that crop has led to an increase in land under wheat in 1898 to a fraction under seventy-one thousand square miles (nine thousand square miles added), on which the largest crop ever known has doubtless been raised, variously computed at the present time from 620,000,000 to 700,000,000 bushels. The area now under wheat is therefore less than four per cent of our arable land.

The area planted with wheat in 1897 was just under forty million acres, or nearly sixty-two thousand square miles. The high price paid for that crop caused an increase in wheat acreage in 1898 to just under seventy-one thousand square miles (adding nine thousand square miles), resulting in what is likely the largest crop ever recorded, currently estimated between 620,000,000 and 700,000,000 bushels. So, the area currently used for wheat is less than four percent of our farmable land.

In order to develop our potential in wheat it will be best to limit our present consideration to three States only—namely, Minnesota, North and South Dakota—from which we derive the greater part of our spring wheat. The area of these three States is two hundred and thirty-two thousand square miles, disregarding fractions. The land which is deemed to be suitable for wheat growing is estimated by the officials from whom I have derived reports at one hundred and sixty[156] thousand square miles. The crop of 1898 is computed at 190,000,000 bushels, a quantity sufficient to supply Great Britain with all that she needs in addition to her domestic production. It has been grown on an area of less than twenty thousand square miles, or upon one eighth part of the land of these three States only; the rest of the wheat land can be as surely and profitably devoted to the production of wheat as that part already under that crop. The fact may be recalled that the territory which now constitutes the two States of North and South Dakota began to be computed separately from other States only in 1880, when a little under 3,000,000 bushels were credited to that territory. The minimum product of these two States this year will be 100,000,000 bushels.

To maximize our potential in wheat, it's best to focus on just three states—Minnesota, North Dakota, and South Dakota—since we get most of our spring wheat from them. These three states cover an area of 232,000 square miles, excluding fractions. The land considered suitable for wheat farming is estimated by the officials who provided my reports to be 160,000[156] square miles. The crop yield for 1898 is projected at 190 million bushels, which is enough to supply Great Britain with all the wheat it needs, in addition to its domestic production. This crop has been grown on less than 20,000 square miles, or one-eighth of the land in these three states; the remaining wheat land can equally and profitably be used for wheat production. It's worth noting that the area now known as North and South Dakota was first calculated separately from other states in 1880, when just under 3 million bushels were credited to that territory. This year, the minimum yield from these two states will be 100 million bushels.

One of the authorities upon whom I rested for absolute information is Mr. L. G. Powers, chief of the Bureau of Labor of the State of Minnesota, in whose Annual Report for 1896 is the most exhaustive study of the grain production of the Mississippi Valley that has ever been made. I therefore do not hesitate to incorporate in this article his comments upon the proof sheets sent to him:

One of the experts I relied on for accurate information is Mr. L. G. Powers, head of the Bureau of Labor for the State of Minnesota. In his Annual Report for 1896, he provided the most thorough study of grain production in the Mississippi Valley that has ever been done. So, I have no hesitation in including his feedback on the proof sheets I sent him in this article:

"The probable product of wheat in a State like Minnesota, at a fixed price, such as Mr. Atkinson mentions, can be estimated, even approximately, only by taking account of a number of such factors as the present actual and relative profit of the wheat farmer, and the probable changes that will be made in the next few years in the cost of cultivating wheat and of transporting it to London. A few of the leading well-known facts relating to these subjects may with profit be noted in this connection, and first a few words with reference to the profits of wheat raising in Minnesota.

"The expected wheat production in a state like Minnesota, at a set price as Mr. Atkinson points out, can only be estimated, even roughly, by considering several factors such as the current profitability of wheat farmers and the likely changes in the costs of growing and transporting wheat to London over the next few years. It might be useful to highlight some key facts related to these topics, starting with a brief discussion on the profits associated with wheat farming in Minnesota."

"Whatever may be true of wheat raising in Europe, or in the Atlantic coast States of America, it can be positively asserted that the average profit of the Minnesota wheat grower has been steadily though irregularly increasing since the admission of this State to the Union in 1858. This is evidenced by the relative number and amount of farm-mortgage foreclosures in the State, as a whole, and in its several sections at the present time and in the past. Properly to use those foreclosures as a measure of the increasing prosperity of the Minnesota wheat farmer, two facts should be kept in mind. In 1880, and prior to that time, the industry of wheat growing was most fully developed in those counties which now constitute the First Congressional District. The farmers of those counties at that time depended for their income largely upon their wheat crops. Later they have adopted a highly diversified system of agriculture in which wheat is only an incidental cash crop. The exclusive cultivation of wheat now finds its seat in the counties composing the Seventh Congressional District. The lands of this district are situated about two[157] hundred miles on an average farther from the markets of Europe than those of the First District. Notwithstanding this fact and all changes in the selling price of wheat, and all allied changes affecting the wheat industry of the State, the farm-mortgage foreclosures in the Seventh District in the five years ending with December, 1897, were relatively twenty per cent less than they were in the First District in the five years 1880 to 1884, and were forty per cent less than in the five years 1869 to 1873. To the extent represented by these figures has the average cultivation of wheat as an exclusive crop become more profitable in Minnesota than it was twenty, thirty, or forty years ago. A much greater increase of farm prosperity has taken place in those counties which have adopted a diversified system of agriculture, and made wheat an incidental cash crop.

"Regardless of what may be true about wheat farming in Europe or the Atlantic coast states of America, it's clear that the average profit for Minnesota wheat growers has been steadily, albeit unevenly, increasing since the state joined the Union in 1858. This is shown by the relative number and amount of farm mortgage foreclosures in the state and its different regions, both now and in the past. To properly use these foreclosures as a gauge of the Minnesota wheat farmer's increasing prosperity, two facts should be considered. In 1880, and before that time, wheat farming was most developed in the counties that now make up the First Congressional District. Farmers in those counties relied heavily on their wheat crops for income. Over time, they have adopted a more diversified agricultural system where wheat is just one of many cash crops. Now, the exclusive cultivation of wheat is primarily found in the counties of the Seventh Congressional District. The lands in this district are about two[157] hundred miles further from European markets on average than those in the First District. Despite this and all the fluctuations in wheat prices and related changes affecting the state's wheat industry, farm mortgage foreclosures in the Seventh District in the five years ending in December 1897 were about twenty percent lower than in the First District from 1880 to 1884, and forty percent lower than in the five years from 1869 to 1873. This indicates that on average, cultivating wheat as a primary crop has become more profitable in Minnesota than it was twenty, thirty, or forty years ago. A much greater increase in farm prosperity has occurred in those counties that have embraced a diversified agriculture system and made wheat a secondary cash crop."

"The growing farm prosperity in Minnesota above noted finds its highest development in the past five years, during which the selling price of wheat in London has averaged approximately one dollar per bushel, or the amount called for by the conditions stated by Mr. Atkinson. This increasing farm prosperity in Minnesota, which lessens the mortgage foreclosures of the exclusive wheat growers forty per cent in thirty years, has been the main factor in the settlement of Minnesota and the two Dakotas. It has caused the wheat grown in the territory of these three States to increase from 10,000,000 bushels in 1867 to 190,000,000 bushels in 1898. With no added profit in the business, the settlement of the vacant lands of these States and those of Montana and of the British Northwest will move on, and twenty-five years from now will find in the territory tributary to Minneapolis and Duluth not less than 400,000,000 bushels of wheat raised annually. Even then but a fraction of the possible wheat lands of the great Northwest will be under the plow. If a material increase should take place in the present average profits of the Northwestern wheat grower, the imagination of man could hardly picture the stimulus to wheat culture that would result.

The increasing prosperity of farms in Minnesota has reached its peak in the last five years, during which the selling price of wheat in London has averaged about one dollar per bushel, as stated by Mr. Atkinson. This rise in farm prosperity in Minnesota, which has reduced mortgage foreclosures among exclusive wheat growers by 40% over thirty years, has been a key factor in the settlement of Minnesota and the two Dakotas. It has led to an increase in wheat production in this region from 10 million bushels in 1867 to 190 million bushels in 1898. Without any additional profit in the business, the settlement of the vacant lands in these states, as well as in Montana and the British Northwest, will continue, and in twenty-five years, we can expect that the area around Minneapolis and Duluth will produce no less than 400 million bushels of wheat annually. Even then, only a small portion of the potential wheat lands in the great Northwest will be cultivated. If there were a significant increase in the current average profits for Northwestern wheat growers, it would be hard to imagine the boost to wheat farming that would follow.

"With a fixed price of one dollar per bushel in London, called for by Mr. Atkinson's conditions, the American farmers can find increased profit in two possible sources: decreased cost of transportation to London, and lessening cost of wheat production in Minnesota. A detailed analysis of the various charges that constitute the present cost of transporting wheat from the Red River Valley of Minnesota, the Dakotas, and of Manitoba to London gives reasonable assurance of a reduction in the next few years of at least five and possibly seven cents per bushel in such cost. Here is an almost certain addition, in the next few years, of from five to seven cents a bushel to the profit of American-grown wheat, providing only its average selling price in London remains practically unchanged.

"With a set price of one dollar per bushel in London, as outlined by Mr. Atkinson's conditions, American farmers can find greater profits from two sources: lower transportation costs to London and reduced wheat production costs in Minnesota. A detailed breakdown of the various expenses involved in transporting wheat from the Red River Valley of Minnesota, the Dakotas, and Manitoba to London suggests a reasonable likelihood of a reduction in the next few years of at least five and possibly seven cents per bushel in these costs. This almost guarantees an increase of five to seven cents per bushel in the profits from American-grown wheat in the coming years, assuming the average selling price in London stays mostly the same."

"A careful study of farm methods among Minnesota farmers discloses this fact: Some wheat growers, with the best farm machinery, and employing the best methods of agriculture, make a profit in wheat raising of from ten to fifteen cents a bushel more than do their less intelligent and less progressive neighbors. Now, the tendency in the State and throughout the Northwest is to bring, by education and a general exchange of methods, the poorer farmers up to the level of the best. This change is rapidly taking place. It will not require fifteen years to realize its consummation. When the methods and facilities of the average farmer are brought up to the level of the best of the present time, this change, with the change above noted in transportation charges, will add to the average profit of Minnesota farmers in growing wheat a total of not less than fifteen and possibly of over twenty cents a bushel. Such a change would more than double the existing net profit of the wheat grower in the Northwest. Could it be maintained for a series of years, as is presupposed under Mr. Atkinson's supposition of London prices, it would furnish such an incentive to wheat growing in Minnesota and the surrounding territory as has as yet never been experienced. A million families of immigrants would pour into the great Northwest within the next twenty to twenty-five years. They would take up all the existing vacant lands of Minnesota and the Dakotas. The lands suitable for irrigation in these States and in Montana would be set to growing wheat. The wave of humanity anxious to raise wheat for a dollar a bushel in London would sweep past the boundaries of the four States mentioned, and carry the cultivation of that cereal all over Manitoba, Assiniboia, Alberta, and Saskatchewan. In these four British provinces and in the four American States, dollar wheat in London would in twenty years open more acres of good land to wheat than are now subject to the plow within their borders. Even then the beginning only would have been made to the possibilities of wheat culture in the British Northwest. Settlements would not have extended as far north as St. Petersburg in Russia; neither would settlers have trenched upon the lands with a climate as severe as that of the Russian metropolis.

A detailed look at farming methods among Minnesota farmers reveals an interesting fact: some wheat growers, using top-notch farm machinery and the best agricultural practices, earn a profit of ten to fifteen cents per bushel more than their less knowledgeable and less innovative neighbors. In both the State and the Northwest, there’s a push to elevate the poorer farmers to the level of the best through education and sharing effective methods. This transition is happening quickly. It won’t take fifteen years to see it fully realized. When the average farmer’s methods and tools reach the standard of today’s best, this improvement, combined with the noted changes in transportation costs, will boost the average profit for Minnesota farmers growing wheat by at least fifteen cents, possibly over twenty cents, per bushel. Such a shift would more than double the current net profit for wheat growers in the Northwest. If this could be sustained for several years, as assumed in Mr. Atkinson's scenario regarding London prices, it would create an unprecedented incentive for wheat farming in Minnesota and the surrounding areas. Within the next twenty to twenty-five years, a million immigrant families would flock to the great Northwest, occupying all the vacant agricultural land in Minnesota and the Dakotas. The land suitable for irrigation in these states and in Montana would be dedicated to wheat cultivation. The wave of people eager to grow wheat for a dollar a bushel in London would move beyond the boundaries of the four mentioned states, spreading wheat farming across Manitoba, Assiniboia, Alberta, and Saskatchewan. In these four Canadian provinces and the four American states, dollar wheat in London would, within twenty years, open up more acres of quality land for wheat than are currently being farmed in those regions. Even then, this would only be the beginning of what’s possible for wheat farming in the British Northwest. Settlements would not have reached as far north as St. Petersburg in Russia, nor would settlers have ventured onto lands with as harsh a climate as that of the Russian capital.

"The foregoing is a brief statement of what dollar wheat in London would do for one section of North America in stimulating wheat cultivation. If that statement is based upon a true conception, as the writer believes it is, of the possibilities of the American Northwest, it demonstrates how impossible it will be to maintain dollar wheat in London for any great length of time in the future. It also shows that Mr. Atkinson is wrong in not asserting a sure continuation of that decline in wheat prices which he so fully predicted in 1880."

"The above is a short explanation of how dollar wheat in London could boost wheat farming in one part of North America. If this explanation is based on an accurate understanding, as the writer believes it is, of the potential of the American Northwest, it highlights how unlikely it will be to sustain dollar wheat in London for an extended period in the future. It also indicates that Mr. Atkinson is mistaken in not confidently stating that the drop in wheat prices he predicted in 1880 will definitely continue."

Cost of Shipping Wheat per Bushel from Moorhead, an Interior Point in Minnesota, to Liverpool.

Cost of shipping wheat per bushel from Moorhead, an inland point in Minnesota, to Liverpool.

 On May 27, 1898.On July 9, 1898.On August 20, 1898.On September 17,
1898.
 Cts. per bu.Cts. per bu.Cts. per bu.Cts. per bu.
Rate, Moorhead to Duluth9.309.308.708.70
Duluth elevator and inspection charges0.800.800.800.80
Lake freight, Duluth to Buffalo1.401.251.251.75
Elevator charges and commission at Buffalo1.001.001.001.00
Canal freight, Buffalo to New York3.003.002.752.50
Elevator charges, etc., in New York2.002.002.002.00
Ocean freight, New York to Liverpool8.003.504.506.00
Totals25.5020.8521.0022.75
General average, 22.525 cents per bushel.

It will be remarked that Mr. Powers says I am wrong in not asserting a sure continuation of the decline in the price of wheat which I predicted in 1880. In setting up one dollar a bushel in London as the standard of this inquiry, I had no thought that our farmers could be made happy for the next thirty years by any hope of securing so high a price. In my predictions in 1880 I said that the time was not then far off when the farmers of the Mississippi Valley would secure as large a remuneration from their wheat at thirty-four shillings per quarter in London as they had been gaining from a previous average of fifty-two shillings. I might then have fixed the lessened price at twenty-eight shillings, and at the present time I have a greater expectation of a reduction in the price of wheat in Mark Lane to less than twenty-eight shillings a quarter, or eighty-five cents a bushel, than I had in 1880 that it would so soon reach thirty-four shillings. I merely adopted a dollar a bushel as an arbitrary standard on which an abundant supply of bread at low cost would be absolutely assured to the people of England.

Mr. Powers claims I’m wrong for not stating that the decline in wheat prices I predicted in 1880 would continue for sure. When I set one dollar per bushel in London as the standard for this analysis, I never believed our farmers would be content for the next thirty years just hoping for such a high price. In my 1880 predictions, I mentioned that it wouldn’t be long before the farmers in the Mississippi Valley would earn as much from their wheat at thirty-four shillings per quarter in London as they had from an earlier average of fifty-two shillings. I could have set the lowered price at twenty-eight shillings, and now I actually expect wheat prices in Mark Lane to drop below twenty-eight shillings a quarter, or eighty-five cents a bushel, more than I expected back in 1880 for it to quickly hit thirty-four shillings. I simply used one dollar per bushel as an arbitrary standard to ensure an ample supply of affordable bread for the people of England.

In fact, as I stated before the Royal Commission on Depression of Agriculture, it is not probable that a reduction in the price of wheat to forty cents a bushel on Western farms or sixty-five to seventy cents a bushel in England would stop the growth of this grain, although it might check an increase. When the price went down to a very low point on the last excessive crop it is probable that 100,000,000 bushels of wheat were fed to swine and to cattle. It proved to make better pork and beef than maize or Indian corn, and, as the price of meat did not decline in anything like the proportion to the price of wheat, the farmers who thus fed their excess secured a profit which the sale of the crude grain might not have given.

In fact, as I mentioned to the Royal Commission on the Depression of Agriculture, it's unlikely that lowering the price of wheat to forty cents per bushel on Western farms or sixty-five to seventy cents per bushel in England would stop the production of this grain, although it could slow down its growth. When the price dropped to a very low level during the last huge crop, it’s believed that 100 million bushels of wheat were fed to pigs and cattle. It turned out to produce better pork and beef than corn or maize, and since the price of meat didn’t drop nearly as much as the price of wheat, the farmers who fed their surplus to livestock made a profit that selling the raw grain might not have provided.

In this comment Mr. Powers deals with the reduction in the number of foreclosures in Minnesota. Attention should be called to[160] the fact that the United States census investigation for which a million dollars was appropriated, for the purpose of recording farm mortgages in 1890, disclosed the fact that in the ten great grain-growing States of the middle West two thirds of the farms were then free of any mortgage of any kind, and were well stocked; the incumbrance on the remaining third being less than forty per cent of the computed value of the mortgaged farms. Since that date several State investigations have been made, leading to the conclusion that not exceeding twenty per cent of the farms in these States are now under any incumbrance of any kind. In the more prosperous parts of Minnesota and other wheat sections since the substitution of intelligent and varied agriculture for the single wheat crop, foreclosures have almost ceased, such as do occur being attributed to special causes; while such is the abundance of capital accumulated in this section that the rates of interest on safe investments, which but a few years since were nearly double those prevailing in the seaboard commercial cities, are now about even. When certain causes lately produced a short stringency in the money markets of the East, remittances were made from these Western cities for investment in Eastern commercial paper.

In this comment, Mr. Powers discusses the decrease in foreclosures in Minnesota. It's important to note that the U.S. census investigation, for which a million dollars was allocated to record farm mortgages in 1890, revealed that in the ten major grain-producing states of the Midwest, two-thirds of the farms were debt-free and well-stocked. The remaining third had debts that were less than forty percent of the estimated value of the mortgaged farms. Since then, several state investigations have concluded that no more than twenty percent of the farms in these states currently have any kind of debt. In the more prosperous areas of Minnesota and other wheat regions, the shift to smart and diverse farming practices instead of just focusing on wheat has nearly eliminated foreclosures. When they do happen, they are due to specific reasons. The amount of capital accumulated in this region is so abundant that interest rates on safe investments, which were nearly double those in coastal commercial cities just a few years ago, are now about the same. Recently, when certain factors led to a short tightening of the money markets in the East, money was sent from these western cities to invest in Eastern commercial paper.

In regard to wheat production at a fixed price in London, the Commissioner of Agriculture and Labor of North Dakota remarks: "Wheat at one dollar per bushel in London would net the North Dakota farmer on the average about seventy-five cents per bushel on the railroad track. At that price as a standard, every farmer in the State would utilize all the land he has, and buy up more of the land now lying idle and in the hands of speculators. It would increase immigration so that nearly all the vacant Government land would be taken up. We also have over one million acres of school and State land, of which at least eighty per cent is suitable for raising wheat. Such a price would give North Dakota a boom that never had its equal."

Regarding wheat production at a fixed price in London, the Commissioner of Agriculture and Labor of North Dakota states: "Wheat priced at one dollar per bushel in London would give the North Dakota farmer an average of about seventy-five cents per bushel at the railroad track. With that price as a baseline, every farmer in the state would maximize all the land they have and acquire more land that's currently unused and held by speculators. It would boost immigration so that nearly all the vacant government land would be claimed. We also have over a million acres of school and state land, with at least eighty percent suitable for wheat cultivation. Such a price would create an economic boom in North Dakota like never before."

A few words may be given to the report from Texas. The Secretary of the Board of Agriculture states that "the area of arable land of fair quality, including pasture that might be put under the plow in this State, is two hundred thousand square miles; about one hundred thousand square miles suitable for wheat and other grains lying north of parallel 31°; about one hundred thousand square miles lying south of that line adapted to cotton, sugar, fruits, and vegetables of all kinds."

A few words can be shared about the report from Texas. The Secretary of the Board of Agriculture mentions that "the area of good arable land, including pastures that could be cultivated in this State, is two hundred thousand square miles; around one hundred thousand square miles suitable for wheat and other grains located north of the 31° parallel; and about one hundred thousand square miles to the south of that line suitable for cotton, sugar, fruits, and all kinds of vegetables."

An unexpected reply comes from Idaho, as yet insignificant in wheat production, stating that the potential of that State under the conditions named might reach 400,000,000 bushels.

An unexpected response comes from Idaho, which is still minor in wheat production, saying that the state's potential under the specified conditions could reach 400,000,000 bushels.

Again, from Arkansas, to which State we have looked more for excellent cotton than for grain, "there are fifteen million acres of[161] good wheat land; wheat is fast becoming a cash crop, displacing cotton—the capacity of a considerable part of the land at the beginning being forty bushels to the acre, which, being much better than five-cent cotton, is leading the farmers to take advantage of existing prices."

Again, from Arkansas, which we have always considered more for its excellent cotton than for grain, "there are fifteen million acres of[161] good wheat land; wheat is quickly becoming a cash crop, replacing cotton—the capacity of a significant portion of the land initially being forty bushels per acre, which, being far better than five-cent cotton, is encouraging farmers to capitalize on current prices."

Time has not sufficed since my questions were sent out for replies to reach me from Oregon, Washington, and Montana, where the potential in wheat production is probably equal to that of Minnesota, North and South Dakota combined.

Time has not been enough since I sent out my questions for responses to come back to me from Oregon, Washington, and Montana, where the potential for wheat production is likely on par with that of Minnesota, North Dakota, and South Dakota combined.

Sir William Crookes makes reference to the future necessity of providing fertilizers, a matter to which the closest attention is now being given by the cultivation of renovating crops. But regard must be given to the fact that we have the most complete and adequate supply of phosphate of lime and phosphate of potash in the vast deposits of bone or mineral phosphates of Tennessee, Kentucky, and Florida, while again we may look to nitrate of soda as a very inexpensive source of nitrogen, of which the most adequate supply can be assured at very low cost. Known methods are also being applied to saving the enormous waste of nitrogen from our coke ovens and iron furnaces.

Sir William Crookes highlights the future need for fertilizers, which is now being closely examined through the cultivation of restorative crops. However, it's important to recognize that we have a plentiful and sufficient supply of phosphate of lime and phosphate of potash in the extensive deposits of bone and mineral phosphates found in Tennessee, Kentucky, and Florida. Additionally, we can consider nitrate of soda as a very cost-effective source of nitrogen, with a reliable supply available at a low price. Established methods are also being used to reduce the significant waste of nitrogen from our coke ovens and iron furnaces.

I almost feel it right to apologize to Sir William Crookes for the presentation of these facts. My function is that of the practical business man who deals with these economic problems wholly from that point of view, and not from the high standard of a complete mastery of the physical sciences.

I almost feel like I should apologize to Sir William Crookes for presenting these facts. My role is that of a practical businessman who addresses these economic issues solely from that perspective, rather than from the lofty position of complete expertise in the physical sciences.

As I have stated, I happen to have dealt with this question several times at meetings of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, and in other ways in Great Britain as well as in this country. I deem it of the utmost importance at the present time that the interdependence of the English-speaking people should be brought into view in the most conspicuous manner. In their relative production and conditions the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland and the United States are the complement of each other. Their mutual relation or interdependence is now being recognized, and it can not be long before many of the legal obstructions to mutual service will be removed. The people of this country are now passing through a stage in their economic education closely corresponding to that through which Great Britain passed between 1840 and 1856 under the wise leadership of Sir Robert Peel, Richard Cobden, and William E. Gladstone. We move more quickly, not only in acts but in ideas, than we did fifty years ago. The revolution of ideas which has followed the revolution of institutions in the Southern States has made the people of this country into one homogeneous nation. A revolution of ideas in regard to the conditions of international[162] commerce will presently bring the English-speaking people of the world into one homogeneous body governed by the same common law, the same common principles of action, and the same policy in the collection of revenue. When thus united, there can be no competition in the commerce of the world on the part of the continental states of Europe under their present burdens—the blood tax of standing armies and navies and the money tax of debts that can never be paid. There have been within a few months two witnesses to the growing influence and power of the English-speaking people when united for the maintenance of commerce and for the conduct of the works of peace, order, and industry: one is the warning of the Chancellor of the Austrian Empire, calling upon the states of middle Europe to unite their forces in order to remain capable of maintaining government by privilege and taxation by force of arms; the other, the recent manifesto of the enlightened ruler of Russia, calling upon the states of continental Europe to disarm, lest they should hereafter be incapable of competition with the English-speaking people of the world when they become bound together by a union of mutual service and by community of interest which without any formal alliance will give to them the chief control in rendering service by the exchange of product for product to all other states and nations, to the mutual benefit of all who are thus joined in the bonds of peace.

As I've mentioned, I've addressed this question several times at meetings of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, as well as in other settings in both Great Britain and this country. I believe it’s extremely important right now to highlight the interdependence of English-speaking people in a prominent way. In terms of production and conditions, the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland and the United States complement each other. Their mutual relationship or interdependence is now becoming recognized, and it won’t be long before many of the legal barriers to mutual support are lifted. The people of this country are going through a phase of economic understanding similar to what Great Britain experienced between 1840 and 1856 under the wise leadership of Sir Robert Peel, Richard Cobden, and William E. Gladstone. We move faster, not only in actions but also in ideas, than we did fifty years ago. The shift in ideas following the transformation of institutions in the Southern States has unified the people of this country into one cohesive nation. A change in thinking about international commerce will soon unite the English-speaking peoples of the world into a single entity governed by common law, shared principles of action, and a unified approach to revenue collection. Once united, there can be no competition in global commerce from the continental European states under their current burdens—the human cost of standing armies and navies along with the monetary burden of debts that can never be fully repaid. In recent months, there have been two indications of the increasing influence and power of English-speaking people when united for maintaining commerce and promoting peace, order, and industry: one is the warning from the Chancellor of the Austrian Empire, urging the states of central Europe to join forces to maintain governance through privilege and taxation via military power; the other is a recent statement from the enlightened ruler of Russia, calling for continental European states to disarm, so that they do not fall behind the English-speaking peoples of the world when they come together for mutual support and shared interests, which, without any formal alliance, will give them primary control in providing services by exchanging products with all other states and nations, benefiting all connected by the ties of peace.

On my visit to Russia last year, to meet the leading economists and statisticians of Europe, it was stated to me by well-informed men that a plan had been considered by several continental states in the event of war to change the present international custom by making food products contraband of war, the purpose being to cripple England. To such desperate conditions have some of the European states been brought under the burden of the policy of blood and iron. My comment upon this insane proposal was that I hoped it might become a matter of public discussion, since nothing could so surely and quickly bring about a commercial union of the English-speaking people, to the end that, even if no other alliance were made, their navies might at any moment be combined for the protection of their commerce, and for the total cessation of any interference by war vessels or privateers with their traffic.

During my visit to Russia last year to meet with the top economists and statisticians in Europe, informed individuals explained to me that several countries were considering a plan in the event of war to change current international practices by classifying food products as contraband of war, with the aim of weakening England. This is the desperate situation some European nations find themselves in due to the harsh policies of blood and iron. My take on this outrageous proposal was that I hoped it would spark public debate, as nothing could more effectively and quickly lead to a commercial union among English-speaking countries. This union would mean that, even without any other alliances, their navies could come together at any time to protect their trade and completely halt any interference by warships or privateers with their commerce.

The prime motive of this article is to remove from the minds of our English friends many false impressions which I have constantly met in my intercourse even among men who hold important positions, of which the address of Sir William Crookes is but an extreme expression, and to bring into common view a comprehension of the resources of this country and of the mutual dependence of the United Kingdom and the United States in the supply and consumption not only of wheat, but of all the other necessaries of life.

The main goal of this article is to clear up the many misconceptions that I have often encountered in my interactions, even among people in significant positions, like Sir William Crookes' speech, which is just a strong example of this. I aim to highlight the resources of this country and to show how the United Kingdom and the United States depend on each other for the supply and consumption of not just wheat, but all essential goods.


THE RACIAL GEOGRAPHY OF EUROPE.
A SOCIOLOGICAL STUDY.

(Lowell Institute Lectures, 1896.)

Lowell Institute Lectures, 1896.

By WILLIAM Z. RIPLEY, Ph. D.,

ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF SOCIOLOGY, MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY; LECTURER IN ANTHROPO-GEOGRAPHY AT COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY.

By WILLIAM Z. RIPLEY, Ph.D.,

ASSISTANT PROFESSOR OF SOCIOLOGY, MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY; LECTURER IN ANTHROPO-GEOGRAPHY AT COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY.

SUPPLEMENT.—THE JEWS.[1]

Social solidarity, the clearest expression of which to-day is nationality, is the resultant of a multitude of factors. Foremost among these stand unity of language, a common heritage of tradition and belief, and the permanent occupation of a definite territory. The first two are largely psychological in essence. The third, a material circumstance, is necessary rather to insure the stability of the others than for its own sake; although, as we know, attachment to the soil may in itself become a positive factor in patriotism. Two European peoples alone are there which, although landless, have succeeded, notwithstanding, in a maintenance of their social consciousness, almost at the level of nationality. Both Gypsies and Jews are men without a country. Of these, the latter offer perhaps the most remarkable example, for the Gypsies have never disbanded tribally. They still wander about eastern Europe and Asia Minor in organized bands, after the fashion of the nomad peoples of the East. The Jews, on the other hand, have maintained their solidarity in all parts of the earth, even in individual isolation one from another. They wander not gregariously in tribes, often not even in families. Their seed is scattered like the plant spores of which the botanists tell us; which, driven by wind or sea, independently travel thousands of miles before striking root or becoming fecund. True, the Jews bunch wherever possible. This is often a necessity imposed for self-preservation; but in their enforced migrations their associations must change kaleidoscopically from place to place. Not all has been said [164] even yet of the unique achievement of this landless people. That the Jews have preserved their individuality despite all mutations of environment goes without saying. They have done more. They have accomplished this without absolute unity of language. Forced of necessity to adopt the speech of their immediate neighbors, they have only where congregated in sufficient numbers been able either to preserve or to evolve a distinctive speech. In Spain and the Balkan states they make use of Spanish; in Russia and Poland they speak a corrupt German; and in the interior of Morocco, Arabic. Nevertheless, despite these discouragements of every kind, they still constitute a distinctive social unit wherever they chance to be.

Social solidarity, which is most clearly represented today by nationality, comes from a variety of factors. The most important of these are a shared language, a common heritage of traditions and beliefs, and the ongoing presence in a specific territory. The first two are mostly psychological, while the third, being more tangible, primarily serves to ensure the stability of the others rather than for its own sake; however, it’s clear that attachment to one’s land can foster patriotism. Only two European groups, the Gypsies and Jews, have managed to maintain a social consciousness that is almost at the level of nationality, despite being landless. Among these, Jews stand out as perhaps the most remarkable example, since Gypsies have never lost their tribal structure. They continue to roam Eastern Europe and Asia Minor in organized groups, similar to nomadic peoples of the East. In contrast, Jews have maintained their solidarity all over the world, even when isolated from one another. They often do not travel together in tribes, or even in families. Their presence is scattered like plant spores that, carried by the wind or sea, travel thousands of miles before taking root and thriving. While Jews do gather whenever possible, often out of necessity for survival, their forced migrations lead to constantly changing connections from place to place. There's still more to say about the unique achievements of this landless people. It’s clear that Jews have preserved their individuality despite all changes in their environment. They've gone further; they’ve done this without a single dominant language. Necessity has forced them to adopt the languages of their neighbors, and they've only been able to keep or evolve a distinct tongue when gathered in large enough numbers. In Spain and the Balkans, they use Spanish; in Russia and Poland, they speak a corrupted German; and in Morocco, Arabic. Yet despite these numerous challenges, they remain a distinctive social unit wherever they are found.

This social individuality of the Jews is of a peculiar sort. Bereft of linguistic and geographical support, it could not be political. The nineteenth century, says Anatole Leroy-Beaulieu, is the age of nationality; meaning obviously territorial nationality, the product of contiguity, not birth. To this, he says, the Jew is indifferent, typifying still the Oriental tribal idea. As a result he is out of harmony with his environment. An element of dislike of a political nature on the part of the Christian is added to the irreconcilability of religious belief. It has ever been the Aryan versus the Semite in religion throughout all history, as Renan has observed; and to-day it has also become the people versus the nation, as well as the Jew versus the Christian. Granted that this political dissonance is largely the fault of the Gentile, its existence must be acknowledged, nevertheless.

The social individuality of Jews is quite unique. Lacking both linguistic and geographical backing, it couldn’t be political. The nineteenth century, according to Anatole Leroy-Beaulieu, is the era of nationality; specifically, territorial nationality, which comes from proximity rather than heritage. He argues that the Jew is indifferent to this, still representing the Oriental tribal concept. Because of this, he feels out of sync with his surroundings. There is also a layer of political dislike from Christians that adds to the conflict of religious beliefs. Throughout history, it has always been Aryans against Semites in religion, as Renan noted; today, it has also evolved into the people against the nation, as well as Jews against Christians. While it’s true that much of this political discord is largely the Gentiles' responsibility, its existence still needs to be acknowledged.

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION of JEWS.

Jewish Geographic Distribution.

How has this remarkable result been achieved? How, bereft of two out of three of the essentials of nationality, has the Jew been enabled to perpetuate his social consciousness? Is the superior force of religion, perhaps abnormally developed, alone able to account for it all? Is it a case of compensatory development, analogous in the body to a loss of eyesight remedied through greater delicacy of finger touch? Or is there some hidden, some unsuspected factor, which has contributed to this result? We have elsewhere shown that a fourth element of social solidarity is sometimes, though rarely, found, in a community of physical descent. That, in other words, to the cementing bonds of speech, tradition, belief, and contiguity, is added the element of physical brotherhood—that is to say, of race. Can it be that herein is a partial explanation of the social individuality of the Jewish people? It is a question for the scientist alone. Race, as we constantly maintain, despite the abuses of the word, really is to be measured only by physical characteristics. The task before us is to apply the criteria of anthropological science, therefore, to the problems of Jewish derivation and descent. Only incidentally and as matters of contributory interest shall we consider the views of[165] the linguists, the archæologists, and the students of religious traditions. Our testimony is derived from facts of shape of head, color of hair and eye, of stature, and the like. These alone are the data indicative of racial descent. To these the geographer may add the probabilities derived from present distribution in Europe. No more do we need to settle the primary racial facts. Further speculations concerning matters rather than men belong to the historian and the philologist.

How has this incredible result been achieved? How has the Jew managed to maintain his social identity despite lacking two out of three key aspects of nationality? Is the strong influence of religion, perhaps unusually heightened, the only explanation for this? Is it similar to how a loss of eyesight may lead to improved sensitivity in touch? Or could there be some hidden, unexpected factor that has contributed to this outcome? We have previously shown that a rare fourth element of social unity can sometimes be found in a common physical ancestry. In other words, alongside the uniting bonds of language, tradition, belief, and proximity, there is the aspect of physical kinship—that is, race. Could this be part of the explanation for the unique social identity of the Jewish people? This question is for scientists to answer. Race, as we consistently point out, despite the misuses of the term, should only be gauged by physical traits. Our goal is to apply the standards of anthropological science to the issues of Jewish ancestry and lineage. We will only briefly consider the insights from[165] linguists, archaeologists, and scholars of religious traditions. Our observations are based on facts like head shape, hair and eye color, height, and similar characteristics. These are the only data indicating racial lineage. The geographer can add insights based on current population distribution in Europe. We no longer need to assess the primary racial facts. Further speculation on these matters, rather than individuals, is the domain of historians and linguists.

The number and geographical distribution of the chosen people of Israel is of great significance in its bearing upon the question of their origin.[2] While, owing to their fluid ubiquitousness, it is exceedingly difficult to enumerate them exactly, probability indicates that there are to-day, the world over, between eight and nine million Jews. Of these, six or seven million are inhabitants of Europe, the remainder being sparsely scattered over the whole earth, from one end to the other.

The number and geographical distribution of the chosen people of Israel is very important for understanding their origins.[2] While it’s quite challenging to count them accurately due to their widespread presence, estimates suggest that there are currently between eight and nine million Jews around the world. Of these, six to seven million live in Europe, while the rest are thinly spread across the globe, from one end to the other.

Their distribution in Europe, as our map opposite shows, is exceedingly uneven. Fully one half of these descendants of Jacob reside in Russia, there being four or five million Jews in that country alone. Austria-Hungary stands next in order, with two million odd souls. After these two there is a wide gap. No other European country is comparable with them except it be Germany and Roumania with their six or seven hundred thousand each. The British Isles contain relatively few, possibly one hundred thousand, these being principally in London. They are very rare in Scotland and Ireland—only a thousand or fifteen hundred apiece. Holland contains also about a hundred thousand, half of them in the celebrated Ghetto at Amsterdam. Then follow France with eighty thousand more or less, and Italy with perhaps two thirds as many. From Scandinavia they have always been rigidly excluded, from Sweden till the beginning and from Norway until nearly the middle of this century. Spain, although we hear much of the Spanish Jew, contains practically no indigenous Israelites. It is estimated that there were once about a million there settled, but the persecutions of the fifteenth century drove them forth all over Europe, largely to the Balkan states and Africa. There are a good many along these Mediterranean shores of Africa, principally in Morocco and Tripoli. [166] The number decreases as we approach Egypt and Palestine, the ancient center of Jewish dispersion. As to America, it is estimated, although we know nothing certainly, that there are about a half million Jews scattered through our cities in the United States. New York city, according to the last census, contained about eighty thousand Poles and Russians, most of whom, it may be assumed, were Jews. But they have come since in ever-increasing numbers, with the great exodus from Russia, at the rate of scores of thousands annually. A recent writer places their present number in New York city at a quarter of a million. The British provinces, on the other hand, do not seem to offer great attractions; as late as 1870, for example, the census in Nova Scotia could not discover a solitary Jew.

Their distribution in Europe, as shown on the opposite map, is extremely uneven. About half of these descendants of Jacob live in Russia, with four or five million Jews in that country alone. Austria-Hungary follows next, with just over two million people. After these two, there’s a significant drop. No other European country comes close except Germany and Romania, each hosting around six or seven hundred thousand. The British Isles have relatively few, about one hundred thousand, mostly in London. They are quite rare in Scotland and Ireland, with only about one thousand to fifteen hundred each. Holland also has about one hundred thousand, half of whom live in the famous Ghetto at Amsterdam. Next is France, with around eighty thousand, and Italy, with perhaps two-thirds that number. Scandinavia has always strictly excluded them, from Sweden until recently and from Norway until nearly the middle of this century. Spain, although often associated with the Spanish Jew, has virtually no indigenous Israelites. It’s estimated that there were once about a million settled there, but the persecutions of the fifteenth century forced them to scatter across Europe, largely to the Balkan states and Africa. Many can be found along the Mediterranean coast of Africa, primarily in Morocco and Tripoli. [166] The numbers decrease as we approach Egypt and Palestine, the ancient center of Jewish dispersion. In terms of America, it’s estimated—though we don’t know for sure—that about half a million Jews are scattered throughout cities in the United States. According to the last census, New York City had about eighty thousand Poles and Russians, most of whom were likely Jews. They have since arrived in increasing numbers, especially during the large exodus from Russia, at a rate of tens of thousands annually. A recent writer estimates their current numbers in New York City at a quarter of a million. The British provinces, on the other hand, don’t seem to offer much attraction; as recently as 1870, for instance, the census in Nova Scotia found not a single Jew.

A more suggestive index of the problems of Jewish distribution, however, is offered in the ratio of the number of Jews to the entire population. This is directly illustrated by our map. To be sure, this represents the situation twenty years ago, but no great change in relativity is to be suspected since that time. Even the wholesale exodus from Russia of recent years has not yet drawn off any large proportion of its vast body of population. Inspection of our map shows that the relative frequency of Jews increases in proportion to the progressive darkening of the tints. This brings out with startling clearness the reason for the recent anti-Semitic uprisings in both Russia, Austria, and the German Empire. A specific "center of gravity" of the Jewish people, as Leroy-Beaulieu puts it, is at once indicated in western Russia. The highest proportion, fifteen per cent, more or less, appears, moreover, to be entirely restricted to the Polish provinces, with the sole exception of the government of Grodno. About this core lies a second zone, including the other west Russian governments, as well as the province of Galicia in the Austro-Hungarian Empire. Germany, as it appears, is sharply divided from its eastern neighbors, all along the political frontier. Not even its former Polish territory, Posen, is to-day relatively thickly settled with Jews. Hostile legislation it is, beyond a doubt, which so rigidly holds back the Jew from immigration along this line. Anti-Semitismus is not, therefore, to-day to any great extent an uprising against an existing evil; rather does it appear to be a protest against a future possibility. Germany shudders at the dark and threatening cloud of population of the most ignorant and wretched description which overhangs her eastern frontier. Berlin must not, they say, be allowed to become a new Jerusalem for the horde of Russian exiles. That also is our American problem. This great Polish swamp of miserable human beings, terrific in its proportions, threatens to drain itself off into our country as well, unless we restrict its ingress. As along the German frontier, so also toward the[167] east, it is curious to note how rapidly the percentage of Jews decreases as we pass over into Great Russia. The governments of St. Petersburg, Novgorod, and Moscow have no greater Jewish contingent of population than has France or Italy; their Jewish problem is far less difficult than that of our own country is bound to be in the future. This clearly defined eastern boundary of Judenthum is also the product of prohibitive legislation. The Jews are by law confined within certain provinces. A rigid law of settlement, intended to circumscribe their area of density closely, yields only to the persuasion of bribery. Not Russia, then, but southwestern Russia alone, is deeply concerned over the actual presence of this alien population. And it is the Jewish element in this small section of the country which constitutes such an industrial and social menace to the neighboring empires of Germany and Austria. In the latter country the Jews seem to be increasing in numbers almost four times as rapidly as the native population. The more elastic boundaries of Jewish density on the southeast, on the other hand, are indicative of the legislative tolerance which the Israelites there enjoy. Wherever the bars are lowered, there does this migratory human element at once expand.

A more revealing indicator of the issues related to Jewish distribution is the ratio of Jews to the total population. Our map illustrates this directly. While it reflects the situation from twenty years ago, we shouldn't expect major changes in this ratio since then. Even the large number of Jews leaving Russia in recent years hasn't significantly impacted its large population. Our map shows that the frequency of Jews increases as the colors darken. This highlights clearly why there have been recent anti-Semitic uprisings in Russia, Austria, and the German Empire. A specific "center of gravity" of the Jewish people, as Leroy-Beaulieu states, is identified in western Russia. The highest percentage, around fifteen percent, seems to be concentrated entirely in the Polish provinces, with the exception of the Grodno government. Surrounding this core is a second zone that includes the other west Russian governments and the province of Galicia in the Austro-Hungarian Empire. Germany is sharply divided from its eastern neighbors along the political border. Not even its former Polish territory, Posen, has a relatively high Jewish population today. Hostile legislation is undoubtedly what keeps Jews from immigrating along this route. Thus, anti-Semitism today is not so much a reaction against a present evil; it seems more like a protest against a potential future threat. Germany is alarmed by the looming presence of a large, uneducated, and impoverished population on its eastern border. They fear that Berlin could become a new Jerusalem for a wave of Russian exiles. This is also our issue in America. This vast Polish region filled with suffering people, immense in size, threatens to spill over into our country as well unless we limit their entry. Similar to the German border, it's interesting to see how quickly the percentage of Jews decreases as we move into Greater Russia. The governments of St. Petersburg, Novgorod, and Moscow have no larger Jewish population than France or Italy; their Jewish issue is far less complicated than what our own country will likely face in the future. This clearly marked eastern boundary of Jewish presence is a result of restrictive laws. Jews are legally restricted to specific provinces. A strict settlement law designed to limit their population density can only be bypassed through bribery. Thus, it's not all of Russia, but southwestern Russia, that is truly concerned about the presence of this alien population. The Jewish community in this small area poses a significant industrial and social threat to the nearby empires of Germany and Austria. In Austria, the Jewish population seems to be growing almost four times faster than that of the native population. On the other hand, the more flexible boundaries of Jewish density in the southeast reflect the legal tolerance that Jews there experience. Wherever restrictions are eased, this migratory population immediately begins to expand.

The peculiar problems of Jewish distribution are only half realized until it is understood that, always and everywhere, the Israelites constitute pre-eminently the town populations.[3] They are not widely disseminated among the agricultural districts, but congregate in the commercial centers. It is an unalterable characteristic of this peculiar people. The Jew betrays an inherent dislike for hard manual or outdoor labor, as for physical exercise or exertion in any form. He prefers to live by brain, not brawn. Leroy-Beaulieu seems to consider this as an acquired characteristic due to mediæval prohibition of land ownership or to confinement within the Ghetto. To us it appears to be too constant a trait the world over to justify such a hypothesis. Fully to appreciate, therefore, what the Jewish question is in Polish Russia, we must always bear this fact in mind. The result is that in many parts of Poland the Jews form an actual majority of the population in the towns. This is the danger for Germany also. Thus it is Berlin, not Prussia at large, which is threatened with an overload of Jews from the country on the east. This aggregation in urban centers becomes the more marked as the relative frequency for the whole country lessens. Thus in Saxony, which, being industrial, is not a favorite Jewish center, four fifths of all the Jewish residents are found in Dresden and Leipsic alone.[4] This is probably also the reason for the lessened frequency of Jews [168] all through the Alpine highlands, especially in the Tyrol. These districts are so essentially agricultural that few footholds for the Jew are to be found.

The unique challenges of Jewish distribution are only partially understood until we recognize that, consistently throughout history, the Israelites primarily make up urban populations.[3] They aren't spread out widely in rural areas but instead gather in commercial hubs. This is an unchanging trait of this distinct community. Jews generally show a preference against hard manual labor or outdoor work, and they avoid physical exertion in any form. They choose to rely on their intellect rather than physical strength. Leroy-Beaulieu suggests that this is a learned behavior stemming from medieval restrictions on land ownership or being confined to the Ghetto. However, it seems to us that this trait is too consistent across the globe to support such a theory. To truly understand the Jewish situation in Polish Russia, we must always keep this fact in mind. As a result, in many areas of Poland, Jews make up a significant portion of the town population. This poses a similar challenge for Germany. Consequently, it is Berlin, rather than all of Prussia, that is facing an influx of Jews from the east. This concentration in urban areas becomes even more noticeable as their overall presence in the country decreases. For instance, in Saxony, which is industrial and not a major Jewish center, four-fifths of all Jewish residents live in Dresden and Leipsic alone.[4] This likely also explains the lower number of Jews throughout the Alpine highlands, particularly in the Tyrol. These regions are predominantly agricultural, leaving few opportunities for Jews to settle.

A small secondary center of Jewish aggregation appears upon our map to be manifested about Frankfort. It has a peculiar significance. The Hebrew settlers in the Rhenish cities date from the third century at least, having come there over the early trade routes from the Mediterranean. Germany being divided politically, and Russia interdicting them from 1110, a specific center was established, especially in Franconia, Frankfort being the focus of attraction. Then came the fearful persecutions all over Europe, attendant upon the religious fervor of the Crusades. The Polish kings, desiring to encourage the growth of their city populations, offered the rights of citizenship to all who would come, and an exodus in mass took place. They seem to have been welcomed, till the proportions of the movement became so great as to excite alarm. Its results appear upon our map. Thus we know that many of the Jews of Poland came to Russia as a troublesome legacy on the division of that kingdom. At the end of the sixteenth century but three German cities remained open to them—namely, Frankfort, Worms, and Furth.[5] Yet it was obviously impossible to uproot them entirely. To their persistence in this part of Germany is probably due the small secondary center of Jewish distribution, which we have mentioned, indicated by the darker tint about Frankfort, and including Alsace-Lorraine. Here is a relative frequency, not even exceeded by Posen, although we generally conceive of this former Polish province as especially saturated with Jews. It is the only vestige remaining to indicate what was at one time the main focus of Jewish population in Europe. It affords us a striking example of what legislation may accomplish ethnically, when supplemented, or rather aggravated, by religious and economic motives.

A small secondary center of Jewish settlement appears on our map around Frankfurt. This has a unique significance. The Jewish neighborhoods in the Rhenish cities date back to at least the third century, having arrived there via early trade routes from the Mediterranean. With Germany politically fragmented and Russia barring their entry since 1110, a specific center was established, particularly in Franconia, with Frankfurt being the main draw. Then came the brutal persecutions across Europe, fueled by the religious zeal of the Crusades. The Polish kings, seeking to grow their city populations, granted citizenship rights to all who came, leading to a mass exodus. They seemed to be welcomed until the movement grew so large that it raised concerns. The outcomes are evident on our map. Thus, we see that many Jews from Poland migrated to Russia as a challenging legacy during the division of that kingdom. By the end of the sixteenth century, only three German cities remained open to them—Frankfurt, Worms, and Fürth.[5] Yet it was clearly impossible to completely remove them. Their persistence in this part of Germany likely accounts for the small secondary center of Jewish presence we noted, shown by the darker shading around Frankfurt, which includes Alsace-Lorraine. Here, the Jewish population is relatively high, even exceeding that of Posen, although we typically think of this former Polish province as densely populated with Jews. It is the only remaining sign of what was once a major center of Jewish presence in Europe. It serves as a striking example of what legislation can achieve ethnically, particularly when combined, or rather complicated, by religious and economic factors.

Does it accord with geographical probability to derive our large dark area of present Jewish aggregation entirely from the small secondary one about Frankfort, which, as we have just said, is the relic of a mediæval center of gravity? The question is a crucial one for the alleged purity of the Russian Jew; for the longer his migrations over the face of the map, the greater his chance of ethnic intermixture. A moot point among Jewish scholars is, as to the extent of this exodus from Germany into Poland. Bershadski has done much to show its real proportions in history. Talko-Hryncewicz[6] and Weissenberg,[7] among anthropologists, seem to be inclined to derive this great body of Polish Jews from Palestine by way [169] of the Rhone-Rhine-Frankfort route. They are, no doubt, partially in the right; but the mere geographer would rather be inclined to side with Jacques.[8] He doubts whether entirely artificial causes, even mediæval persecutions, would be quite competent for so large a contract. There is certainly some truth in Harkavy's theory, so ably championed by Ikof (1884), that a goodly proportion of these Jews came into Poland by a direct route from the East. Most Jewish scholars had placed their first appearance in southern and eastern Russia, coming around the Black Sea, as early as the eighth century. Ikof, however, finds them in the Caucasus and Armenia one or two centuries before Christ. Then he follows them around, reaching Ruthenia in the tenth and eleventh centuries, arriving in Poland from the twelfth to the fourteenth. The only difficulty with this theory is, of course, that it leaves the language of the Polish Jews out of consideration. This is, in both Poland and Galicia, a corrupted form of German, which in itself would seem to indicate a western origin. On the other hand, the probabilities, judging from our graphic representation, would certainly emphasize the theory of a more general eastern immigration directly from Palestine north of the Black and Caspian Seas. The only remaining mode of accounting for the large center of gravity in Russia is to trace it to widespread conversions, as the historic one of the Khozars. Whichever one of these theories be correct—and there is probability of an equal division of truth among them all—enough has been said to lead us geographically to suspect the alleged purity of descent of the Ashkenazim Jew. Let us apply the tests of physical anthropology.

Does it make sense geographically to say that the large dark area of present-day Jewish population comes entirely from the small secondary area around Frankfurt, which is just a remnant of a medieval center? This question is crucial for the supposed purity of Russian Jews; the more migrations they’ve had across the map, the higher the chances of ethnic mixing. A debated topic among Jewish scholars is the scale of this migration from Germany into Poland. Bershadski has done a lot to clarify its true historical scale. Talko-Hryncewicz[6] and Weissenberg,[7] among anthropologists, seem to believe that this large group of Polish Jews traces back to Palestine via the Rhone-Rhine-Frankfurt route. They are partially correct, but a strict geographer would likely agree with Jacques.[8] He questions whether entirely artificial causes, even medieval persecutions, could be sufficient for such a large contraction. There is definitely some merit to Harkavy's theory, strongly supported by Ikof (1884), that a significant number of these Jews arrived in Poland directly from the East. Most Jewish scholars have placed their initial presence in southern and eastern Russia, arriving around the Black Sea as early as the eighth century. Ikof, however, traces their presence in the Caucasus and Armenia one or two centuries before Christ. He then follows them around, reaching Ruthenia in the tenth and eleventh centuries, and arriving in Poland from the twelfth to the fourteenth. The only issue with this theory is that it overlooks the language of Polish Jews, which is, in both Poland and Galicia, a corrupted form of German, suggesting a western origin. Conversely, the probabilities, based on our graphic representation, would certainly support the idea of more extensive eastern immigration directly from Palestine north of the Black and Caspian Seas. The only other way to explain the large population center in Russia is to attribute it to widespread conversions, such as the historic one of the Khazars. Regardless of which theory is correct—and it’s likely there’s some truth in all of them—there’s enough here to make us question the claimed purity of descent of the Ashkenazi Jew. Let’s apply the tests of physical anthropology.

Stature.—A noted writer, speaking of the sons of Judah, observes: "It is the Ghetto which has produced the Jew and the Jewish race; the Jew is a creation of the European middle ages; he is the artificial product of hostile legislation." This statement is fully authenticated by a peculiarity of the Israelites which is everywhere noticeable. The European Jews are all undersized; not only this, they are more often absolutely stunted. In London they are about three inches shorter than the average for the city. Whether they were always so, as in the days when the Book of Numbers (xiii, 33) described them "as grasshoppers in their own sight," as compared with the Amorites, sons of Anak, we leave an open question. We are certain, however, as to the modern Jew. He betrays a marked constancy in Europe at the bodily height of about five feet four inches (1.63 metre) for adult men. This, according to the data afforded by measurements of our recruits during the civil war, is about the average of American youth between the ages of fifteen and sixteen, [170] who have still three, almost four, inches more to grow. In Bosnia, for example, where the natives range at about the American level—that is to say, among the very tallest in the world (1.72 metre)—the Jews are nearly three inches and a half shorter on the average.[9] If we turn to northern Italy, where Lombroso has recently investigated the matter, we apparently find the Jew somewhat better favored by comparison. He is in Turin less than an inch inferior to his Italian neighbors. But why? Not because taller than in the case of Bosnia, for his stature in both places is the same. The difference decreases, not because the Jew in Piedmont is taller, but solely because the north Italians are only of moderate height. So it goes all over Austria and Russia: the diminutiveness is plainly apparent.[10] There is in all Europe only a single exception to the rule we have cited. Anutchin finds them in Odessa and Riga slightly to exceed the Christians. In order to emphasize this point it will repay us to consider the adopted fatherland of the Jews a bit more in detail.

Height.—A well-known writer, discussing the sons of Judah, notes: "The Ghetto has produced the Jew and the Jewish race; the Jew is a creation of the European Middle Ages; he is the artificial result of hostile laws." This observation is clearly supported by a distinctive characteristic of the Israelites that can be seen everywhere. European Jews tend to be shorter in stature; in fact, many are significantly stunted. In London, they average about three inches shorter than the city's general population. Whether they have always been this way, as suggested in the Book of Numbers (xiii, 33), where they described themselves "as grasshoppers in their own sight," compared to the Amorites, is still up for debate. However, when it comes to the modern Jew, there is a consistent average height in Europe of about five feet four inches (1.63 meters) for adult men. This height matches roughly the average height of American boys aged fifteen to sixteen, who still have three to almost four inches left to grow. For example, in Bosnia, where the local population is around the American average height—among the tallest in the world (1.72 meters)—Jews are nearly three and a half inches shorter on average.[9] In northern Italy, where Lombroso has recently studied this topic, it seems that Jews are slightly better off in comparison. In Turin, they are less than an inch shorter than their Italian neighbors. But why is that? It's not that they are taller than in Bosnia; their height is consistent in both regions. The difference is due to the fact that the northern Italians are generally of average height. This trend is evident throughout Austria and Russia, where the smaller stature is quite noticeable.[10] There is only one exception to this pattern across Europe. Anutchin has found that in Odessa and Riga, Jews are slightly taller than Christians. To emphasize this point, it would be valuable to examine the Jews' adopted homeland in greater detail.

STATURE POLAND.

STATURE Poland.

Our map herewith shows a general average of stature for Poland by districts. This unhappy country appears to be populated by the shortest human beings north of the Alps; it is almost the most stunted in all Europe. The great majority of the districts, as our map shows, are characterized by a population whose adult men scarcely average five feet four inches (1.62 metre) in height. This is more than half a head shorter than the type of the British Isles or northern Germany. What is the meaning of this? Is it entirely the fault of the native Poles? We know that the northern Slavs are all merely mediocre in stature. But this depression is too serious to be accounted for in this way; and further analysis shows that the defect is largely due to the presence of the vast horde of Jews, whose physical peculiarity drags down the average for the entire population.[11] This has been proved directly. Perhaps the deepest pit in this great "misery spot," as we have termed such areas of dwarfed population elsewhere, is in the capital city of Warsaw, where Elkind found the average stature of two hundred male Jews to be less than five feet three inches and a half (1.61 metre).[12] The women were only four feet eleven inches tall on the average. Compare the little series of maps given on pages 172 and 173 if further proof of this national peculiarity be needed. Two of these, it will be observed, give [171] the average height of Jews and Poles respectively, dividing the city into districts. The social status of these districts is shown upon our third map. Comparison of these three brings out a very interesting sociological fact, to which we have already called attention in our earlier papers.[13] The stature of men depends in a goodly measure upon their environment. In the wards of the city where prosperity resides, the material well-being tends to produce a stature distinctly above that of the slums. In both cases, Poles and Jews are shortest in the poorer sections of the city, dark tinted on the maps. The correspondence is not exact, for the number of observations is relatively small; but it indicates beyond a doubt a tendency commonly noticeable in great cities. But to return to our direct comparison of Poles and Jews; the deficiency of the latter, as a people, is perfectly apparent. The most highly favored Jewish population socially, [172] in the whole city of Warsaw in fact, can not produce an average stature equal to that of the very poorest Poles; and this, too, in the most miserable section of the capital city of one of the most stunted countries in Europe.

Our map shows the average height across districts in Poland. This unfortunate country seems to have the shortest people north of the Alps; it's nearly the shortest in all of Europe. Most districts, as the map indicates, have adult men who average just about five feet four inches (1.62 meters) tall. That's more than half a foot shorter than men from the British Isles or northern Germany. What does this mean? Is it solely the fault of the Polish people? We know that the northern Slavs are generally of average height. However, this situation is too significant to explain that way, and further analysis reveals that this shortcoming is largely due to the large population of Jews, whose physical characteristics lower the overall average for everyone.[11] This has been demonstrated directly. Perhaps the lowest point in this "misery spot," as we've labeled such areas of stunted populations, is in the capital city of Warsaw, where Elkind found that the average height of two hundred Jewish men was less than five feet three and a half inches (1.61 meters).[12] The women averaged only four feet eleven inches tall. For further evidence of this national peculiarity, refer to the maps on pages 172 and 173. Two of these maps show the average height of Jews and Poles respectively, divided by district. Our third map illustrates the social status of these districts. Comparing these three maps reveals a very interesting sociological fact, which we have noted in our earlier publications.[13] Men's height is significantly influenced by their environment. In city areas where there is prosperity, better living conditions tend to result in taller average heights compared to the slums. In both cases, Poles and Jews are the shortest in the poorer parts of the city, marked in darker shades on the maps. The correlation isn't perfect, as the number of observations is relatively limited; however, it clearly shows a noticeable trend in large cities. Returning to our comparison of Poles and Jews; the short stature of the latter is unmistakable. The most socially privileged Jewish population in all of Warsaw cannot achieve an average height that matches even the poorest Poles, and this occurs in the most deprived area of a capital city in one of the shortest countries in Europe.

AVERAGE STATURE of POLES, WARSAW.

Average height of Poles, Warsaw.

AVERAGE STATURE of JEWS, WARSAW.

AVERAGE HEIGHT of JEWS, WARSAW.

We may assume it as proved, therefore, that the Jew is to-day a very defective type in stature. He seems to be susceptible to favorable influences, however; for in London, the West End prosperous Jews almost equal the English in height, while they at the same time surpass their East End brethren by more than three inches.[14] In Russia also they become taller as a class wherever the life conditions become less rigorously oppressive. They are taller in the fertile Ukraine than in sterile Lithuania; they sometimes boast of a few relatively tall men.[15] These facts all go to show that the Jew is short, not by heredity, but by force of circumstances; and that where he is given an even chance, he speedily recovers a part at least of the ground lost during many ages of social persecution. Jacobs mentions an interesting fact in this connection about his upper-class English Jews. Close analysis of the data seems to show that, for the present at least, their physical development has been stretched nearly to the upper limit; for even in individual cases the West End Jews of London manifest an inability to surpass the height of five feet nine inches. So many have been blessed by prosperity that the average has nearly reached that of the English; but it is a mean stature of which the very tall form no component part. Thus perhaps [173] does the influence of heredity obstruct the temporary action of environment.

We can assume it's been proven that Jewish people today tend to have a shorter stature. However, they seem to respond well to positive influences; in London, wealthy Jews in the West End are almost as tall as the English, while they are over three inches taller than their counterparts in the East End.[14] In Russia, they are also taller as a group wherever living conditions are less harsh. They are taller in the fertile Ukraine than in barren Lithuania and sometimes have a few relatively tall individuals.[15] These facts indicate that Jews are short not due to genetics but because of circumstances; where they are given a fair chance, they quickly regain some of the ground lost over centuries of social oppression. Jacobs points out an interesting detail about his upper-class English Jews. A close look at the data suggests that, at least for now, their physical development has nearly reached its limit; even among individuals, West End Jews in London show an inability to exceed five feet nine inches. Although many have benefited from prosperity, the average height has nearly matched that of the English, but tall individuals make up no part of that average. This may illustrate how heredity can limit the immediate effects of environment.

Whether this short stature of the Jew is a case of an acquired characteristic which has become hereditary, we are content to leave an open question. All we can say is, that the modern Semites in Arabia and Africa are all of goodly size, far above the Jewish average.[16] This would tend to make us think that the harsh experiences of the past have subtracted several cubits from the stature of the people of Israel. In self-defense it must be said that the Christian is not entirely to blame for the physical disability. It is largely to be ascribed to the custom of early marriages among them. This has probably been an efficient cause of their present degeneracy in Russia, where Tschubinsky describes its alarming prevalence. Leroy-Beaulieu says that it is not at all uncommon to find the combined age of husband and wife, or even of father and mother, to be under thirty years. The Shadchan, or marriage broker, has undoubtedly been an enemy to the Jewish people within their own lines. In the United States, where they are, on the other hand, on the up grade socially, there are indications that this age of marriage is being postponed, perhaps even unduly.[17]

Whether the short stature of Jews is an acquired trait that has become hereditary is still an open question. What we do know is that modern Semites in Arabia and Africa are generally taller, well above the Jewish average.[16] This suggests that the harsh experiences of the past have taken a toll on the height of the people of Israel. In fairness, it should be noted that Christians aren't entirely responsible for this physical disadvantage. Much of it can be attributed to the tradition of early marriages among them. This has likely contributed to their current decline in Russia, where Tschubinsky highlights its concerning prevalence. Leroy-Beaulieu mentions that it's quite common for the combined age of a husband and wife, or even of parents, to be under thirty years. The Shadchan, or marriage broker, has undoubtedly been a negative influence on the Jewish community from within. In the United States, however, where they are socially advancing, there are signs that the age of marriage is being postponed, perhaps even excessively.[17]

SOCIAL STATUS WARSAW.

SOCIAL STATUS WARSAW.

A second indication in the case of the Jew of uncommonly hard usage in the past remains to be mentioned. These people are, anthropologically as well as proverbially, narrow-chested and deficient in lung capacity. Normally the chest girth of a well-developed man ought to equal or exceed one half his stature, yet in the case of the Jews as a class this is almost never the case. Majer and Kopernicki[18] first established this in the case of the Galician Jews. Stieda[19] gives additional testimony to the same effect. Jacobs[20] shows the English Jews distinctly inferior to Christians in lung capacity, which is generally an indication of vitality. In [174]Bosnia, Glück[21] again refers to it as characteristic. Granted, with Weissenberg,[22] that it is an acquired characteristic, the effect of long-continued subjection to unfavorable sanitary and social environment, it has none the less become a hereditary trait; for not even the perhaps relatively recent prosperity of Jacobs's West End Jews has sufficed to bring them up to the level of their English brethren in capacity of the lungs.

A second sign of the unusually tough conditions faced by Jews in the past needs to be highlighted. These individuals are, both anthropologically and traditionally, often narrow-chested and have limited lung capacity. Typically, the chest circumference of a well-built man should equal or be greater than half his height, but this is almost never true for Jews as a group. Majer and Kopernicki[18] first demonstrated this with Galician Jews. Stieda[19] provides further evidence supporting this claim. Jacobs[20] shows that English Jews are noticeably inferior to Christians in lung capacity, which is typically a sign of vitality. In [174]Bosnia, Glück[21] again cites this as a notable characteristic. Even if we agree with Weissenberg,[22] that it is an acquired trait, resulting from prolonged exposure to poor sanitary and social conditions, it has nonetheless become inherited; because even the relatively recent success of Jacobs's West End Jews has not been enough to raise them to the lung capacity level of their English counterparts.

At this point a surprising fact confronts us. Despite the appearances of physical degeneracy which we have noted, the Jew betrays an absolutely unprecedented tenacity of life. It far exceeds, especially in the United States, that of any other known people.[23] This we may illustrate by the following example: Suppose two groups of one hundred infants each, one Jewish, one of average American parentage (Massachusetts), to be born on the same day. In spite of all the disparity of social conditions in favor of the latter, the chances, determined by statistical means, are that one half of the Americans will die within forty-seven years; while the first half of the Jews will not succumb to disease or accident before the expiration of seventy-one years. The death rate is really but little over half that of the average American population. This holds good in infancy as in middle age. Lombroso has put it in another way. Of one thousand Jews born, two hundred and seventeen die before the age of seven years; while four hundred and fifty-three Christians—more than twice as many—are likely to die within the same period. This remarkable tenacity of life is well illustrated by the following table from a most suggestive article by Hoffmann.[24] We can not forbear from reproducing it in this place.

At this point, a surprising fact confronts us. Despite the signs of physical decline we've noted, Jews show an absolutely unprecedented resilience. This resilience, especially in the United States, surpasses that of any other known group.[23] We can illustrate this with the following example: Imagine two groups of one hundred infants each, one Jewish and one of average American descent (from Massachusetts), born on the same day. Even with all the social advantages for the latter group, statistics show that half of the Americans will die within forty-seven years, while the first half of the Jews will not succumb to disease or accidents until seventy-one years. The death rate for Jews is actually just slightly over half that of the average American population. This trend holds true in infancy as well as middle age. Lombroso expressed it another way: Of one thousand Jews born, two hundred and seventeen die before reaching seven years old, while four hundred and fifty-three Christians—more than twice as many—are likely to die within the same timeframe. This remarkable resilience is well demonstrated by the following table from a very insightful article by Hoffmann.[24] We feel compelled to include it here.

Death Rates per 1,000 Population in the Seventh, Tenth, and Thirteenth Wards of New York City, 1890, by Place of Birth.

Death Rates per 1,000 Population in the Seventh, Tenth, and Thirteenth Wards of New York City, 1890, by Place of Birth.

Eras.Total.United States
(includes colored).
Ireland.Germany.Russia and Poland
(mostly Jews).
Total26.2545.1836.0422.1416.71
Under 15 years41.2862.2540.7130.3832.31
15 to 25 years7.559.4315.157.142.53
25 to 65 years21.6425.9239.5121.207.99
65 and under104.72105.96120.9288.5184.51

From this table it appears, despite the extreme poverty of the Russian and Polish Jews in the most densely crowded portions [175] of New York; despite the unsanitary tenements, the overcrowding, the long hours in sweat shops; that nevertheless, a viability is manifested which is simply unprecedented. Tailoring is one of the most deadly occupations known; the Jews of New York are principally engaged in this employment; and yet they contrive to live nearly twice as long on the average as their neighbors, even those engaged in the outdoor occupations.

From this table, it seems that despite the extreme poverty of Russian and Polish Jews in the most densely populated areas [175] of New York; despite the unsanitary living conditions, overcrowding, and long hours in sweatshops; there is still a level of resilience that is truly unprecedented. Tailoring is one of the most dangerous jobs out there; the Jews of New York are mostly involved in this work; yet they manage to live nearly twice as long, on average, as their neighbors, even those who work outdoors.

Is this tenacity of life despite every possible antagonistic influence, an ethnic trait; or is it a result of peculiar customs and habits of life? There is much which points to the latter conclusion as the correct one. For example, analysis of the causes of mortality shows an abnormally small proportion of deaths from consumption and pneumonia, the dread diseases which, as we know, are responsible for the largest proportion of deaths in our American population. This immunity can best be ascribed to the excellent system of meat inspection prescribed by the Mosaic laws. It is certainly not a result of physical development, as we have just seen. Hoffmann cites authority showing that in London often as much as a third of the meats offered for sale are rejected as unfit for consumption by Jews. Is not this a cogent argument in favor of a more rigid enforcement of our laws providing for the food inspection of the poor?

Is this resilience in life despite every possible opposing force an ethnic trait, or is it due to unique customs and lifestyle habits? There’s a lot that suggests the latter is the correct explanation. For instance, an analysis of the causes of death shows an unusually low proportion of deaths from tuberculosis and pneumonia, the major diseases that, as we know, account for a significant number of deaths in the American population. This immunity can be attributed to the excellent meat inspection system established by the Mosaic laws. It’s definitely not because of physical development, as we just noted. Hoffmann cites sources indicating that in London, as much as one-third of the meat sold is rejected as unfit for consumption by Jews. Isn’t this a strong argument for stricter enforcement of our food inspection laws for the poor?

A second cause conducive to longevity is the sobriety of the Jew, and his disinclination toward excessive indulgence in alcoholic liquors. Drunkenness among Jews is very rare. Temperate habits, a frugal diet, with a very moderate use of spirits, render the proportion of Bright's disease and affections of the liver comparatively very small. In the infectious diseases, on the other hand, diphtheria and the fevers, no such immunity is betrayed. The long-current opinion that the Jews were immune from cholera and the other pestilences of the middle ages is not to-day accepted. A third notable reason for this low death rate is also, as Hoffmann observes, the nature of the employment customary among Jews, which renders the proportion of deaths from accidental causes exceedingly small. In conclusion, it may be said that these people are prone to nervous and mental disorders; insanity, in fact, is fearfully prevalent among them. Lombroso asserts it to be four times as frequent among Italian Jews as among Christians. This may possibly be a result of close inbreeding in a country like Italy, where the Jewish communities are small. It does not, however, seem to lead to suicide, for this is extraordinarily rare among Jews, either from cowardice, as Lombroso suggests; or more probably for the reason cited by Morselli—namely, the greater force of religion and other steadying moral factors.

A second reason for longevity is the sobriety of Jews and their reluctance to excessively indulge in alcohol. Drunkenness among Jews is very uncommon. Moderate habits, a simple diet, and limited consumption of spirits keep the rates of Bright's disease and liver issues quite low. However, this immunity doesn't extend to infectious diseases like diphtheria and fevers. The long-held belief that Jews were immune to cholera and other plagues of the Middle Ages is no longer accepted today. A third notable reason for the low death rate, as Hoffmann points out, is the typical nature of occupations among Jews, which keeps accidental deaths very low. In conclusion, it's evident that this group tends to experience more nervous and mental disorders; in fact, insanity is alarmingly common among them. Lombroso claims it occurs four times more often among Italian Jews than Christians. This could be due to close inbreeding in a country like Italy, where Jewish communities are small. However, it doesn't seem to lead to suicide, which is exceptionally rare among Jews, either due to cowardice, as Lombroso suggests, or more likely because of the stronger influence of religion and other stabilizing moral factors.

[To be continued.]

[More to come.]


THE PLAYGROUNDS OF RURAL AND SUBURBAN SCHOOLS.

By ISABELLA G. OAKLEY.

By ISABELLA G. OAKLEY.

While the officers and friends of education in large cities are exerting themselves to provide open-air playgrounds for the schools, the villages and smaller towns all over the East are reversing the case. Except in the small district schools, the children's playground has almost ceased to exist.

While education officials and supporters in big cities are working hard to create outdoor playgrounds for schools, villages and smaller towns across the East are doing the opposite. Aside from small district schools, children's playgrounds have nearly disappeared.

This is an evil which has crept in with the tendency to centralize the schools. When in any place the schools begin to overflow, a movement to put up a larger building takes place, accompanied by an effort to create a high-school department; not so much the need of the community as the ambitious dream of some principal who would be superintendent, or some sort of central sun to a group of satellites. This dream is too easily realized, because it flatters the people. Then there rises a preposterous structure of stone and brick; a house of many gables, out of keeping with everything, either public or private, in the place; a temple of vanity. Now is rung the knell of the school playground, for the new "high school," although it will house all the children from five to fifteen, must needs be surrounded by a fine lawn, studded with shrubbery, and threaded by bluestone roads. The janitor has to employ an assistant to keep the grounds in order. A shut-in, penitentiarylike place has been evolved by the architect and school committee, gratifying to their pride and a deep wrong to the children. There are many wrongs about it; the one insisted upon here is the abolishing of the recess, that time-honored joy of the American schoolboy and schoolgirl.

This is a problem that has emerged with the trend to centralize schools. When schools in any area start to overflow, there’s often a push to build a larger building, along with an effort to create a high school department; this is driven not so much by the community's needs as by the ambitious aspirations of some principal who wants to be a superintendent, or some kind of central figure for a group of schools. This dream is easily achieved because it appeals to the people. Then, a ridiculous structure made of stone and brick rises up; a building with many roofs that clashes with everything else, public or private, in the area; a monument to vanity. At this point, the school playground is effectively over. The new “high school,” which will accommodate all children from ages five to fifteen, has to be surrounded by a beautiful lawn, decorated with shrubs, and lined with blue stone pathways. The janitor has to hire help to keep the grounds tidy. A closed-in, prison-like environment has been created by the architect and the school committee, satisfying their pride but causing real harm to the children. There are many issues with this; the one emphasized here is the removal of recess, that time-honored pleasure of American school kids.

The cheerful sounds of play no more re-echo; the little ones march in "lock step" from the doors to the very curb of this immaculate ornate inclosure. If, on this beautiful lawn, any impulsive youngster is caught running, or performing an instinctive hopscotch or leapfrog, he is sure to be seen by a watching and powerful janitor and reported. Leapfrog and profanity, in the true Draconian spirit, are alike visited with the extreme penalty of a visit to the principal's office. However, in default of a playground, the new schoolhouse provides a gymnasium for physical culture. I speak now of a particular school, the pride of a simple village, and a type of many. This gymnasium is a costly room filled with elaborate apparatus, most of which is suited only to the high-school pupils, and never touched by the majority, who leave school at twelve or thirteen; their physical exercises have been chiefly provided for by a box of dumb-bells and wands. In many schools the "gymnasium"[177] is a cavernous and ugly basement, a place full of shadows cast by the gloomy arches on which the building rests, with walls of brick and floors of asphalt. Little troops of silent, pale children arrive and depart all day for their physical culture, a dreary repetition of silent dumb-bell exercises. There is no speech nor language among them, no sound is heard but the jingle of the piano and the sharp tones of the monitor's counting. I have never heard the children count aloud or accompany the calisthenics by singing except in a private school. What an alternative for a free recess! No penitentiary drill could be more perfunctory, spiritless, dead. It must be said of the public schools that the thing they most seem to dread is the sound of a child's voice. The rude, untrained intonations, the slovenly speech, the slouching attitude remain rude, slovenly, and slouching, for all the school attempts to do for their improvement is infinitely little. Even the blessed relief of shaking the arm and hand to attract the teacher's attention has been reduced in some schools to lifting two fingers.

The cheerful sounds of play have faded away; the kids line up perfectly from the doors to the curb of this pristine, ornate area. If, on this lovely lawn, any eager child is caught running or doing a spontaneous game of hopscotch or leapfrog, they're sure to be spotted by a vigilant janitor and reported. Both leapfrog and swearing are dealt with harshly, leading to a trip to the principal's office. However, in the absence of a playground, the new school building offers a gym for physical education. I'm referring to a particular school, the pride of a modest village, and a model for many others. This gym is an expensive room filled with fancy equipment, mostly suited for high school students, and never used by the majority who leave school at twelve or thirteen; their physical activities are largely limited to a box of dumbbells and wands. In many schools, the "gymnasium"[177] is a vast, unattractive basement, darkened by the gloomy arches holding up the building, with brick walls and asphalt floors. Groups of quiet, pale children come and go all day for their physical culture, repeating dull, silent dumbbell exercises. There’s no talking among them; the only sounds are the piano jingling and the monitor's sharp counting. I've never heard the kids count aloud or sing along with the calisthenics, except in a private school. What a poor substitute for a free recess! No prison drill could feel more robotic, lifeless, and dull. It's worth noting that what public schools seem to fear the most is the sound of a child's voice. The rough, untrained tones, careless speech, and slouched postures remain unchanged, as the school's efforts to improve them are minimal at best. Even the simple act of raising a hand to get the teacher's attention has in some schools been reduced to just lifting two fingers.

The pupils generally hate their calisthenics, or, in the new phrase, physical culture exercises. And they would hate just as sincerely regulated games superintended by some impossible master of sports. What they want is spontaneity in play. Public money is wasted in providing these abhorrent alternatives. Poor little Carthusians as young as six and seven years are kept in their rooms, and principally in their seats, above two hours at each session, and often after that to atone for some delinquency, most likely for speaking. In many schools they do not leave the room for any kind of exercise. If they were capable of demanding their rights they would call for both the abolition of the school lawn and calisthenic basement, and the restoration of their playground and recess.

The students generally dislike their calisthenics, or what we now call physical culture exercises. They would feel just as strongly against structured games overseen by some overbearing sports coach. What they truly want is the freedom to play as they wish. Public funds are wasted on these awful alternatives. Poor little Carthusians as young as six and seven are kept in their rooms, mostly stuck in their seats, for over two hours in each session, and often even longer to make up for some minor misbehavior, most likely for talking. In many schools, they don't get to leave the room for any kind of exercise. If they were able to demand their rights, they would call for the elimination of the school lawn and calisthenics basement, and the return of their playground and recess.

From the cruelty of this repression nature finds a little way out; the children require of the neighbors what they have been deprived of by the school committee. All around the precincts of the temple of learning the trodden borders of the sidewalk, churned to mire in winter and trampled to rock in summer, speak of the victory of the boys. There are towns, perhaps, where they all go straight home, but in our town, they gather four times a day in knots of twenties and fifties for some kind of fun. The patient neighbors go on removing coats and dinner pails from the pickets, clearing away papers and missiles from their inclosures, yet I discover that even they would vote to keep the school lawn; it improves the town. Very true. But ingenuity could well contrive some way of uniting the playground and the school park. Spaces of grass to rest the eye and decorate the square could be interspersed with inclosures of asphalt, furnished with a few parallel bars[178] and swings, without sacrifice of appearances. Often the school property is so large that it could include half a dozen such special playgrounds. We have but to begin it to find some feasible plan.

From the harshness of this oppression, nature finds a small escape; the children look to their neighbors for what the school committee has taken from them. All around the edges of the learning center, the worn-down sidewalks, turning to mud in the winter and hard as rock in the summer, show the boys' triumph. There might be towns where kids go straight home, but in our town, they gather four times a day in groups of twenty or fifty for some fun. The tolerant neighbors keep taking off coats and lunchboxes from the fences, clearing away trash and projectiles from their yards, yet I find that even they would agree to keep the school lawn; it enhances the town. That's true. But creativity could easily come up with a way to combine the playground and the school park. Areas of grass to please the eye and beautify the square could be mixed with asphalt enclosures, equipped with a few parallel bars[178] and swings, without sacrificing aesthetics. Often the school property is so large that it could fit half a dozen of these specialized playgrounds. We just need to start to discover a workable plan.

If the palatial school and its park is reaction against the "ragged beggar" of Whittier's lovely poem, sunning in the midst of the blackberry vines of Hardscrabble Hill, it is a reaction that has gone too far to suit a generation which loves to read Hosea Bigelow:

If the grand school and its park are a response to the "ragged beggar" from Whittier's beautiful poem, basking among the blackberry vines of Hardscrabble Hill, it's a response that has gone too far for a generation that enjoys reading Hosea Bigelow:

"The old school is a place I choose
Before anyone else, if I want to ponder; I sat down where I used to sit, and get My childhood is behind me, along with better things that came with it—
Faith, Hope, and something, if it isn't Charity,
"It's just a lack of cunning, and that's quite a rarity."

If it may be replied, that is not the generation for whom schoolhouses are now built, it is one which may interpret the wants of its children by just such recollections.

If it can be replied that this is not the generation for whom schools are currently built, it is one that can understand the needs of its children through just such memories.

Another evil has grown out of the centralization of the schools. The smaller schoolhouses formerly stood within convenient reach, and by abandoning them we have forced many little children to walk farther than they are able to walk. In the absence of street cars and sidewalks this becomes a great hardship in extreme weather. In one village in New York, out of an enrollment of fourteen hundred, there was one month last year an average attendance of four hundred. The new school building, which had cost seventy-five thousand dollars, was more than two miles from some part of the district, and there were no sidewalks; neither were there paved streets or street lamps. In such circumstances a number of children are unable to get home to the noon meal, usually dinner, and most important. Where do they eat their luncheon? In their seats, watched by teachers, who are compelled unwillingly to take turns at this duty, and who have also to eat a cold, unpalatable lunch in bad air for a week at a time. After lunch there is an hour to be disposed of by the children, but there is no place to play in except the basement or the streets of the neighborhood. The teachers frequently read them a story, that they may stretch their minds a little if not their bodies. It is a painful sight—few more painful to me—to see a crowd of young children having their recreation in one of these basements. Running and loud talking are forbidden; a police of teachers armed with symbols of authority and punishment keep the restless little prisoners within bounds.

Another problem has come from the centralization of schools. The smaller schoolhouses used to be conveniently close, and by replacing them, we've forced many small children to walk farther than they can manage. Without streetcars and sidewalks, this becomes very tough, especially in extreme weather. In one village in New York, out of an enrollment of fourteen hundred students, there was an average attendance of four hundred in one month last year. The new school building, which cost seventy-five thousand dollars, was over two miles from some areas of the district, and there were no sidewalks; the streets weren’t paved, and there were no street lamps. Under such conditions, some children can't get home for lunch, which is usually the most important meal of the day. Where do they eat their lunch? In their seats, watched by teachers, who reluctantly take turns overseeing them and also have to eat a cold, unappetizing lunch in poor air for a week at a time. After lunch, the children have an hour to fill, but there's no place to play except the basement or the neighborhood streets. The teachers often read them a story to help stretch their minds a little, if not their bodies. It’s a heartbreaking sight—few things are more painful to me—than seeing a group of young children trying to have fun in one of these basements. Running and loud talking are prohibited; a group of teachers armed with signs of authority and punishment keeps the restless little captives in line.

Another objection to the central school is the rainy-day half-session. Though the daily instruction may be managed so that the pupils do not miss anything, it is still a fact that the majority of[179] parents expect the school to take charge of their children, and are often much dissatisfied to have them thrown back upon their own hands on rainy days.

Another complaint about the central school is the rainy-day half-session. Even though daily lessons can be organized so the students don’t miss anything, most of the[179] parents expect the school to look after their kids and often feel very unhappy when they have to take care of them on rainy days.

How has it come about that the playground and school recess have been so generally given up? Is it altogether on account of appearances? Teachers plead that the children ought to be preserved from association with objectionable playmates. This may do for the touch-me-not, only child, but in American society it is never a strong plea. That small fraction which seeks to educate its children as a class can do so in a few schools limited to church, plutocracy, Quakerism, or some such narrow basis. But the schools of a free State are, above everything, founded on the essential equality of individuals in the State, and the possibility of every one to rise to a successful and honorable manhood. If there is one conviction above another strengthened by experience, it is that, in their choice of companions and susceptibility to influence, children are governed by their innate qualities, and these qualities are fixed by heredity and home influences long before the school age. In so large a community as a public school there is companionship for all, for it certainly represents the town itself. Let no one be afraid of the democratic instincts of childhood.

How did we end up giving up playgrounds and school recess so completely? Is it just because of appearances? Teachers argue that kids should be kept away from bad influences. This might work for the socially awkward only child, but in American society, it’s not a strong argument. That small group that wants to raise their kids as a class can only do so in a few exclusive schools tied to church, wealth, Quakerism, or similar narrow ideas. But schools in a free state are, above all, based on the essential equality of individuals and the potential for everyone to achieve success and respect. If there's one belief reinforced by experience, it’s that children choose their friends and are influenced by their natural traits, which are shaped by genetics and home life long before they start school. In a large community like a public school, there’s companionship for everyone, since it reflects the town itself. Let’s not be afraid of the natural democratic instincts of children.

I believe the playground is abolished because it interferes with that deadly order and craze for supervision which is sought for as the prime condition both inside and outside the schools. Order of a wholesome sort is not inconsistent with the free recess of a big school. I watched in Los Angeles a great school as it was marshaled out to play and back again at the sound of a drum. After a quarter of an hour of unrestrained sport, several hundreds were gathered in lines at the tap of the drum, facing the cheerful schoolhouse in the mild bright sun, their faces radiating contentment and good will while they straightened up at the mere hint of the teachers on duty. In San Francisco I once found a certain primary school keeping doll's day, when every girl brought her doll to school and exhibited her at recess. The school yard was a barren inclosure within a high board fence, but a joyful place to that young company. To what purpose are teachers urged to study psychology? The children in their seats are emptied of everything that pertains to their souls. Not to study, because the teacher will explain everything, and to behave just well enough to get safe out of school, is the simple code which covers the conduct of average children. To extend this code to ideas of social duty—the highest—is not possible while they do not form a society. Cultivation of friendship is just as much out of the case; awakening of ideals, an impossibility. But thrown together half an hour or more each day, the dead machinery[180] that pulls the bells and adds the marks within the school walls gives way to life; and here a man who sympathizes with childhood has all the opportunity he needs, and probably much more than he can use, in providing for that life where a code of reciprocity and honor must be established. It is not as the magistrate he will successfully rule, but as the sympathetic general in the field, whose very name is a talisman and an inspiration to every man. In the school yard, the bully, who comes to the front in about every tenth child, needs to be repressed; the foul mouth must be cleansed; against these prevailing evils the playground has a protection the street can not possess. The boy's world is a peculiar world, certainly, making laws for itself as rigorous and about as barbarous as those of a gang of pirates; but it is through his esprit du corps he can be uplifted and educated; the individual may be a selfish animal; as one of a body he is capable of heroism and devotion to a noble idea. He can be a friend; the playground is the field for the natural growth of friendships, and youth the generous time of their birth.

I think the playground is gone because it clashes with the strict control and obsession for oversight that’s pushed as the main requirement both in and out of schools. Healthy order doesn’t contradict the freedom of play in a large school. I observed a large school in Los Angeles being led out to play and back in again at the sound of a drum. After about fifteen minutes of uninhibited fun, several hundred students gathered in lines at the drum’s signal, facing the bright schoolhouse under the warm sun, their faces expressing happiness and goodwill as they straightened up at the mere suggestion of the teachers on duty. In San Francisco, I once saw a primary school having doll's day, when every girl brought her doll to school and showed it off at recess. The schoolyard was a barren space enclosed by a tall wooden fence, but it was a joyful spot for those young kids. Why are teachers pushed to study psychology? The kids in their seats are stripped of everything that makes them who they are. They’re not there to learn, because the teacher will explain everything, and they just behave well enough to escape school safely; this simple code defines the actions of typical children. Expanding this code to include ideas of social responsibility—the highest duty—is impossible when they don’t form a community. Building friendships isn't even on the table; inspiring ideals is out of the question. But when they’re thrown together for half an hour or more each day, the mechanical system of bells ringing and grades being tallied inside the school walls gives way to real life; here, a person who truly understands childhood has all the chances he needs, and maybe even more than he can handle, to nurture that living atmosphere where a code of mutual respect and honor can be established. It won’t be as a strict authority figure that he can lead successfully, but rather as a compassionate general in the field, whose very presence is a powerful motivator and inspiration for everyone. In the schoolyard, the bully, who emerges in about one in every ten kids, needs to be controlled; offensive language has to be cleaned up; against these common issues, the playground offers a level of protection that the streets can’t provide. The world of boys is indeed a unique place, crafting its own rules that are both stringent and almost as savage as those of a band of pirates; yet it’s through this esprit du corps that he can be uplifted and educated; the individual may be selfish, but as part of a group, he can show heroism and dedication to a noble cause. He can be a friend; the playground is the perfect space for friendships to develop naturally, and youth is the ideal time for them to begin.

I recall another scene in a schoolroom in a Western city long ago. A gentle girl, magnetic, deep-hearted, large-eyed, sat after school at her table in tears. On a seat in front of her platform were piles of slates which she had been correcting, for she instructed all day a succession of arithmetic classes coming to her from the different grades. At the same time she was in charge, for all particular purposes of their order and conduct, of about forty boys in their early teens. Her tears were in consequence of a quarrel at recess between two of her boys. They had settled their quarrel by a fight; not unlikely it was a wholesome fight, for they were not boys of the mean sort, and were friends. It is an affair of long ago, but of a time when, in a large city, a teacher shed her influence upon the school playground, and took account of its moral standards, its friendships and breaches of friendship.

I remember another scene from a schoolroom in a Western city a long time ago. A gentle girl, charming, kind-hearted, and big-eyed, sat at her desk in tears after school. In front of her were stacks of slates she had been grading, having taught a series of arithmetic classes throughout the day. At the same time, she was responsible for about forty boys in their early teens, making sure they followed the rules and behaved. She was crying because two of her boys had a fight during recess. They settled their disagreement through the fight, which likely was a healthy way to resolve it, as they weren’t the mean-spirited type and were actually friends. It’s a memory from long ago, back when, in a big city, a teacher had a significant influence on the school playground and was concerned about its moral standards, friendships, and the conflicts between friends.


Although white men, if they take due precautions, may live and do certain kinds of work in tropical Africa, it will never be possible, Mr. J. Scott Keltie concludes from the results of past experience and study, to colonize that part of the world with people from the temperate zone. Even in such favorable situations as Blantyre, a lofty region south of Lake Nyassa, children can not be reared beyond a certain age, but must be sent home to England; otherwise they will degenerate physically and morally. A plan has been proposed of bringing Europeans down into the tropical regions by degrees, and acclimatizing them by successive generations to more and more torrid conditions till they are finally settled in the heart of the continent. But the experiment would be a very long one, if tried; and the ultimate result would probably be a race deprived of all those characteristics which have made Europe what it is.

While white men can live and work in tropical Africa if they take the right precautions, Mr. J. Scott Keltie believes, based on past experiences and research, that it will never be possible to colonize that area with people from temperate climates. Even in places like Blantyre, a high area south of Lake Nyassa, children cannot be raised beyond a certain age and must be sent back to England; otherwise, they face physical and moral decline. There has been a suggestion to slowly introduce Europeans to the tropical regions and acclimatize them over generations to hotter conditions until they settle in the heart of the continent. However, if this were attempted, the process would take a long time, and the final result would likely be a population lacking all the characteristics that define Europeans.


UP THE SKEENA RIVER TO THE HOME OF THE TSIMSHIANS.[25]

By GEORGE A. DORSEY, Ph. D.,
FIELD COLUMBIAN MUSEUM, CHICAGO, ILL.

By GEORGE A. DORSEY, Ph. D.,
FIELD COLUMBIAN MUSEUM, CHICAGO, ILL.

In a recent number of the Monthly I described some of the incidents of a visit to the Haida and Tlingit villages about Dixon's Entrance; now I am to speak of the Tsimshian villages on the Skeena River. The Tsimshian Indians are one of the five great stocks which make up the aboriginal population of the coast of British Columbia and southern Alaska. They are shut in by the Tlingits on the north and by the Kwakiutls on the south, while on the head waters of the Nass and Skeena Rivers they come in contact with the great Tinneh or Athabascan stock. The Tsimshians are probably the most progressive of all the coast Indians, and are one of a few stocks on the American continent which are holding their own in point of numbers.

In a recent issue of the Monthly, I shared some experiences from my visit to the Haida and Tlingit villages near Dixon's Entrance; now I want to discuss the Tsimshian villages along the Skeena River. The Tsimshian people are one of the five major groups that make up the Indigenous population of the coast of British Columbia and southern Alaska. They are bordered by the Tlingits to the north and the Kwakiutls to the south, while they come into contact with the large Tinneh or Athabascan group in the upper reaches of the Nass and Skeena Rivers. The Tsimshians are likely the most progressive of all the coastal Indigenous peoples, and they are one of the few groups on the American continent that are maintaining their population numbers.

Desiring to visit those villages which are least contaminated by modern influence, we ascended the Skeena River to the village of Kitanmaksh or Hazelton. The Skeena is the historic river of British Columbia; its name signifies the "Water of Terrors." Nearly every rock, every bend, every cañon is the scene of some mythical tale. The scene of the birth of the Tsimshian nation lies in its valley; the rock is still revered upon which rested the Tsimshian ark after the flood, and the "Dum-lak-an," "the new home and place of dispersal," is still a Mecca to which pilgrimages are made. In the modern development of the Omenica and Cariboo gold fields the Skeena has been the highway to the sea. For hundreds of years canoes have been paddled up and down its waters; it has been the highway for intertribal trade from time immemorial, and when the Hudson Bay Company's post was established at Hazelton, and merchandise began to pour into the upper country in a steady stream, the Tsimshians with their canoes enjoyed for a long time a monopoly of the carrying trade. Gradually, as they learned the ways and methods of the white man, the price per ton of freight from the coast to Hazelton began steadily to rise, until in 1891 the tariff of sixty dollars a ton was declared ruinous by the company, and they decided to build their own steamer with which to carry their freight up the river.

Wanting to explore villages that are least affected by modern influences, we traveled up the Skeena River to the village of Kitanmaksh, or Hazelton. The Skeena is the historic river of British Columbia; its name means "Water of Terrors." Almost every rock, bend, and canyon is tied to some mythical story. The valley is where the Tsimshian nation was born; the rock that the Tsimshian ark rested on after the flood is still respected, and "Dum-lak-an," which means "the new home and place of dispersal," remains a pilgrimage destination. With the recent developments in the Omenica and Cariboo gold fields, the Skeena has served as the route to the sea. For hundreds of years, canoes have navigated its waters; it has been a crucial trade route between tribes for ages. When the Hudson Bay Company's post was established in Hazelton and goods started flooding into the upper country, the Tsimshians monopolized the carrying trade with their canoes for a long time. As they adapted to the ways of the white settlers, the cost of transporting freight from the coast to Hazelton began to rise consistently. By 1891, the company declared the $60 per ton tariff to be unsustainable, prompting them to decide to build their own steamer to transport freight up the river.

Port Essington is the chief port of the mouth of the Skeena, and in Essington we found ourselves on the twenty-third day of July. The Caledonia was up the river on her third trip, but was expected back any hour, but so delightfully uncertain is the river [182] voyage that, as we were informed, "there was no telling when she would be down—in fact, she might be caught above the cañon and wouldn't be down for weeks."

Port Essington is the main port at the mouth of the Skeena, and we arrived in Essington on July 23rd. The Caledonia was up the river on her third trip but was expected back any moment. However, the river voyage is so wonderfully unpredictable that, as we were told, "there’s no way to know when she’ll be back—in fact, she could be stuck above the canyon and might not come down for weeks."

View on the Upper Skeena River; Peak of the "Five Virgins" Mountain.

View of the Upper Skeena River; Top of the "Five Virgins" Mountain.

The town of Essington dates back to 1835, when the Hudson Bay Company established a post there. Its only rival for preeminence on the coast is Port Simpson. The town in summer is completely given over to fishing, the salmon cannery of Cunningham & Son being one of the largest on the coast, and the river for twenty miles is dotted with canneries. In one day, while we were in Essington, the catch of salmon on the river was ninety-two thousand fish. In addition to the cannery the town boasts of a good hotel and a Salvation Army. An Indian Salvation Army is worth going miles to see, for the Indian is a natural-born salvationist; the army permits him to make all the noise he chooses, sing as loudly as he pleases, and, best of all, he is entitled to make a speech every time it comes his turn.

The town of Essington goes back to 1835, when the Hudson Bay Company set up a post there. Its only competitor for dominance on the coast is Port Simpson. In the summer, the town is completely focused on fishing, with the Cunningham & Son salmon cannery being one of the largest on the coast, and for twenty miles along the river, you’ll find canneries. One day while we were in Essington, the salmon catch on the river was ninety-two thousand fish. Besides the cannery, the town has a nice hotel and a Salvation Army. An Indian Salvation Army is definitely worth a visit, because the Indian is a natural-born salvationist; the army allows him to make as much noise as he wants, sing as loudly as he likes, and, best of all, he gets to give a speech every time it’s his turn.

In the afternoon, about four o'clock, on the day after our arrival, a long, shrill blast of the whistle aroused the entire town, for the Caledonia was in sight. Down we went to the wharf, and the entire town followed. What a motley crowd you will find on one of these[183] British Columbia wharves! What coloring, what a Babel of tongues—Tlingits from Alaska, Haidas from the Queen Charlotte Islands, Tsimshians from the Skeena, Kwakiutls from Vancouver, Chinamen, Japanese, Greeks, Scandinavians, Englishmen, and Yankees; men, women, children, dogs, and from two to six woolly bear cubs. The Caledonia is the exclusive property of the Hudson Bay Company; she is not a common carrier, and does not encourage either passengers or freight, as the tariff rates prove. There is a feverish haste and hustle about the movements of the steamer which are fairly contagious. She makes her first trip early in the spring, as soon as the ice has left the rivers, on the Stickene; then it is a wild, eager ambition of the company to have her make four trips up the Skeena before the river closes up in the fall.

In the afternoon, around four o'clock, the day after we arrived, a loud, piercing blast from the whistle woke up the whole town because the Caledonia was in sight. We headed down to the wharf, and the whole town followed us. What a diverse crowd you see at one of these[183] British Columbia wharves! The colors, the mix of languages—Tlingits from Alaska, Haidas from the Queen Charlotte Islands, Tsimshians from the Skeena, Kwakiutls from Vancouver, Chinese, Japanese, Greeks, Scandinavians, Englishmen, and Americans; men, women, children, dogs, and anywhere from two to six fluffy bear cubs. The Caledonia is the sole property of the Hudson Bay Company; she's not a common carrier and doesn’t really cater to passengers or freight, as the pricing shows. There's a frantic energy about the steamer's movements that's almost contagious. She makes her first trip early in the spring, as soon as the ice has cleared from the rivers on the Stickene; then, it's the company's eager goal to have her make four trips up the Skeena before the river closes in the fall.

We had as passengers two prospectors from Spokane, a mining expert from Victoria, a native evangelist from Essington, and about fifty Indians, mostly women and children, each one with a varied assortment of boxes, bales, bundles, and dogs; the crew numbered twenty, and we had about one hundred tons of freight on board.

We had two prospectors from Spokane as passengers, a mining expert from Victoria, a local evangelist from Essington, and around fifty Native Americans, mostly women and children, each carrying a mix of boxes, bales, bundles, and dogs; the crew had twenty people, and we had about one hundred tons of freight on board.

From Essington to Hazelton is one hundred and fifty-two miles, a panorama of unending and unbroken beauty; never monotonous, always interesting, it presents a river voyage which is probably not equaled, certainly not excelled, by any other river voyage of the same length on the American continent or in the world. We began the voyage on Sunday morning, we tied up in front of Hazelton on Saturday night. To recount in detail the haps and mishaps of each day's progress would take more time than I can command. In one day we made forty-eight miles, on another day we made one hundred yards, on another day we didn't make a foot. With plenty of water under her keel the Caledonia could run twenty miles an hour; she could cut her way through a sand bar at the rate of a yard or so an hour; and at either rate of progress she burned each hour from one and a half to two cords of wood.

From Essington to Hazelton is one hundred and fifty-two miles, a beautiful journey that never feels boring and is always captivating. This river trip is probably unmatched, if not surpassed, by any other river journey of the same length in the U.S. or around the world. We started our trip on Sunday morning and arrived in front of Hazelton on Saturday night. Detailing the ups and downs of each day's travel would take more time than I have available. One day, we covered forty-eight miles; another day, we went just one hundred yards; and on yet another day, we didn’t move at all. With plenty of water beneath her, the Caledonia could travel at twenty miles per hour, but when navigating through a sandbar, she only made about a yard per hour. Regardless of our speed, she consumed between one and a half to two cords of wood each hour.

For the first ten miles the scenery does not differ materially from that which we are accustomed to in the inland sea from Victoria to Alaska. Then we enter fresh water and for the next forty miles steam through one long mountain gorge, for here the river has cut completely through the Cascade Range. The mountains begin at the water's edge and rise almost perpendicularly to heights of from three to four thousand feet. Their lower limits are covered with dense green forests, which seem to grow out of the solid rock. The summits are smooth and glistening, and often covered with snow and ice. Here and there we can trace some tiny rivulet issuing from an ice bed high up among the clouds, and every portion of its course can be traced down the steep mountain wall until it gives one final and[184] headlong plunge into the river. At times these streams, taking their rise in some extensive glacier, are of considerable magnitude, and fairly roar as they leap and hurl themselves downward from their dizzy height. And here we learned a curious fact about the river: in summer it falls when it rains, and rises when the sun shines, so rapidly do the pent-up snows of winter disappear and rush down the mountain sides under the heat of the spring sun.

For the first ten miles, the scenery doesn’t really change much from what we’re used to seeing in the inland sea from Victoria to Alaska. Then we enter fresh water and for the next forty miles, we navigate through one long mountain gorge, where the river has carved its way through the Cascade Range. The mountains start right at the water’s edge and rise almost straight up to heights of three to four thousand feet. The lower parts are covered in dense green forests that seem to grow right out of the solid rock. The peaks are smooth and shiny, often covered in snow and ice. Here and there, you can spot a tiny stream coming from an ice patch high up in the clouds, and you can trace its path down the steep mountain wall until it takes a final plunge into the river. Sometimes these streams, flowing from large glaciers, are quite substantial, and they roar as they leap and tumble down from their dizzying heights. And here we discovered something interesting about the river: in summer, it lowers when it rains and rises when the sun shines, so quickly do the trapped winter snows melt and rush down the mountainsides under the warmth of the spring sun.

Until noon of the second day we had been making good time, but now the fun began, for we had left deep water and had arrived at the first flight of the eight-hundred-foot stairway which the Caledonia had to climb ere Hazelton could be reached. The river had been gradually widening as one island after another had been passed, until now it was nearly half a mile wide and flowed through four channels. The captain attempted one channel, but we couldn't gain an inch, and in drifting back again down the rapids the current carried the boat against the rocks and, with a crash and a lurch, but minus some woodwork, she was in the stream again. Then two other channels were tried, but without avail, although the wheel was throwing water and gravel over the pilot house. The fourth channel was next tried, but the current was too strong. Then we "lined her out," and this novel method of getting a huge steamboat up a stream soon became only too commonplace. The method of procedure is this: The boat is forced against a sand bar and allowed to rest while men go forward in a skiff with a long four-inch cable, which is made fast to a tree on the bank or to a "dead man," a long spar buried deep in the earth of a sand bar and heaped over with bowlders. When all is ready, the boat is attached to the capstan and the wheel begins to revolve. It is tedious work and often provoking, as when the cable parts, or the "dead man" gives up his hold, and the whole work must be done over again. The boat quivers from stem to stern, and the wheel, with all possible steam on, is simply one revolving ball of water. We fairly hold our breath as we listen to the dull vibration of the boat, the rumbling of the capstan, and the grating sound of the keel of the steamer as she is being dragged through the rapids over the bar; but above all can be heard the voice of Captain Bonser as he shouts to his Indian pilot, "Go 'head capstan," "Stop steamboat," "Stop capstan," "Go 'head steamboat," "Go 'head capstan!" In four hours we have made about fifty yards, but we are in open water again and the boat settles down to its regular chug, chug, chug.

Until noon of the second day, we had been making good progress, but now the real challenge began, as we had left deep water and reached the first step of the eight-hundred-foot stairway that the Caledonia needed to climb before reaching Hazelton. The river had been gradually widening as we passed one island after another, and now it was nearly half a mile wide, flowing through four channels. The captain tried one channel, but we couldn't move forward at all, and as we drifted back down the rapids, the current crashed the boat against the rocks, and with a jolt and a scrape, minus some woodwork, we were back in the stream. Then two other channels were attempted, but we had no luck, even though the wheel was sending water and gravel over the pilot house. The fourth channel was next, but the current was too strong. So we resorted to "lining her out," a unique method of getting a large steamboat upstream that soon became all too common. The process works like this: The boat is pushed against a sandbar and allowed to rest while men go ahead in a skiff with a long four-inch cable, tying it to a tree on the bank or to a "dead man," a long pole buried deep in the sandbar and covered with boulders. When everything is ready, the boat is connected to the capstan, and the wheel starts turning. It’s slow and often frustrating work, especially when the cable snaps or the "dead man" loses its grip, forcing us to start all over again. The boat shakes from end to end, and the wheel, with all the steam possible, is just a whirlpool of water. We hold our breath as we hear the dull vibration of the boat, the rumble of the capstan, and the scraping sound of the steamer’s keel being pulled through the rapids over the bar; but most distinct is Captain Bonser’s voice shouting to his Indian pilot, "Go ahead, capstan," "Stop, steamboat," "Stop, capstan," "Go ahead, steamboat," "Go ahead, capstan!" In four hours, we’ve covered about fifty yards, but we’re back in open water again, and the boat resumes its steady chug, chug, chug.

Eighty miles from Essington the Skeena in its flight to the sea makes its first plunge into the Cascade Mountains, and its entrance is indescribably grand. No pen or brush can do justice to the beauties of the Kitselas Cañon. At its mouth we are in a broad,[185] deep basin, as if the river had felt depressed as it passed through the quarter-mile narrow gorge and had here spread itself out to breathe and rest before it started anew its downward journey to the sea. It was late in the afternoon, and the western sun threw long shadows of the lofty sky-crowned perpendicular walls of the left-hand side of the cañon over against the rocky islets and ragged, rock-bound eastern shore. Once we have entered, there is no faltering; "lining it out" is impossible here, and on and on the boat labors and climbs, twisting and turning through the narrow, tortuous channel. A quick eye and a steady nerve must command the wheel now, for a turn too much or too little would be fatal. One instinctively feels that the "Water of Terrors" is the proper name for this river, and with that feeling comes the other—that it was never intended for navigation.

Eighty miles from Essington, the Skeena begins its journey to the sea by making its first dramatic plunge into the Cascade Mountains, and its entrance is incredibly grand. No words or images can truly capture the beauty of the Kitselas Canyon. At its mouth, we find ourselves in a broad, deep basin, as if the river, feeling a bit overwhelmed as it passed through the quarter-mile narrow gorge, had spread itself out here to breathe and rest before continuing its downward journey to the sea. It was late afternoon, and the setting sun cast long shadows of the towering, vertical walls on the left side of the canyon against the rocky islets and jagged, rock-bound eastern shore. Once we enter, there's no turning back; "lining it out" is impossible here, and the boat struggles and climbs, twisting and turning through the narrow, winding channel. A sharp eye and steady nerves are essential at the wheel now, as a turn too much or too little could be disastrous. One can't help but feel that "Water of Terrors" is a fitting name for this river, accompanied by a sense that it was never meant for navigation.

A Skeena River Salmon Cannery.

A Skeena River Salmon Factory.

After four days' grinding over sand bars and pounding against rocks we tie up for repairs. One of the boilers had sprung a leak which could be neglected no longer. The delay of thirty-six hours was not without compensation, for the country about was open, and proved a relief after the long ride through the high-walled river from the sea to the cañon. The banks were low or moderately high and of gravel or sand bluffs, and we could look off over a landscape[186] broken here and there by solitary peaks or clustered mountains, their summits always covered with ice and snow. To the far east were the pure white peaks of the Five Virgins, their summits glistening under the bright sun. Even the character of the vegetation had changed, and the dense forests of somber firs, spruces, and cedars of the lower river had given way to great cottonwoods and underbrush of hazel and alder.

After four days of grinding over sandbars and smashing against rocks, we stopped for repairs. One of the boilers had sprung a leak that couldn’t be ignored any longer. The thirty-six-hour delay had its perks, as the surrounding area was open and provided a welcome change after the long journey through the high-walled river from the sea to the canyon. The banks were low or moderately high with gravel or sandy bluffs, and we could gaze across a landscape[186] dotted with solitary peaks or clusters of mountains, their tops always covered in ice and snow. To the far east, the pure white peaks of the Five Virgins sparkled under the bright sun. Even the type of vegetation had changed, with the dense forests of dark firs, spruces, and cedars from the lower river replaced by tall cottonwoods and underbrush of hazel and alder.

In the afternoon we climbed a bluff near the river, from which we could look off over a country that was wild and extremely picturesque. To one side of us could be seen a great mountain, its summit covered by a mighty glacier whose blue-white ice gleamed and glistened in the sun. And there was no mistaking the power of the sun that day; its warm rays being especially welcome after some weeks of the cold, depressing gloom and fog of the coast.

In the afternoon, we hiked up a hill by the river, where we could see a wild and beautiful landscape. On one side, a large mountain loomed, its peak covered by a huge glacier that sparkled and shone in the sunlight. You couldn't miss the strength of the sun that day; its warm rays felt especially nice after several weeks of cold, dreary gloom and fog along the coast.

We were now really in the country of the Tsimshians, and every few hours we drew up in front of some quiet, peaceful village, its almost deserted cottages guarded by the totem poles of former days. In succession we pass Meamskinesht, Kitwangah, and Kitzegukla, with now and then a small salmon-fishing station. The villages proved disappointing both in their smallness and modernness, and none of them seemed worthy of any extended visit. From time to time we passed great black patches in the forest, the result of extensive fires, sure signs that the rainy coast was far away.

We were now truly in Tsimshian territory, and every few hours we would stop in front of some quiet, peaceful village, its nearly abandoned cottages watched over by the totem poles of the past. We passed through Meamskinesht, Kitwangah, and Kitzegukla, along with the occasional small salmon-fishing station. The villages were disappointing in both their size and modernity, and none of them seemed worthy of a longer visit. From time to time, we saw large black patches in the forest, the aftermath of major fires, clear signs that the rainy coast was far away.

On Friday night we tied up to the bank within five miles of our destination, but we had yet to pass Macintosh's Bar. That was accomplished on the following day, after eleven hours' hard work, and by five o'clock we had reached "The Forks," or the junction of the Skeena and Bulkley Rivers. Our course was to the left, up the Skeena for half a mile, and in a few moments more we tied up in front of the stockaded post of the Hudson Bay Company; we had reached Hazelton. The region about us was "Dum-lak-an," "what will be a good place," the home of the Tsimshians.

On Friday night, we tied up to the shore within five miles of our destination, but we still had to pass Macintosh's Bar. We did that the next day after eleven hours of hard work, and by five o'clock we arrived at "The Forks," where the Skeena and Bulkley Rivers meet. We then headed left, up the Skeena for half a mile, and shortly after, we tied up in front of the stockaded post of the Hudson Bay Company; we had reached Hazelton. The area around us was "Dum-lak-an," meaning "what will be a good place," the home of the Tsimshians.

Before 1870 the town was farther down the river, on the flat at the junction of the Bulkley and Skeena Rivers. It has had additions to its population from Kis-pi-yeoux, and from villages down the river. There are also to be numbered among the inhabitants the Indian agent, Mr. Loring, the Hudson Bay representative, Mr. Sargent, and his assistants, and Mr. Fields, the missionary. The Indian population numbers about two hundred and seventy-five. The town occupies a low, uneven plain, which, beginning at the water's edge, extends back for a quarter of a mile, where it is hemmed in by a high bluff on the face of the second river terrace. There are but few of the old houses left and still fewer totem poles, and they are without particular interest. Most prominent in the village is the warlike[187] stockade of the company's post, with its two bastions at opposite corners, and the blockhouse in the center of the inclosure, but now hidden by the store which stands in front of it. The stockade was put up in 1891, when an Indian uprising was feared throughout the length of the river.

Before 1870, the town was located further down the river, on the flat land at the junction of the Bulkley and Skeena Rivers. The population has grown due to people coming from Kis-pi-yeoux and other villages along the river. Among the residents are the Indian agent, Mr. Loring, the Hudson Bay representative, Mr. Sargent, along with his assistants, and Mr. Fields, the missionary. The local Indian population is about two hundred and seventy-five. The town sits on a low, uneven plain that starts at the water's edge and stretches back a quarter of a mile, where it is bordered by a steep bluff at the edge of the second river terrace. There are only a few old houses remaining, and even fewer totem poles, which lack notable significance. The most prominent structure in the village is the fortified stockade of the company’s post, featuring two bastions at opposite corners and a blockhouse in the center of the enclosure, although it is now concealed by the store in front of it. The stockade was constructed in 1891 due to fears of an Indian uprising along the entire river.

Wherever you find a trading post and a missionary you can not hope to find people who retain much of their native life or who are of great value to anthropology. But still Hazelton was sufficiently primitive to be of interest in many respects. In matters of dress the Indians are almost on a footing with the whites, but they still make a curious garment for winter's use which is worn by nearly all of the interior tribes. This is a blanket made out of long, narrow strips of rabbit hide, and is warm, heavy, and extremely durable. We were fortunate enough to find a woman who was engaged in making one of these curious garments on a most rude and primitive loom. Other garments are still occasionally made of Indian hemp, which grows wild and in abundance. This is beaten and pounded and then spun into fine thread, and woven into the desired form.

Wherever you find a trading post and a missionary, you can't expect to find people who still hold onto much of their native culture or have significant value for anthropology. However, Hazelton was still primitive enough to be interesting in many ways. In terms of clothing, the Indians are almost on the same level as the whites, but they still create a unique winter garment that most of the interior tribes wear. This is a blanket made from long, narrow strips of rabbit hide, which is warm, heavy, and incredibly durable. We were lucky to find a woman working on one of these unique garments using a very basic and primitive loom. Other garments are still sometimes made from Indian hemp, which grows wild and abundantly. This hemp is beaten, pounded, and then spun into fine thread, which is woven into various forms.

Tsimshian Shaman's Ceremonial Bow and Arrow.

Tsimshian Shaman's ceremonial bow and arrow.

In former days the Indians used large quantities of the wool of the mountain sheep in making the beautiful chilcat blankets that formed an important part of the chief's costume, but now the Indians buy most of their wool. Its chief uses are for sashes and belts, which are still worn and made after the fashion of former days. Of other garments of daily use, except moccasins, there is nothing remaining. There are a few remnants of ceremonial costumes still in existence, and by a bit of good fortune we were enabled to secure the complete paraphernalia of a shaman, or Indian doctor, who had only recently renounced his native practices and joined Mr. Fields's band of Christians. In the outfit thus acquired were rattles, charms, blankets, masks, and headdresses of various kinds. From another individual we secured the complete costume of a member of the fraternity, or secret society, of Dog Eaters. The Tsimshians have four such societies, and the Dog Eaters stand third in rank, being surpassed only by the Man Eaters[188] or Cannibal Society. The chief object of this outfit, apart from the white and red cedar bark rings, was a long club, one side of which was ornamented by a fringe of red cedar tassels. Of interest also was the curious cap made of plaited bands of red cedar bark, and so ornamented as to represent the head of the owl. Another object secured from a shaman was a peculiar bow and arrow. These were purely ceremonials, and were only used in the dances of the secret societies. By an ingenious device the point of the arrow could be opened out, and in this position represented the open jaws of a serpent. On the bow were two fins, that could be lowered or raised at will by means of cords, which represented the fin-back whale. The bow itself is of light soft wood, and is bent by means of a string passing around the operator's body, the two ends of the bow being fastened to the body of the bow by leather hinges.

In the past, the Indians used a lot of wool from mountain sheep to make the beautiful chilcat blankets that were an essential part of the chief's outfit, but now they mostly buy their wool. Its main uses are for sashes and belts, which are still worn and made in the traditional way. Aside from moccasins, there are no other daily garments left. There are a few remnants of ceremonial costumes that still exist, and fortunately, we managed to acquire the complete set of a shaman, or Indian doctor, who recently abandoned his traditional practices and joined Mr. Fields's group of Christians. The outfit we obtained included rattles, charms, blankets, masks, and various headdresses. From another person, we got the complete costume of a member of the fraternity, or secret society, of Dog Eaters. The Tsimshians have four such societies, and the Dog Eaters rank third, surpassed only by the Man Eaters[188] or Cannibal Society. The main item in this outfit, besides the white and red cedar bark rings, was a long club, one side of which was decorated with a fringe of red cedar tassels. Also of interest was an unusual cap made from braided strips of red cedar bark, designed to look like an owl's head. Another item we obtained from a shaman was a strange bow and arrow, which were purely ceremonial and only used in the dances of the secret societies. With an clever mechanism, the tip of the arrow could open up, resembling the open jaws of a serpent. The bow had two fins that could be raised or lowered using cords, representing the fin-back whale. The bow itself is made of light, soft wood and is bent using a string that goes around the operator's body, with the two ends of the bow attached to it by leather hinges.

In all the ceremonies, both religious and civil, an important part of the costume is the mask. These are generally of wood, and portray all manner of real and fanciful personages. Some of them are wonders of ingenuity, being so constructed that the eyes, mouth, and often the ears can be moved at the will of the wearer. Some of them are even double, and so arranged that by drawing open the outer mask, an inner one of an entirely different character can be revealed. One of the rarest masks which was ever brought out of the Tsimshian country is one in the possession of the museum, which was acquired some time ago. It is of bone and finely carved, while the teeth and tusks are those of animals.

In all the ceremonies, both religious and civil, an important part of the outfit is the mask. These are usually made of wood and depict all kinds of real and imaginary characters. Some of them are incredible feats of creativity, designed so that the eyes, mouth, and often the ears can be moved by the wearer. Some are even double-layered, allowing the wearer to pull back the outer mask to reveal a completely different inner one. One of the rarest masks ever brought out of the Tsimshian region is now in the museum's collection; it was acquired some time ago. It's made of bone and finely carved, with teeth and tusks from animals.

Hazelton is of much interest to the observer of the human countenance, for, while the residents of the town are Tsimshians, there is a village near by on the Bulkley River, the people of which belong to the great Tinneh or Athabascan stock, which extends from the Arctic Circle on the north to the Territories of Arizona and New Mexico on the south, where it is represented by the Apaches. In some respects the differences between the Tsimshians and Tinnehs, or Howgelgaits, as this branch is called, are quite marked, and these differences stand out in greater relief because more or less of the population of Howgelgait spend a part of their time in Hazelton, and so one sees representatives of the two stocks in close contact. The Tsimshians, like the Haidas, are great canoe people, and are rather short-legged, with great development of the chest and shoulders. Like the Haidas, also, they have strong, long arms, which bespeak familiarity with the paddle. The Howgelgaits, on the other hand, are a pure mountaineer people, and are tall, robust, and finely proportioned. Their hair is black, coarse, and abundant. The eyebrows are thick and remarkably wide at the outer side. This same peculiarity may be observed in the masks of this tribe. The beard is sparse, but it must[189]
[190]
be remembered that the hair is generally pulled out as it appears, particularly on the cheeks, while the mustache and the chin tuft are allowed to grow. Among the Tsimshians the face is wide and the cheek bones are prominent. The nose is narrow, with a depressed root. Neither the Tsimshians nor Tinneh practice artificial deformation of the head. With the Tinneh, or more exactly the Howgelgaits, the forehead is broad and less receding than is usual with the American aborigines. The face is full and broad and the cheek bones prominent, but the nose, unlike that of the Tsimshians, is well formed and generally aquiline, although occasionally it is thick and flattish. Their lips are also thick and the chin is more prominent than is usual among the Tsimshians. The eyes are large and of a deep black color; the jaws are generally very heavy and massive.

Hazelton is really interesting for anyone studying human faces because, while the town is home to the Tsimshians, there's a nearby village on the Bulkley River where the people belong to the Tinneh or Athabascan group. This group stretches from the Arctic Circle in the north to Arizona and New Mexico in the south, where the Apaches live. The differences between the Tsimshians and the Howgelgaits, as this branch is called, are quite distinct, and these differences are even more noticeable because some of the Howgelgait population spends time in Hazelton, allowing for close interactions between the two groups. The Tsimshians, similar to the Haidas, are skilled canoeists, generally shorter with well-developed chests and shoulders. They also have strong, long arms that show their experience with paddling. In contrast, the Howgelgaits are mountain people who are tall, strong, and well-proportioned. Their hair is black, coarse, and thick. Their eyebrows are also thick and notably wide at the outer edges—this characteristic can be seen in their tribal masks as well. While their beards are sparse, it's important to note that hair is often removed, especially on the cheeks, while mustaches and chin tufts are allowed to grow. For the Tsimshians, the face is wide with prominent cheekbones, and their nose is narrow with a depressed bridge. Neither the Tsimshians nor the Tinneh practice artificial head modification. The Howgelgaits specifically have broad foreheads that are less receding than what is typically seen in other Native American groups. Their faces are full and wide, with prominent cheekbones, but their noses, unlike those of the Tsimshians, are generally well-formed and often aquiline, although they can sometimes be thick and flat. Their lips are thick, and their chins are more pronounced compared to what is common among the Tsimshians. They have large, deep black eyes, and their jaws tend to be very heavy and robust.

Of traces of the ancient prevalent fashion in deformity we saw very little. One old woman still retained the labret, but it was only a shadow of the former labrets in size. Although the long, finely polished bone ornament which the men formerly wore in a hole through the septum of the nose has entirely disappeared, we saw a few old men in whom the pierced septum was still plainly visible. With the Howgelgaits it was formerly the custom to load down the ears with highly polished bits of abalone shells, which were suspended by means of brass rings inserted into holes one above the other on the outer margin of the ear, extending from the lobe around the entire helix.

We saw very little evidence of the old fashion for body modifications. One elderly woman still had a labret, but it was just a faint reflection of the large ones from before. The long, smoothly polished bone ornament that men used to wear through a hole in the septum of their noses has completely vanished, but we spotted a few older men who still had visible piercings in their septum. Among the Howgelgaits, it used to be customary to weigh down the ears with shiny pieces of abalone shell that were hung from brass rings inserted in holes arranged vertically along the outer edge of the ear, going from the lobe all the way around the helix.

A Street in the Tsimshian Cemetery at Hazelton, B. C.

A Street in the Tsimshian Cemetery in Hazelton, B.C.

Hazelton's "City of the Dead" stands on a high bluff overlooking the town and valley, and commands a view off over the broken forest-clad country which is as beautiful as well could be. A trail winds along the face of the bluff until the crest of the plateau is reached, where it divides into a right and left path leading through the main street of the silent city. The sight is strangely odd and picturesque. Over each grave has been erected a neat little frame house, often of considerable dimensions. All are painted with bright colors, and the effect is decidedly "mixed." In one of the houses, which was substantially built and neatly carpeted, I saw through a glass window two chairs, a washstand with full assortment of toilet articles, and an umbrella, while at the rear of the house stood a table on which was spread a neat cloth, and on the table was a lamp. On the floor was a new pair of shoes. Over the table hung a large crayon portrait of the departed occupant of the grave beneath.

Hazelton's "City of the Dead" sits on a high bluff that overlooks the town and valley, offering a stunning view of the fragmented forest-covered landscape that is as beautiful as can be. A trail winds along the edge of the bluff until it reaches the flat top, where it splits into two paths that lead through the main street of this quiet city. The scene is oddly fascinating and picturesque. Each grave has a tidy little frame house built above it, often quite spacious. All are painted in bright colors, creating a decidedly mixed effect. In one of the houses, which was well-built and neatly furnished with carpet, I looked through a glass window and saw two chairs, a washstand stocked with toiletries, and an umbrella. At the back of the house was a table covered with a tidy cloth, and on it stood a lamp. On the floor lay a new pair of shoes. Hanging over the table was a large crayon portrait of the person resting beneath the grave.

In another house I saw chests of clothing, and suspended from a cord were garments of various kinds, including a complete costume of the fraternity of the Dog Eaters. These five-feet-deep graves covered by little houses are not the usual manner of burial with the Tsimshians, for until within a very few years the dead were cremated[191] Even to-day in the neighboring village of Kispiyeoux the dead are buried in shallow graves just in front of the house.

In another house, I saw chests full of clothes, and hanging from a cord were different types of garments, including a complete outfit from the Dog Eaters fraternity. These graves, which are five feet deep and covered by small houses, aren't the typical burial style for the Tsimshians. Until just a few years ago, the dead were cremated. Even today, in the nearby village of Kispiyeoux, the dead are buried in shallow graves right in front of the house.[191]

Of the many charming spots about Hazelton which are well worthy of a visit, we had time for only one—a horseback ride to the Howgelgait Cañon. The ride was most enjoyable in every respect. The road leads from the town up over the plateau through the burying ground, and then on through a partly cleared forest of cottonwoods and maples. Then we plunge into a two-mile-long lane, the trail scarcely wide enough to admit of the passing of a horse, through a dense grove of hazel bushes, laden to their tips with unripe nuts still protected by their green fuzzy envelopes; and now we knew whence came the name "Hazelton." Suddenly the grove terminates, and after dismounting and walking forward a few steps we came to the face of the cañon. What a sight! On the opposite cliff, but on a higher level, stands the old deserted village of Howgelgait, with its great empty houses and skeleton totem poles. At our feet, down a sheer precipice almost a thousand feet below, the Bulkley River, set on edge, rushes and roars and foams through the rocky gorge to join the Skeena a mile away. Just by the mouth of the cañon, at the edge of the great whirlpool, and on a gravelly beach, stands the present town of Howgelgait. Hearing shouts, we looked closer, and far down we saw men moving about, their forms dwarfed to almost spiderlike dimensions. They were building a swinging bridge over the river, and the timbers already in place looked like the meshes of a spider's web.

Of the many charming places around Hazelton that are definitely worth a visit, we only had time for one—a horseback ride to Howgelgait Canyon. The ride was enjoyable in every way. The path starts from town and goes over the plateau, passing through the cemetery and then through a partly cleared forest of cottonwoods and maples. After that, we entered a two-mile-long lane, barely wide enough for a horse to pass, that wound through a dense grove of hazel bushes, heavy with unripe nuts still covered by their green fuzzy shells; and that’s when we figured out how Hazelton got its name. Suddenly, the grove ended, and after dismounting and walking a few steps, we reached the edge of the canyon. What a view! On the opposite cliff, but at a higher elevation, stood the abandoned village of Howgelgait, with its large empty houses and skeletal totem poles. Below us, a sheer drop of almost a thousand feet, the Bulkley River rushed, roared, and foamed through the rocky gorge on its way to join the Skeena a mile downstream. At the mouth of the canyon, right at the edge of the swirling waters, on a gravelly beach, was the current town of Howgelgait. Hearing shouts, we looked closer and saw men working down below, their figures appearing almost spiderlike. They were constructing a swinging bridge over the river, and the timbers already in place looked like the strands of a spider's web.

Looking up the cañon, we could see from the opposite wall near the water's edge, and far below us, a rude scaffolding suspended by bark ropes over the river, and from this Indians were lowering their nets and drawing up salmon. One man after another would leave for his home, his back bending under the weight of many fish, his place to be taken by another, who begins casting his nets. And so these rude scaffoldings here and all along the rivers are occupied by busy fishermen throughout the summer, for salmon is chief of the winter's food supply of these people. In one house we saw over a thousand salmon hung up to dry for use during the winter months.

Looking up the canyon, we could see from the opposite wall near the water's edge, and far below us, a rough scaffolding hanging by bark ropes over the river, where Native Americans were lowering their nets and pulling up salmon. One by one, they would leave for home, their backs bending under the weight of many fish, and their spot would be taken by another person who began casting their nets. So, these basic scaffolds here and all along the rivers are filled with busy fishermen throughout the summer because salmon is the main source of food for these people in winter. In one house, we saw over a thousand salmon hung up to dry for use during the winter months.

We left the cañon for the ride back to Hazelton with keen regret, for no more fascinating spot did we find on our entire journey than right here. On the way we encountered a woman of the Carrier tribe of the Tinnehs from Frazer's Lake, who was returning from Hazelton laden with provisions and cheap calicoes.

We left the canyon for the ride back to Hazelton with a deep sense of regret, as we found no more fascinating place on our whole journey than right here. On the way, we came across a woman from the Carrier tribe of the Tinnehs from Frazer's Lake, who was returning from Hazelton loaded with supplies and inexpensive fabric.

We had scarcely entered Hazelton when the tinkling of the bell of the "lead horse" announced the arrival of the pack train. Second only in importance to the arrival of the Caledonia to the people of Hazelton is the arrival of the pack train, for it brings the[192] news of the far interior. But of much greater importance and value is the cargo of furs which are brought out on every trip in exchange for supplies which are taken in. On that day there were fifty-seven mules, each laden with two bales of furs weighing two hundred and fifty pounds, and including beaver, mink, otter, sable, and bear, all destined for the Hudson Bay Company's house in London, there to be auctioned off in lots to the highest bidder, and then to be distributed to all parts of the civilized world.

We had hardly entered Hazelton when the bell on the "lead horse" signaled the arrival of the pack train. For the people of Hazelton, the arrival of the pack train is almost as significant as the arrival of the Caledonia, because it brings news from the far interior. But even more important is the load of furs that are brought back on every trip in exchange for supplies taken in. That day, there were fifty-seven mules, each carrying two bales of furs weighing two hundred and fifty pounds, including beaver, mink, otter, sable, and bear, all headed for the Hudson Bay Company's house in London, where they would be auctioned off in lots to the highest bidder and then sent out to various parts of the civilized world.

Hagivilgait Cañon, with Indian Fish Weirs at Bottom.

Hagivilgait Canyon, which has Indian fish traps at the bottom.

Within less than an hour's time the precious furs were aboard, and we bade farewell to Hazelton. The Caledonia drops back, is slowly turned around by the current, and with its steady chug, chug, we began our journey down the river, the power of the boat aided by the swiftly flowing water carrying us along at a rapid rate. If the slow, labored up journey was a revelation with its worries and anxieties, what can be said of the down journey with its kaleidoscopic panorama of sand bars, Indian villages, far-away snowy mountains, dense forests of mighty cottonwoods, lofty heights which tower above us clad to their very summits with eternal green, mountain streams, and innumerable waterfalls and cascades! And what shall one say[193] of that memorable ride through the cañon, the wheel reversed and throwing water over the pilot house, the boat rocking and swaying to and fro! Before we were fairly aware of the fact we were out into that great, deep, silent basin again and off on the home stretch. Apart from taking on wood and stopping at one or two Indian villages, a delay of a few hours was made to permit some mining engineers to examine a mine. They had just come up from the coast and brought with them news of the gold excitement in the Yukon Valley, and now for the first time we heard that magic word "Klondike," which was soon to "electrify the world and put the gold fields of California, South Africa, and Australia to shame."

Within less than an hour, the precious furs were loaded on board, and we said goodbye to Hazelton. The Caledonia fell back, slowly turned around by the current, and with its steady chugging, we started our journey down the river, the boat’s power boosted by the fast-flowing water carrying us along quickly. If the slow, difficult journey upstream was a revelation with its worries and anxieties, what can be said about the downstream journey with its colorful panorama of sandbars, Native villages, distant snowy mountains, dense forests of towering cottonwoods, lofty peaks draped in eternal green, mountain streams, and countless waterfalls and cascades! And what can one say of that unforgettable ride through the canyon, the wheel reversed and splashing water over the pilot house, the boat rocking back and forth! Before we fully realized it, we were out into that vast, deep, silent basin again and headed for home. Besides picking up wood and stopping at a couple of Native villages, we took a few hours' delay to let some mining engineers check out a mine. They had just come up from the coast and brought news of the gold rush in the Yukon Valley, and for the first time, we heard that magical word "Klondike," which was soon to "electrify the world and put the gold fields of California, South Africa, and Australia to shame."

At nine o'clock we were in Essington once more. "Klondike, Klondike!" on every side. The whole country seemed to have gone daft. One steamer after another went racing by the mouth of the Skeena on the way to Dyea and the Skagway Trail. But our fortunes lay in the other direction, and that night we were aboard the Islander, bound for Victoria and the south.

At nine o'clock, we were back in Essington. "Klondike, Klondike!" was everywhere. It felt like the whole country had gone crazy. One steamer after another sped past the mouth of the Skeena, heading to Dyea and the Skagway Trail. But our fortunes were leading us the other way, and that night we boarded the Islander, headed for Victoria and the south.


LIGHT AND VEGETATION.

By D. T. MACDOUGAL, Ph. D.,
PROFESSOR IN CHARGE OF PLANT PHYSIOLOGY, UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA.

By D. T. MACDOUGAL, Ph. D.,
PROFESSOR IN CHARGE OF PLANT PHYSIOLOGY, UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA.

Light is the most important of all the external agencies which influence the vegetal organism, and the sun's rays have been the most potent force in shaping the development of existent plant forms.

Light is the most crucial of all the external factors that affect plant life, and sunlight has been the strongest influence in shaping the development of existing plant forms.

The sunbeam stands in a manifold relation to the plant. First and foremost, light is the universal source of energy, by the aid of which the chlorophyll apparatus in green leaves builds up complex food substances from simple compounds obtained from the soil and air, a process necessary for the nutrition of the entire living world. Some obscure organisms, such as the "nitrosomonas," soil bacteria, are able to accomplish the construction of complex substances, by means of energy derived from other chemical compounds, which were, however, formed originally by green plants. These food-building processes are designated as photosynthesis, chemosynthesis, electrosynthesis, thermosynthesis, etc., according to the source of energy used.

The sunbeam has many connections to plants. First and foremost, light is the universal source of energy that allows the chlorophyll in green leaves to create complex food substances from simple compounds found in the soil and air, a process essential for the nutrition of all living things. Some obscure organisms, like "nitrosomonas," which are soil bacteria, can also create complex substances using energy from other chemical compounds, which were originally produced by green plants. These processes of food production are called photosynthesis, chemosynthesis, electrosynthesis, thermosynthesis, etc., depending on the source of energy used.

By photosynthesis, carbon dioxide from the air and water from the cell are combined in the green cells of leaves, forming sugar and possibly other substances. During this process an amount of oxygen approximately equal to that of the carbon dioxide taken up is exhaled.[194] It will be of interest to note the relation of the living world to the atmosphere. Eight hundred to nine hundred grammes of carbon dioxide are produced in the respiration of a single person for a day, and the entire product of the human race for this period is twelve hundred million kilogrammes. In addition, large quantities of the gas result from the combustion of the four hundred and sixty millions of kilogrammes of coal and wood burned yearly. The lower animals, fungi, and green plants themselves contribute an amount which must bring the total to twice the immense sum named above. The atmosphere contains three or four hundredths of one per cent of carbon dioxide, or an amount of about two to three thousand billions of kilogrammes. No especial variation in this proportion has been detected since observations upon this point were first made. The fact that no increase takes place is partly due to the absorption of the gas by plants, and its replacement by oxygen, and also to certain geological processes in constant operation. Absorption takes place at the rate of about two and a half grammes for every square metre of leaf surface per hour, or about twenty-five to thirty grammes daily, since the process goes on only in daylight. It is to be seen that a single human being exhales as much carbon dioxide as may be removed from the air by thirty or forty square metres of leaf surface. According to Ebermayer, a hectare (2.47 acres) of forest would use eleven thousand kilogrammes of carbon dioxide yearly, and the amount used by plants is generally much in excess of that furnished by the activity of the inhabitants of any given area. Plants thrive and show increasing vigor as the amount of carbon dioxide in the air rises until two hundred times the present proportion is reached. An increase of the gas in the atmosphere would therefore be partly corrected by the absorption and by the stronger vegetation induced. Nothing short of a comprehensive cataclysm could work such disturbance to the composition of the air as to endanger the well-being of the animal inhabitants of the earth.

Through photosynthesis, carbon dioxide from the air and water from the cells combine in the green cells of leaves to create sugar and possibly other substances. During this process, an amount of oxygen roughly equal to the carbon dioxide taken in is released.[194] It’s interesting to note the connection between the living world and the atmosphere. A single person produces around 800 to 900 grams of carbon dioxide per day, and collectively, the human race generates about 1.2 billion kilograms in that time. Additionally, significant amounts of this gas come from burning the 460 million kilograms of coal and wood each year. Animals, fungi, and green plants also contribute amounts that likely double the total just mentioned. The atmosphere holds about 0.03 to 0.04 percent carbon dioxide, which is around 2 to 3 trillion kilograms. No significant changes in this ratio have been observed since records began. The stability is partly due to plants absorbing the gas and replacing it with oxygen, along with ongoing geological processes. Absorption happens at a rate of about 2.5 grams for every square meter of leaf surface per hour, totaling around 25 to 30 grams daily, since this process only occurs during the day. A single person exhales as much carbon dioxide as can be absorbed by 30 to 40 square meters of leaf surface. According to Ebermayer, one hectare (2.47 acres) of forest would consume 11,000 kilograms of carbon dioxide each year, and the amount used by plants is typically much greater than what the residents of any area produce. Plants flourish and grow stronger as the carbon dioxide levels in the air increase, up to 200 times the current level. Therefore, any rise in the gas in the atmosphere would be partly offset by absorption and the resulting robust vegetation. Only a major catastrophe could disrupt the balance of air composition enough to threaten the well-being of Earth's animal inhabitants.

The activity of a square metre of leaf surface results in the formation of one and a half to two grammes of solid substance per hour in sunlight. A vigorous sunflower with one hundred and forty-five leaves constructed thirty-six grammes of solid matter in a day, and a squash with one hundred and sixteen leaves one hundred and sixteen grammes in the same length of time. The amounts formed by such trees as the beech, maple, oak, poplar, elm, and horse-chestnut, with leaf surfaces aggregating three hundred to one thousand square metres, must be correspondingly large.

The activity of one square meter of leaf surface produces about one and a half to two grams of solid material per hour in sunlight. A healthy sunflower with one hundred and forty-five leaves generates thirty-six grams of solid matter in a single day, while a squash plant with one hundred and sixteen leaves produces one hundred and sixteen grams in the same period. The amounts generated by trees like beech, maple, oak, poplar, elm, and horse-chestnut, with leaf surfaces ranging from three hundred to one thousand square meters, must be similarly substantial.

A comparison of plants grown in strong sunlight, diffuse light, and darkness will reveal many differences in stature and internal structure. These differences are for the most part due to the formative[195] and tonic effect of light. Otherwise expressed, the influence of variations of light upon plants causes adaptive reactions, and disturbances of the nutritive processes and growth.

A comparison of plants grown in bright sunlight, indirect light, and complete darkness will show many differences in height and internal structure. These differences are mostly due to the formative[195] and tonic effects of light. In other words, changes in light affect plants, leading to adaptive responses and disruptions in their nutrition and growth.

In consequence of these facts the reaction of any given organ to changes in the intensity of the illumination will depend upon its specific functions and relation to the remainder of the organism.

As a result of these facts, how any specific organ reacts to changes in light intensity will depend on its unique functions and its connection to the rest of the body.

The stems formed by seedlings and awakening underground organs are usually surrounded by plants or other objects which cut off more or less sunlight. The developing shoot can not spread its leaves to the light advantageously until it has outstripped or grown beyond the objects intervening between it and the light. This necessity is one of the most important conditions in the struggle for existence. To meet it, a very great majority of seed-forming plants have acquired the power of accelerated elongation of the stems when deprived of their normal amount of light.

The stems that grow from seedlings and underground parts are typically surrounded by other plants or objects that block some sunlight. The shoot can't spread its leaves to get the most light until it has grown taller than the obstacles between it and the light. This need to reach the light is a key factor in the struggle for survival. To address this, most seed-producing plants have developed the ability to grow their stems quickly when they aren’t getting enough light.

Very striking examples of this reaction are offered by the awakening corms of the Jack-in-the-pulpit (Arisæma triphyllum). The corms usually lie at a distance of five or six centimetres below the surface of the soil, and when the growth of the large bud begins in the spring the heavy sheathing scales elongate and pierce the soil, opening when the surface is reached at the distance of a few centimetres. If the corm should have been buried deeper in the substratum by floods or drifts of leaves, the growth of the bud scales will continue until the light is reached, though it may be a distance of twenty centimetres. Such growth may be seen if the corms are grown in a deep layer of sphagnum moss, or in a dark room.

Very striking examples of this reaction can be seen in the awakening corms of the Jack-in-the-pulpit (Arisæma triphyllum). The corms typically lie about five or six centimeters below the soil surface, and when the large bud starts to grow in the spring, the heavy protective scales stretch and break through the soil, opening up once they reach the surface a few centimeters away. If the corm is buried deeper in the ground due to floods or piles of leaves, the growth of the bud scales will keep going until they reach the light, even if that means traveling a distance of twenty centimeters. This growth can be observed if the corms are placed in a thick layer of sphagnum moss or in a dark room.

After the stems emerge from the "drawn" buds they show a similar attenuation, attaining a length of twice the normal. The excessive elongation of stems is accompanied by variations in the structure and contents of the tissues. The cells are generally longer, while the walls are thinner. In consequence, organs grown in darkness are very weak and easily bent or broken. Growth in darkness is attended by the non-formation of chlorophyll. This is replaced by etiolin, giving the plant a pale, waxy, yellow appearance.

After the stems grow from the "drawn" buds, they appear stretched, reaching a length that's twice the normal size. This excessive lengthening of the stems comes with changes in the structure and contents of the tissues. The cells are generally longer, while the walls are thinner. As a result, organs that develop in the dark are weak and can easily bend or break. Growth in the absence of light leads to a lack of chlorophyll, which is replaced by etiolin, making the plant look pale, waxy, and yellow.

The adaptive elongation is not shown by all species, however. It has been found that stems of beet, hop, dioscorea, and a few others show no adaptations to diminished light. The adaptive modification of stems elongating in darkness is developed from the retarding influence exercised by light upon growth. Thus it is a well-known fact that the action of certain portions of the sun's rays actually impedes or checks the increase in volume known as growth, though it does not influence actual division of the cells to any great extent. When this retarding action is eliminated excessive elongation ensues.

Not all species exhibit adaptive elongation, though. Research has shown that the stems of beet, hop, dioscorea, and a few others do not adapt to low light conditions. The way stems elongate in the dark is a response to the slowing effect that light has on growth. It's a well-known fact that certain parts of sunlight actually hinder or slow down growth in terms of volume, although they don't significantly affect cell division. When this slowing effect is removed, excessive elongation occurs.

The behavior of leaves in illuminations below the normal depends upon the relation of these organs to the storage structures of the plant as well as upon other factors, and many types are dependent upon their own activity for plastic material necessary for growth.

The way leaves act in light levels lower than normal depends on their connection to the plant's storage structures and other factors, and many types rely on their own activity for the essential materials needed for growth.

It is to be said in general that leaves of dicotyledonous plants are incapable of full development in darkness, though to this rule there are many exceptions. Thus the leaves of the beet develop normally, or nearly so, in darkness.

In general, the leaves of dicotyledonous plants can’t fully develop in darkness, although there are many exceptions to this rule. For example, the leaves of the beet grow normally, or nearly so, in the dark.

On the other hand, leaves of monocotyledonous plants attain normal size in darkness, especially those with straight or curved parallel venation. Some, as the iris, swamp marigold, and onion, attain a greater length in darkness than in light. Here, as in stems, cell division is not modified, but the growth of the individual cell is increased.

On the other hand, leaves of monocot plants reach their normal size in the dark, especially those with straight or curved parallel veins. Some, like iris, swamp marigold, and onion, grow longer in the dark than in light. Similar to stems, cell division doesn’t change, but the growth of each individual cell increases.

The growth of leaves in darkness may be easily observed if the underground perennial stems of common mandrake are placed in a dark chamber before the growth of the leaf buds has begun. The leaves are peltate, and in the bud are folded about the end of the petiole after the manner of an umbrella. Usually this umbrella expands as soon as it has pushed upward and become free from the soil, attaining a diameter of twenty-five to forty centimetres when outspread. In darkness, however, it refuses to unfold, the laminæ are pale yellow and retain the crumpled form of the bud, and as the petiole shows an exaggerated elongation the organ takes on the appearance of a very small parasol on a very long handle. The imperfect development of leaves and the rapid decay of aërial organs deprived of sunlight leads to the conclusion that the action of light is necessary to the health and normal activity of these organs, and the light therefore exercises a tonic influence upon vegetation.

The growth of leaves in the dark can be easily observed if the underground perennial stems of common mandrake are placed in a dark chamber before the leaf buds start to grow. The leaves are peltate, and in the bud, they are folded around the end of the petiole like an umbrella. Usually, this umbrella spreads out as soon as it pushes upward and breaks free from the soil, reaching a diameter of twenty-five to forty centimeters when fully opened. In the dark, however, it doesn't unfold; the leaves are pale yellow and maintain the crumpled shape of the bud, and as the petiole grows unusually long, it makes the organ look like a tiny parasol on a very long handle. The incomplete development of leaves and the quick decay of aerial parts that lack sunlight suggest that light is essential for the health and normal functioning of these organs, and thus light has a tonic effect on plants.

Many species of plants are so plastic and capable of such ready response to variations in external conditions that they undergo distinct morphological changes in response to variations in the intensity of the light. The common potato is an example of this fact. The edible tubers are simply thickened stems, and the plant has the habit of storing starch in any stems not acted upon by the light. The branches arising from the base of the main stem are generally underneath the surface of the soil, and afford the proper conditions for tuber formation. Sugar is constructed in the leaves, carried down the length of the stem, and deposited in the underground branches as starch. Space is made for the accumulating store by the multiplication of the thin-walled cells of the pith. If any of the upper branches should become shaded, they become at once the focus of converging streams of sugar, and similar enlargement ensues, resulting[197] in the formation of tubers. Such structures are occasionally observed in plants grown thickly together.

Many types of plants are so adaptable and responsive to changes in their environment that they undergo noticeable physical changes based on varying light intensity. The common potato is a prime example of this. The edible tubers are essentially thickened stems, and the plant tends to store starch in any stems that aren't exposed to light. The branches that grow from the base of the main stem are usually below the soil surface, providing the right conditions for tuber development. Sugar is produced in the leaves, travels down the stem, and is stored in the underground branches as starch. As the thin-walled cells of the pith multiply, they create space for the accumulating starchy storage. If any of the upper branches get shaded, they quickly become the target for converging streams of sugar, leading to similar enlargement and the formation of tubers. Such structures can sometimes be seen in plants that are closely planted together.

Vöchting, by a number of most ingenious experiments, has succeeded in producing tubers on any branch of a potato plant by simply inclosing the branch in a small dark chamber. As the result of one experiment the entire main stem springing from a sprouting tuber was converted into a new tuber nearly as large as the first. The entire plant at the close of the experiment had the form of a dumb-bell, with the old tuber as one ball and the new tuber as the other.

Vöchting, through some really clever experiments, has been able to create tubers on any branch of a potato plant just by placing the branch in a small dark chamber. In one experiment, the whole main stem growing from a sprouting tuber turned into a new tuber that was almost as big as the original. By the end of the experiment, the entire plant looked like a dumbbell, with the old tuber on one end and the new tuber on the other.

The same writer has described important results obtained from a study of the action of light upon the stems of cactus, consisting of a number of flattened internodes. When the growing tips of such plants were allowed to develop in a dark chamber the new internodes grown were cylindrical in form. Such behavior suggests that these plants were originally furnished with cylindrical stems and foliar leaves. The leaves at some time in the history of the plant were found unsuitable, and gradually atrophied, while the stems were flattened and extended to take up their functions.

The same writer has reported significant findings from a study on how light affects cactus stems, which have several flattened sections. When the growing tips of these plants were kept in a dark chamber, the new sections that formed were cylindrical. This behavior implies that these plants initially had cylindrical stems and leaves. At some point in the plant's history, the leaves became ineffective and gradually diminished, while the stems flattened and elongated to assume their roles.

Some very striking adaptations of form of organs to the intensity of the light have been analyzed by Goebel. The common harebell (Campanula rotundifolia) has an upright stem twenty to sixty centimetres in height. The upper part of the stem bears sessile lanceolate leaves, decreasing in size from the base to the summit. The first leaves formed by the stem on its emergence from the soil are entirely different in construction, showing a heart-shaped lamina with a distinct petiole. These leaves are formed at the actual surface of the soil, are generally more or less shaded or covered by fallen leaves, and in fact are not known or seen by many collectors or observers of the plant. Goebel found that similar leaves might be formed on any part of the plant if it were shaded from the full glare of the sun's rays. The cordate leaves at the base of the stem were always produced, however, no matter to what intensity of illumination that part of the plant was subjected. It is therefore safe to conclude that the cordate leaves are inherited forms, and that the lanceolate organs are adaptations to light which may be shown by any individual of the species.

Some striking adaptations of organ shapes to light intensity have been analyzed by Goebel. The common harebell (Campanula rotundifolia) has a straight stem that grows between twenty to sixty centimeters tall. The upper part of the stem has sessile lanceolate leaves that get smaller from the base to the top. The first leaves that form when the stem emerges from the soil are quite different, showing a heart-shaped blade with a distinct petiole. These leaves grow right at the soil surface, are usually shaded or covered by fallen leaves, and often go unseen by many collectors or observers of the plant. Goebel discovered that similar leaves could form on any part of the plant if it was shielded from the full intensity of the sun. However, the heart-shaped leaves at the base of the stem were always produced, regardless of how much light that part of the plant received. It is therefore reasonable to conclude that the heart-shaped leaves are inherited traits, while the lanceolate leaves are adaptations to light that can develop in any individual of the species.

In general it is to be said that the leaves of sun-loving species have a thick epidermis, entirely free from chlorophyll, with stomata on the lower side only, a firm consistence due to the formation of woody tissues, and are often provided with a coating of hairs. The leaves of shade-loving plants, on the other hand, have a thin-walled epidermis often containing chlorophyll, stomata on both sides, and are not so plentifully provided with hairs as those in exposed situations.

In general, the leaves of sun-loving plants have a thick outer layer that's completely free of chlorophyll, with stomata only on the underside, a sturdy texture because of the development of woody tissues, and they often have a layer of hairs. In contrast, the leaves of shade-loving plants have a thin outer layer that often contains chlorophyll, stomata on both sides, and are not as hairy as those in exposed environments.

The variations in external form described above are due to the intensity of the illumination. At the same time the structure and arrangement of the cells depend on the direction from which the light rays come. Thus, an organ receiving light from one side only will exhibit a structure different from an organ of the same kind receiving direct rays from two or more sides. Light, then, is a cause of dorsiventrality—that is, of the fact that the upper and lower sides of organs are not alike in structure. The leaf affords a splendid example of dorsiventrality as a result of the exposure of one side only to direct light. The upper side of a horizontal leaf, such as the oak, beech, or maple, contains one or two layers of cylindrical cells with their long axes perpendicular to the surface. In vertical leaves, such as the iris, these palisade cells, as they are termed, are not so well defined, and in all leaves grown in darkness this tissue is very much reduced. If a young leaf not yet unfolded from the bud is fastened in such a position that the under side is uppermost, palisade cells will be formed on the side exposed to the direct rays of the sun.

The differences in external shape mentioned earlier are due to how intense the light is. At the same time, the structure and arrangement of the cells depend on the direction the light comes from. So, an organ that only gets light from one side will have a different structure than an organ of the same type that receives direct light from two or more sides. Light, therefore, causes dorsiventrality — meaning that the upper and lower sides of organs have different structures. The leaf is a great example of dorsiventrality because one side only gets direct light. The upper side of a horizontal leaf, like those of the oak, beech, or maple, has one or two layers of cylindrical cells with their long axes perpendicular to the surface. In vertical leaves, like those of the iris, these palisade cells, as they are called, are not as well defined, and all leaves that grow in darkness have this tissue significantly reduced. If a young leaf that hasn’t unfolded from the bud is positioned so that the underside is facing up, palisade cells will develop on the side that is exposed to direct sunlight.

The influence of light upon the sporophylls, or reproductive organs of the seed-forming plants, is quite as well defined as upon the vegetative organs.

The effect of light on sporophylls, or the reproductive organs of seed-producing plants, is just as clearly defined as it is on the vegetative organs.

In general it is to be said that stamens and pistils may reach functional maturity in darkness or diffuse light, and if pollination is provided for, seed and fruit formation may ensue.

In general, it can be said that stamens and pistils can become functionally mature in darkness or bright, indirect light, and if pollination occurs, seed and fruit development can follow.

The diminution of light has the effect of transforming inflorescences into leafy shoots in some instances, however. The more common reaction consists of alterations in the size, form, and color of the perianth, and greater changes are induced in the petals than in the sepals. The corolla shows greater decrease in size in Melandryum and Silene, in diffuse light, though the relative form is maintained. The writer has obtained most striking results from growing flowers of Salvia (sage) in a dark chamber, inclosing the inflorescence only. In the normal flower the irregular scarlet corolla attains three times the length of the calyx, and two stamens extrude from under the upper lip. When grown in darkness, the corolla with the adherent stamens measure about three millimetres in length, or one twelfth the normal, and are scarcely more than half the size of the calyx, which is but two thirds the size of similar organs grown in the light. The color is entirely lacking from the corolla, and is found only along the veins of the calyx.

The reduction of light can sometimes cause flowers to turn into leafy shoots. More commonly, it leads to changes in the size, shape, and color of the flower parts, with petals undergoing more significant alterations than sepals. The corolla of Melandryum and Silene shrinks more in diffuse light, but its relative shape remains the same. The author has seen particularly striking results when growing Salvia (sage) flowers in a dark chamber, enclosing just the flower. In a normal flower, the uneven scarlet corolla is three times longer than the calyx, with two stamens sticking out from beneath the upper lip. However, when grown in darkness, the corolla with the attached stamens measures about three millimeters long, or one-twelfth of the normal size, and is barely more than half the size of the calyx, which itself is only two-thirds the size of similar structures grown in light. The corolla is completely colorless, with color only appearing along the veins of the calyx.

In other instances in which the corolla is composed of separate members, an unequal reaction is exhibited. The corolla of nasturtium (Tropæolum majus) consists of five approximately equal petals. Flowers of this species grown in darkness show one of nearly normal[199] stature, two of reduced size, while the remaining two take the form of club-shaped bracts.

In other cases where the petals are separate, an uneven reaction is seen. The flower of nasturtium (Tropæolum majus) has five roughly equal petals. Flowers of this type that are grown in darkness show one that is nearly normal[199] size, two that are smaller, and the other two take on the shape of club-like bracts.

The diminished size of the perianth of cleistogamous flowers of such types as the violet is due directly to the action of diminished light upon the hidden or inclosed flower.

The smaller size of the perianth in cleistogamous flowers, like those of the violet, is directly caused by reduced light affecting the hidden or enclosed flower.

The influence of light upon the structure, reproductive processes, and distribution of the lower forms brings about the most widely divergent reactions, which can not be described here.

The impact of light on the structure, reproductive processes, and distribution of lower life forms leads to a variety of reactions that can't be fully explained here.

The distribution and color of marine algæ depend upon the depth of the water and the consequent intensity of the light. This gives rise to distinct zones of aquatic vegetation. Thus in one series of surveys the littoral zone, the beach area covered at high water and exposed at low water, was found to furnish proper conditions for green, brown, and red algæ. The sublittoral zone, extending to a depth of forty metres, is furnished with red algæ, increasing in number with the depth, and the brown algæ disappear; while the elittoral zone, from forty to one hundred and ten metres, is inhabited by red algæ alone. The number of species of vegetal organisms below this depth is extremely small. An alga (Halosphæria viridis) has been brought up from depths of one thousand to two thousand metres.

The distribution and color of marine algae depend on the water depth and the resulting light intensity. This creates distinct zones of aquatic vegetation. For example, in one set of surveys, the littoral zone, which is the beach area that is covered at high tide and exposed at low tide, was found to provide suitable conditions for green, brown, and red algae. The sublittoral zone, extending down to forty meters, is populated by red algae, which increase in number with greater depth, while brown algae disappear; meanwhile, the elittoral zone, from forty to one hundred ten meters, is home to red algae alone. The number of species of plant organisms below this depth is extremely low. An alga (Halosphæria viridis) has been retrieved from depths of one thousand to two thousand meters.

A very great number of bacteria are unfavorably affected by light, and find proper conditions at some depth in the soil or water. It is on account of this fact that the water of frozen streams becomes more thickly inhabited by certain organisms than in the summer time, and exposure to sunlight is adopted as a hygienic measure in freeing clothing and household effects from infection. Bacteria occur abundantly in sea water at depths of two hundred to four hundred metres, and quite a number of species are to be found at eight hundred to eleven hundred metres.

A large number of bacteria are negatively impacted by light and thrive in darker conditions below the surface of the soil or water. Because of this, the water in frozen streams often has a higher concentration of certain organisms than in the summer. Sunlight exposure is also used as a hygiene measure to cleanse clothing and household items of infection. Bacteria are found in abundance in seawater at depths of two hundred to four hundred meters, and many species are present at depths of eight hundred to eleven hundred meters.

The distribution of fungi follows the general habit of bacteria in that they thrive best in darkness.

The distribution of fungi is similar to that of bacteria in that they grow best in the dark.

It is to be noticed in this connection that light is also a determining factor in the distribution of the higher land plants. Thus the amount of light received in polar latitudes is quite insufficient for the needs of many species, entirely irrespective of temperature.

It should be noted in this context that light is also a key factor in the distribution of higher land plants. The amount of light received in polar regions is simply inadequate for the needs of many species, regardless of temperature.

The retarding influence of light upon growth is even more marked in the lower forms than in the higher. Such action is the result of the disintegrating effect of the blue-violet rays upon ferments and nitrogenous plastic substances.

The slowing effect of light on growth is even more pronounced in simpler organisms than in more complex ones. This effect is caused by the breaking down influence of blue-violet rays on enzymes and nitrogen-rich substances.

The greater massiveness of the bodies of the higher plants enables them to carry on the chemical activities in which these substances are concerned in the interior, where the intense rays may not[200] penetrate. The attenuated and undifferentiated fungi must seek the shade, to escape the dangers of strong light, against which they have no shield.

The larger size of higher plants allows them to perform the chemical processes related to these substances internally, where the intense light might not[200] reach. The thin and undeveloped fungi have to find shade to avoid the risks of bright light, which they have no protection against.

The reproductive processes are particularly sensitive to illumination. The formation of zoöspores by green felt (Vaucheria) may occur only in darkness, at night, or in diffuse light, and these examples might be multiplied indefinitely. Many features of the germination of spores and the growth of protonemæ or prothallia among the mosses, liverworts, and ferns are determined by light.

The reproductive processes are especially sensitive to light. The creation of zoospores by green felt (Vaucheria) can only happen in the dark, at night, or in soft light, and there are countless more examples like this. Many aspects of how spores germinate and how protonemæ or prothallia develop in mosses, liverworts, and ferns are influenced by light.

Perhaps the most striking reactions of plants to light are to be seen in locomotor and orientation movements.

Perhaps the most noticeable reactions of plants to light are seen in their movement and orientation.

Locomotor movements are chiefly confined to lower forms, and are most noticeable in the "swarm spores," or zoöspores of the algæ, though exhibited by spermatozoöids as well. Zoöspores may be seen collected against the side of the vessel receiving direct sunlight, while the opposite side of the vessel will be free from them. The chlorophyll bodies of green cells arrange themselves similarly. The latter bodies may move away from the exposed side of the cell if the light exceeds a certain intensity.

Locomotor movements mainly occur in simpler organisms and are most apparent in the "swarm spores," or zoöspores, of algae, although they are also shown by sperm cells. You can observe zoöspores gathered on the side of a container that's getting direct sunlight, while the other side remains clear of them. The chlorophyll bodies in green cells behave in a similar way. These bodies can move away from the light-exposed side of the cell if the light becomes too intense.

The typical plant may not move its body toward or away from the source of light, but it may secure the same end by dispositions of its surfaces to vary the angle at which the rays are received. This form of irritability is one of the most highly developed properties of the plant. Wiesner has found that a seedling of the vetch is sensitive to an amount of light represented by one ten-millionth of a unit represented by a Roscoe-Bunsen flame. The "sensitiveness" to light may take one of three forms: The organ may place its axis parallel and pointing toward the source of the rays, as in stems, when it is said to be proheliotropic; the axis of the organ may assume a position perpendicular to the rays, which is designated as diaheliotropism; or it may place its axis parallel to the rays and pointing away from the light, when it is said to be apheliotropic. Upright stems are proheliotropic, horizontal leaves and creeping stems are diaheliotropic, and roots and such stems as those of ivy are apheliotropic.

A typical plant may not physically move toward or away from a light source, but it can achieve the same effect by adjusting its surfaces to change the angle at which light hits them. This ability to respond to light is one of the most advanced features of plants. Wiesner discovered that a vetch seedling is sensitive to light levels as low as one ten-millionth of a unit measured by a Roscoe-Bunsen flame. The plant's "sensitivity" to light can manifest in one of three ways: The organ may align its axis parallel to and facing the light source, which is called proheliotropic; the organ's axis may position itself perpendicularly to the light rays, referred to as diaheliotropism; or it may orient its axis parallel to the rays but face away from the light, known as apheliotropic. Upright stems are proheliotropic, horizontal leaves and creeping stems are diaheliotropic, while roots and stems like those of ivy are apheliotropic.

Sunlight varies from zero to the full blaze of the noonday sun, and assumes its greatest intensity in the equatorial regions. The intensity in latitudes 40° to 45° north would be represented by 1.5 units, and at the equator by 1.6 units. Near the equator the intensity is so great that an ordinary leaf may not receive the full force of the noonday sun without damage. The injury would not result from the luminous rays, but from the temperatures, 40° to 50° C., arising from the conversion of light into heat. As an adaptation to this condition nearly all leaves have either a pendent or a vertical position,[201] or the power of assuming this position by motor or impassive wilting movements.

Sunlight ranges from none at all to the intense brightness of midday, with its strongest intensity found in equatorial regions. The intensity at latitudes 40° to 45° north is about 1.5 units, while at the equator, it reaches around 1.6 units. Close to the equator, sunlight is so strong that an ordinary leaf may not be able to handle the full force of the midday sun without sustaining damage. The harm comes not from the light itself but from the extreme temperatures of 40° to 50° C. that occur when light converts to heat. As an adaptation to this, almost all leaves either hang down or stand upright, or can move into these positions through active or passive wilting.[201]

Among the plants of the temperate zone the so-called compass plants are examples of similar adaptations. The compass plants include, among others, the wild lettuce (Lactuca scariola) and rosin weed (Silphium laciniatum). These plants place the leaves in a vertical position with the tips pointing north and south in such manner that the direct rays of the morning and evening sun only may strike the surfaces at right angles, while the edges are presented to the fierce rays at noonday. That this arrangement is an adaptation against the intense light is evident when it is seen that specimens growing in shaded locations or in diffuse light place the leaves in the typical horizontal position. To meet the functional conditions, both sides of the compass leaves are almost equally provided with palisade cells for food formation and stomata for transpiration. The estimation of the light striking a compass leaf shows that it receives approximately the same amount of light as a horizontal leaf during the course of a day, but the two maxima of intensity, morning and evening, are much below that of the noon of horizontal leaves.

Among the plants in the temperate zone, the so-called compass plants are examples of similar adaptations. Compass plants include, among others, wild lettuce (Lactuca scariola) and rosin weed (Silphium laciniatum). These plants position their leaves vertically, with the tips pointing north and south, so that the direct rays of the morning and evening sun hit the surfaces at right angles, while the edges face the intense midday sun. This arrangement helps them adapt to strong light, as evidenced by specimens growing in shaded areas or diffuse light that position their leaves horizontally. To meet their needs, both sides of the compass leaves are almost equally equipped with palisade cells for food production and stomata for transpiration. The amount of light hitting a compass leaf shows that it receives about the same light as a horizontal leaf over the course of a day, but the peak intensities in the morning and evening are much lower than that of the noon sun on horizontal leaves.

The influence of light upon plants may be briefly summed as follows:

The impact of light on plants can be summarized as follows:

Light is necessary for the formation of food substances by green plants, and it is an important factor in distribution in land and marine forms.

Light is essential for green plants to create food, and it plays a significant role in the distribution of land and marine life.

Growth and reproduction are generally retarded by the action of the blue-violet rays.

Growth and reproduction are usually slowed down by the effect of the blue-violet rays.

Light is fatal to certain bacteria and other low forms of vegetable life.

Light is deadly to some bacteria and other simple forms of plant life.

Many plants have the power of accelerated growth of stems in diminished light as an adaptation for lifting the leaves above "shading" objects.

Many plants can grow their stems faster in low light as a way to raise their leaves above "shading" objects.

The growth of many leaves and of the perianth of flowers is hindered in diminished light.

The growth of many leaves and the flower petals is restricted in reduced light.

The outward form of many organs, particularly leaves, is dependent upon the intensity of the light received.

The shape of many organs, especially leaves, depends on the amount of light they get.

The internal structure of bilateral or dorsiventral organs is largely determined by the direction of the rays.

The internal structure of bilateral or dorsiventral organs is mainly shaped by the direction of the rays.

Plants have the power of movement to adjust their surfaces to a proper angle with impinging light rays, as a protective adaptation.

Plants can move to position their surfaces at the right angle to incoming light rays, which is a way to protect themselves.


Matches which do not contain any phosphorus and which take fire by friction on any surface—a match that has been long sought—have been prepared by Mr. S. A. Rosenthal and Dr. S. J. von Kornocki. It is represented that they can be manufactured as cheaply as ordinary matches.

Matches that have no phosphorus and can light by rubbing against any surface—a type of match that has been sought after for a long time—have been developed by Mr. S. A. Rosenthal and Dr. S. J. von Kornocki. They've stated that these can be made as cheaply as regular matches.


THE STONE AGE IN EGYPT.

By J. DE MORGAN.

By J. DE MORGAN.

The investigation of the origin of man in Egypt is a very complex problem, belonging as much to geology as to archæology. The earliest evidences we have of human industry, in fact, go back to so remote a period that they should be regarded rather as fossils than as archæological documents. They are very coarsely worked flints, which are found near the surface of the ground among the pebbles of the Quaternary or Pleistocene epoch, and similar to those which occur abundantly in Europe, America, and Asia; but the study and collection of them have been pursued with less method than in those countries. The more recent monuments, so much more conspicuous and more easily accessible, have attracted most attention, while these have been left in the background.

The investigation into the origin of humans in Egypt is a very complex issue, tied to both geology and archaeology. The earliest evidence we have of human activity actually dates back so far that it should be seen more as fossils than as archaeological finds. These are very roughly made flint tools, found near the surface among the pebbles of the Quaternary or Pleistocene period, similar to those that are plentiful in Europe, America, and Asia; however, the study and collection of these tools has been less systematic than in those regions. The more recent monuments, which are much more prominent and easier to access, have drawn most of the focus, while these earlier findings have been overlooked.

No region in the world presents a clearer and more distinct individual character than Egypt. Each village is a special world, each valley a universe that has developed its own life; and man has felt the special local impressions; and even in modern times, while all the Egyptian villages present a similar aspect, and although the fellah appears to be the same sort of a man everywhere, each locality has its special individual characteristics. One who knows how to observe men and things critically will find considerable differences. These dissimilarities are as old as Egypt itself. They have always existed, and are as much more intense as the communications between district and district were formerly more difficult. They are due to physical conditions special to each village, to the prevailing winds, the form and character of the mountains, the extent of cultivable lands, and the supply of water. A study of the detail of the country is a very important preliminary to the examination of Egyptian history. Every village and every nome had formerly its special divinity and its particular usages. Are we sure that the gods and customs were not imposed by local conditions? At Ombos two hostile gods were adored in the same temple. May we not see in this fact a recollection of the hostility which has always prevailed between the inhabitants of the two banks of the river, and still continues?

No region in the world showcases a clearer and more distinct character than Egypt. Each village is its own unique world, and each valley represents a universe that has developed its own way of life. People have been influenced by local impressions; even today, while all Egyptian villages might look similar, and although the fellah seems to be the same kind of person everywhere, each area has its own specific traits. Someone who can observe people and things critically will notice significant differences. These variations are as old as Egypt itself. They have always existed and are even more pronounced because in the past, communication between regions was much harder. They arise from the unique physical conditions of each village, the prevailing winds, the shape and nature of the mountains, the amount of arable land, and the availability of water. A detailed study of the landscape is essential before examining Egyptian history. Every village and every nome once had its own god and its own customs. Can we be sure that the gods and traditions were not shaped by local conditions? In Ombos, two rival gods were worshiped in the same temple. Could this be a reflection of the long-standing hostility between the people on either side of the river, which still exists today?

Previous, however, to investigating these details which have been so influential on Egyptian civilization, we ought to dispel the darkness which hides from us the earliest traces of man in the valley of the Nile, and examine how man lived in his beginning, to study the geology of the country and its condition when it issued from the seas. As one of the results of this study we find that palæolithic[203] man, known to us only through the rough-cut flints we find in the alluvions, made his first appearance. After this period of excavation came that of filling up with silt, which still continues. New evidences of man appear in his burial places and the ruins of his villages, the kitchen middens which he has left in his habitations of unburned brick and in his camps. This time he is more civilized; he chips his flints with a skill that is not surpassed in European neolithic implements; he makes vessels of stone and clay, covers them with rude paintings, sculptures animal forms of schist, and wears necklaces of the shells and the stones of the country. Then comes a foreign people to take possession of Egypt, bringing knowledge of metals, writing, hieroglyphics, painting, sculpture, new industries and arts that have nothing in common with the arts of the people it has overcome. The ancient Pharaonic empire begins, or perhaps the reign of the divine dynasties. The men with stone implements are the aborigines; the others are the conquering civilized Egyptians. Nothing can be more interesting than a comparison of the arts of the aborigines and those of the Egyptians of the earlier dynasties. Nearly all their characteristics are different, and it is impossible to regard them as of common origin. Yet some of the native forms persisted till the last days of the empire of the Pharaohs. These aborigines belonged to a race that is now extinct, they having been absorbed into the mass of the Egyptians and Nubians among whom they lived, and from this mixture the fellah of ancient times is derived. The origin of the conquering race—of the Egyptians as we know them—has not been precisely determined. The weight of evidence, so far as it has been obtained, and the balance of opinion, are in favor of an Asiatic origin and of primary relationship with the Shemites of Chaldea.

Before we dive into the details that significantly shaped Egyptian civilization, we should first uncover the early signs of human life in the Nile Valley and look into how people lived at the beginning. We need to study the geology of the area and its state when it emerged from the seas. From this research, we find that paleoolithic man, known to us only through crude flint tools found in the alluvial deposits, first appeared. Following this excavation period, there came an era of sediment accumulation, which is still ongoing. New evidence of human existence emerges from burial sites and the remains of villages, as well as kitchen waste left behind in their unbaked brick homes and camps. During this time, people were more advanced; they skillfully chipped flints, making tools comparable to European Neolithic implements. They created stone and clay vessels, decorated them with primitive paintings, sculpted animal forms from schist, and wore necklaces made from local shells and stones. Then, a foreign group arrived in Egypt, bringing knowledge of metals, writing, hieroglyphics, painting, sculpture, and new industries and art forms that were completely different from those of the local population they conquered. This marked the beginning of the ancient Pharaonic empire, or perhaps the reign of the divine dynasties. The people using stone tools were the natives; the others were the conquering, advanced Egyptians. Comparing the arts of the natives with those of the early dynastic Egyptians is incredibly fascinating. Almost all their features differ, making it impossible to see them as sharing a common origin. Yet, some native artistic forms persisted until the very end of the Pharaohs' empire. These natives belonged to a now-extinct race that was integrated into the larger groups of Egyptians and Nubians they lived among, and from this blend, the ancient fellah emerged. The exact origin of the conquering race—who we recognize as the Egyptians—has not been definitively established. The evidence gathered so far and the prevailing opinion lean toward an Asiatic origin with primary connections to the Shemites of Chaldea.

In Egypt more than in any other country it is necessary to proceed with the most scrupulous circumspection in the examination of remote antiquities. The relics of thousands of years of human life have been piled one upon another and often intermixed. The questions they raise can not be answered in the cabinet or by the study of texts; but the inquiry must be prosecuted on the ground, by comparison of the deposits where they are found and in the deposits from which they are recovered.

In Egypt, more than anywhere else, it's essential to approach the study of ancient artifacts with great care. Artifacts from thousands of years of human history have accumulated and often blended together. The questions they raise can't be answered just by looking at documents or in a lab; the investigation must take place on-site, by comparing the layers where they are found and the layers from which they are taken.

From my first arrival in Egypt, in 1892, my attention has been greatly occupied with the question of the origin of the relics of the stone age that have been found from time to time in that country. I have gathered up the scattered documents, explored a large number of sites, and have bought such flint implements as I have found on sale. I have gradually been led to believe that while some of these cut stones may possibly belong to the historical epoch, we shall have[204] to attribute a much more remote antiquity to the most of them, and that evidences of a neolithic age in the valley of the Nile are more abundant than has generally been supposed.

Since my arrival in Egypt in 1892, I have been significantly focused on understanding the origins of the stone age relics that have been discovered in the country over time. I have collected various documents, explored numerous sites, and purchased any flint tools I could find for sale. I have gradually come to believe that while some of these stone tools might belong to the historical period, we should attribute much older origins to most of them. It appears that evidence of a neolithic age in the Nile Valley is more plentiful than people usually think.

In many minds the historical antiquity of Egypt, the almost fabulous ages to which its civilization ascends, seem to challenge the history of other countries, and the land of the Pharaohs, rejecting all chronological comparison, to have appeared in the midst of the world as a single example of a land which savage life had never trodden. Yet what are the centuries since Menes ruled over the reclaimed valleys, the few thousand years of which we can calculate the duration, by the side of the incalculable lapse of time since man, struggling with the glaciers and the prehistoric beasts, began his conquest of the earth? The antiquity of Egypt, the eight thousand years (if it be as many) since the first Pharaoh, are only as an atom in the presence of these ages. We can assert some vague knowledge of these pre-Pharaonic inhabitants, for two hatchets of the Chellean pattern were found some time ago in the desert, one at Esnet, the other near the pyramids of Gizeh; and we can now affirm in the most positive manner that Quaternary man lived in the country which is now Egypt, and was then only preparing to be. Four palæolithic stations have been more recently discovered—at Thebes, Tukh, Abydos, and Daschur. Join these sites to the other two where isolated pieces were found, and we have the geography of what we know at present of Chellean man in the valley of the Nile. Doubtless continuous researches would result in similar discoveries at other points, for I have met these relics wherever I have been able to make a short sojourn. The Chellean implements are found in the gravels of the diluvium on the pebbly surface. They have been disturbed and probably scattered, but some places yield them more numerously than others—points possibly corresponding to the ancient workshops. I have found a considerable number of specimens at Deir-el-Medinet; M. Daressy, of the Bureau of Antiquities, found a perfectly characteristic Chellean hammer stone in the Yalley of the Queens at Gurneh, as perfectly worked as the best specimens found at Chelles, St. Acheul, and Moulin-Quignon.

In many minds, the ancient history of Egypt, with its almost legendary civilization, seems to stand out when compared to other countries. The land of the Pharaohs, defying all chronological comparisons, appears as a unique example of a place untouched by savage life. But what do the centuries since Menes ruled over the reclaimed valleys really mean, alongside the countless ages since humanity first faced the glaciers and prehistoric animals in its quest to conquer the earth? The age of Egypt, some eight thousand years (if it truly is that long) since the first Pharaoh, is just a tiny fraction compared to those bygone eras. We know a little about the people who lived before the Pharaohs, as two hatchets of the Chellean pattern were found not long ago in the desert—one at Esnet and the other near the pyramids of Giza. We can confidently say that early humans inhabited the region that is now Egypt, which was then still in its early stages of development. Recently, four Paleolithic sites have been discovered in Thebes, Tukh, Abydos, and Dashur. If we combine these locations with the other two where isolated pieces were found, we start to piece together the geography of what we currently know about Chellean man in the Nile Valley. Continuous research is likely to lead to similar finds elsewhere since I've come across these artifacts in every place I’ve been able to stay for a short time. Chellean tools are found in the gravel deposits on the pebble-strewn surface. They have been disturbed and possibly scattered, but some areas yield them more abundantly than others—likely corresponding to ancient workshops. I've discovered a significant number of artifacts at Deir-el-Medinet; M. Daressy from the Bureau of Antiquities found a perfectly typical Chellean hammerstone in the Valley of the Queens at Gurneh, as well-crafted as the finest specimens uncovered at Chelles, St. Acheul, and Moulin-Quignon.

The finds are not very numerous at Tukh, but one may in a few hours make a collection there of hatchets (or hammer stones), scrapers, points, simple blades, and a large number of stones bearing indisputable marks of having been worked, but not presenting precise forms. The deposit at Abydos is in the bottom of a circle behind the ruins surrounding the Pharaonic necropolis. The specimens seem sufficient to prove the existence of Quaternary man in Egypt, while the search for them has hardly yet begun. In view of them it is extremely improbable that man did not also exist there[205] during the long period that intervened between this primitive age and that of the earliest Egyptians who had metals. He did exist there then, and the evidences of it are found in neolithic remains between Cairo and Thebes, a distance of about eight hundred kilometres along the valley of the Nile, in the Fayum, and in Upper Egypt. Among these are the remarkable tombs at Abydos which have been explored by M. E. Amélineau, and of which he has published descriptions. They belong to a category which I have characterized as tombs of transition and as signalizing the passage from the use of polished stone to that of metals. Their archaic character can not be disputed, and their royal origin is probably certain. They may belong to aboriginal kings or to the earliest dynasties. They reveal a knowledge of brass and of the use of gold for ornament. At the necropolis of El-'Amrah, a few miles south of Abydos, are some archaic tombs, all of the same model, composed of an oval trench from five to six and a half feet deep. The body is laid on the left side, and the legs are doubled up till the knees are even with the sternum; the forearms are drawn out in front and the hands placed one upon the other before the face, while the head is slightly bent forward. Around the skeleton are vases, and large, rudely made urns, often filled with ashes or the bones of animals, and nearer to them are painted or red vessels with black or brown edges, vessels roughly shaped out of stone, and figurines in schist representing fishes or quadrupeds, cut flints, alabaster clubs, and necklaces and bracelets of shells. Bronze is rare, and found always in shape of small implements. Both purely neolithic tombs and burials of the transition period to metals occur at El-'Amrah. The most remarkable feature of the burials is the position of the corpse, totally unlike anything that is found of the Pharaonic ages.

The finds at Tukh aren't very numerous, but in just a few hours, one can collect hatchets (or hammer stones), scrapers, points, simple blades, and many stones showing clear signs of being worked, though they don’t take on specific shapes. The deposit at Abydos is located at the bottom of a circle behind the ruins of the Pharaonic necropolis. The specimens seem enough to demonstrate that Quaternary humans lived in Egypt, while the search for them has hardly begun. Given this evidence, it’s highly unlikely that humans didn't exist there during the long period between this primitive age and the time of the earliest Egyptians who used metals. They were indeed present, and the evidence can be found in neolithic remains scattered between Cairo and Thebes, which is about eight hundred kilometers along the Nile Valley, in the Fayum, and in Upper Egypt. Among these are the remarkable tombs at Abydos that M. E. Amélineau has explored and described. They fit into a category I’ve identified as transitional tombs, marking the shift from polished stone tools to metal use. Their ancient nature is undeniable, and their royal origin is likely. They could belong to indigenous kings or to the earliest dynasties. They show an understanding of brass and the use of gold for decoration. At the necropolis of El-'Amrah, just south of Abydos, there are several ancient tombs that share the same design, consisting of an oval trench about five to six and a half feet deep. The body is positioned on the left side, with the legs folded up so that the knees are at the level of the sternum; the forearms extend in front, and the hands rest one over the other in front of the face, with the head slightly bent forward. Surrounding the skeleton are vases and large, crudely made urns, often filled with ashes or animal bones, as well as painted or red vessels with black or brown edges, roughly shaped stone vessels, and schist figurines representing fish or mammals, chipped flints, alabaster clubs, and necklaces and bracelets made from shells. Bronze is rare and is found only in the form of small tools. El-'Amrah contains both distinctly neolithic tombs and burials from the transitional period to metal use. The most notable characteristic of these burials is the positioning of the corpse, which is entirely different from anything found in the Pharaonic eras.

The Egyptian finds of stone implements present the peculiarity as compared with those of Europe, that types are found associated together belonging to what would be regarded in other countries as very different epochs. The time may come when subdivisions can be made of the Egyptian stone age, but the study has not yet been pursued far enough to make this practicable at present. Among these articles are hatchets showing the transitions, examples of which are wanting in Europe, from the rudest stone hammer to the polished neolithic implement; knives of various shape and some of handsome workmanship; scrapers, lance heads, arrowheads, saws, pins, bodkins, maces, beads, bracelets, and combs. The large number of instruments with toothed blades found at some of the stations may be regarded as pointing to a very extensive cultivation of cereals at the time they were in use. The deposits of Tukh, Zarraïdah, Khattarah, Abydos, etc., situated in regions suitable for growing grain,[206] yield thousands of them, while they are very rare at the fishing station of Dimeh. That the use of sickles tipped with flint very probably lasted long after the introduction of metals seems to be proved by the hieroglyphics; but very few evidences of the existence of such tools are found after the middle empire.

The Egyptian discoveries of stone tools are interesting because, unlike those in Europe, they show types that would be considered from very different periods found together. One day, we might be able to break down the Egyptian stone age into smaller sections, but we haven't studied it enough yet to do that right now. Among these items are hatchets that illustrate transitions, with examples not found in Europe, ranging from basic stone hammers to polished Neolithic tools; variously shaped knives, some beautifully crafted; scrapers, spearheads, arrowheads, saws, pins, bodkins, maces, beads, bracelets, and combs. The large number of tools with jagged edges found at some sites suggests that there was extensive grain farming at the time they were used. The sites at Tukh, Zarraïdah, Khattarah, Abydos, etc., located in areas suitable for growing grain,[206] yield thousands of these tools, while they are very rare at the fishing site of Dimeh. The hieroglyphics suggest that sickles made with flint likely continued to be used long after metals were introduced, but there are very few signs of such tools after the Middle Kingdom.

No traces of articles related to the religion of the Pharaohs are found in the burial places of the aborigines. In place of the statuettes and funerary divinities of later times are found rude figurines of animals cut in green schists. They represent fishes, tortoises with eyes adorned with hard stone or nacre, and numerous signs the origin of which is unknown, and were apparently regarded as fetiches or divinities. Articles of pottery are very numerous, very crude, and of a great variety of forms. It is not necessary to suppose that the people who have left these relics were savages or barbarians. History and even the present age afford instances of many peoples who have obtained considerable degrees of civilization while backward in some of the arts. It is hardly possible to achieve delicacy of design and finish without the use of metals. I believe I have shown that an age of stone once existed in Egypt, and that it furthermore played an important part, even in Pharaonic civilization.—Translated for the Popular Science Monthly from the Author's Recherches sur les Origines de l'Egypte.

No evidence of articles related to the religion of the Pharaohs is found in the burial sites of the indigenous people. Instead of the figurines and funerary gods seen in later periods, there are crude animal figures carved from green schists. These depict fish, tortoises with eyes made of hard stone or mother-of-pearl, and many symbols whose origins are unclear, which were likely seen as fetishes or deities. There are many pieces of pottery that are quite common, very simplistic, and come in a wide variety of shapes. It doesn’t have to be assumed that the people who left behind these artifacts were savages or barbarians. History, and even modern times, provide examples of many societies that achieved significant levels of civilization while remaining underdeveloped in certain arts. It’s nearly impossible to create refined designs and finishes without using metals. I believe I have demonstrated that a Stone Age once existed in Egypt and that it played a significant role, even in Pharaonic civilization.—Translated for the Popular Science Monthly from the Author's Recherches sur les Origines de l'Egypte.


SUPERSTITION AND CRIME.

By Prof. E. P. EVANS.

By Prof. E. P. EVANS.

In January, 1898, an elderly woman came in great anxiety to a priest of the Church of St. Ursula, in Munich, Bavaria, and complained that the devil haunted her house at night and frightened her by making a great noise. In explanation of this unseasonable and undesirable visit from the lower world she stated that a joint-stock company had been formed in Berlin, with a branch in Munich, for the purpose of discovering hidden treasures, and that in order to attain this object a human sacrifice must be made to the devil, and that she had been selected as the victim. A woman, whose husband was a stockholder in the aforesaid company, had kindly communicated to her this information, so that she might be prepared and have time to set her house in order. Satan, however, grew impatient of the promised sacrifice, and began to look after her. The priest sent one of his younger assistants at the altar to read appropriate prayers in the haunted house, and thus exorcise the evil spirit. We can hardly suppose that his reverence believed in the reality of the reported apparition, and yet he could not assert its impossibility by[207] calling in question the existence of the devil or the actuality of diabolical agencies in human affairs without undermining the foundations of the ecclesiastical system, of which he was an acknowledged supporter. Such a declaration would "take away our hope," as the Scotchman said of the denial of a literal hell-fire and the doctrine of eternal punishment. It was for the same reason that the great body of the Catholic clergy, from Pope Leo XIII and the highest dignitaries of the church down to the humblest country vicar, so easily fell into the snares laid by Leo Taxil and accepted the signature of the devil Bitru as genuine, and his revelations concerning the pact of the freemasons with Satan as authentic. It is certainly somewhat startling to meet with such a case of gross superstition as the above-mentioned in one of the seats of modern science and centers of European civilization. In rural districts, remote from the influences of intellectual culture, however, instances of this kind are of quite frequent occurrence, and often result in the commission of crime. Human sacrifices to Satan are still by no means uncommon in many parts of Russia, and are supposed to be effective in warding off famine and in staying the ravages of pestilence. Even in Germany and other countries of western Europe the belief in their prophylactic virtue is remarkably prevalent, and would be often put into practice were it not for the stricter administration of justice and the greater terror of the law.

In January 1898, an elderly woman visited a priest at the Church of St. Ursula in Munich, Bavaria, clearly distressed. She complained that the devil was haunting her house at night, making a lot of noise and scaring her. She explained that a joint-stock company had been established in Berlin, with a branch in Munich, to find hidden treasures, and as part of this, a human sacrifice was needed for the devil, with her being chosen as the victim. A woman, whose husband was a shareholder in the company, had kindly informed her about this so she could prepare and put her affairs in order. However, the devil became impatient waiting for the promised sacrifice and started to show interest in her. The priest sent one of his younger assistants to read appropriate prayers in the haunted house to exorcise the evil spirit. It's hard to believe that the priest genuinely thought the reported haunting was real, but he couldn’t deny the existence of the devil or the idea of evil forces in human affairs without undermining the very foundations of the church system he supported. Such a statement would "take away our hope," as one Scottish man described the denial of a literal hell and eternal punishment. This is also why the vast majority of the Catholic clergy, from Pope Leo XIII and the highest church leaders down to the most humble village priest, easily fell for the tricks of Leo Taxil and accepted the signature of the devil Bitru as authentic, believing his claims about a pact between the freemasons and Satan. It’s certainly shocking to encounter such blatant superstition in a place known for modern science and European civilization. However, in rural areas, far from intellectual influence, similar incidents occur quite frequently and often lead to crime. Human sacrifices to Satan are still not uncommon in many parts of Russia, believed to help prevent famine and stop outbreaks of disease. Even in Germany and other Western European countries, the belief in their protective power is surprisingly widespread, and while they might often be practiced, stricter law enforcement and the greater fear of legal consequences tend to keep them in check.

In October, 1889, the criminal court in the governmental province of Archangelsk, in northern Russia, sentenced a Samoyede, Jefrern Pyrerka, to fifteen years' imprisonment with hard labor for the murder of a maiden named Ssavaney. His sole defense was that an unusually severe winter with a heavy fall of snow had produced a famine followed by scurvy, of which all his children had died. He therefore made an image of the devil out of wood, smeared its lips with fat, and set it up on a hillock. He then attempted to lasso one of his companions, Andrey Tabarey, and had already thrown the noose round his neck, when the energetic wife of the intended victim intervened and rescued her husband. Shortly afterward he succeeded in strangling the girl and offering her as a sacrifice to his idol. In the province of Novgorod, known as "the darkest Russia," it is a general custom among the country people to sacrifice some animal, usually a black cat, a black cock, or a black dog, by burying it alive, in order to check the spread of cholera. In the village of Kamenka, a peasant, whose son had died of this disease, interred with the body eight live tomcats. The immolation of dumb animals, however, is deemed less efficacious than that of human beings. On one occasion, when the cholera was raging severely, a deputation of peasants waited upon their parson, stating that they had[208] determined to bury him alive in order to appease the demon of the plague. He escaped this horrible death only by apparently acceding to their wishes and craving a few days' respite in order to prepare for such a solemn ceremony; meanwhile he took the measures necessary to secure his safety and thwarted the purpose of his loving parishioners. In Okopovitchi, a village of the same province, the peasants succeeded in enticing an aged woman, Lucia Manjkov, into the cemetery, where they thrust her alive into the grave containing the bodies of those who had died of the epidemic, and quickly covered her up. When brought to trial they proved that they had acted on the advice of a military surgeon, Kosakovitch, who was therefore regarded as the chief culprit, and sentenced to be knouted by the hangman, and then to undergo twelve years' penal servitude in Siberia. We are indebted for these instances of barbarous superstition to the researches of Augustus Löwenstimm, associate jurisconsult in the department of justice at St. Petersburg, who has derived them from thoroughly authentic and mostly official sources. He reports several occurrences of a similar kind during the epidemics of cholera in 1831, 1855, and 1872. Indeed, it is very difficult to abolish such pagan practices so long as the clergy foster the notion that animal sacrifices are expiatory and propitiatory in their effects. In some parts of the province of Vologda it is still customary on the day dedicated to the prophet Elias (July 20th in the Greek calendar) to offer up bullocks, he-goats, or other quadrupeds within the precincts of the church. The animal is driven into the courtyard surrounding the sacred edifice and there slaughtered; the flesh is boiled in a large kettle, one half of it being kept by the peasants who provide the sacrifice, while the other half is distributed among the priests and sacristans.[26]

In October 1889, the criminal court in the Archangelsk region of northern Russia sentenced a Samoyede named Jefrern Pyrerka to fifteen years in prison with hard labor for murdering a young woman named Ssavaney. His only defense was that an unusually harsh winter with heavy snowfall had caused famine and subsequent scurvy, resulting in the deaths of all his children. In response, he created a wooden image of the devil, smeared its lips with fat, and placed it on a small hill. He then tried to lasso one of his friends, Andrey Tabarey, and had already thrown a noose around his neck when Andrey’s resourceful wife intervened and saved her husband. Shortly after, he managed to strangle the girl and offer her as a sacrifice to his idol. In the Novgorod region, often called "the darkest Russia," it is common for locals to sacrifice some animal, usually a black cat, black rooster, or black dog, by burying it alive to prevent the spread of cholera. In the village of Kamenka, a peasant whose son had died from the disease buried eight live tomcats with his child's body. However, the sacrifice of animals is considered less effective than that of humans. Once, during a severe cholera outbreak, a group of peasants approached their priest and declared their intention to bury him alive to appease the plague demon. He avoided this dreadful fate by pretending to agree and asking for a few days to prepare for such a solemn event; in the meantime, he took steps to ensure his own safety and thwart the wishes of his devoted parishioners. In Okopovitchi, another village in the same province, the locals managed to lure an elderly woman named Lucia Manjkov into the cemetery, where they buried her alive in a grave containing victims of the epidemic and quickly covered her up. When they were put on trial, they claimed they had followed the advice of a military surgeon, Kosakovitch, who was then held responsible and sentenced to be caned by the executioner and to twelve years of hard labor in Siberia. These accounts of barbaric superstition are credited to the research of Augustus Löwenstimm, an associate jurist in the justice department in St. Petersburg, who gathered them from reliable, mostly official sources. He reported several similar incidents during cholera outbreaks in 1831, 1855, and 1872. In fact, it's quite difficult to eliminate such pagan customs as long as the clergy encourage the belief that animal sacrifices have expiatory and propitiatory powers. In some areas of the Vologda province, it is still customary on the day dedicated to the prophet Elias (July 20th in the Greek calendar) to offer bullocks, he-goats, or other four-legged animals within the church grounds. The animal is driven into the courtyard surrounding the church and slaughtered there; the meat is boiled in a large pot, with half kept by the peasants who made the sacrifice and the other half distributed among the priests and sacristans.[26]

The belief that the walls of dams, bridges, aqueducts, and buildings are rendered preternaturally strong by immuring a living human being within them still prevails in many countries of Christendom, and there is hardly an old castle in Europe that has not a legend of this sort connected with it. Usually a child is supposed to be selected for this purpose, and the roving bands of gypsies are popularly accused of furnishing the infant victims. The custom of depositing gold coins or other precious objects in the foundation stones of important public edifices is doubtless a survival of the ancient superstition.[27]

The belief that the walls of dams, bridges, aqueducts, and buildings are somehow made incredibly strong by sealing a living person within them still exists in many Christian countries, and almost every old castle in Europe has some legend related to this. Usually, a child is thought to be chosen for this purpose, and roaming bands of gypsies are often blamed for supplying the infant victims. The practice of placing gold coins or other valuable items in the foundation stones of significant public buildings is likely a remnant of this ancient superstition.[27]

Löwenstimm mentions a curious superstition of pagan origin still practiced in portions of Russia, and known as "korovya smertj" (cow-death) and "opachivaniye" (plowing roundabout). If pestilence or murrain prevails in a village, an old woman of repute as a seeress or fortune-teller enters the confines of the village at midnight and beats a pan. Thereupon all the women of the place assemble in haste, armed with divers domestic utensils—frying-pans, pokers, tongs, shovels, scythes, and cudgels. After shutting the cattle in their stalls, and warning the men not to leave their houses, a procession is formed. The seeress takes off her dress and pronounces a curse upon Death. She is then hitched to a plow, together with a bevy of virgins and a misshapen woman, if such a one can be found, and a continuous and closed furrow is drawn round the village three times. When the procession starts, the image of some saint suitable to the occasion, that of St. Blasius, for example, in the case of murrain, is borne in front of it; this is followed by the seeress, clad only in a shift, with disheveled hair and riding on a broomstick; after her come women and maidens drawing the plow, and behind them the rest of the crowd, shrieking and making a fearful din. They kill every animal they meet, and if a man is so unfortunate as to fall in with them he is mercilessly beaten, and usually put to death. In the eyes of these raging women he is not a human being, but Death himself in the form of a were-wolf, who seeks to cross their path and thus break the charm and destroy the healing virtue of the furrow. The ceremony varies in different places, and generally ends by burying alive a cat, cock, or dog. In some districts the whole population of the village, both men and women, take part in the procession, and are often attended by the clergy with sacred images and consecrated banners. During the prevalence of the pest in the province of Podolia, in 1738, the inhabitants of the village of Gummenez, while marching in procession through the fields, met Michael Matkovskij, a nobleman of a neighboring village, who was looking for his stray horses. The strange man, wandering about with an eager look and a bridle in his hand, was regarded as the incarnate pestilence, and was therefore seized and most brutally beaten and left lying half naked and half dead on the ground. At length he recovered his senses and succeeded with[210] great difficulty in reaching his home. No sooner was it known that he was still alive than the peasants rushed into his house, dragged him to their village, subjected him to terrible tortures, and finally burned him. A curious feature of these remedial rites is the mixture of paganism and Christianity which characterizes them; and it is an unquestionable though almost incredible fact that their atoning efficacy is often quite as firmly believed in by the village priests of the Russian Church as by the most ignorant members of their flock. In the autumn of 1894 some Russian peasants in the district of Kazan slew one of their own number as a sacrifice to the gods of the Votiaks, a Finnish race dwelling on the Volga, Viatka, and Kama Rivers. Even orthodox Christians of the Greek Church, although regarding these gods as devils, fear and seek to propitiate them, especially in times of public distress.

Löwenstimm talks about a strange superstition of pagan roots still practiced in parts of Russia, known as "korovya smertj" (cow-death) and "opachivaniye" (plowing roundabout). When a village is hit by disease or illness, a respected old woman who is seen as a seer or fortune-teller enters the village at midnight and bangs a pan. All the women in the village quickly gather, armed with various household items—frying pans, pokers, tongs, shovels, scythes, and clubs. After they secure the cattle in their stalls and tell the men to stay indoors, they form a procession. The seeress removes her dress and curses Death. She is then hitched to a plow, along with a group of virgins and a deformed woman, if one can be found, and they plow a continuous furrow around the village three times. At the start of the procession, an image of a saint relevant to the situation, such as St. Blasius during an outbreak, is carried at the front; then comes the seeress, dressed only in a shift, her hair unkempt and riding a broomstick; followed by women and girls pulling the plow, with the rest of the crowd behind them screaming and making a terrible noise. They kill any animal they encounter, and if a man happens to cross their path, he is brutally beaten and typically killed. To these furious women, he’s not seen as a human but as Death himself in the shape of a werewolf, trying to disrupt their ritual and undermine the power of the plowed furrow. The ceremony differs in various locations and usually concludes with a cat, rooster, or dog being buried alive. In some areas, the entire village, both men and women, participates in the procession, often led by clergy carrying sacred images and consecrated banners. During a plague outbreak in Podolia in 1738, the villagers of Gummenez, while marching through the fields, encountered Michael Matkovskij, a nobleman from a nearby village looking for his lost horses. This stranger, wandering around with a bridle in hand and an eager expression, was seen as the personification of the plague, so he was seized, brutally beaten, and left half-naked and nearly dead on the ground. Eventually, he regained his senses and managed, with great effort, to make it home. Once word got out that he was still alive, the peasants stormed into his house, dragged him back to their village, tortured him, and ultimately burned him. A fascinating aspect of these rituals is the blend of paganism and Christianity they embody; it's a striking yet almost unbelievable fact that both village priests of the Russian Church and their least informed followers often firmly believe in their effectiveness. In the autumn of 1894, some Russian peasants in the Kazan district killed one of their own as a sacrifice to the gods of the Votiaks, a Finnish group living along the Volga, Viatka, and Kama Rivers. Even orthodox Christians from the Greek Church, while viewing these gods as devils, still fear and try to appease them, especially during times of public crisis.

Still more widely diffused is the practice of infanticide as the sequence of superstition. The belief that dwarfs or gnomes, dwelling in the inner parts of the earth, carry off beautiful newborn babes and leave their own deformed offspring in their stead is not confined to any one people, but is current alike in Germanic, Celtic, Romanic, and Slavic countries, and causes a misshapen child to be looked upon with suspicion and subjected to cruel tortures and even killed. The supposed changeling is often severely beaten with juniper rods and the scourging attended with incantations, so as to compel the wicked fairies to reclaim their deformed bantling and restore the stolen child. If the castigation proves ineffective, more summary measures are frequently taken, and the supposititious suckling is thrown out of the window on a dunghill or immersed in boiling water. In 1877, in the city of New York, an Irish immigrant and his wife burned their child to death under the delusion that they were ridding themselves of a changeling. Cases of this kind are quite common in Ireland, where the victims are sometimes adults.[28] Not long since Magoney, an Irish peasant, had a sickly child, which the most careful nurture failed to restore to health and strength. The parents, therefore, became convinced that a changeling had been imposed upon them, and when the boy was four years old they resolved to have recourse to boiling water, in which he was kept, notwithstanding his shrieks and protestations that he was not an elf, but their own Johnny Magoney, until death released him from his torments.

The practice of infanticide, driven by superstition, is still widespread. The belief that dwarfs or gnomes living underground take beautiful newborns and leave their own deformed babies in their place is not limited to one culture; it exists in Germanic, Celtic, Romance, and Slavic societies. This leads to deformed children being viewed with suspicion and subjected to cruel treatment or even killed. The supposed changeling is often severely beaten with juniper rods, accompanied by incantations meant to force the wicked fairies to return their deformed child and give back the stolen baby. If this punishment doesn’t work, harsher actions are often taken, such as throwing the alleged changeling out the window onto a dung pile or immersing it in boiling water. In 1877, in New York City, an Irish immigrant and his wife burned their child to death, believing they were getting rid of a changeling. Such cases occur frequently in Ireland, where sometimes adults are the victims. Not long ago, Magoney, an Irish peasant, had a sickly child that no amount of care could heal. The parents became convinced that a changeling had been placed with them, and when the boy turned four, they decided to use boiling water. They held him in the water, ignoring his screams and protests that he was not an elf, but their own Johnny Magoney, until death finally freed him from his suffering.

Wilhelm Mannhardt, the celebrated writer on folklore, states that when, in 1850, he was in Löblau, a village of West Prussia, he saw a man brutally maltreating a boy on the street. On inquiry he [211] found that the lad had done nothing worthy of blame, but that his only fault was an exceptionally large head. This cranial peculiarity, offensively conspicuous in what seems to have been a narrow-headed family, was reason enough for the parents to disown their offspring, and to treat him as the counterfeit of a child foisted in by the fairies. At Hadersleben, a considerable market town of North Silesia, the wife of a farmer, in 1883, gave birth to a puny infant, which the parents at once assumed to be a changeling. In order to defeat the evil designs of the elves and to compel the restoration of their own child, they held the newborn over a bed of live coals on the hearth until it was covered with blisters and died in intense agony. In East Prussia, the Mazurs, a Polish race, whose only notable contribution to modern civilization and the gayety of nations is the mazurka, take precautionary measures by placing a book (usually the Bible, although any book will do) under the head of the newborn babe, so as to prevent the devil from spiriting it away and substituting for it one of his own hellish brood, thus unwittingly furnishing a marvelous illustration of the beneficent influence of the printing press and the magic power of literature. The Estonian inhabitants of the island of Oesel in Livonia refrain from kindling a fire in the house while the rite of baptism is being celebrated, lest the light of the flames should render it easier for Satan surreptitiously to exchange an imp for the infant. After the sacred ceremony has been performed there is supposed to be no danger of such a substitution.

Wilhelm Mannhardt, the well-known writer on folklore, says that when he was in Löblau, a village in West Prussia, in 1850, he witnessed a man brutally abusing a boy in the street. Upon asking about it, he found out that the boy hadn’t done anything wrong; his only fault was having an unusually large head. This striking feature, very obvious in what seemed to be a narrow-headed family, was enough for the parents to disown their child and treat him like a fake child left by fairies. In 1883, in Hadersleben, a significant market town in North Silesia, a farmer’s wife gave birth to a tiny baby, which the parents immediately believed to be a changeling. To thwart the elves’ evil intentions and to get their real child back, they held the newborn over a bed of live coals on the hearth until it was covered in blisters and died in severe pain. In East Prussia, the Mazurs, a Polish group, protect against this by placing a book (usually the Bible, but any book will do) under the newborn’s head to keep the devil from snatching it away and replacing it with one of his hellish kids, which unwittingly highlights the positive impact of the printing press and the magical power of literature. The Estonians on the island of Oesel in Livonia avoid lighting a fire in the house during the baptism ceremony, fearing that the flames’ light would make it easier for Satan to secretly swap an imp for the baby. After the sacred ritual is completed, it’s believed that there’s no longer any risk of such a replacement.

One of the most incredible instances of this extremely silly and surprisingly persistent superstition occurred in 1871 at Biskunizy, a village of Prussian Posen, where a laborer, named Bekker, had by industry and frugality gradually acquired a competence and been able to buy a house of his own, in which he led a happy domestic life with his wife and five children, of whom he was very fond. After fourteen years of unbroken felicity the wife's elder sister, Marianne Chernyāk, came from Poland to pay them a visit. This woman was a crackbrained devotee, who spent half her time in going to mass and the other half in backbiting her neighbors. She also claimed that she could detect at once whether a person is in league with Satan, and could cast out devils. The villagers came to look upon her as a witch, and avoided all association with her, especially as her aberrations manifested themselves in exceedingly malevolent and mischievous forms. Unfortunately, she acquired complete ascendency over her younger sister, who accepted her absurd pretensions as real. On November 19, 1871, Marianne, after returning from confession, went to bed, but at midnight Mrs. Bekker, who slept with her youngest child, a boy about a year old, was awakened by a fearful shriek and lit the lamp. Thereupon the sister rushed[212] into the room, crying: "The demons have stolen your child and put a changeling in your bed: beat him, beat him, if you wish to have your child again!" Under the influence of this suggestion, which seemed to be almost hypnotic in its character, the bewildered mother began to beat the boy. The aunt now seized him and swung him to and fro, as if she would fling him out of the window, at the same time calling out to Satan: "There! you have him; take your brat!" She then gave him back to his mother with the words: "Throw him to the ground, drub him, beat him to death; otherwise you will never recover your child." This advice was followed, and the boy severely strapped with a heavy girdle as he lay on the floor. Meanwhile Bekker, hearing the noise, got up and at first tried to intervene for the protection of his son, but was easily convinced by his wife that she was doing the right thing, and persuaded to aid her in discomfiting the devil by beating the boy with a juniper stick. The process of exorcism, thus renewed with increased vigor, soon proved fatal. At this juncture, as the son of the aunt, a lad of five years, threw himself down with loud lamentations beside the dead body of his little cousin, his mother cried out: "Beat him; he is not my child! Why should we spare him? We shall get other children!" Thereupon he, too, was maltreated in the same manner until he expired. The aunt then declared that the devil had crept into the stovepipe, and went to work to demolish the stove, but, when she was prevented from doing so, fled into the garden, where she was found the next morning by the school-teacher. By this time Bekker and his wife seem to have come to their senses, and were sitting by the corpses of the murdered children, weeping and praying, as the neighbors entered the house. The trial, which took place at Ostrov in January, 1872, led to the introduction of conflicting expert testimony concerning the mental soundness of the accused, and the matter was finally referred to a commission of psychiaters in Berlin, who decided that Bekker and his wife were not suffering from mental disease, and therefore not irresponsible, but that the aunt was subject to periodical insanity to such a degree as not to be accountable for her actions. Curiously enough, the jurors remained uninfluenced by this testimony, and pronounced her guilty of the crime laid to her charge, and in accordance with this verdict the court sentenced her to three years' imprisonment with hard labor. The jurors even went so far as to declare that she herself did not believe in the existence of elf children or satanic changelings, but made use of this popular superstition for her own selfish purposes, and that she guilefully denounced her own boy as an imp in order to get rid of him. In this verdict, or rather in the considerations urged in support of it, it is easy to perceive the effects of strong local prejudice against the[213] accused, who had the reputation of being a lazy, malicious, and crafty person, and was therefore denied the extenuation of honest self-deception. Indeed, in such cases it is always more or less difficult to determine where sincere delusion ceases and conscious swindling begins. Just at this point the annals of superstition present many puzzling problems, the solution of which is of special interest as well as of great practical importance not only to the psychologist and psychiater, but also to the legislator and jurisprudent, who have to do with the enactment and administration of criminal laws.

One of the most astonishing examples of this really silly and oddly persistent superstition happened in 1871 in Biskunizy, a village in Prussian Posen. A laborer named Bekker, through hard work and frugality, had managed to build a decent life for himself and was able to buy a house where he lived happily with his wife and their five children, whom he loved dearly. After fourteen years of uninterrupted happiness, the wife's older sister, Marianne Chernyāk, came from Poland to visit them. This woman was a bit eccentric and spent half her time going to church and the other half gossiping about her neighbors. She also claimed she could immediately tell if someone was in league with Satan and could cast out demons. The villagers started to see her as a witch and avoided her company, especially since her odd behavior often turned malicious and troublesome. Unfortunately, she gained complete control over her younger sister, who believed in her ridiculous claims. On November 19, 1871, after returning from confession, Marianne went to bed, but at midnight, Mrs. Bekker, who was sleeping with her youngest child, a one-year-old boy, was awakened by a terrifying scream and turned on the lamp. Then, her sister rushed into the room, shouting, “The demons have taken your child and put a changeling in your bed: beat him, beat him, if you want your child back!” Under this almost hypnotic suggestion, the confused mother started beating the boy. The aunt then grabbed him and swung him back and forth, as if she planned to throw him out the window, while yelling at Satan: “Take him! He’s your brat!” She then handed him back to his mother, saying, “Throw him on the ground, hit him, beat him to death; otherwise you’ll never get your child back.” This advice was followed, and the boy was severely beaten with a heavy belt while lying on the floor. Meanwhile, Bekker, hearing the commotion, got up and initially attempted to protect his son, but his wife easily convinced him that what she was doing was right and persuaded him to help her drive out the devil by hitting the boy with a juniper stick. This renewed exorcism, done with increased intensity, soon became fatal. At that moment, the aunt's five-year-old son threw himself down, crying beside his dead cousin, prompting his mother to shout: “Beat him; he’s not my child! Why should we spare him? We can have more children!” So, he was also mistreated in the same way until he died. The aunt then claimed that the devil had crawled into the stovepipe and started to tear apart the stove, but when she was stopped from doing that, she fled into the garden, where the schoolteacher found her the next morning. By this time, Bekker and his wife seemed to have come to their senses and were sitting next to the bodies of their murdered children, crying and praying as the neighbors entered the house. The trial, which took place in Ostrov in January 1872, introduced conflicting expert testimonies about the mental stability of the accused. Eventually, the case was referred to a commission of psychiatrists in Berlin, which determined that Bekker and his wife were not mentally ill, and therefore responsible for their actions, while the aunt was deemed to suffer from periodic insanity to the extent that she was not accountable for her behavior. Interestingly, the jurors were not swayed by this testimony and found her guilty of the charges against her. According to the verdict, the court sentenced her to three years in prison with hard labor. The jurors even claimed that she did not actually believe in elf children or devilish changelings but used this common superstition for her own selfish ends, wrongfully accusing her own child of being a demon to get rid of him. In this verdict, or rather in the reasoning that supported it, you can easily see the influence of local biases against the accused, who had a reputation for being lazy, malicious, and crafty, and therefore was denied the benefit of any honest self-deception. Indeed, in such cases, it is always somewhat difficult to determine where sincere delusion ends and conscious fraud begins. This point raises many puzzling issues in the history of superstition, the resolution of which is especially interesting and practically significant not only for psychologists and psychiatrists but also for lawmakers and legal professionals dealing with the creation and enforcement of criminal laws.

In the penal codes of the most civilized nations the agency of superstition as a factor in the promotion of crime is almost wholly ignored, and, as this was not the case in former times, the omission would seem to assume that the general diffusion of knowledge in our enlightened age had rendered all such specifications obsolete and superfluous. Only in the Russian penal code, especially in the sections Ulosheniye and Ustav on felonies and frauds, as cited by Löwenstimm, do we find a distinct recognition and designation of various forms of superstition as incentives to crime. Thus, in paragraph 1469 of the first of these sections, the murder of "monstrous births or misshapen sucklings" as changelings is expressly mentioned, and the penalty prescribed; and in other clauses of the code punishments are imposed for the desecration of graves and mutilation of corpses, in order to procure talismans or to prevent the dead from revisiting the earth as vampires, and for various offenses emanating from the belief in sorcery and diabolical possession. The practice of opening graves and mutilating dead bodies is quite common, and arises in general from the notion that persons who die impenitent and without extreme unction, including suicides and victims to delirium tremens, apoplexy, and other forms of sudden death, as well as schismatics, sorcerers, and witches, come forth from their graves and wander about as vampires, sucking the blood of individuals during sleep and inflicting misery upon entire communities by producing drought, famine, and pestilence. The means employed to prevent this dangerous metamorphosis, or at least to compel the vampire to remain in the grave, differ in different countries. In Russia the deceased is buried with his face downward, and an ashen stake driven through his back, while in Poland and East Prussia the corpse is wrapped up in a fish net and covered with poppies, owing, doubtless, to the soporific qualities of this plant. Preventive measures of this kind are often taken with the consent and co-operation of the clergy and local authorities. Thus, in 1849, at Mariensee, near Dantzig, in West Prussia, a peasant's wife came to the Catholic priest of the parish and complained that an old woman named Welm, recently[214] deceased, appeared in her house and beat and otherwise tormented her child. The priest seems to have accepted the truth of her statement, since he ordered the corpse to be disinterred, decapitated, reburied at a cross-road, and covered with poppies. In 1851, during the prevalence of cholera in Ukraine, in the governmental province of Kiev, the peasants of Possady attributed the epidemic to a deceased sacristan and his wife, who were supposed to roam about at night as vampires and kill people by sucking their blood. In order to stay the ravages of the scourge the corpses of this couple were exhumed, their heads cut off and burned, and ashen stakes driven through their backs into the ground. In 1892 a peasant woman in the Russian province of Kovno hanged herself in a wood near the village of Somenishki. The priest refused her Christian burial because she had committed suicide, and was therefore given over to the devil. In order that she might rest quietly in her grave and not be changed into a vampire, her sons severed her head from her body and laid it at her feet. In thus refusing to perform religious funeral rites the priest obeyed the canons of the church and also the laws of the Russian Empire. Until quite recently a corner of unconsecrated ground next to the wall of the Russian cemetery was reserved as a sort of carrion pit for the corpses of self-murderers, and it is expressly prescribed in the Svod Sakonov[29] that they "shall be dragged to such place of infamy by the knacker, and there covered with earth." This treatment of a felo-de-se by the ecclesiastical and civil authorities directly fosters popular superstition by tending to confirm the notion that there is something uncanny, eldritch, demoniacal, and preternaturally malignant inherent in his mortal remains, a notion still further strengthened by a most unjust paragraph (1472) in the Russian code, which declares the last will and testament of a suicide to have no legal validity. Drought, too, as well as pestilence, is ascribed to the evil agency of vampires, which "milk the clouds," and hinder the falling of the dew. In 1887 the South Russian province of Cherson began to suffer from drought soon after a peasant had hanged himself in the village of Ivanovka, the inhabitants of which, assuming a causative connection between the aridity and the self-homicide, poured water on the grave while uttering the following words: "I sprinkle, I pour; may God send a shower, bring on a little rainfall, and relieve us from misery!" As this invocation failed to produce the desired effect, the body was taken up and inhumed again in a gorge outside of the village. In some districts the corpse is disinterred, beaten on the head, and drenched with water poured through a sieve; in others it is burned.

In the laws of most developed countries, the role of superstition in encouraging crime is largely overlooked, unlike in the past. This omission seems to suggest that the widespread knowledge in our modern age has made such details unnecessary. The only exception is found in the Russian penal code, particularly in the sections Ulosheniye and Ustav related to felonies and frauds, as referenced by Löwenstimm. Here, we see a clear acknowledgment of various types of superstition as motivators for crime. For instance, paragraph 1469 in the first section explicitly mentions the murder of "monstrous births or deformed infants" as changelings, with penalties outlined for these acts. Other parts of the code impose punishments for desecrating graves and mutilating corpses to obtain talismans or prevent the dead from returning as vampires, as well as for crimes stemming from beliefs in witchcraft and demonic possession. The practice of digging up graves and mutilating bodies is quite common, generally driven by the belief that individuals who die unrepentant or without extreme unction—including suicides and victims of delirium tremens, apoplexy, and other sudden deaths, along with schismatics, sorcerers, and witches—emerge from their graves and wander around as vampires, draining people's blood while they sleep and causing widespread suffering through drought, famine, and disease. The methods used to prevent this dangerous transformation, or at least to keep the vampire in its grave, vary by country. In Russia, the body is buried face down with an ash stake driven through its back, while in Poland and East Prussia, the corpse is wrapped in a fishnet and covered with poppies, likely due to the sedative properties of the plant. Such preventive measures are often taken with the agreement and support of clergy and local authorities. For example, in 1849, in Mariensee near Dantzig in West Prussia, a peasant's wife approached the local Catholic priest, claiming that an old woman named Welm, who had recently died, was tormenting her child. The priest seemingly accepted her claim, as he ordered the body to be exhumed, decapitated, reburied at a crossroads, and covered with poppies. In 1851, during a cholera outbreak in Ukraine's Kiev province, villagers in Possady blamed the sickness on a dead sacristan and his wife, believing they roamed at night as vampires and preyed on people. To stop the epidemic, they dug up the couple's bodies, severed their heads, burned them, and drove stakes through their backs into the ground. In 1892, a peasant woman in Kovno, Russia, hanged herself in a forest near Somenishki. The priest denied her a Christian burial because she committed suicide and was thus considered possessed by the devil. To ensure she wouldn't turn into a vampire, her sons cut off her head and placed it at her feet. By refusing religious funeral rites, the priest adhered to church rules and the laws of the Russian Empire. Until recently, a section of unconsecrated ground beside the wall of Russian cemeteries was allocated as a sort of graveyard for suicides, where it was mandated in the Svod Sakonov that they "shall be dragged to such place of infamy by the knacker, and there covered with earth." This treatment of individuals who took their own lives by both religious and civil authorities supports widespread superstition, reinforcing the idea that something unnatural and malevolent resides in their remains. This belief is further bolstered by an unjust clause (1472) in the Russian code that states the will of a suicide has no legal power. Vampires are also blamed for droughts and diseases, which they supposedly "milk from the clouds" and prevent from falling to the ground. In 1887, the southern Russian province of Cherson experienced a drought shortly after a peasant hanged himself in the village of Ivanovka. The villagers, linking the dry conditions to the suicide, poured water on the grave while pleading for rain, saying: "I sprinkle, I pour; may God send a shower, bring on a little rainfall, and relieve us from misery!" When this plea failed, the body was dug up and reburied in a gorge outside the village. In some areas, the corpse is exhumed, hit on the head, and soaked with water poured through a sieve; in others, it is cremated.

The records of the criminal courts in West Prussia during the last half century contain numerous instances of the violation of graves from superstitious motives. Thus in March, 1896, a peasant died in the village of Penkuhl; soon afterward his son was taken ill of a lingering disease, which the remedies prescribed by the country doctor failed to relieve. It did not take long for the "wise women" of the village to convince him that his father was a "nine-killer," and would soon draw after him into the grave nine of his next of kin. The sole means of depriving him of this fatal power would be to disinter him and sever his head from his body. In accordance with this advice the young man dug up the corpse by night and decapitated it with a spade. In this case the accused, if tried in court, might honestly declare that he acted in self-defense; indeed, he might plead in justification of his conduct that he thereby preserved not only his own life, but also the lives of eight of his nearest and dearest relations, and that he should be commended rather than condemned for what he had done. It is the possibility and sincerity of this plea that render it so difficult to deal with such offenses judicially and justly. Here is needed what Tennyson calls

The criminal court records in West Prussia over the last fifty years show many cases of grave violations driven by superstition. For example, in March 1896, a peasant died in the village of Penkuhl; shortly after, his son fell ill with a lingering illness that the local doctor’s remedies couldn’t cure. It didn’t take long for the village "wise women" to convince him that his father was a "nine-killer," meant to drag nine of his relatives into the grave with him. The only way to stop this fatal power was to dig up the body and sever its head from its body. Following this advice, the young man exhumed the corpse at night and decapitated it with a spade. In this situation, if he were tried in court, he could honestly claim self-defense; he might even argue that he saved not just his own life, but also the lives of eight of his closest relatives, and that he should be praised, not punished, for his actions. The possibility and sincerity of this defense make it challenging to address such crimes fairly in the judicial system. Here is needed what Tennyson calls

"The smart choice of a bright
Sharp intellect, to separate Error due to crime.

Quite different, however, from a moral point of view, is the opening of graves in quest of medicaments, and especially of talismans, which are supposed to bring good luck to the possessor or to enable him to practice sorcery and to commit crime with impunity. In ancient times, and even in the middle ages, physicians sometimes prescribed parts of the human body as medicine, and in Franconia, North Bavaria, a peasant now occasionally enters an apothecary's shop and asks for "Armensünderfett," poor sinner's fat, obtained from the bodies of executed malefactors and prized as a powerful specific. The culprit was tried first for murder and then for lard, and thus made doubly conducive to the safety and sanitation of the community. Formerly many persons went diligently to public executions for the purpose of procuring a piece of the criminal as a healing salve, but since the hangman or headsman has generally ceased to perform his fearful functions in the presence of a promiscuous crowd, such loathsome remedies for disease are sought in churchyards.

However, from a moral perspective, digging up graves in search of medicines, especially talismans believed to bring good fortune or enable someone to practice sorcery and commit crimes without punishment, is quite different. In ancient times, and even during the Middle Ages, doctors sometimes prescribed human body parts as medicine. For instance, in Franconia, North Bavaria, a peasant might still go into a pharmacy and ask for "Armensünderfett," or poor sinner's fat, sourced from the bodies of executed criminals and valued as a strong remedy. The accused was tried first for murder and then for the fat, thus contributing doubly to the safety and cleanliness of the community. In the past, many people would eagerly attend public executions to obtain a piece of the criminal for healing purposes. However, since executioners have mostly stopped carrying out their grim tasks in front of large crowds, these repulsive remedies for illness are now sought in graveyards.

In May, 1865, a Polish peasant in Wyssokopiz, near Warsaw, discovered that the grave of his recently deceased wife had been opened and the corpse mutilated. Information was given to the police, and a shepherd's pipe, found in the churchyard, led to the[216] detection of the culprit in the person of the communal shepherd, a man twenty-six years old, who on examination confessed that he, with the aid of two accomplices, had committed the disgustful deed. His object, he said, was to procure a tooth and the liver of a dead person. He intended to pulverize the tooth and after mixing it with snuff to give it to his brother-in-law in order to poison him. On perceiving, however, that the body was that of a woman, he did not take the tooth, because it would have no power to kill a man; but he cut out the liver for the purpose of burying it in a field where the sheep were pastured, and thus causing the death of the entire flock in case he should be superseded by another shepherd, which he feared might happen. All three were condemned to hard labor in Siberia.

In May 1865, a Polish farmer in Wyssokopiz, near Warsaw, discovered that his recently deceased wife's grave had been disturbed and her body mutilated. He reported this to the police, and a shepherd's pipe found in the cemetery led to the[216] arrest of the culprit, the communal shepherd, a 26-year-old man. Upon interrogation, he confessed that he, with the help of two accomplices, had carried out the gruesome act. He claimed his goal was to obtain a tooth and the liver of a dead person. He planned to grind the tooth and mix it with snuff to poison his brother-in-law. However, when he realized the body was that of a woman, he decided not to take the tooth since it wouldn’t kill a man; instead, he removed the liver with the intent to bury it in a pasture to kill the entire flock if he were replaced as shepherd, which he feared. All three were sentenced to hard labor in Siberia.

It is a quite prevalent notion that if any part of a corpse is concealed in a house, the inmates will have the corresponding bodily organs affected by disease and gradually paralyzed. A drastic example of this superstition occurred in May, 1875, at Schwetz, a provincial town of West Prussia, where a woman named Albertine Mayevski became the mother of a male child, which died soon after its birth. The father, to whom she was betrothed, refused to marry her, and to punish him for this breach of promise she disinterred the body of her babe, cut off its right hand at the wrist and the genitals, and hid them in the chimney of the house of her faithless lover, hoping thereby to cause the hand, with which he had pledged his vow, to wither away, and to render him impotent. All this she freely confessed when brought to trial, and was sentenced to two months' imprisonment. But such relics of the tomb are used, on the principle of similia similibus, not only for inflicting injury, but also for bringing luck. Thus members of the "light-fingered craft" carry with them the finger of a corpse in order to enhance their skill, success, and safety in thievery; if the finger belonged to an adroit thief or a condemned criminal its talismanic virtue is all the greater. It is also believed that a purse in which a finger joint is kept will contain an inexhaustible supply of money. The finger of a murdered man is greatly prized by burglars because it is supposed to possess a magic power in opening locks. The records of criminal courts prove that these absurd notions are generally entertained by common malefactors in East Prussia, Thuringia, Silesia, Bohemia, and Poland. A candle made of fat obtained from the human body is very frequently used by thieves on account of its supposed soporific power, since with such a taper, known in Germany as Diebslicht or Schlummerlicht (sloom-light in provincial English), they are confident of being able to throw all the inmates of the house into a deep sleep, and thus rummage the rooms at will and with perfect impunity. The[217] danger of detection is also forestalled by laying a dead man's hand on a window sill; and in order to make assurance doubly sure, both preservatives are usually employed. Hence the proverbial saying, "He sleeps as though a dead hand had been carried round him." The desire to procure material for such candles often leads to the commission of crime. An Austrian jurist, Dr. Gross, in his manual for inquisitorial judges (Handbuch für Untersuchungsrichter), and the folklorists Mannhardt and Jakushkin, give numerous instances of this kind, and there is no doubt that the many mysterious murders and ghastly mutilations, especially of women and children, so horrifying to the public and puzzling to the police, are due to the same cause. In most cases the prosecuting attorneys and judges are unable to discover the real motives of such bloody and brutal deeds because they are ignorant of the popular superstitions in which they have their origin, and, for lack of any better explanation, attribute them to mere brutishness, wantonness, homicidal mania, and other vague and unintelligible impulses, whereas in reality they spring from a supremely selfish but exceedingly definite purpose, are perpetrated deliberately, and with the normal exercise of the mental faculties, and can not be mitigated even by the extenuating plea of sudden passion. Crimes of this sort are of common occurrence not only in the semi-barbarous provinces of Russia, but also in Austria and Germany, justly reckoned among the most civilized countries of Christendom. On January 1, 1865, the house of a man named Peck, near Elbing in West Prussia, was entered during the absence of the family by a burglar, Gottfried Dallian, who killed the maid-servant, Catharina Zernickel, and ransacked the premises in search of money and other objects of value. Before carrying off his spoils he cut a large piece of flesh out of the body of the murdered girl in order to make candles for his protection on future occasions of this sort. The talismanic light, which he kept in a tin tube, did not prevent him from being caught in the act of committing another burglary about six weeks later. During the trial, which resulted in his condemnation to death, he confessed that he had eaten some of the maid-servant's flesh in order to appease his conscience. This disgusting method of alleviating the "compunctious visitings of Nature" would seem to confirm the suggestion of a writer in the Russkiya Wjedomosti (Russian News, 1888, No. 359) that the thieves' candle is a survival of primitive cannibalism, distinct traces of which he also discovers in a Russian folk song which runs as follows: "I bake a cake out of the hands and feet, out of the silly head I form a goblet, out of the eyes I cast drinking glasses, out of the blood I brew an intoxicating beer, and out of the fat I mold a candle." It is certainly very queer to find such stuff constituting the theme of popular song within the[218] confines of Christian civilization at the present day, a grewsome stuff more suitable as the staple of Othello's tales

It is a common belief that if any part of a corpse is hidden in a house, the people living there will suffer from illness and eventually become paralyzed. A drastic example of this superstition happened in May 1875 in Schwetz, a small town in West Prussia, where a woman named Albertine Mayevski gave birth to a boy who died shortly after. The father, to whom she was engaged, refused to marry her, and to get back at him for breaking his promise, she dug up her baby’s body, cut off its right hand at the wrist and the genitals, and hid them in the chimney of her unfaithful lover’s house, hoping to cause the hand, with which he had made his vow, to wither and to make him impotent. She openly confessed this when brought to trial and was sentenced to two months in jail. However, such body parts are used, based on the principle of similia similibus, not only to inflict harm but also to bring good luck. For example, members of the "light-fingered craft" carry a corpse's finger to improve their skill, success, and safety in stealing; if the finger belonged to a skilled thief or a condemned criminal, it is even more powerful. It is also believed that a purse containing a finger joint will always have money in it. Burglars particularly value fingers from murdered people because they are thought to have magical abilities for picking locks. Records from criminal courts show that these bizarre beliefs are commonly held by thieves in East Prussia, Thuringia, Silesia, Bohemia, and Poland. Thieves often use candles made from human fat due to their supposed ability to induce sleep, as they believe that by using such a candle, known in Germany as Diebslicht or Schlummerlicht (sloom-light in provincial English), they can put everyone in the house into a deep sleep and steal without being noticed. To avoid getting caught, they also place a dead man's hand on a window sill; usually, both practices are used together. Hence, the saying, "He sleeps as though a dead hand had been carried around him." The desire to obtain materials for these candles often leads to criminal acts. An Austrian legal expert, Dr. Gross, in his guide for investigating judges (Handbuch für Untersuchungsrichter), along with folklorists Mannhardt and Jakushkin, provide numerous examples of such cases, and it's clear that many mysterious murders and horrific mutilations, especially of women and children, which shock the public and baffle the police, are linked to these beliefs. In most instances, prosecutors and judges struggle to understand the true motives behind these brutal acts because they are unaware of the popular superstitions that inspire them, and without better explanations, they attribute these crimes to mere savagery, capriciousness, homicidal impulses, and other vague and incomprehensible motivations, when in fact, these crimes stem from a deeply selfish but very clear intention, are committed intentionally, and with the normal exercise of mental faculties, and cannot be excused even by claims of sudden passion. Such crimes occur not only in the semi-barbaric regions of Russia but also in Austria and Germany, which are considered some of the most civilized countries in the Christian world. On January 1, 1865, a man named Peck's home near Elbing in West Prussia was broken into while the family was away by a burglar named Gottfried Dallian, who killed the maid, Catharina Zernickel, and searched the place for money and valuables. Before leaving with his loot, he cut off a large piece of flesh from the murdered girl's body to make candles for his protection during future burglaries. The talismanic light, which he kept in a tin tube, did not prevent him from being caught while committing another burglary about six weeks later. During the trial, which ended with his death sentence, he confessed to eating some of the maid's flesh to ease his conscience. This repulsive way of alleviating the "guilty feelings of nature" seems to support a suggestion made by a writer in the Russkiya Wjedomosti (Russian News, 1888, No. 359) that the thieves' candle is a remnant of primitive cannibalism, which he believes is also reflected in a Russian folk song that goes: "I bake a cake out of the hands and feet, out of the foolish head I form a goblet, out of the eyes I make drinking glasses, out of the blood I brew intoxicating beer, and out of the fat I mold a candle." It is indeed quite strange to find such themes present in popular songs within the confines of modern Christian civilization, content more appropriate for the eerie tales of Othello.

"—of the cannibals who eat one another,
The anthropophagi, and men whose heads
Do grow under their shoulders.

In the burglary just mentioned the murder and mutilation of the maid were incidental to the robbery, and probably an afterthought, but there are on record numerous instances of persons being waylaid and killed for the sole purpose of making candles out of their adipose tissue. No longer ago than November 15, 1896, two peasants were convicted of this crime in Korotoyak, a city on the Don in South Russia. Their victim was a boy twelve years of age, whom they strangled and eviscerated in order to make candles from the fat of the caul and entrails. It would be superfluous and tedious to cite additional examples of this outrageous offense against humanity and common sense, for, like the devils that entered into the Gadarene swine, their name is Legion.

In the burglary mentioned earlier, the murder and mutilation of the maid were just side effects of the robbery, likely an afterthought. However, there are many recorded cases of people being attacked and killed solely to make candles from their body fat. Just on November 15, 1896, two peasants were convicted of this crime in Korotoyak, a city on the Don River in South Russia. Their victim was a twelve-year-old boy, whom they strangled and disemboweled to make candles from the fat of the caul and intestines. It's unnecessary and tiresome to list more examples of this horrific crime against humanity and common sense, because, like the demons that possessed the Gadarene swine, there are many.

A still more disgusting and dangerous superstition is the notion that supernatural powers are acquired by eating the heart of an unborn babe of the male sex, just as a savage imagines that by eating the heart of a brave foe he can become indued with his valor. The modern European cannibal believes that by eating nine hearts, or parts of them, he can make himself invisible and even fly through the air. He can thus commit crime without detection, and defy all efforts to arrest or imprison him, releasing himself with ease from fetters, and passing through stone walls. This horrible practice has been known for ages, and is still by no means uncommon. In the first half of the fifteenth century the notorious marshal of France, Gilles de Laval, Baron of Rayz, is said to have murdered in his castle near Nantes one hundred and fifty women in order to get possession of unborn babes. He was then supposed to have committed these atrocities from lewd motives, and was also accused of worshiping Satan. A mixed commission of civilians and ecclesiastics, appointed to examine into the matter, found him guilty and condemned him to be strangled and burned on October 25, 1440. In 1429, when he was thirty-three years of age, he had fought the English at Orleans by the side of Joan of Arc, and it was probably the desire to acquire supernatural powers in emulation of the maid that led him to perpetrate a succession of inhuman butcheries extending over a period of fourteen years, the real object of which seems to have been imperfectly understood by the tribunal which sentenced him to death.[30] Löwenstimm cites several instances of this crime. Thus, in [219] 1577 a man was put to the rack in Bamberg, North Bavaria, for murdering and disemboweling three pregnant women. In the seventeenth century a band of robbers, whose chief was known as "King Daniel," created intense consternation among the inhabitants of Ermeland in East Prussia. For a long time these freebooters roved and spoiled with impunity, but were finally arrested and executed. They confessed that they had killed fourteen women, but, as the unborn infants proved to be female, their hearts were devoid of talismanic virtue. Indeed, they attributed their capture to this unfortunate and unforseeable circumstance, and posed as persons worthy of commiseration on account of their ill luck. One of the strangest features of this cruel and incredible superstition is its persistency in an age of superior enlightenment. Dr. Gross records two cases of comparatively recent occurrence in the very centers of modern civilization: one in 1879, near Hamburg, where a woman, great with child, was killed and cut open by a Swede named Andersen, and another of like character ten years later in Simmering, near Vienna.

A more disgusting and dangerous superstition is the belief that supernatural powers can be gained by eating the heart of an unborn male baby, just like a savage thinks that by eating the heart of a brave enemy, he can gain his courage. The modern European cannibal believes that by consuming nine hearts or parts of them, he can become invisible and even fly. This way, he can commit crimes without being caught and evade all efforts to apprehend or imprison him, easily escaping from handcuffs and moving through solid walls. This horrific practice has been around for ages and is still not uncommon. In the first half of the fifteenth century, the infamous French marshal, Gilles de Laval, Baron of Rayz, allegedly murdered one hundred fifty women in his castle near Nantes to obtain unborn babies. It was said that he committed these acts out of lewd motivations and was also accused of worshipping Satan. A mixed commission of civilians and church officials appointed to investigate found him guilty and sentenced him to be strangled and burned on October 25, 1440. In 1429, at the age of thirty-three, he fought the English at Orleans alongside Joan of Arc, and it’s likely that his desire to gain supernatural powers, inspired by her, led him to carry out a series of inhumane murders over fourteen years, the true nature of which seems to have been poorly understood by the court that sentenced him to death.[30] Löwenstimm cites several examples of this crime. For instance, in [219] 1577, a man was tortured in Bamberg, North Bavaria, for murdering and disemboweling three pregnant women. In the seventeenth century, a gang of robbers, led by a man known as "King Daniel," caused great fear among the residents of Ermeland in East Prussia. For a long time, these thieves roamed free and plundered without consequence until they were finally caught and executed. They admitted to killing fourteen women, but since the unborn babies were female, their hearts lacked any magical properties. In fact, they claimed their capture was due to this unfortunate and unforeseen detail and acted as if they deserved sympathy for their bad luck. One of the most bizarre aspects of this cruel and unbelievable superstition is its persistence in an era of greater knowledge. Dr. Gross records two relatively recent instances right in the heart of modern civilization: one in 1879, near Hamburg, where a pregnant woman was killed and cut open by a Swede named Andersen, and another similar case ten years later in Simmering, near Vienna.

An ordeal very commonly practiced in the middle ages to determine the guilt or innocence of any one accused of theft was to give him a piece of consecrated cheese, which, if he were guilty, it would be impossible for him to swallow. Hence arose the popular phrase, "It sticks in his throat." Thus Macbeth says, after he had "done the deed":

An ordeal that was commonly practiced in the Middle Ages to determine someone's guilt or innocence in theft was to offer them a piece of consecrated cheese, which, if they were guilty, they would be unable to swallow. This is how the popular phrase, "It sticks in his throat," came about. Thus, Macbeth says, after he had "done the deed":

"But why couldn't I say amen?
I needed a blessing the most, and amen. Stuck in my throat.

Wuttke states that this custom still prevails in the Prussian province of Brandenburg, where a person suspected of larceny is made to swallow a piece of Dutch cheese on which certain magical letters and signs are scratched. His failure to do so is regarded as conclusive evidence of his guilt. Various other means of making inquest for the detection of crime are in vogue, some of them merely silly, and others mercilessly savage. Thus a mirror is laid for three successive nights in the grave of a dead man. It is placed there in the name of God, and taken out in the name of Satan. It is believed that by looking into such a mirror the person of the thief can be clearly seen. A bull belonging to a peasant not far from Perm, on the Kama, died suddenly. The owner declared that the death of the animal was due to witchcraft, and demanded that all the women of the village should be made to creep through a horse collar in order to discover the hag who had wrought the mischief. This plan was approved by his neighbors, and, although their wives protested against being subjected to the degrading and for corpulent women extremely[220] difficult and even dangerous test, they finally submitted to it rather than remain under the suspicion of practicing the black art. This performance, which is unquestionably a relic of Uralian-Finnish paganism, took place on March 16, 1896. The following instance may serve as an example of the ruthless barbarity to which such delusions often lead: In December, 1874, a South Russian peasant in the vicinity of Cherson missed one hundred rubles and went to a weird woman in order to learn what had become of them. She consulted her cards and declared that the money had been stolen by a certain Marfa Artynov. The man was greatly astonished at this response, because the accused was a highly respected teacher of young children, and had the reputation of being thoroughly honest. Nevertheless, his credulity got the better of his common sense, and with the aid of his neighbors he seized Marfa and carried her to the churchyard, where he bound her to a cross and began to torture her, beating her with a knout, suspending her by her hands, and twisting and tearing her neck and tongue with a pincers. To her cries and entreaties her tormentors coolly replied, "If you are really innocent, what we are doing can cause you no pain!" Many of the persons who offer their services as clairvoyants and seers to a credulous and confiding public, and whose utterances are accepted as oracles, are professional swindlers. Thus a young lady moving in the higher circles of society in Vienna had a valuable set of diamonds stolen. By the advice of a trusted lackey she consulted a woman, who was reputed to have the power of divination, and who informed her, contrary to the strong suspicions of the police, that the theft had been committed, not by any member of the household, but by a stranger. The young lady was so firmly persuaded of the truth of this statement that, although urged by the court to prosecute the lackey, she refused to do so. The evidence against him, however, was so strong that he was finally tried and condemned. The pythoness, who had endeavored to exculpate him, proved to be his aunt and accomplice.

Wuttke notes that this practice still exists in the Prussian province of Brandenburg, where someone suspected of theft has to swallow a piece of Dutch cheese with specific magical letters and symbols scratched on it. If they fail to swallow it, that’s taken as definitive proof of their guilt. There are various other methods used for detecting crimes, some are simply ridiculous, while others are brutally savage. For example, a mirror is placed for three consecutive nights in the grave of a deceased person. It is put there in the name of God and taken out in the name of Satan. It’s believed that if you look into that mirror, you can clearly see the thief's image. A bull belonging to a farmer near Perm on the Kama suddenly died. The owner claimed that the bull’s death was due to witchcraft and demanded that all the women in the village crawl through a horse collar to find out who was behind the mischief. His neighbors supported this plan, and even though their wives protested against the humiliating and extremely difficult— not to mention dangerous—test, they ultimately went along with it rather than face suspicion of practicing witchcraft. This event, which certainly reflects Uralian-Finnish paganism, occurred on March 16, 1896. A further example of the brutal barbarity these delusions can lead to happened in December 1874, when a South Russian farmer near Cherson noticed he was missing one hundred rubles and consulted a strange woman to find out what happened to them. She read her cards and claimed that the money had been stolen by a woman named Marfa Artynov. The man was shocked by this revelation because Marfa was a highly respected teacher of young children, known for her honesty. Yet, his gullibility overwhelmed his common sense, and with the help of his neighbors, he captured Marfa and took her to the churchyard, where they tied her to a cross and began to torture her—beating her with a knout, hanging her by her hands, and twisting and pulling her neck and tongue with pliers. Despite her screams and pleas, her tormentors coldly responded, "If you’re truly innocent, this shouldn’t hurt you!" Many of those who present themselves as clairvoyants and seers to a naïve and trusting public, whose words are treated as prophetic, are actually con artists. For instance, a young woman from the upper echelons of society in Vienna had a valuable set of diamonds stolen. Following the advice of a trusted servant, she consulted a woman thought to possess divination skills, who misinformed her—contrary to the police's strong suspicions—that the theft was committed by a stranger, not by someone in the household. The young woman became so convinced of this claim that, even when encouraged by the court to pursue legal action against the servant, she refused. However, the evidence against him was so compelling that he was eventually tried and convicted. The fortune teller, who tried to absolve him, turned out to be his aunt and accomplice.

A queer phase of superstition, which in many parts of Europe seriously interferes with the administration of justice, manifests itself in the various means of avoiding the evil consequences of perjury, at least so far as to soothe the pangs of conscience and to avert the divine anger. This immunity is secured in some provinces of Austria by carrying on one's person a bit of consecrated wafer, a piece of bone from the skeleton of a child, or the eyes of a hoopoe, holding a ducat or seven small pebbles in the mouth, pressing the left hand firmly against the side, crooking the second finger, or pulling off a button from the trousers while in the act of swearing, or spitting immediately after taking an oath. The Russian province of Viatka[221] is settled by a people of Finnish origin, the majority of whom have been baptized and call themselves orthodox Christians, while the remainder are still nominally as well as really heathen. When they take an oath it is administered by a pope or priest, and a Russian jurist, J. W. Mjeshtshaninov, describes the method employed by them to forswear themselves with safety. When called upon to take an oath, the witness raises the right hand with the index finger extended; he then lays the left hand in the palm of the right hand with the index finger pointing downward, and by a crisscross combination of the other fingers, which probably works as a charm, the whole body is converted into a conductor, so that the oath entering through the index finger of the right hand passes through the index finger of the left hand into the earth like an electric current. The witness thus feels himself discharged of the binding influence of the oath, and may give false testimony without laying perjury upon his soul.

A strange phase of superstition, which disrupts the justice system in many parts of Europe, shows up in the various ways people try to avoid the negative consequences of lying under oath, at least to ease their conscience and avoid divine wrath. In some regions of Austria, this immunity is achieved by carrying a piece of consecrated wafer, a bone from a child's skeleton, or the eyes of a hoopoe, holding a ducat or seven small pebbles in their mouth, pressing the left hand firmly against the side, bending the second finger, removing a button from their trousers while swearing, or spitting right after taking an oath. The Russian province of Viatka[221] is inhabited by people of Finnish descent, most of whom are baptized and identify as orthodox Christians, while the rest remain nominally and genuinely pagan. When they take an oath, it's done by a pope or priest, and a Russian jurist, J. W. Mjeshtshaninov, describes their method for swearing falsely without consequences. When asked to take an oath, the witness raises their right hand with the index finger pointed; they then lay their left hand in the palm of their right hand with the index finger pointing down. By intertwining the other fingers in a specific way, which likely serves as a charm, the whole body becomes a conductor, allowing the oath to pass through the right index finger, through the left index finger, and into the ground like an electric current. The witness feels free from the obligation of the oath and can provide false testimony without feeling guilty of perjury.

The superstitions which encourage ignorant people to commit crime are handed down from generation to generation, and have in most cases a purely local character. In other words, the charms and sorceries and other magical arts employed to produce the same results differ in different places, and unless the judges are familiar with these various forms of superstition they will be unable to understand the exact nature of the offenses with which they have to deal, and their efforts to detect and punish violations of the law will be greatly hampered and sometimes completely thwarted.

The superstitions that lead uneducated people to commit crimes are passed down through generations and usually have a local flavor. In other words, the charms, spells, and other magical practices used to achieve the same outcomes vary by location. If judges aren't familiar with these different forms of superstition, they won't fully grasp the nature of the offenses they need to handle, making their efforts to identify and punish lawbreakers much more difficult, and sometimes completely ineffective.

The subject here discussed has not only a speculative interest for ethnographers and students of folklore, but also, as already indicated, a practical importance for criminal lawyers and courts of justice in the Old World and even in the United States. The tide of immigration that has recently set in from the east and south of Europe has brought to our shores an immense number of persons strongly infected with the delusions which we have attempted to describe. Acts which would seem at first sight to have their origin in impulses of cruelty and brutality are found on closer investigation to be due to crass ignorance and credulity, and, although the ultimate motives are usually utterly selfish, there are rare instances in which the perpetrators of such deeds are thoroughly disinterested and altruistic, and do the most revolting things, not from greed of gain, but solely for the public good. In cases of this kind the most effective preventive of wrongdoing is not judicial punishment but intellectual enlightenment.

The topic we're discussing here is not only interesting for ethnographers and folklore students, but it also has practical importance for criminal lawyers and courts in Europe and even in the United States. The recent wave of immigration from Eastern and Southern Europe has brought a huge number of people who are strongly influenced by the delusions we've tried to describe. Actions that might initially seem to stem from cruelty and brutality, upon closer examination, often result from ignorance and gullibility. While the ultimate motives are generally quite selfish, there are rare cases where the people committing these acts are genuinely selfless and altruistic, doing the most shocking things not out of greed but purely for the public good. In such cases, the best way to prevent wrongdoing isn't through legal punishment but rather through education and awareness.


A GEOLOGICAL ROMANCE.

By J. A. UDDEN.

By J. A. UDDEN.

A western naturalist once said that the geology of Kansas was monotonous. In one sense this remark is certainly justifiable, and the same may be said about the geology of some of the other States on the Western plains. The American continent is built on a comprehensive plan, and many of its formations can be followed for hundreds of miles without presenting much variation in general appearance. Occasionally, however, some feature of special interest crops out from the serene uniformity, and the very nature of its surroundings then makes it appear all the more striking. Minor accidents in the development of our extensive terranes sometimes stand out in bold relief, as it were, from the monotonous background. In their isolation from other details such features occasionally display past events with unusual clearness.

A naturalist from the West once remarked that Kansas's geology is pretty dull. In one way, this statement is definitely valid, and the same can be said for the geology of some other states on the Western plains. The American continent is structured according to a comprehensive plan, and many of its geological formations can stretch for hundreds of miles without showing much change in overall appearance. However, now and then, a feature of particular interest breaks through the calm uniformity, making it stand out even more because of its surroundings. Small events in the formation of our extensive landscapes can sometimes pop out dramatically against the boring backdrop. In their isolation from other details, these features can sometimes reveal past events with remarkable clarity.

Such is the case with a deposit of volcanic ash which has been discovered in the superficial strata on the plains.[31] It lies scattered in great quantities in a number of localities in Nebraska, Kansas, South Dakota, and Colorado, having been found in no less than twenty counties in the first-mentioned State. It measures from two to fourteen feet in thickness in different localities, and is mostly found imbedded in yellow marl and clay, and has a somewhat striking appearance in the field, due to its snowy whiteness and to the sharpness of the plane which separates it from the underlying darker materials. Many years before its real nature was known it had been noticed and described by Western geologists. Prof. O. T. St. John saw it many years ago in Kansas, where it appeared as "an exceedingly fine, pure white siliceous material," forming a separate layer of several feet, and set off by a sharp line from the buff clay-marl below. His words describe its usual appearance in other places (see Fig. 1).

There’s a deposit of volcanic ash that’s been found in the top layers of the plains. [31] It’s scattered in large amounts across several areas in Nebraska, Kansas, South Dakota, and Colorado, showing up in at least twenty counties in Nebraska alone. The thickness varies from two to fourteen feet depending on the location, and it’s mostly found mixed in with yellow marl and clay. It stands out in the field due to its bright whiteness and the clear contrast with the darker materials underneath. Long before its true nature was understood, Western geologists had already noticed and described it. Prof. O. T. St. John observed it years ago in Kansas, where it looked like "an extremely fine, pure white siliceous material," forming a distinct layer several feet thick and separated by a sharp line from the buff clay-marl below. His description fits its usual appearance in other areas (see Fig. 1).

Fig. 1.Stratified Volcanic Ash near Meade, Kansas.
(From the University Geological Survey of Kansas, vol. ii.)

Fig. 1.Layered volcanic ash near Meade, Kansas.
(From the University Geological Survey of Kansas, vol. ii.)

This ash occurs in several outcrops in McPherson County in the central part of Kansas, where the writer had an opportunity to study it somewhat in detail a few years ago. Some of the features of the dust at this place reveal the conditions under which it was formed with considerable distinctness, and the volcanic episode which produced it appears strikingly different from the dull monotony [223] of the ordinary geological work recorded in the terranes of the plains. It may be said to consist of angular flakes of pumice, averaging one sixteenth of a millimetre in diameter, and having a thickness of about one three-hundredth of a millimetre. The most common shape of the flakes is that of a triangle, or rather of a spherical triangle, since the flakes are apt to be concave on one side and convex on the other. In the microscope they sometimes appear like splinters of tiny bubbles of glass, and this is really what they are (Fig. 2).

This ash is found in several outcrops in McPherson County in central Kansas, where the author had the chance to study it in detail a few years ago. Some features of the dust at this site clearly reveal the conditions under which it was formed, and the volcanic event that created it seems strikingly different from the usual geological processes recorded in the plains. It consists of angular flakes of pumice, averaging one-sixteenth of a millimeter in diameter and about one three-hundredth of a millimeter thick. The most common shape of the flakes is triangular, or more accurately, a spherical triangle, since the flakes tend to be concave on one side and convex on the other. Under the microscope, they sometimes look like splinters of tiny glass bubbles, which is exactly what they are (Fig. 2).

Fig. 2.Flakes of Volcanic Ash.
Magnified about 100 diameters.
A, flake with a branching rib; B, fragment of a broken hollow sphere of glass; C, fragment with drawn-out tubular vesicles; D and E, plain fragments of broken pumice bubbles. (From American Geologist, April, 1893.)

Fig. 2.Volcanic Ash Flakes.
Magnified about 100 times.
A, flake with a branching rib; B, piece of a shattered hollow glass sphere; C, piece with elongated tubular vesicles; D and E, plain pieces of broken pumice bubbles. (From American Geologist, April, 1893.)

The explosive eruptions which give rise to showers of this kind of ash, or dust, are due to fusion and superheating of subterranean masses of rocks charged with more or less moisture. A part of this moisture escapes in the form of steam at the time of an eruption. But the viscidity of the ejected material prevents much of the steam from passing off, and such of the lava as cools most rapidly retains a certain quantity in solution, as it were. Obsidian is a rock which has been made in this way. It often contains much of the original water, which will cause it to swell up into a stony froth when fused.

The explosive eruptions that produce showers of this type of ash or dust are caused by the melting and intense heating of underground rock masses that contain varying amounts of moisture. Some of this moisture turns into steam during an eruption. However, the thickness of the ejected material limits how much steam can escape, and the lava that cools the quickest holds onto a certain amount of moisture, so to speak. Obsidian is one such rock formed in this manner. It often retains a lot of the original water, which can cause it to bubble up into a stony froth when melted.

This volcanic dust has the same property. If one small particle of it be heated on a piece of platinum foil it is seen to swell up into[224] a compound bubble of glass (Fig. 3). It is evident that this is due to the expansive force of the heated included moisture, to which the viscid half-molten glass readily yields. At the time of the eruption which produced this dust, subterranean heat was applied to the moisture-bearing rock until this was superheated to such an extent that the weight of the overlying material was insufficient to hold the water from expanding into steam. Then there was a tremendous explosion, and the molten magma was thrown up with such a force that it was shattered into minute droplets, in the same way as water does when it is thrown forcibly into the air. Being thus released from pressure, the steam inside of each little particle of the heated glass caused it to swell out into a tiny bubble. As this kept on expanding it was cooled, the thin glass wall of the bubble congealed, and finally burst from the pressure of the steam within. This is the reason why the little dust particles are thin, mostly triangular, and often slightly concave flakes with sharp angles. Sometimes the angles appear rounded, as if the fragments had been viscid enough to creep a little after the bubble burst. The study of one single little grain of dust, barely visible to the naked eye, thus makes clear the nature of a catastrophe which must have shaken a whole mountain, and which left its traces over a quarter of a continent.

This volcanic dust has the same property. If one small particle of it is heated on a piece of platinum foil, it swells up into[224] a compound bubble of glass (Fig. 3). It’s clear that this happens because of the expanding force of the heated moisture trapped inside, which the gooey half-melted glass readily accommodates. During the eruption that produced this dust, underground heat was applied to the moisture-rich rock until it became so hot that the weight of the material above it couldn’t stop the water from turning into steam. Then there was a massive explosion, and the molten magma was ejected with such force that it shattered into tiny droplets, just like water does when it’s forcefully thrown into the air. Released from pressure, the steam inside each small particle of heated glass caused it to swell into a tiny bubble. As this continued to expand and cool, the thin glass wall of the bubble solidified and eventually burst due to the pressure from the steam inside. This explains why the tiny dust particles are thin, mostly triangular, and often slightly concave flakes with sharp angles. Sometimes the angles look rounded, as if the fragments had been gooey enough to flow a little after the bubble burst. Studying just one tiny grain of dust, barely visible to the naked eye, reveals the nature of a disaster that must have rocked an entire mountain and left its marks over a quarter of a continent.

Fig. 3.A Particle of Volcanic Ash swelled up by Fusion.
Magnified 100 diameters.

Fig. 3.A particle of volcanic ash enlarged by fusion.
Magnified 100 times.

That the dust was produced in this way is quite evident from other circumstances. If a handful from the dust of this place be thrown into water and gently stirred, it nearly all will settle after a while. But some rather large particles remain floating on the surface. If these are removed and examined under the microscope, they are seen to be hollow spheres (Fig. 2, b). These are some of the original bubbles that never burst, either because they contained too little steam or else because the steam was cooled before it had time to break the walls open. It is evident that not every droplet of the molten magma would form a single sphere, but that many also would swell up into a compound frothlike mass of pumice. A few such pieces may sometimes be observed in the deposit at this place, and that many more were made and broken is evident from the great number[225] of glass fragments which have riblike edges on their flat sides (Fig. 3, a).

It's clear from other circumstances that the dust was produced this way. If you take a handful of this dust and toss it into water, gently stirring it, most of it will settle down after a while. However, some larger particles will stay floating on the surface. If you remove these and look at them under a microscope, you'll see they are hollow spheres (Fig. 2, b). These are some of the original bubbles that never burst, either because they had too little steam or because the steam cooled down before it could break the walls open. It's apparent that not every droplet of the molten magma formed a single sphere; many would swell into a compound frothy mass of pumice. Occasionally, you can see a few such pieces in the deposit here, and it's clear that many more were created and broken, as seen in the large number[225] of glass fragments that have ribbed edges on their flat sides (Fig. 3, a).

The nature of the force which caused the eruption may thus be understood from the study of one little grain of the dust, but much more extended observations are needed in order to make out the place where the great convulsion took place. It will, perhaps, never be known what particular volcanic vent was the source of this ash. Different deposits may have come from different places. But it seems possible that it all came from the same eruption. There can be no doubt that the volcanic disturbances occurred to the west of the Great Plains. No recent extinct volcanoes are found in any other direction. This conclusion is corroborated by the fact that the dust is finer in eastern localities and coarser nearer the Rocky Mountains. In a bed near Golden, in Colorado, seventy-three per cent, by weight, of the dust consists of particles measuring from one fourth to one thirty-second of a millimetre, while some from Orleans, in Nebraska, contains seventy-four per cent of particles measuring from one sixteenth to one sixty-fourth of a millimetre in diameter. Still finer material comes from the bluffs of the Missouri River near Omaha. Evidently the coarser particles would settle first, and if the dust is finer toward the east, it must be because the wind which brought it blew from the west. Most likely the eruption occurred somewhere in Colorado or in New Mexico.

The nature of the force that caused the eruption can be understood by studying just a tiny grain of the dust, but we need much more extensive observations to determine where the massive upheaval occurred. It might never be known which specific volcanic vent was the source of this ash. Different deposits could have come from different locations. However, it seems possible that all of it originated from the same eruption. There’s no doubt that the volcanic activity happened to the west of the Great Plains. No recently extinct volcanoes are found in any other direction. This conclusion is supported by the fact that the dust is finer in the eastern areas and coarser closer to the Rocky Mountains. In a layer near Golden, Colorado, seventy-three percent of the dust by weight consists of particles measuring from one-fourth to one-thirty-second of a millimeter, while some from Orleans, Nebraska, contains seventy-four percent of particles measuring from one-sixteenth to one-sixty-fourth of a millimeter in diameter. Even finer material comes from the bluffs of the Missouri River near Omaha. Clearly, the coarser particles would settle first, and if the dust is finer toward the east, it's because the wind that carried it blew from the west. Most likely, the eruption happened somewhere in Colorado or New Mexico.

It may be asked how it can be known that the dust was carried this long distance by the wind. May it not as well have been transported by water? The answer must be, in the first place, that showers of the same kind of material have been observed in connection with volcanic outbursts in other parts of the world. One such shower is known to have strewn the same kind of dust on the snow in Norway after a volcanic eruption in Iceland, and after the great explosion on Krakatoa, in 1883, such dust was carried by the wind several hundred miles, and scattered over the ocean. If this ash had been transported by water, it would not be found in such a pure state, but it would be mixed with other sediments. There would, no doubt, also be found coarser fragments of the volcanic products. On the contrary, it appears uniformly fine. No particles have been found which measure more than one millimetre in diameter, and less than one per cent of its weight consists of particles exceeding one eighth of a millimetre in diameter. In seven samples taken from different places the proportions of the different sizes of the grains were about as follows:

It might be asked how we know that the dust was carried such a long distance by the wind. Could it not have been transported by water instead? The answer starts with the fact that similar showers of the same material have been observed during volcanic eruptions in other places around the world. One such event is known to have spread this type of dust on the snow in Norway after a volcanic eruption in Iceland, and after the massive explosion of Krakatoa in 1883, this dust was blown by the wind several hundred miles and dispersed over the ocean. If this ash had been moved by water, it wouldn’t be found in such a pure state; it would be mixed with other sediments. There would likely also be larger fragments of volcanic material. Instead, it appears to be uniformly fine. No particles larger than one millimeter in diameter have been found, and less than one percent of its weight consists of particles larger than one-eighth of a millimeter. In seven samples taken from different locations, the proportions of the different sizes of the grains were about as follows:

Diameter of grains in millimetres12-1414-1818-116116-132132-164164-11281128-1256
Percentage of weight of each size0.10.119373291

Flaky particles of this size are easily carried along by a moderate wind. In some places it appears as if the dust were resting on an old land surface where no water could have been standing when it fell. There is really no room for doubt that it was carried several hundred miles by the wind. It must have darkened the sky at the time, and it must have settled slowly and quietly over the wide plains, covering extensive tracts with a white, snowlike mantle several feet in thickness. What a desolate landscape after such a shower! What a calamity for the brute inhabitants of the land!

Flaky particles of this size are easily carried by a moderate wind. In some areas, it looks like the dust settled on an old land surface where no water could have been present when it fell. There’s really no doubt that it traveled several hundred miles by the wind. It must have darkened the sky at the time and settled slowly and quietly over the vast plains, blanketing large areas with a white, snow-like layer several feet thick. What a desolate landscape after such a storm! What a disaster for the animals living there!

Fig. 4.Tracks in the Volcanic Dust, probably made by a Crawfish.
Reduced to 28 diameter.

Fig. 4.Tracks in the volcanic dust, probably made by a crawfish.
Reduced to 28 diameter.

Right here in McPherson County there was either a river or a lake at the time of the catastrophe. This is plainly indicated in several ways. In one place the dust rests on sand and clay, with imbedded shells of fresh-water clams. It is assorted in coarse and fine layers like a water sediment. Lowermost is a seam of very coarse grains. These must have settled promptly through the water, while the finer material was delayed. In another place it lies on higher ground, and here marks of sedges and other vegetation are seen extending up about a foot into the base of the deposit, from an underlying mucky clay. Bog manganese impregnates a thin layer just above the clay, indicating a marshy condition. Here also the material is somewhat sorted, but in a different way. It is ripple-bedded. The water was evidently shallow, if there was any water at all. A burrow like that of a crawfish extended down into the old clay bottom. On a slab of the volcanic ash itself some tracks appeared (Fig. 4). These were probably made by an individual of the same race in an effort to escape from the awful fate of being buried alive like the inhabitants of Herculaneum and Pompeii.

Right here in McPherson County, there was either a river or a lake at the time of the disaster. This is clearly shown in several ways. In one spot, the dust rests on sand and clay, with embedded shells of freshwater clams. It is arranged in coarse and fine layers like sediment from water. At the bottom is a layer of very coarse grains. These must have settled quickly through the water, while the finer material took longer. In another spot, it sits on higher ground, where marks of sedges and other plants extend up about a foot into the base of the deposit, coming from an underlying mucky clay. Bog manganese forms a thin layer just above the clay, indicating a marshy environment. Here, the material is somewhat sorted, but in a different way. It has ripple patterns. The water was clearly shallow, if there was any water at all. A burrow similar to that of a crawfish extended down into the old clay bottom. On a slab of volcanic ash itself, some tracks were visible (Fig. 4). These were likely made by someone trying to escape the terrible fate of being buried alive like the people of Herculaneum and Pompeii.

Fig. 5.Ripple Marks in the Volcanic Dust.
Reduced to ¼ diameter.

Fig. 5.Ripple Marks in the Volcanic Ash.
Reduced to ¼ diameter.

The shower must have lasted for a time of two or three days. I infer this from the nature of the wind changes, which are indicated by the ripples in the dust. These still lie in perfect preservation (Fig. 5), and may be studied by removing, inch by inch, the successive[227] layers from above downward, for it is evident that as the direction of the wind changed, the ripples were also turned. The deciphering of this record must be made backward. The bottom layers were deposited first, and the excavation must begin on top. Otherwise the record is as perfect as if it had been taken down by an instrument when the shower occurred. It may be only local in its significance, for it shows the direction of the wind at this particular place alone. The wind may have been somewhat deflected from the general direction by local topographic peculiarities, though these appear to have been of small importance. In any case, the old legend is quite interesting to read, being, I believe, the only geological record ever found of the passing of a cyclone over the United States.

The shower must have lasted for two or three days. I can tell this from the changes in the wind, which are shown by the ripples in the dust. These are still perfectly preserved (Fig. 5), and can be examined by removing the layers from top to bottom, inch by inch. It's clear that as the wind direction changed, the ripples were also altered. To understand this record, you have to look at it in reverse. The bottom layers were laid down first, so you need to start digging from the top. Otherwise, the record is as intact as if it had been recorded by an instrument when the shower happened. It may have only local significance, as it reflects the wind's direction in this particular spot alone. The wind may have been slightly deflected from the general direction due to local geographic features, though these seem to be of minor importance. In any case, the old legend is quite fascinating to read, as it’s, I believe, the only geological record ever found of a cyclone passing over the United States.

Fig. 6.Peculiar Elevations caused by a Current from the Southwest to the Northeast.
Reduced to ½ diameter.

Fig. 6.Unusual Elevations caused by a current moving from the Southwest to the Northeast.
Reduced to ½ diameter.

In the lowermost foot of the deposit no ripple marks can be seen. But there appear some marks of sedges and other vegetation, and these are inclined to the west, as if the plants had been bent by an east wind. Just above the height to which the imprints of the vegetation extend, ripple marks begin to appear, running on a northeast-southwest course. They were made by a southeast wind, for their northwest slopes are the steeper. A little above this height some peculiar small elevations appear on one of the bedding planes, and slightly raised ridges run for a short distance to the northeast from each elevation, vanishing in the same direction (Fig. 6). A southwesterly current was unmistakably obstructed by the little elevations, and left the small trails of dust in their lee. Six inches higher up the wind comes more from the south, and for the next foot the ripples continue to gradually turn still more in the same direction so as to at last record a due south wind. At this point it suddenly changed and[228] set in squarely from the west, for the ripples are turned north and south, with the steeper slopes to the east. This direction seems to have prevailed as long as the dust kept on falling. It appears to me that these successive changes are best explained as attendant upon the passage of a cyclone, or of what our daily weather maps call a "low area." Going by from west to east, on the north, it would at first cause an east wind. This would then gradually be turned to the south and then to the west. One such rotation of the wind generally lasts a day or two. The shower must then have kept on at least for the same length of time, if not longer (Fig. 7).

In the lowest part of the deposit, there are no ripple marks visible. However, there are some marks from sedges and other plants, which tilt to the west, as if they were bent by an east wind. Just above the level where the plant imprints stop, ripple marks start to appear, running in a northeast-southwest direction. These were created by a southeast wind, as their northwest slopes are the steeper ones. A little higher up, some unique small elevations show up on one of the bedding planes, with slightly raised ridges extending for a short distance to the northeast from each elevation, fading out in that direction (Fig. 6). A southwesterly current was clearly blocked by these small elevations, leaving behind trails of dust in their shadow. Six inches higher up, the wind shifts to come more from the south, and for the next foot, the ripples gradually adjust more in that same direction until they finally indicate a due south wind. At this point, there’s a sudden change, and it comes directly from the west, as the ripples are now oriented north and south, with the steeper slopes to the east. This direction seems to have remained as long as the dust continued to settle. It seems to me that these successive changes are best understood as happening during the passage of a cyclone or what our daily weather maps refer to as a "low area." If it's moving from west to east, in the north, it would first create an east wind. This would then gradually shift to the south and then to the west. Such a wind rotation typically lasts a day or two. The shower must have persisted for at least that long, if not longer (Fig. 7).

Fig. 7.Changes in the Wind as recorded by the Ripple Marks.

Fig. 7.Changes in the Wind as noted by the Ripple Marks.

There is reason to believe that this catastrophe occurred in summer. No crayfish would be out making tracks during the cold months, and the fossil vegetation could hardly have left such plain marks if it had been buried by the dust during the winter. The most conspicuous of these marks are some triangular and Y-shaped molds of the stems and leaves of sedges. Siliceous skeletons of chara and filamentous algæ were also found upon a close examination in some of these molds.

There’s good reason to think that this disaster happened in the summer. No crayfish would be out making tracks during the cold months, and the fossilized plants couldn’t have left such clear marks if they had been covered by dust in winter. The most noticeable of these marks are some triangular and Y-shaped impressions of the stems and leaves of sedges. Siliceous skeletons of chara and filamentous algae were also discovered upon closer inspection in some of these molds.

It is really difficult to appreciate the change such a shower must have produced in the appearance of the landscape, and the effect it must have had on animal and plant life. So far away from the volcanic source, the wind can not have laid down a layer of this dust several feet in thickness without scattering it far and wide all around. It must have covered tens of thousands of square miles. Just imagine, if you can, a whole State, clad in the verdure of summer, suddenly, in two or three days, covered over by a blanket of white volcanic ash! Many species of plants must have found it impossible to grow in such a soil. And what disaster it must have caused in the animal world! Grazing herds had their sustenance buried from their sight, and could save their lives only by traveling long distances in this loose dust. Many a creature must have had its lungs or its gills clogged with the glassy flakes floating in the water and in the air. The sudden disappearance of several mammal species near the beginning of the Quaternary age has been noted by paleontologists. Does it seem unlikely that an event like this, especially if repeated, may have hastened the extermination of some species of land animals? That many individuals must have perished there can be no doubt. Not very far away from that outcrop of the dust which I have described, one of the early settlers in this part of the State once made a deep well that penetrated the ash. Above the deposit, and some sixty feet below the surface of the prairie, he found what he described as[229] "an old bone yard." In digging other wells in this vicinity mammal bones have been taken up by the settlers from about the same horizon. It is to be regretted that, with one exception, none of these fossils have been preserved for study, for it is likely that they were the remains of animals which were killed in the dust shower.

It's hard to grasp how much a shower like that must have changed the look of the landscape and its impact on animals and plants. Even though it's far from the volcanic source, the wind couldn't have spread several feet of this dust without scattering it everywhere. It must have blanketed tens of thousands of square miles. Just try to imagine a whole state, usually lush and green in summer, suddenly covered in a thick layer of white volcanic ash in just a couple of days! Many plant species must have struggled to grow in such soil. And think about the disaster for animals! Grazing herds had their food buried from sight and could only survive by wandering long distances through that loose dust. Many creatures likely had their lungs or gills clogged with the glassy flakes floating in the air and water. Paleontologists have noted the sudden disappearance of several mammal species around the start of the Quaternary period. Doesn't it seem plausible that an event like this, especially if it happened more than once, could have sped up the extinction of some land animal species? There's no doubt that many individuals must have died there. Not far from the dust I just described, one of the early settlers in this region drilled a deep well that went through the ash. Above that deposit, about sixty feet below the surface of the prairie, he found what he called[229] "an old bone yard." When digging other wells nearby, settlers have uncovered mammal bones from about the same level. It's unfortunate that, with just one exception, none of these fossils have been preserved for study, as they likely belonged to animals that were killed in the dust shower.

In the absence of fossils definitely known to be connected with the ash, its exact age seems yet uncertain. In McPherson County it is underlaid by clay, gravel, and sand, which contain remains of the horse, of a megalonyx, and of bivalve mollusks of modern aspect. In the bluffs of the Missouri River near Omaha pockets of a similar ash rest on glacial clay under the loess. At the latter place it must belong to the Pleistocene age, and at the former it can not be older than the late Pleiocene. These two deposits may not belong to the same shower, but it appears, at any rate, that the volcanic disturbances which produced them occurred near the beginning of the Pleistocene age.

In the absence of fossils definitely linked to the ash, its exact age remains uncertain. In McPherson County, it sits on top of clay, gravel, and sand, which contain remains of horses, a megalonyx, and bivalve mollusks that look modern. In the bluffs of the Missouri River near Omaha, pockets of similar ash rest on glacial clay beneath the loess. In that location, it likely belongs to the Pleistocene age, while in McPherson County, it can't be older than the late Pliocene. These two deposits may not originate from the same event, but it does seem that the volcanic activity that created them occurred near the beginning of the Pleistocene age.

In comparison with the slow and even tenor of the routine of geological history, the event here sketched appears so unique and so striking that it may well be called a geological romance. Modern science has taught us that the geological forces are slow and largely uniform in their work, and that most of the earth's features must be explained without taking recourse to theories involving any violent revolutions or general terrestrial cataclysms. While the making of this dust is not any real exception to the law of uniformity, we are here reminded that Nature is quite independent in her ways, and that even in her sameness there is room for considerable diversity.

Compared to the slow and steady pace of geological history, the event described here seems so unique and remarkable that it can be called a geological romance. Modern science has shown us that geological forces operate slowly and mostly uniformly, and that most of the earth's features can be explained without resorting to theories of violent upheavals or widespread natural disasters. While the creation of this dust isn't a true exception to the law of uniformity, it reminds us that Nature has her own methods, and even within her consistency, there is plenty of room for significant diversity.


Mr. William Ogilvie, of the Topographical Survey of Canada, estimates that there are more than 3,200 miles of fair navigation in the system of the Yukon River, of which Canada owns nearly forty-two per cent. A remarkable feature of the river, with its Lewes branch, is that it drains the Peninsula of Alaska and nearly cuts it in two, starting as it does less than fourteen miles, "as the crow flies," from the waters of the Pacific Ocean, at the extreme head of the Lewes branch, whence it flows 2,100 miles into the same ocean, or Bering Sea, which is a part of it. The drainage basin of the river occupies about 388,000 square miles, of which Canada owns 149,000 square miles, or nearly half, but that half is claimed to be the most important. As for the origin of the name Yukon, the Indians along the middle stretches of the river all speak the same language, and call the river the Yukonah; in English, "the great river" or "the river." The Canadian Indians in the vicinity of Forty Mile call it "Thetuh," a name of which Mr. Ogilvie could not learn the meaning. The correct Indian name of the Klondike is Troandik, meaning Hammer Creek, and refers to the barriers the Indians used to erect across the mouth of the stream to catch salmon, by hammering sticks into the ground.

Mr. William Ogilvie from the Topographical Survey of Canada estimates there are over 3,200 miles of navigable waterways in the Yukon River system, with Canada owning nearly forty-two percent. A key feature of the river, along with its Lewes branch, is that it drains the Alaska Peninsula and nearly splits it in two, starting just under fourteen miles "as the crow flies" from the Pacific Ocean at the extreme head of the Lewes branch. From there, it flows 2,100 miles into the same ocean, including the Bering Sea. The river's drainage basin spans about 388,000 square miles, with Canada owning 149,000 square miles, or nearly half, which is believed to be the largest portion. As for the name Yukon, the Native Americans living along the middle sections of the river all speak the same language and call it the Yukonah; in English, this means "the great river" or simply "the river." The Canadian Indigenous people near Forty Mile refer to it as "Thetuh," but Mr. Ogilvie couldn’t determine the meaning of that name. The correct Indigenous name for the Klondike is Troandik, which means Hammer Creek, referring to the barriers the Indigenous people would set up at the mouth of the stream to catch salmon by hammering sticks into the ground.


THE SEASON OF THE YEAR.

By GRANT ALLEN.

By Grant Allen.

A year is, roughly speaking, the period which it takes the earth to perform one complete revolution round the sun. I say "roughly speaking" with due humility, having the fear of the expert ever before my eyes, because I know that if I do not sing small, that inconvenient person, the astronomical critic, will come down upon me at once like a wolf on the fold, with minute distinctions about the mean, the tropical, and the sidereal year; matters of immense importance at Greenwich Observatory, no doubt, but elsewhere of very little interest indeed, seeing that they differ from one another by so many minutes only. Let us leave the astronomers their own problems. The year with which I am going to deal humbly here is a much more commonplace, ordinary, and comprehensible year—the visible year of vegetation, of plant and animal life, of the four seasons; the year as roughly known to children and savages, and to the weeds, the flowers, the bees, and the squirrels.

A year is, roughly speaking, the time it takes for the Earth to make one complete trip around the sun. I say "roughly speaking" with all due respect, knowing that the expert could easily point out my oversights. If I don't keep it simple, that pesky astronomical critic will pounce on me like a wolf on sheep, bringing up details about the mean, tropical, and sidereal year—topics that are definitely important at Greenwich Observatory, but of very little interest elsewhere, since they only differ by a few minutes. Let’s leave the astronomers with their own issues. The year I’ll be discussing here is a much more ordinary, everyday one—the visible year of growth, of plants and animals, of the four seasons; the year as understood by children, simple people, and by the weeds, flowers, bees, and squirrels.

It has often struck me as curious that people took this complex concept of the year so much for granted—inquired so little into its origin and discovery. Yet it is by no means everywhere obvious. How did men first come to notice, in the tropics especially, that there was such a thing as the year at all? How did they first observe, save in our frozen north, any fixed sequence or order in the succession of Nature? How did they learn, even here, that spring would infallibly follow winter, and summer be succeeded in due course by autumn? And, to go a step farther back, how did the plants and animals, in all parts of the world alike, come originally to discover and adapt themselves to all these things? How did the bee know that she must "gather honey all the day from every opening flower," the summer through, in order to use it up as bodily fuel in winter? How did the plants learn when to blossom and produce seed? In one word, how did the seasons come to be automatically recognized?

It’s always seemed odd to me that people take the complex idea of a year for granted and don’t ask much about its origins and discovery. Yet, it’s not obvious everywhere. How did people first notice, especially in the tropics, that a year even existed? How did they first see, besides in our cold north, any consistent pattern or order in nature’s cycles? How did they figure out, even here, that spring would reliably follow winter and summer would eventually lead to autumn? And to dig even deeper, how did plants and animals all over the world originally come to discover and adapt to these changes? How did bees know they had to “gather honey all day from every blooming flower” all summer so they could use it as fuel in winter? How did plants learn when to bloom and produce seeds? In short, how did the seasons become something that was automatically recognized?

That they are automatically recognized, even by plants, quite apart from the stimulus of heat or cold, drought or rain, a single fact (out of many like it) will sufficiently prove. Trees brought from Australia to England, where the seasons are reversed, try for two or three years to put forth leaves and flowers in October or November—the southern spring. It takes them several autumns before they learn that the year has been turned upside down—that June is now summer and December winter. This shows that life moves in regular cycles, adapted to the seasons, but not directly dependent[231] upon them. The rhythm of the world has set up an organic rhythm which now spontaneously and automatically follows it.

That they are automatically recognized, even by plants, regardless of heat or cold, drought or rain, one fact (among many similar ones) proves this well. Trees taken from Australia to England, where the seasons are switched, attempt for two or three years to grow leaves and flowers in October or November—the southern spring. It takes them several autumns to realize that the year has been turned upside down—that June is now summer and December is winter. This indicates that life follows regular cycles, aligned with the seasons, but is not directly reliant[231] on them. The rhythm of the world has established an organic rhythm that now instinctively and automatically follows it.

At first sight, to the dweller in the temperate zone at the present day, the questions I have put above may seem needless, not to say childish. But that is perhaps because we have all too much the habit of taking it for granted that what is true here and now has also been true everywhere and always. A first visit to the tropics often enough rudely disturbs this uninquiring attitude of mind. For in the tropics, and especially in the equatorial region, there is no winter and no summer, no spring and no autumn. The world wags wearily through an unending display of monotonous greenery. As far as temperature goes, the year is pretty much alike in all its months. Yet not only do equatorial men recognize the existence of the year as a natural epoch quite as much as other men—not only do equatorial savages celebrate annual feasts, count ages by years, and perform certain rites in certain months only—but also animal and vegetable nature recognizes the year; trees have their month for blossoming and fruiting, birds their month for assuming the plumage of courtship, for nesting and hatching, almost as markedly as elsewhere. The recognition of the year both by man and by Nature is not therefore entirely dependent upon the difference of summer and winter, as such. We must go deeper, and I think, when we come to consider geological time, much deeper, if we wish to understand the true character of yearliness—a word which I venture here to coin to express this meaning.

At first glance, for someone living in a temperate zone today, the questions I’ve raised may seem unnecessary, if not a bit silly. But that’s probably because we often assume that what’s true here and now has always been true everywhere. A first trip to the tropics can quickly shake up this uncritical way of thinking. In the tropics, especially near the equator, there’s no winter or summer, no spring or autumn. The world moves through an endless display of monotonous greenery. When it comes to temperature, the year tends to be pretty much the same across all its months. Yet not only do equatorial people recognize the year as a natural cycle just like anyone else—not only do they celebrate annual feasts, count ages by years, and perform specific rituals during certain months—but also the animal and plant life acknowledges the year; trees have their time for blooming and bearing fruit, birds have their time to get their mating feathers, nest, and hatch, almost as distinctly as elsewhere. The recognition of the year by both humans and nature is not solely based on the differences between summer and winter. We need to look deeper, and I believe, when we consider geological time, much deeper, to understand the true concept of yearliness—a term I’m coining here to capture this idea.

Have you ever quite realized what the tropical year is like? Suppose you are living on or near the equator, then in December the sun is south of you and at its greatest distance away; you have, so to speak, a relative winter. But in March the sun is overhead; it is now full midsummer. By the end of June the sun has gone north, and is once more on a tropic; you have a second winter; not much of a winter, I admit, but still, a relative winter. By September he has returned overhead again, and you are enduring a second summer. In December he has once more retreated to the southern tropic (Capricorn), and it is comparative winter. Thus the equatorial year consists of four distinct seasons, in two of which the sun stands directly overhead, while in two he is at his northern or southern limit. I may add that the effect is always curious when, as you face the sun, you see that he is moving in his diurnal path, not from left to right ("the way of the sun," as we say), but from right to left (or "widdershins"). You are never till then aware how natural and inevitable has seemed the opposite direction: when you find it reversed the effect is surprising.

Have you ever really understood what a tropical year is like? If you live on or near the equator, in December the sun is to the south of you, at its farthest point away; you experience, so to speak, a relative winter. In March, the sun is directly overhead; it’s now full midsummer. By the end of June, the sun has moved north and is back on a tropic; you have a second winter; it may not be much of a winter, I agree, but it’s still a relative winter. By September, it’s overhead again, and you’re experiencing a second summer. In December, it retreats to the southern tropic (Capricorn), and it feels like a comparative winter. So, the equatorial year has four distinct seasons, with two of them having the sun directly overhead and two where it is at its northern or southern limit. I should mention that it’s always interesting when, as you face the sun, you see it moving in its daily path, not from left to right (the way we usually say the sun moves) but from right to left (or “widdershins”). You don’t realize how natural and expected the usual direction seems until you notice it reversed; the effect can be surprising.

Now, the distance to which the sun travels north or south of you,[232] if you live on the equator—I use ordinary terms instead of astronomical ones for simplicity's sake—is so comparatively small that within the tropics themselves you never notice much difference as to the amount of heat between one period of the year and another. In equatorial countries the day and night temperature is much the same all the year round: if the country be plain, it is always hot; if mountainous, like the district about Bogotá, it is "a perpetual spring"; one day is always much the same as the one that went before and the one that comes after it. Even on the actual tropics, again, the difference is too slight to make any marked change in the temperature; people living on the northern tropic (Cancer), for example, have the sun vertical to them on June 21st, and some forty-three degrees south of them on December 21st. Nevertheless, the sun is still as near them and as powerful as he is at Milan or Venice in the height of summer; and the consequence is that, as a matter of fact, the thermometer within the tropics and at sea level seldom descends below 75° or 80°, even at midnight in the relative winters. For the heating power of the sun depends, of course, upon the directness of his rays, and lessens with their obliquity; in Venice and Milan they are strong enough to make the ground very hot in July and August, though it has been cooled before by a northern winter; much more than in Jamaica or Madagascar, which have never been cooled, does the accumulated heat keep everything warm even when the sun is most oblique—and he never reaches the same obliquity as in an English summer. The ground is hot, the houses are hot, wood and stone are hot, and they have all been hot from time immemorial.

Now, the distance the sun travels north or south of you,[232] if you live on the equator—I use everyday language instead of astronomical terms for simplicity—is so relatively small that within the tropics you hardly notice any significant difference in heat from one time of year to another. In equatorial regions, the temperatures between day and night are pretty much the same all year long: if the area is flat, it’s always hot; if it’s mountainous, like around Bogotá, it feels like "a perpetual spring." Each day is pretty much like the one before and the one after. Even in the actual tropics, the temperature variation is so minor that it doesn’t create any noticeable changes; for instance, people living on the northern tropic (Cancer) have the sun directly overhead on June 21st and about forty-three degrees south of them on December 21st. Still, the sun is just as close to them and just as strong as it is in Milan or Venice during the height of summer; as a result, the thermometer in the tropics and at sea level rarely drops below 75° or 80°, even at midnight during the relative winters. The sun's heating power relies, of course, on the directness of its rays and diminishes as their angle becomes more oblique; in Venice and Milan, the rays are strong enough to make the ground very hot in July and August, even after being cooled by the northern winter. Much more so than in Jamaica or Madagascar, where temperatures never really cool down, the heat accumulates to keep everything warm—even when the sun is most oblique, which it never gets in an English summer. The ground is hot, the houses are hot, wood and stone are hot, and they have all been hot since ancient times.

Yet tropical and equatorial trees and plants have their definite seasons to flower and fruit, just the same as elsewhere. This seems surprising at first when one visits the tropics. You can not see why everything should not flower and fruit the whole year round. And yet, at one time pineapples are "in," at another mangoes. And these seasons differ in the northern and southern hemispheres; what is mango winter in the one being mango summer in the other. I do not say the seasons anywhere in the tropics differ markedly; still, they do differ; the tropical year is divided into times and months for agriculture just as much as any other. Thus there are regular dates in each hemisphere for planting, tending, and cutting the sugar cane. Now, what is the reason of these changes in vegetation, when temperature remains so constant? Why do not trees and shrubs of each kind flower up and down throughout the year irregularly—now one individual and now another? Why are there seasons for things at all in the tropics?

Yet tropical and equatorial trees and plants have their specific seasons for flowering and fruiting, just like everywhere else. This can seem surprising at first when you visit the tropics. You might wonder why everything doesn't bloom and bear fruit all year round. However, at certain times pineapples are "in," and at others, mangoes. These seasons differ between the northern and southern hemispheres; what is mango winter in one is mango summer in the other. I'm not saying that the seasons in the tropics differ dramatically; they do differ, and the tropical year is divided into times and months for agriculture just like anywhere else. There are specific dates in each hemisphere for planting, tending, and harvesting sugar cane. So, what causes these changes in vegetation when the temperature stays so consistent? Why don’t trees and shrubs of each type flower irregularly throughout the year—one at a time, then another? Why are there seasons for anything in the tropics at all?

The answer is, because the same causes which produce summer[233] and winter in temperate climate produce other changes of other sorts in the tropical region. The temperature, it is true, remains the same, or approximately the same; but the meteorological conditions vary. Even with ourselves, summer is not only hotter but also drier than winter; winter is marked by rain and snow as well as by lowered temperature. In the tropics, on the other hand, it is rather the summer or summers that are wet, for there is a certain moving zone of equatorial calms in which it practically keeps on raining always. But this zone is not fixed; it flits with the sun. When the sun goes northward for the northern summer the rainy zone goes with him; when he turns southward again the zone shifts after him. Thus places on or near the two tropics have one rainy season a year, while places on the equator have usually two. The intervening dry seasons are often very dry and parched, indeed; and where this is markedly the case, the rainy season acts just as spring does in the north, or as the inundation does in Egypt; it is the beginning of vegetation. The plants that were dry and dormant during the arid months wake up into fresh life; the branches put forth new leaves; the brown seeds germinate; the flowers appear; and in due time the fruit ripens. Everything in these cases depends upon the recurrence of the rainy season, just as everything in India depends upon the bursting of the monsoons, and everything in Egypt on the rising of the Nile. I have seen a dry plain in Jamaica bare and brown one day, and covered six or eight inches high with fresh green waving guinea-grass the day but one after. The rains had come meanwhile, and Nature had awaked with more than springlike awakening. In those hot climates everything grows by magic as soon as it gets the needed water.

The reason is that the same factors that create summer[233] and winter in temperate climates lead to different changes in tropical regions. While the temperature stays about the same, the weather conditions change. For us, summer is not only hotter but also drier than winter, which brings rain and snow along with colder temperatures. In tropical areas, it's typically the summer or summers that are rainy, as there’s a shifting zone of equatorial calm where it seems to rain constantly. However, this zone isn’t fixed; it moves with the sun. When the sun travels north during the northern summer, the rainy zone follows; when it moves south again, the zone shifts with it. Therefore, locations on or near the tropics usually have one rainy season a year, while places on the equator typically have two. The dry periods in between can be extremely dry, and where this happens, the rainy season functions similarly to spring in the north or the flooding in Egypt; it marks the start of new plant growth. The plants that were dry and dormant during the arid months spring back to life; branches grow new leaves; brown seeds start to germinate; flowers bloom; and eventually, the fruit matures. Everything in these situations relies on the arrival of the rainy season, just like everything in India depends on the arrival of the monsoons, and everything in Egypt relies on the Nile's rise. I’ve witnessed a dry, brown plain in Jamaica one day, and just a day later, it was covered six or eight inches high with vibrant, green guinea-grass. The rains had come in between, and nature had awakened with more than just a spring-like renewal. In those warm climates, everything grows like magic as soon as it receives the necessary water.

Indeed, we may say that in half the world the seasons, organically speaking—I mean, the seasons of plant and animal life—depend upon heat and cold, summer and winter, snow or sunshine; but in the other half they depend almost entirely upon drought and rainfall. Even as near home and as far north as Algeria, the summer is far too dry and dusty for agriculture; the autumn rains set in about October or November; they are immediately followed by the plowing; and the winter becomes for most purposes the practical summer. Fruits and vegetables are at their best in January and February; the fields are full of flowers up to March or April; in June, July, and August the country is an arid and weary desert. But the seasons for dates are almost reversed; they ripen in autumn. In Egypt again, where everything depends upon the inundation, the seasons are still more complicated; the inundation begins to subside in October; in Upper Egypt the winter season which follows is far the most important for agriculture, and crops sown as the water subsides[234] are reaped from four to seven months after. But in the Delta, rice, cotton, and indigo are sown in the spring (March or April) and harvested in October, November, and December. Here, irrigation and temperature come in as disturbing elements, for the Delta feels something of the cold of winter.

Indeed, we can say that in half the world, the seasons, in terms of plant and animal life, depend on heat and cold, summer and winter, snow or sunshine; but in the other half, they rely almost entirely on drought and rainfall. Even as close to home and as far north as Algeria, summer is too dry and dusty for farming; the autumn rains start around October or November, immediately followed by plowing; and winter becomes the practical summer for most purposes. Fruits and vegetables are at their best in January and February; the fields are filled with flowers until March or April; in June, July, and August, the country turns into a dry and exhausting desert. However, the season for dates is almost reversed; they ripen in autumn. In Egypt, where everything relies on the flooding, the seasons are even more complicated; the flooding starts to recede in October; in Upper Egypt, the subsequent winter season is the most crucial for agriculture, and crops sown as the water recedes are harvested four to seven months later. But in the Delta, rice, cotton, and indigo are planted in spring (March or April) and harvested in October, November, and December. Here, irrigation and temperature add complexity, as the Delta experiences some of the cold of winter.

I could give many other instances, but these will suffice. As a general rule, we may say that in the temperate and frigid zones the seasons for plants and animals are ruled by heat and cold, but that in tropical and even in subtropical climates, rainfall and drought, themselves largely due to the same circumstances, are the ruling factors.

I could provide many more examples, but these will do. Generally, we can say that in temperate and cold regions, the seasons for plants and animals are determined by heat and cold, while in tropical and even subtropical climates, rainfall and drought, which are mainly caused by the same conditions, are the key factors.

Again, everybody knows that winter and summer, and the other phenomena which simulate or accompany them, such as wet and dry seasons, depend upon the fact that the earth's axis is not perpendicular to the plane in which the earth moves round the sun, but slightly inclined to it. Now, a year in itself, viewed as a measure of time, is merely the period which it takes the earth to perform one such complete revolution. During one half of each such revolution the north pole is turned at a considerable angle toward the sun, and during the other half, the south pole. When the north pole is so turned we call it summer in the northern hemisphere; when the south pole is being favored, and the north is receiving less light and heat, we call it winter. Let us suppose for a moment that the earth had not got this twist or kink in its axis; that the equator was always presented exactly toward the sun; what then would happen? Obviously, there would be no change of seasons. The day and night would have fixed lengths which never varied; climate would in each place be uniform and, barring accidents of elevation or distribution of land and water, the climate of each place would also depend entirely the whole year round on its distance from the equator. Roughly speaking, the temperature of a district would be the temperature it now possesses in March and September, only not quite so cold as March nor so warm as September, owing to the absence of accumulated heat from summer or of reserves of ice and snow from winter. In one word, under such conditions there would have been climates—marked belts of climate; but there would not have been seasons.

Again, everyone knows that winter and summer, along with other related phenomena like wet and dry seasons, depend on the fact that the Earth's axis isn’t straight up and down in relation to the plane it follows around the sun, but is slightly tilted. Now, a year, as a measure of time, is simply the period it takes for the Earth to complete one full revolution. During half of this revolution, the North Pole leans significantly toward the sun, and during the other half, the South Pole does. When the North Pole is tilted toward the sun, we call it summer in the Northern Hemisphere; when the South Pole gets more sunlight and the North Pole receives less light and heat, we call it winter. Let’s imagine for a moment that the Earth didn’t have this tilt; that the equator was always aimed directly at the sun—what would happen then? Clearly, there would be no change of seasons. Day and night would have fixed lengths that never changed; the climate would be uniform in each location, and apart from differences in elevation or the arrangement of land and water, the climate in each area would depend entirely on its distance from the equator all year round. Basically, the temperature in a region would be similar to what it is in March and September, though not quite as cold as March nor as warm as September, due to the lack of accumulated heat from summer or reserves of ice and snow from winter. In short, under these conditions, there would be climates—distinct climate zones—but there wouldn’t be any seasons.

Seasons, however, depend in great part, as Mr. Alfred Russel Wallace has ingeniously shown, on a great many things besides this mere inclination of one end or the other of the earth toward the sun in June and January. Much must be laid to the count of accumulated stores of heat or cold; and though accumulated cold is physically a misnomer, still for all practical purposes we may apply the words fairly enough to the ice caps of the pole and the[235] glaciers of mountain systems. And here we come face to face with the very core of our problem: for the odd part of it is that seasons (at least as we know them) seem to be quite a recent and exceptional phenomenon in the history of our planet. So far as we can judge, geologically speaking, the earth during all its earlier life enjoyed, over all its surface, what we should now consider tropical or subtropical conditions. England—or rather the land that occupied the part of the earth's crust where England now stands—had a vegetation of huge tree ferns and palms and cycads during the Primary period; as late even as the middle Tertiaries it had a vegetation like that of South Carolina or Upper India. Greenland itself, in quite recent times, flourished like a green bay tree, and did not belie its odd modern name. The world as a whole enjoyed perpetual summer. In one word, except in something like the equatorial sense, there were practically no seasons. The sun went north and south, no doubt, as now, but the temperature, even in the relative winter, seems to have remained perennially mild and genial.

Seasons, however, depend greatly, as Mr. Alfred Russel Wallace cleverly pointed out, on many factors beyond just the tilt of the Earth toward the sun in June and January. We must consider the effects of accumulated heat or cold; and although "accumulated cold" isn't technically accurate, it's reasonable for us to apply the term to the ice caps at the poles and the glaciers in mountain ranges. This leads us to the heart of our issue: the strange part is that seasons (at least the way we know them) seem to be a relatively recent and unusual phenomenon in the history of our planet. From what we can tell geologically, the Earth mostly experienced what we would now call tropical or subtropical conditions throughout most of its early existence. England—or rather the land that now makes up England—was home to large tree ferns, palms, and cycads during the Primary period; even as late as the mid-Tertiary period, it had a climate similar to South Carolina or Upper India. Greenland, not too long ago, thrived as a lush green land and lived up to its unusual modern name. Overall, the world enjoyed eternal summer. In summary, except in the strictest equatorial sense, there were virtually no seasons. The sun traveled north and south as it does today, but the temperature, even in what we consider winter, appears to have always remained comfortably mild and pleasant.

It is true, occasional slight traces of glacial epochs, earlier than the great and well-known Glacial epoch, break here and there the almost continuous geological record of palmy and balmy world-wide summers; yet, taking the geological monuments as a whole, they show us few or no signs of anything worth calling a serious winter till quite recent periods. Large-leaved evergreens are still, in the day-before-yesterday of geology, the order of the day; magnolias and liquidambars, cinnamons and holly oaks, vines and rotang palms formed the forests even of Miocene Britain. The animals during all the Tertiary period were of what we now regard as tropical or subtropical types—lions, rhinoceroses, hippopotamuses, monkeys, or more antique races, equally southern in aspect. There could have been little change of winter and summer during this long warm spell; the variations can have been scarcely more than those of dry and rainy seasons. The trees never lost their leaves; the fruits and flowers never ceased to follow one another; no interruption of the food supply drove insects to hibernate in their silken cocoons, or squirrels and bears to lay by stores of food or fat for the cold and hungry winter.

It’s true that slight traces of glacial periods, even before the well-known Ice Age, occasionally punctuate the almost continuous geological record of warm, sunny summers across the globe. However, looking at the geological evidence as a whole, we see few, if any, signs of what we’d call a real winter until fairly recent times. Back in the day, large-leaved evergreens thrived; magnolias, liquidambars, cinnamon trees, holly oaks, vines, and rattan palms dominated the forests even in Miocene Britain. The wildlife during the entire Tertiary period consisted of animals we now associate with tropical or subtropical climates—like lions, rhinoceroses, hippopotamuses, monkeys, and more ancient species that also thrived in the south. There couldn’t have been much difference between winter and summer during this lengthy warm phase; the weather variations were probably no more significant than those between dry and rainy seasons. The trees retained their leaves year-round; the fruits and flowers continued to bloom continuously; there was no shortage of food to force insects into hibernation or to make squirrels and bears stash away food or fat for a cold winter.

Nevertheless, taking the world round as it stands, we must believe that the distinction of seasons grew up, both for plants and animals, and for man or his ancestors, during this age of relatively unmarked summers and winters. For the tropics more than anywhere else preserve for us to-day the general features and aspect of this earlier time; they have never had the continuity of their stream of life rudely interrupted by the enormous changes of the Glacial epoch. Yet, even in the tropics, things, as we saw, have seasons.[236] There are annuals and perennials there, as elsewhere. Each kind has its month for sprouting, for flowering, for fruiting, for shedding its seed; and men in the tropics, some of them long isolated in oceanic islands, or in great insulated regions like Australia or New Guinea, from the rest of their kind in the temperate regions, nevertheless know and observe the year, and perform all their functions, agricultural or religious, by yearly cycles. For example, there is among them all an annual feast for the dead, and widows mourn their husbands for one year from their burial. Observation of the year, therefore, both automatically by organisms at large and consciously by man, antedates and is independent of observation of the existence of summer or winter.

Still, looking at the world as it is, we have to believe that the change of seasons developed for plants, animals, and humans or their ancestors during this period of mostly unremarkable summers and winters. The tropics, more than anywhere else, show us today the general characteristics and appearance of this earlier time; they haven't experienced the significant disruptions to their way of life caused by the massive changes of the Ice Age. However, even in the tropics, as we’ve seen, there are seasons. There are annuals and perennials, just like everywhere else. Each type has its month for sprouting, blooming, fruiting, and shedding seeds; and people in the tropics, some of whom have been isolated for long periods on oceanic islands or in vast regions like Australia or New Guinea, still recognize and observe the year, carrying out all their agricultural or religious practices in yearly cycles. For instance, there is an annual feast for the dead, and widows mourn their husbands for one year after their burial. Therefore, the observation of the year, both automatically by living organisms and consciously by humans, predates and exists independently of the awareness of summer or winter.[236]

I do not think, however, that man would have noted the merely astronomical year—the year of the sun's position—at least till a relatively late stage in culture, if he had not first noticed the organic year—the regular recurrence of plant and animal seasons. So many yams—that is to say, so many yam harvests—in other words, so many years, is a common savage way of reckoning times and ages. But they call it "yams," not summers or winters. And when I say yams, I give that merely as a single instance, for elsewhere the "seedtime and harvest" are reckoned indifferently in maize or millet, rice or barley, according to the agriculture of the particular people. Even hunting races know that at certain times of year certain foods abound; and this is true of equatorial savages and equatorial plants or animals, as well as of others.

I don’t think, however, that people would have recognized the astronomical year—the year based on the sun's position—until a relatively advanced stage of culture, if they hadn’t first observed the organic year—the regular cycles of plant and animal seasons. Saying “so many yams”—which means “so many yam harvests,” or in other words, “so many years”—is a common way for indigenous people to track time and ages. But they call it “yams,” not summers or winters. When I mention yams, I’m just giving that as one example; in other places, the “seedtime and harvest” are counted using maize or millet, rice or barley, depending on what those people farm. Even hunting communities understand that at certain times of the year, certain foods are plentiful; this applies to both equatorial indigenous people and the plants or animals in their environment, as well as others.

Moons are more obvious measures of time than suns, in the tropics at least—probably everywhere; for the waxing and waning of the moon mean much to people who live largely out of doors; and the month is, perhaps, the earliest fixed mode of reckoning time beyond a day or two. Most savages count time mainly by so many moons. But they must also have noticed early that after a certain number of moons (usually about thirteen), certain fruits or seeds were ripe again; especially must they have noticed it when this recurrence coincided with the return of the rainy season, or of some other annual meteorological phenomenon, like the bursting of the monsoon or the Nile inundation. Thus, even in the tropics, and before the coming on of the Glacial epoch, men or the ancestors of men (one can not draw precise lines here) must probably have observed a certain rough relation between the months and the vegetative cycles; after so many moons, about say thirteen, the yam, or the mangoes, or the grains are ripe again. These organic years, I take it, must have been noticed before the astronomical ones. For it is now beginning to be more and more believed that man is of preglacial origin; and even if something worth calling a man were not, then[237] at least man's pre-human ancestors go back far into the Tertiary period. Only later would men begin to note that some thirteen moons, and the recurrence of a food stuff, concurred with a particular solar season.

Moons are clearer indicators of time than suns, at least in the tropics—likely everywhere; because the phases of the moon are significant to people who spend a lot of time outdoors. The month is probably the earliest fixed way to measure time beyond just a day or two. Most primitive people track time mainly by counting moons. But they must have also quickly realized that after a certain number of moons (usually about thirteen), certain fruits or seeds would be ripe again; they especially would have noticed this when it matched the arrival of the rainy season or some other annual weather event, like the start of the monsoon or the flooding of the Nile. So, even in the tropics and before the onset of the Glacial epoch, humans or their ancestors (it's hard to draw precise lines here) likely observed a loose connection between the months and the growing cycles; after so many moons, say about thirteen, the yam, mangoes, or grains would be ready to harvest again. These organic years must have been recognized before the astronomical ones. It's increasingly believed that humans originated before the glaciers; and even if something we could call a human didn't exist back then, at least our pre-human ancestors go way back into the Tertiary period. Only later would people start to notice that thirteen moons and the return of a food source lined up with a certain solar season.

Indeed, if one comes to think of it, how much even now do any of us, save the most scientific, mean by the year, beyond the visible change of summer and winter? What we are thinking of is the leafless trees, the ice and snow, the green grass in spring, the flowers and warm days in summer, not the abstract astronomical fact of the earth's revolution round the sun, or the due succession of the signs of the zodiac. It is that visible organic year that must have counted most with man from the first; though no doubt its meaning and reality are much more vividly present since the coming on of the Glacial epoch, and the more so in proportion as we live nearer to the north or south pole; while at the equator the year is to the last a much more inconspicuous period—a largely artificial mode of reckoning.

Honestly, if you think about it, how many of us really understand what the year means, aside from the changes we see with the seasons, except for those who study science? What we're really focused on are the bare trees, the ice and snow, the green grass in spring, the flowers, and warm days in summer—not the abstract fact that the Earth revolves around the sun or the predictable cycle of the zodiac signs. It's that visible, seasonal year that has likely mattered most to humans from the beginning; although, its significance and reality have probably become even more prominent since the start of the Glacial period, especially for those of us living closer to the poles. Meanwhile, at the equator, the year is a much less noticeable period—it's mostly an artificial way of keeping track of time.

Still, from the very first, there was one element of diversity in the year which must have struck all men, in the temperate and frigid zones at least, perhaps even in a certain way in the tropics. I mean, the varying length of the day, always perceptible in the frigid and temperate zones; for as soon as men in these regions began to think and to observe at all, they must have noticed that the days increased in their summer and lessened in their winter; and they must have learned to correlate this waxing and waning of the day with the appearance or abundance of certain fruits, seeds, birds, fishes, game, roots and other food stuffs. It is at least certain that all the world over men do now celebrate the solstices and the equinoxes as special feasts; and the close similarity in most such celebrations leads one to suspect that the custom has been handed down from the very remote time when the human family was still a single continuous body.

Still, from the very beginning, there was one aspect of diversity in the year that must have caught everyone's attention, at least in the temperate and frigid zones, and perhaps even somewhat in the tropics. I mean the changing length of the day, which is always noticeable in the frigid and temperate areas; because as soon as people in these regions began to think and observe, they must have noticed that days got longer in the summer and shorter in the winter. They likely learned to connect this increase and decrease in daylight with the appearance or abundance of certain fruits, seeds, birds, fish, game, roots, and other food sources. It is definitely true that all over the world, people now celebrate the solstices and equinoxes as special occasions; and the close similarities in most of these celebrations suggest that this tradition has been passed down from the very distant time when humanity was still a single continuous group.

In the tropics, it is true, the days vary so little that this difference in itself is not likely to have struck primæval man. But there, another point would come in—the annual movement of the sun overhead from south to north and vice versa; and though this would be less directly important to human life than in temperate regions, it would still be indirectly important. It would bring the rain with it. In Europe, of course, and in temperate America, we can see at once that the return of the sun northward must always have meant spring, the increase of food stuffs, the promise of corn or maize, the suggestion of harvest; and we can therefore understand why the midwinter feast, when the sun after his long journey south begins to move visibly north again, should have been both in pagan and[238] Christian times the great festival of rejoicing for the men of the north temperate region. Day by day they saw the sun recede and the cold deepen; at last, one evening, he sets a little nearer, and they know that he has not deserted them forever. Similarly, the promise made at Yule begins to be realized at that other great feast of the spring equinox, which we still call in England by its ancient heathen title of Easter; the day by that time has got the better of the night, and "the sun dances on Easter Sunday" in commemoration of his completed victory over the combined powers of winter and darkness. In the tropics, on the other hand, the connection is less clear; but even here the shifting of the sun's apparent place is closely correlated with the shifting of the rain zone; and therefore it would not be long (after man was man) before tropical savages began to perceive a constant relation between the movements of the sun to north or south, and the occurrence of the fertilizing rainy season. We must remember that savages, with their improvident habits, are much more dependent upon rain than we are, and that magical ceremonies for breaking up a drought are among their commonest and most universally diffused superstitions.

In the tropics, it’s true that the days change so little that early humans probably didn't notice this difference. However, there’s another factor to consider—the yearly movement of the sun overhead from south to north and back again. While this movement is less directly important to human life than in temperate regions, it still matters indirectly. It would bring the rain. In Europe and temperate America, we can easily see that the sun moving northward always signaled spring, the abundance of food, the promise of crops like corn or maize, and the anticipation of harvest. This explains why the midwinter celebration, when the sun starts moving visibly north again after its long journey south, became a major festival of joy for people in the northern temperate regions, both in pagan and Christian times. Day by day, they watched the sun retreat and the cold intensify; then one evening, it sets a little closer, and they know it hasn’t abandoned them forever. Similarly, the promise made at Yule begins to come true during the spring equinox festival, which we still refer to in England by its ancient pagan name, Easter; by then, the day has overtaken the night, and "the sun dances on Easter Sunday" to celebrate its victory over the combined forces of winter and darkness. In the tropics, on the other hand, the connection isn’t as clear; but even here, the apparent movement of the sun is closely tied to the changing rain zone. Therefore, it wouldn't take long (after early humans became aware) for tropical communities to realize a consistent relationship between the sun's movements north or south and the onset of the nourishing rainy season. We should keep in mind that early people, with their unplanned lifestyles, are much more reliant on rain than we are, and that magical rituals aimed at ending drought are among their most common and widespread beliefs.

On the whole, then, before the coming on of the Glacial epoch, we may be pretty sure that plants and animals on the one hand had learned organically and automatically to recognize the existence of the year and to adapt themselves to it; and that men or the progenitors of men on the other hand had also learned to correlate the recurrent seasons of food supply with the movements of the sun, though nothing equivalent to winter and summer as we know them to-day existed as yet on any part of our planet. I say advisedly "on any part of our planet," because even near the pole itself remains of a subtropical vegetation in Tertiary times have been amply indicated. Nevertheless, in all parts of the world then, as in the tropics now, we may gather that plants and animals ran through annual cycles—that the year, as I have put it, was organically recognized. Trees had their time to sprout, to bud, to flower, to fruit, to seed, to shed their leaves (in the evergreen way); birds had their time to nest and hatch out their young; insects had their fixed periods for laying, for larval life, for assuming the chrysalis form, for becoming winged beetles or bees or butterflies. In one word, the year is a terrestrial reality, not merely an astronomical fact, in the tropics now; it was a terrestrial reality over the whole planet in the Tertiary period. But it was hardly more marked, apparently, into distinct seasons than it is marked to-day in the equatorial region. Rainfall and drought must have had more to do in determining the annual cycles than winter and summer.

Overall, before the onset of the Glacial epoch, we can be fairly certain that plants and animals on one hand had organically and automatically learned to recognize the existence of the year and adapt to it; and that humans or their ancestors on the other hand had also figured out how to connect the recurring seasons of food supply with the movements of the sun, even though nothing like our current concept of winter and summer existed anywhere on our planet. I emphasize "anywhere on our planet," because even close to the pole, there are clear signs of subtropical vegetation from Tertiary times. Nonetheless, in all parts of the world back then, as in the tropics now, it seems that plants and animals followed annual cycles—that the year, as I said, was recognized organically. Trees had their times to sprout, bud, flower, bear fruit, produce seeds, and shed their leaves (in an evergreen way); birds had their times to build nests and raise their young; insects had their set periods for laying eggs, going through larval life, becoming pupae, and finally emerging as winged beetles, bees, or butterflies. In short, the year is a tangible reality, not just an astronomical fact, in the tropics today; it was a tangible reality across the whole planet during the Tertiary period. However, it was probably not more distinctly marked by different seasons than it is today in the equatorial region. Rainfall and drought likely played a bigger role in shaping the annual cycles than winter and summer did.

From all this it must result that the conception of the year as[239] an epoch at all (save for advanced astronomy) is almost or entirely due to that tilt of the earth's axis which causes the seasons—dry or wet, cold or hot. Without the seasons, in one form or other, we might have been ages longer in discovering the fact that the earth moved round the sun, and that some three hundred and sixty-five days (I omit those important fractions) were needed for its revolution. Certainly, without the seasons, at least to the extent that they occur in the tropics, plant and animal life could hardly have assumed its fixed annual cycles, nor could early men have caught at the idea of the year at all as a period of time, a unit of measurement.

From all this, it must be clear that the idea of the year as[239] an era (except in advanced astronomy) is mostly or entirely due to the tilt of the earth's axis that creates the seasons—dry or wet, cold or hot. Without the seasons, in one form or another, we might have taken ages longer to realize that the earth revolved around the sun, and that it takes about three hundred and sixty-five days (not counting those important fractions) for this revolution. Certainly, without the seasons, especially as they occur in the tropics, plant and animal life would struggle to have established their fixed annual cycles, nor would early humans have been able to grasp the concept of the year as a period of time, a unit of measurement.

Before the Glacial epoch, in particular, the discovery of the year, organically or consciously, must have been much more difficult than it is now in high latitudes. It must have been almost as difficult in what are now the temperate zones as it is to-day in the tropics. Far north or south, of course, the length of the day would tell; and within the Arctic and Antarctic Circles the long night would form an unmistakable feature. But if the plane of the equator had always found itself vertical to the sun, there could have been no recognition of the year at all, either organic or conscious. In other words, from the point of view of organic life, the year does not mean the revolution of the earth round the sun: it means the apparent northward and southward movement of the sun on either side of the equator; it means the seasons, whether recognized as winter and summer, or as dry and wet periods. That is really the year as man knows it, as plants and animals have always known it.

Before the Ice Age, especially with understanding the concept of a year, it must have been way more challenging than it is now in northern regions. It was probably just as tough in what we now call the temperate zones as it is today in the tropics. Far north or south, the varying lengths of day would be noticeable; within the Arctic and Antarctic Circles, the long nights would be a clear sign. But if the equator had always been directly aligned with the sun, there would have been no way to recognize a year at all, either instinctively or consciously. In other words, from the perspective of living organisms, a year doesn’t mean the Earth’s orbit around the sun: it refers to the sun’s apparent movement north and south of the equator; it represents the seasons, whether identified as winter and summer, or as dry and wet periods. That’s truly the concept of a year as humans understand it, as well as how plants and animals have always experienced it.

With the coming on of the great cold spell, however, the importance of the seasons in the temperate and frigid zones, perhaps also even in the tropics, became much more marked. I will not go here into the suggested reasons for that vast revolution, perhaps the greatest our planet has ever suffered. Most physicists now accept more or less the theory put forward with great ingenuity by Mr. Croll, which sets it down to a period of extreme eccentricity in the earth's orbit; but some weight must also be allowed, as Mr. Alfred Russel Wallace has clearly shown, to the local arrangement of land and water on the globe at the time of its origin, as well as to the occurrence of mountain ranges just then at the poles, and to other purely terrestrial causes. Never before, in all probability, had the poles been occupied by great glacier-clad mountains. It seems most likely, indeed, that we are now practically at the end of the Glacial epoch, and that if only we could once get rid of the polar ice caps, which keep a stock of chilliness always laid on (I speak the quite comprehensible language of everyday life), we might recur forthwith to the warm and almost imperceptible winters of the preglacial period. But, as things stand, the stock of ice at the poles never gets[240] melted away in the existing northern or southern summer; fresh ice accumulates on top of the old mass with each winter; prevailing winds, blowing over this ice, chill regions lying much farther toward the tropics; icebergs detach themselves and float off, thus lowering the temperature of the sea in the middle zones; arctic or antarctic currents spread round the coasts and absorb the solar heat in enormous quantities. We have only to remember the trenchant difference in England between a parching cold east wind and a mild sou'wester to realize what an immense part these polar ice caps and frozen highlands play in the production of our existing winter. Alps, Pyrenees, Himalayas, Rocky Mountains, further assist in the same direction.

With the arrival of the major cold spell, the significance of the seasons in temperate and frigid zones, and possibly even in the tropics, became much more clear. I won't dive into the suggested reasons for that massive change, perhaps the greatest our planet has ever faced. Most physicists now generally accept the theory proposed by Mr. Croll, which attributes it to a period of extreme eccentricity in the Earth's orbit; however, some credit must also be given, as Mr. Alfred Russel Wallace has clearly demonstrated, to the local arrangement of land and water on the globe at its origin, as well as the presence of mountain ranges at the poles at that time, along with other purely terrestrial causes. It's likely that the poles had never before been home to large glacier-covered mountains. In fact, it seems we are now practically at the end of the Glacial epoch, and if we could just eliminate the polar ice caps, which maintain a constant chill (I’m speaking in the understandable language of everyday life), we could quickly return to the warm and nearly imperceptible winters of the preglacial period. But as it stands, the ice at the poles never melts completely during the current northern or southern summer; new ice builds up on top of the old layer each winter; prevailing winds blowing over this ice chill regions much further toward the tropics; icebergs break off and drift away, lowering the sea temperature in the middle zones; arctic or antarctic currents circulate around the coasts and absorb a vast amount of solar heat. We only need to recall the sharp difference in England between a dry, cold east wind and a mild southwest wind to understand how much these polar ice caps and frozen highlands contribute to our current winter conditions. The Alps, Pyrenees, Himalayas, and Rocky Mountains also play a part in this.

On the other hand, currents in the sea may cut either way; the Gulf Stream makes England warm, while the arctic current makes Labrador, much farther south, practically uninhabitable.

On the other hand, ocean currents can flow in different directions; the Gulf Stream keeps England warm, while the Arctic current makes Labrador, much farther south, almost unlivable.

Ever since the Glacial epoch, therefore, it has been quite easy for man in the temperate and frigid zones to recognize the year as a natural reality. The annual cycles of heat and cold are far too marked to be overlooked by anybody. Organically, they made themselves felt at once by extraordinary changes induced in the fauna and flora. Before the steady advance of the annual cold wave, vegetation had perforce to alter its ways. The large-leaved evergreens went out altogether in frigid and high temperate regions; deciduous trees, or needle-leaved types like the pines and firs, took the place of the luxuriant Miocene foliage in Europe and North America. Every autumn the larger number of trees and shrubs learned to shed their leaves all together; every spring they came out anew in fresh green and in masses of blossom. Similarly with animals. Birds learned to migrate, or to accommodate themselves to the winter; insects learned to hibernate in the egg or the cocoon; pigs fattened themselves on mast against the frozen time; moles slept over winter; squirrels hoarded nuts for a store to bridge over heavy frosts; frogs retired to the warmer mud in the depths of ponds; adders coiled themselves in holes and dozed away the cold season. Innumerable adaptations sprang up at once, those species or individuals which failed to meet the new conditions perishing in the struggle. In proportion as we recede from the tropics, the more marked do the annual cycles of life thus induced become, many species practically ceasing to exist as such for several months of the year, and being only potentially represented by eggs, germs, or seeds, and sometimes by dormant pregnant females.

Since the Ice Age, it's been pretty straightforward for people in temperate and cold regions to recognize the year as a natural reality. The yearly cycles of heat and cold are too obvious to ignore. These changes were immediately felt through dramatic shifts in plants and animals. As the cold weather set in, vegetation had to adapt. Large-leaved evergreens completely disappeared from cold and high temperate areas, replaced by deciduous trees or needle-leaved types like pines and firs, which took over the lush Miocene vegetation in Europe and North America. Every autumn, most trees and shrubs learned to drop their leaves completely; every spring, they sprouted anew with fresh green leaves and clusters of blossoms. The same happened with animals. Birds learned to migrate or tough it out through winter; insects hibernated as eggs or in cocoons; pigs packed on weight during the fall to prepare for the cold; moles hibernated; squirrels gathered nuts to last through harsh frosts; frogs buried themselves in the warmer mud at the bottom of ponds; snakes coiled up in burrows and slept through the cold months. Countless adaptations emerged immediately, and those species or individuals that couldn't adapt perished in the struggle. The further we move away from the tropics, the more pronounced these annual cycles of life become, with many species almost disappearing for several months each year, existing only as eggs, seeds, or sometimes as dormant pregnant females.

At the same time, while the cause of the seasons as a whole is the obliquity of the earth's axis, with the resulting inclination of either pole toward the sun alternately, we must not forget that the[241] seasons and the climate in each particular country depend in part upon many minor contributory causes. It is not merely nearness to or distance from the equator that counts; we have to consider also relative distribution of land and water, elevation, prevalent winds, exposure, condensation, and many other elements of a complex problem. In Ecuador, for example, whose very name means the equator, the plain is always in scorching summer, the mountains are always in perpetual spring. The monsoons, again, produce in other countries some curious results: they depend themselves on the change of relative temperature in sea and land at different seasons; and they break upon the Himalayas with this odd and unexpected effect, that the snow line on the southern side of that vast range goes very far down, owing to the immense rainfall (or rather snowfall) and the consequent spread of snow fields and glaciers; while on the northern side it descends but a very little way, owing to the extreme desert drought and the great summer heat of the central Asiatic table-land. We have thus the apparent paradox that millions of Tibetans occupy towns and cultivate farms to the north at a height from three to four thousand feet above the snow line on the southern slope of the same mountains.

At the same time, while the overall cause of the seasons is the tilt of the earth's axis, which causes each pole to alternate its tilt toward the sun, we must remember that the[241] seasons and climate in each specific country are also influenced by many smaller factors. It’s not just about how close or far you are from the equator; we also need to consider the distribution of land and water, elevation, dominant winds, exposure, condensation, and other elements that complicate the issue. In Ecuador, for example, which is named after the equator, the plains are always experiencing intense summer, while the mountains stay in a constant state of spring. The monsoons create unique effects in other countries as well: they are influenced by the changing temperatures of land and sea at different times of the year. When they hit the Himalayas, there's an interesting and unexpected result: the snow line on the southern side of the mountain range drops significantly due to the heavy rainfall (or more accurately, snowfall) and the resulting spread of snowfields and glaciers; meanwhile, on the northern side, it only slightly descends because of the extreme dryness and heat of the central Asian plateau in summer. This creates the apparent paradox where millions of Tibetans live in towns and farm fields to the north at elevations three to four thousand feet above the snow line on the southern slope of the same mountains.

Looking at the matter broadly, then, and taking for granted the now generally accepted modern view that the great oceans and great continents have been relatively fixed (though liable to minor fluctuations and variations of outline) throughout all geological time, and that the earth's crust has not shifted from pole to equator or vice versa, we arrive at last at the following probable conclusions: There have always been seasons more or less marked, and these have been more or less organically answered by corresponding changes or cycles of change in plants and animals. Rain and drought have in many cases more to do with such changes than variations of temperature. The seasons, again, are less marked in the tropics than in temperate and circumpolar climates. Nevertheless, even near the equator, they exert and have always exerted certain organic influences-have resulted in annual cycles in the life of species. Even before the coming on of the Glacial epoch, the seasons were probably somewhat more marked in the temperate and polar regions than in the tropics, the longer day in summer and the greater directness of impact of the rays making the summer months always warmer. But for various reasons, among which we may presumably rank the absence in early ages of high land at the poles and of an accumulated polar ice cap, together with the existence of warm sea currents from the tropics to the poles, the winters of preglacial ages seem to have been relatively mild, perhaps (if we may judge by the types of plant life) milder than those of South Carolina and Georgia in our own period.[242] No cold winds of importance seem then to have blown with blighting effect from glaciated or snow-clad districts. (Mars in our own time appears to enjoy winters somewhat of this character, though a little colder, with a temporary snow cap.) The seasons as we know them in temperate and arctic climates, however, seem to be largely the result of the glacial epoch, and its persistent legacy the arctic and antarctic ice caps. If we could once manage to get rid of those, it is possible that our planet might again enjoy in all its zones the mild and genial preglacial winters.

Looking at the situation broadly and assuming the widely accepted modern view that the major oceans and continents have remained mostly fixed (though subject to minor changes in shape) throughout geological time, and that the earth's crust hasn't shifted from pole to equator or vice versa, we can reach a few likely conclusions: There have always been seasons to some degree, and these have prompted corresponding changes or cycles of change in plants and animals. Rain and drought often impact such changes more than temperature variations. The seasons are less distinct in the tropics compared to temperate and polar climates. However, even near the equator, they have always had certain organic effects, resulting in annual cycles in species' life. Even before the onset of the Glacial epoch, seasons were probably somewhat more pronounced in temperate and polar regions than in the tropics, with longer days in summer and more direct sunlight making summer months consistently warmer. For various reasons, likely including the lack of high land at the poles and an accumulated polar ice cap in earlier periods, along with warm ocean currents flowing from the tropics to the poles, winters during preglacial times seem to have been relatively mild—possibly milder than those in South Carolina and Georgia today, if we consider the types of plant life. There didn't seem to be significant cold winds affecting areas from glaciated or snow-covered regions. (Mars today appears to experience similar winters, though a bit colder, with a temporary snow cap.) However, the seasons we recognize in temperate and arctic climates seem primarily due to the glacial epoch and its lasting impact, the arctic and antarctic ice caps. If we could somehow eliminate these, it’s possible that our planet might once again enjoy mild and pleasant preglacial winters across all its regions.[242]

These are rough notes, I know; mere adumbrations of a probable truth: but adequately to develop the subject would require a very big volume. My object here is simply to suggest that in many inquiries, both into human and animal or vegetable life, we must never take the existence of seasons as we know them for granted, except in very recent times. The year, for organic beings, means essentially the seasons; and the seasons may mean and have meant many separate things, as time and place vary—heat and cold, food and scarcity, foliage and leaflessness, drought and wet; longer or shorter days, the midnight sun and the winter darkness; hibernation and wakefulness; the egg, the cocoon, the seed, the plant, the flower, the fruit; dormancy or vitality. According as human life started at the poles or the equator, for instance, it would view in the beginning many things differently. All I wish to point out now is merely this, that we must bear such possibilities ever in mind; and that we must never take it for granted in any problem, human or biological, that the seasons were always just what we know them, or that the year to any organic being meant anything more than the seasonal cycle then and there prevalent.—Longman's Magazine.

These are rough notes, I get that; just outlines of a possible truth: but to fully explore the topic would take a really large book. My goal here is simply to suggest that in many investigations, whether into human, animal, or plant life, we should never assume that the seasons as we know them have always existed, except in very recent history. For living beings, the year essentially revolves around the seasons; and the seasons can mean a lot of different things, depending on time and place—heat and cold, availability of food and scarcity, foliage and bare branches, drought and rain; longer or shorter days, the midnight sun and the darkness of winter; hibernation and wakefulness; the egg, the cocoon, the seed, the plant, the flower, the fruit; dormancy or activity. Depending on whether human life began at the poles or the equator, for example, different perspectives would emerge right from the start. All I'm trying to point out is that we must keep these possibilities in mind; and we should never assume in any human or biological problem that the seasons were always exactly what we know them to be, or that for any living being the year meant anything more than the seasonal cycle that was current at that time and place.—Longman's Magazine.


In the excavations of the ancient cemetery of Antinoe, near Lyons, France, a "party dress" of the time of the Emperor Adrian, very fine silks, jewels, etc., have been discovered. One sarcophagus held the remains of a woman musician with a rose chemise, a cythara, pearls, castanets, etc.; in another was a child's costume with its little laced shoes, its vest ornamented with flowers appliqués, and its robe of gauffered crape. It appears that the women of sixteen hundred years ago dyed their hair with henna, and twisted ribbons round their heads. Nothing changes.

During the excavations of the ancient cemetery at Antinoe, near Lyons, France, a "party dress" from the time of Emperor Hadrian was discovered, along with exquisite silks, jewels, and other items. One sarcophagus held the remains of a female musician dressed in a rose-colored chemise, accompanied by a lyre, pearls, castanets, and more; in another, there was a child's outfit complete with tiny laced shoes, a vest decorated with floral appliqués, and a gown made of crinkled crepe. It appears that women sixteen hundred years ago dyed their hair with henna and wrapped ribbons around their heads. Some things never change.

M. A. Thieullen, publishing the results of fifteen years' studies among the flint implements of the French beds, draws the conclusions that the elaborate palæolithic flint axe and hammer and the typical neolithic implements were luxuries used by the more distinguished members or for the more important purposes of the flint-implement-using community, while the ruder implements which are found in enormous numbers were the objects of general and daily use throughout all the flint-using ages, whether palæolithic or neolithic.

M. A. Thieullen, in publishing the results of fifteen years of research on the flint tools found at French sites, concludes that the advanced Paleolithic flint axe and hammer, as well as typical Neolithic tools, were luxuries used by the more prominent members of the flint-using community or for significant purposes. In contrast, the rougher tools, which are found in large quantities, were items used daily throughout all the flint-using periods, whether Paleolithic or Neolithic.


BRAIN WEIGHTS AND INTELLECTUAL CAPACITY.

By JOSEPH SIMMS, M. D.

By JOSEPH SIMMS, M.D.

Having been for thirty years a lecturer on man and his character as evinced by his form, features, head, and gestures, and having made observations on the subject in all parts of North America, in continental Europe and Great Britain, and parts of Asia, Africa, and Australia, I should not be deemed presumptuous when I present a few facts regarding the relations of mind and the size and forms of heads and weights of brains. It has been observed by many persons versed in the branches relating to the subject that men with the largest brains are not those of most talent, power, or intellect; but many such have been only ordinary or inferior men, or even idiots; while some men of most powerful and comprehensive minds have had unusually small brains. Esquirol's assertion that no size or form of head or brain is incident to idiocy or to superior talent is borne out by my observations.

Having spent thirty years teaching about people and their character as shown by their shape, features, head, and gestures, and having made observations on this in all parts of North America, Europe, Great Britain, and parts of Asia, Africa, and Australia, I believe it’s reasonable for me to share some insights on the relationship between the mind and the size and shape of heads and brain weights. Many experienced in relevant fields have noticed that those with the largest brains aren’t necessarily the most talented, powerful, or intelligent; in fact, many of them have been only average or even less capable, while some of the most brilliant and insightful minds have had surprisingly small brains. Esquirol's claim that no specific size or shape of head or brain is associated with idiocy or exceptional talent is supported by my findings.

After long and careful research in the great libraries and museums of the world, I have collected a table of brain weights of eminent men, along with which are entered, in my original document, the occupation of the subject, age at the time of determination, and the source whence the item is derived. These can not be given within the limits of this article, and only the briefest and most generalized summary of the main features can be indicated. The largest weight of brain in the whole list is that of the Russian novelist Turgenieff, whose brain weighed, at the time of his death, at sixty-five years of age, 71 ounces.[32] It is a considerable step from him to the next in order, the English mechanician and author, Knight, whose brain weight at the age of fifty-eight was 64 ounces. Then follow the Scottish physician Abercrombie, 63 ounces; General B. F. Butler, 62 ounces; and the Scottish general Abercromby, 62 ounces. Another group of nine, including weights from 58.6 ounces to 54 ounces, includes Jeffrey, Scottish judge and author, Thackeray, Cuvier, George Combe, United States Senator Atherton, Spurzheim, and the Scottish physician Simpson. The next group, 53.6 to 50, is larger, including twenty-one names, among which are Daniel Webster, Agassiz, Napoleon I, the Scottish divine Chalmers, the mathematicians De Morgan and Gauss, the anthropologist Broca, and the generals Skoboleff and Lamarque. The last group, 49.9 to 40 ounces, contains twenty-five names, including those of the philosopher Huber, Grote, Babbage, the anthropologist Bertillon, [244] Whewell,[33] Liebig, Gall, Gambetta, and Bishop, the mind reader. Only one remove from the foot of the list is Gambetta, a man of indisputably high genius and ability, with a brain weighing only 40.9 ounces.[34]

After extensive and thorough research in the major libraries and museums worldwide, I have compiled a table of brain weights of notable individuals. In my original document, I’ve also included the person's occupation, their age when the measurement was taken, and the source of the information. Due to the constraints of this article, I can only provide a brief and general overview of the key points. The heaviest brain listed belongs to the Russian novelist Turgenev, whose brain weighed 71 ounces at the age of sixty-five when he passed away. It’s a significant drop to the next on the list, the English engineer and writer Knight, who had a brain weight of 64 ounces at fifty-eight. Following them are the Scottish physician Abercrombie at 63 ounces, General B. F. Butler at 62 ounces, and the Scottish general Abercromby, also at 62 ounces. Another group of nine individuals ranges from 58.6 ounces to 54 ounces and includes Jeffrey, a Scottish judge and author, Thackeray, Cuvier, George Combe, U.S. Senator Atherton, Spurzheim, and the Scottish physician Simpson. The next larger group, which weighs between 53.6 to 50 ounces, comprises twenty-one names, including Daniel Webster, Agassiz, Napoleon I, the Scottish theologian Chalmers, mathematicians De Morgan and Gauss, anthropologist Broca, and generals Skoboleff and Lamarque. The final group, ranging from 49.9 to 40 ounces, includes twenty-five names, such as the philosopher Huber, Grote, Babbage, anthropologist Bertillon, Whewell, Liebig, Gall, Gambetta, and the mind reader Bishop. Close to the bottom of the list is Gambetta, a man recognized for his exceptional intelligence and talent, with a brain that weighed only 40.9 ounces.

The table goes to illustrate a general rule which I discovered and published several years ago, that larger brains appertain to natives of colder climates. Dr. John Abercrombie, for instance, was born at Aberdeen, Scotland, on the German Sea, and farther north than any part of the United States. Sir Ralph Abercromby was born in the county of Clackmannan, Scotland, where it is far colder than any part of southern Europe. Lord Francis Jeffrey first saw light in Edinburgh. General Butler was born in Deerfield, New Hampshire. Ivan Turgenieff, with the heaviest brain of all, was a native of cold, inhospitable Russia. Dr. Franz Joseph Gall (brain weight 42.2 ounces)[35] was born in Würtemberg, in southern Germany, passed most of his life in Vienna and Paris, and, being a student, spent much of his time indoors. Gambetta was born at Cahors, France, of Italian parents. This climatological view of the size of brains is confirmed by a paper, "Crania," of the Philadelphia Academy of Sciences, which gives as the average size, in cubic inches, of the cranial cavities of various nationalities, taking the results of many measurements: Lapps, 102; Swedes, 100; Anglo-Saxons, 96; Finns, 95; Anglo-Americans, 94; Germans, 92; Celts, 88; Malays, 86; Chinese, 85; Tombs of Gizeh, 84; embalmed Semitic, 82; Egyptians, 80; Fellah, 79; Bengalese, 78.

The table illustrates a general rule that I discovered and published several years ago: larger brains belong to people from colder climates. Dr. John Abercrombie, for example, was born in Aberdeen, Scotland, on the North Sea, which is farther north than any part of the United States. Sir Ralph Abercromby was born in Clackmannan, Scotland, where it's much colder than anywhere in southern Europe. Lord Francis Jeffrey was born in Edinburgh. General Butler was born in Deerfield, New Hampshire. Ivan Turgenev, who had the heaviest brain of all, was from cold, harsh Russia. Dr. Franz Joseph Gall (brain weight 42.2 ounces)[35] was born in Württemberg, in southern Germany, spent most of his life in Vienna and Paris, and, as a student, spent a lot of time indoors. Gambetta was born in Cahors, France, to Italian parents. This climatic perspective on brain size is supported by a paper, "Crania," from the Philadelphia Academy of Sciences, which reports the average size, in cubic inches, of cranial cavities for various nationalities, based on numerous measurements: Lapps, 102; Swedes, 100; Anglo-Saxons, 96; Finns, 95; Anglo-Americans, 94; Germans, 92; Celts, 88; Malays, 86; Chinese, 85; Tombs of Gizeh, 84; embalmed Semitic, 82; Egyptians, 80; Fellah, 79; Bengalese, 78.

A table of average brain weights of various nationalities, compiled from Topinard's and Manouvrier's works and other standard anthropological publications, illustrates the same tendency toward greater brain weights in colder countries. One of its results is to show that the colder air of the United States produces larger brains in the negroes than the warm air of Africa. The table further shows, in the comparisons of Hindus and African negroes, that the brains are smallest in the warmest countries, irrespective of race or nation; and that the largest average attained is in Scotland, where it is never extremely warm.

A table showing the average brain weights of different nationalities, gathered from Topinard's and Manouvrier's works and other reputable anthropological sources, highlights the same trend of larger brain weights in colder regions. One finding is that the colder air in the United States leads to larger brains in Black individuals compared to the warmer air in Africa. The table also indicates that when comparing Hindus and Black Africans, the smallest brains are found in the hottest countries, regardless of race or nationality; and that the largest average brain weight is in Scotland, where it rarely gets extremely warm.

The measurement of the cranial cavity is a very uncertain gauge of the size of the brain, for the cerebro-spinal fluid may occupy a large share of the space. Weighing the brain is without doubt the only scientifically certain method of determining its size and mass.

Measuring the cranial cavity is a pretty unreliable way to gauge the size of the brain because a lot of that space can be taken up by cerebrospinal fluid. Weighing the brain is definitely the only scientifically accurate method for determining its size and mass.

Perhaps the most remarkable case in the table of great men's brains is that of Gambetta, who was behind none of his compeers in ability, and yet had the smallest brain of all. The first table of the "Average Weight of the Human Body and Mind," compiled from Dr. Boyd's researches among the sane, which was based on more than two thousand post-mortem examinations, gives 45.9 ounces as the average brain weight of boys from seven to fourteen years of age, and 40.2 ounces as that of boys and 40.1 ounces of girls from four to seven years of age. And this little brain of 40.9 ounces appertained to a man, "a lofty, commanding, mental figure, standing out in bold relief from the crowd of mediocrities which he dwarfs and shadows," the embodiment of the French Republic, who steered it through one of its most perilous crises, "the foremost Frenchman of his time," who "established his claim to be placed in the very front rank of European statesmen," and whose untimely death was spoken of as "nothing less than the sudden extinction of a powerful individual force, one of the most powerful, indeed, of such forces hitherto operating in Europe."

One of the most astonishing cases in the table of great minds is that of Gambetta, who was as capable as any of his peers, yet had the smallest brain of all. The first table of the "Average Weight of the Human Body and Mind," created from Dr. Boyd's studies among healthy individuals, which was based on over two thousand autopsies, indicates that the average brain weight of boys aged seven to fourteen is 45.9 ounces, while for boys aged four to seven it’s 40.2 ounces, and for girls it’s 40.1 ounces. This relatively small brain of 40.9 ounces belonged to a man who was "a towering, impressive mental figure, standing out sharply from the crowd of mediocrities who he overshadowed," the embodiment of the French Republic, who guided it through one of its most dangerous crises, "the leading Frenchman of his time," who "earned his place among the top European statesmen," and whose premature death was described as "nothing less than the sudden loss of a powerful individual force, one of the most significant forces ever seen in Europe."

In illustration of the association of large brains with small minds, we have compiled from various sources of recognized authority a list of one hundred and twenty-five persons of ordinary or weak minds, idiots, imbeciles, and criminals, whose brains were generally larger than those of the distinguished men subjects of the preceding notes. Of these, Rustan, an ignorant and unknown workman, appears with a brain weighing 78.3 ounces;[36] the dwarfed Indian squaw who follows him, of 73.5 ounces;[37] an illiterate and weak-minded man had a brain of 71.3 ounces;[38] and a congenitally imbecile person cited by Dr. Ireland, with one of 70.5 ounces.[39] Another imbecile cited by Dr. Ireland had a brain of 63.2 ounces, and the brain of an idiot with a large head, eighteen years old, who had an idiotic sister, weighed 62.8 ounces. The brain of the idiot, No. 56 of the men in the table, 59.5 ounces, is exceeded in size by those of only five on the list of famous men, while eleven persons recorded as idiots, imbeciles, and children had brains heavier than his. An idiot boy of fourteen years, very malicious, who never spoke, and who nearly killed his sister with a pick, had a brain weight of 57.5 ounces. Thirty men out of three hundred and seventy-five examined in the West Riding Asylum gave brain weights of 55 ounces and upward, showing that such weights are not so rare as some have supposed. In another [246] asylum in England one out of every dozen brains examined showed a weight of 55 ounces or more.

To illustrate the link between large brains and small minds, we've put together a list from various credible sources of 125 individuals with average or weak minds, including idiots, imbeciles, and criminals, whose brains were generally larger than those of the distinguished individuals mentioned earlier. Among them, Rustan, an ignorant and unknown worker, had a brain weighing 78.3 ounces;[36] followed by a small Indian woman weighing 73.5 ounces;[37] an uneducated and weak-minded man with a brain of 71.3 ounces;[38] and a congenitally imbecilic person noted by Dr. Ireland, with a brain weighing 70.5 ounces.[39] Another imbecile noted by Dr. Ireland had a brain weighing 63.2 ounces, and the brain of an 18-year-old idiot with a large head, who had an idiotic sister, weighed 62.8 ounces. The brain of the idiot, number 56 on the men’s list, weighed 59.5 ounces, which is larger than that of only five distinguished individuals, while eleven recorded as idiots, imbeciles, and children had larger brains than his. A 14-year-old idiot boy, who was very malicious, never spoke, and nearly harmed his sister with a pick, had a brain weight of 57.5 ounces. Out of 375 individuals examined at the West Riding Asylum, thirty had brain weights of 55 ounces and above, showing that such weights are not as uncommon as some believe. In another [246] asylum in England, one out of every twelve brains examined weighed 55 ounces or more.

In Nachrichten, of Göttingen, 1860, pp. 70-71, Dr. Rudolph Wagner gave a table of thirty-two persons whose brains he examined, among whom were five distinguished men; but the largest brain weight recorded in it, 55.9 ounces, has opposite to it the legend, "Idiotic grown man."

In Nachrichten, from Göttingen, 1860, pp. 70-71, Dr. Rudolph Wagner provided a table of thirty-two individuals whose brains he studied, including five notable figures; however, the heaviest brain weight noted, 55.9 ounces, is described with the label, "Idiotic grown man."

To this list we might have added a large number of persons whose brains weighed less than 53 ounces. Yet the brains of Daniel Webster, Agassiz, Napoleon I, Lord Byron, Baron Dupuytren, General Skoboleff, and other famous men concerning whose large brains much has been said, weighed less than this; and we might have appended hundreds of brain weights of idiots, imbeciles, and other insignificant persons, from 53 ounces down to 49 ounces—probably about the average weight in central Europe. In support of our contention is, further, an observation by Dr. Rudolph Wagner in Nachrichten, February 29, 1860, pp. 71, 72, that "very intelligent men certainly do not differ strikingly in brain weight from less gifted men."

To this list, we could have added a lot of people whose brains weighed less than 53 ounces. However, the brains of Daniel Webster, Agassiz, Napoleon I, Lord Byron, Baron Dupuytren, General Skoboleff, and other famous individuals—who have been noted for their large brains—actually weighed less than this; and we could have included hundreds of brain weights from individuals with varying degrees of mental capability, ranging from 53 ounces down to 49 ounces—probably around the average weight in Central Europe. Supporting our argument, there's also a point made by Dr. Rudolph Wagner in Nachrichten, February 29, 1860, pp. 71, 72, stating that "very intelligent men certainly do not differ noticeably in brain weight from less gifted men."

Dr. Clendenning presents in the Croonian Lectures the following entries of brain weights of male subjects of different ages, the tendency of which is to show that the male encephalon loses, after it is grown, more than an ounce every ten years:

Dr. Clendenning presents in the Croonian Lectures the following entries of brain weights of male subjects of different ages, which tend to show that the male brain loses over an ounce every ten years after reaching adulthood:

15to30years50.75ounces.
30to50"49.66"
50to70"47.1"
70to100"41.5"

A number of other eminent anatomists have given similar evidence of decrease in brain weight as intellectual power increases.

Several other renowned anatomists have provided similar evidence showing that as intellectual ability increases, brain weight tends to decrease.

The "Professor at the Breakfast Table," the late Dr. O. W. Holmes, a learned man and experienced physician and professor of anatomy in Harvard University for thirty-five years, says: "The walls of the head are double, with a great chamber of air between them, over the smallest and most crowded organs. Can you tell me how much money there is in a safe, which also has thick walls, by kneading the knobs with your fingers? So, when a man fumbles about my forehead, and talks about the organs of individuality, size, etc., I trust him as much as I should if he felt over the outside of my strong box, and told me that there was a five-dollar or a ten-dollar bill under this or that rivet. Perhaps there is, only he doesn't know anything about it. We will add that, even if he knows the inward dimensions of the strong box, he could not thence determine the amount of cash deposited in it."

The "Professor at the Breakfast Table," the late Dr. O. W. Holmes, a knowledgeable and experienced physician and anatomy professor at Harvard University for thirty-five years, states: "The walls of the head are double, with a large air chamber in between them, covering the smallest and most crowded organs. Can you tell me how much money is in a safe with thick walls just by feeling the knobs with your fingers? So, when someone probes my forehead and discusses the organs of individuality, size, etc., I trust him as much as I would if he were feeling the outside of my strongbox and claimed there was a five-dollar or a ten-dollar bill under this or that rivet. There might be, but he doesn’t really know anything about it. We should also add that even if he knows the internal dimensions of the strongbox, he still couldn't figure out how much cash is in it."

The internal size of Spurzheim's skull was in cubic inches exactly[247] the same as that of the skull of Joachim, an imbecile six feet nine inches in height, with a brain weight of 61.2 ounces, whereas Spurzheim's brain weighed only 55 ounces.

The internal volume of Spurzheim's skull was exactly[247] the same in cubic inches as Joachim's skull, who was an imbecile standing six feet nine inches tall, with a brain weight of 61.2 ounces, while Spurzheim's brain weighed only 55 ounces.

Whoever has examined heads in the dissecting room of a medical college knows that, except in rare cases of disease, the brain does not fit the skull, but is surrounded by three membranes and a watery fluid; and this liquid, it has been ascertained, is generally sufficient to admit of its performing certain movements.

Whoever has looked at heads in the dissecting room of a medical college knows that, except for some rare diseases, the brain doesn't perfectly fit the skull. Instead, it's surrounded by three membranes and a watery fluid. This fluid has been found to generally allow the brain to carry out certain movements.

There can be no doubt that the brain moves in the skull, changing its position, according to the laws of gravitation, in much the same way as the lungs, heart, and liver do in the body. It has been observed many times to move, as well as to pulsate, when exposed to view during the life of the individual. It is subject to two regular and constant motions—one produced by the arteries, the other by respiration. It has also a third motion, discovered and described by Dr. M. Luys, who stated, in a paper read before the Academy of Medicine of Paris, that "the brain is subject to certain changes of position, dependent on the attitude of the body. Thus, if a man lies on his back or side, or stands on his head, the brain undergoes certain changes of position in obedience to the laws of gravity; the movements take place slowly, and the brain is five or six minutes in returning to its previous position." From these anatomical data M. Luys deduced some interesting and practical conclusions, by which he explained, for example, the symptoms of vertigo which feeble persons experience when suddenly rising from a horizontal position. He suggested whether the pains of meningitis may not be due to an interference with these normal movements, and urges the value of giving the brain the change produced by a horizontal position at night.

There's no doubt that the brain moves inside the skull, changing its position according to the laws of gravity, similar to how the lungs, heart, and liver shift in the body. It has often been seen to move and pulsate when observed during a person's life. It experiences two regular and constant motions—one from the arteries and the other from breathing. There's also a third motion described by Dr. M. Luys, who noted in a paper presented at the Academy of Medicine in Paris that "the brain undergoes certain changes in position, depending on the body's posture. If a person lies on their back or side, or stands on their head, the brain shifts in response to gravity; these movements happen slowly, and it takes five or six minutes for the brain to return to its original position." From these anatomical observations, M. Luys drew some interesting and practical conclusions, explaining, for instance, the symptoms of vertigo that weak individuals feel when they suddenly get up from a lying down position. He proposed that the pain associated with meningitis might be caused by a disruption of these normal movements and emphasized the importance of allowing the brain to rest in a horizontal position at night.

The average cranial capacity is admitted to be 96 cubic inches in England and 94 in New York; and it is to the unusual quantity of fluid of some cases, and to the extraordinary thickness of the skull in others, that we are to attribute the frequent discrepancy between the external dimensions and the size of the encephalon. Daniel Webster's cranial capacity was 122 cubic inches, yet his brain of 53.5 ounces was just what George Combe has laid down as the average weight for an adult man. Water and lymph, we are told, filled the skull. Professor De Morgan's head, almost free from hair, measured 24.87 inches in circumference, and the dimensions were all those of a very large head, sufficient to contain from 65 to 70 ounces of brain, yet his brain weighed only 52.75 ounces, or little, if at all, above the average in the cold parts of the temperate zones. De Morgan was sixty-five years of age when he died. He was much emaciated, and "the brain was distinctly[248] shrunken," not filling the interior cavity, where its place was supplied, as is usual in such cases, by serum or water. There is no known method whereby any man can determine whether brain or water fills the greater part of any living skull. A small orange may have a thin rind, and contain a good amount of eatable substance, while a large one may have so thick a skin that the fruit proves utterly disappointing.

The average cranial capacity is considered to be 96 cubic inches in England and 94 in New York. The frequent discrepancies between actual measurements and brain size are often due to the unusual amount of fluid in some cases and the remarkable thickness of the skull in others. Daniel Webster had a cranial capacity of 122 cubic inches, yet his brain weighed 53.5 ounces, which is exactly what George Combe stated is the average weight for an adult man. It’s said that water and lymph filled his skull. Professor De Morgan's almost hairless head measured 24.87 inches in circumference, and his head size was quite large, able to hold between 65 to 70 ounces of brain. However, his brain weighed only 52.75 ounces, which is just slightly above average for colder regions of the temperate zones. De Morgan was sixty-five when he died. He was quite emaciated, and "the brain was distinctly shrunken," not filling the interior space, which was typically taken up by serum or water in such cases. There isn't a reliable way for anyone to determine if brain tissue or water occupies most of a living skull. A small orange can have a thin skin and contain a good amount of edible fruit, while a larger one might have such a thick peel that the fruit turns out to be extremely disappointing.

Another proof that the skull is formed without regard to the brain is the following: "The bony cabinet and its contents are developed, to a certain extent at least, independently. This is very clearly demonstrated by a fact which was observed by Gratiolet, and is too frequently forgotten. The subject is an infant in whom the cranium presented the normal conformation. The brain was, nevertheless, almost entirely wanting."[40]

Another proof that the skull forms without considering the brain is this: "The bony casing and its contents develop, at least to some degree, independently. This is clearly shown by a fact noted by Gratiolet, which is often overlooked. The subject is an infant whose skull had the normal shape. However, the brain was nearly completely absent."[40]

Dr. Gall was a poor arithmetician, and his biographer says that every kind of numerical calculation fatigued him. He could not go through a process of multiplication or division that was at all complicated, and knew nothing of geometry or of the problems of mathematics.[41] George Combe said of himself: "Arithmetic has always been to me a profound mystery, and to master the multiplication table an insurmountable task.... This faculty in me is, in fact, idiotic." Again he said: "When a boy, I never could learn arithmetic. At the end of five years' teaching I could not subtract, divide, or multiply any considerable number of figures with accuracy and facility, and can not now do so.... At the present day I can not sum a column of figures correctly."[42]

Dr. Gall was not good at math, and his biographer notes that any sort of numerical calculation tired him out. He couldn’t handle any complicated multiplication or division, and had no knowledge of geometry or math problems.[41] George Combe once said about himself: "Arithmetic has always been a complete mystery to me, and mastering the multiplication table felt impossible... This ability in me is, honestly, idiotic." He also mentioned: "As a child, I could never grasp arithmetic. After five years of instruction, I still couldn’t subtract, divide, or multiply any significant numbers accurately or easily, and I still can’t today... Even now, I can’t correctly add a column of numbers."[42]

With these facts in view, our wonder at finding the theories of these men at variance with all exact calculation is considerably diminished. We propose to test some of their theories by arithmetical processes. We found that the sixty famous men entered in the table of authenticated brain weights show an average of 51.3 ounces. We now take all the idiots and imbeciles in the table of "Large Brains and Small Minds," and find the average 59.4 ounces; so that the matter is left to stand thus: Ten idiots and five imbeciles average 59.2 ounces; sixty famous men average 51.39 ounces: in favor of idiocy and imbecility, 7.9 ounces.

With these facts in mind, our surprise at discovering that the theories of these men clash with all precise calculations is significantly reduced. We plan to evaluate some of their theories through arithmetic processes. We found that the sixty notable individuals listed in the table of verified brain weights have an average of 51.3 ounces. Now, we take all the idiots and imbeciles from the table of "Large Brains and Small Minds" and find the average to be 59.4 ounces; so the results stand as follows: Ten idiots and five imbeciles average 59.2 ounces; sixty famous individuals average 51.39 ounces, showing a difference of 7.9 ounces in favor of idiocy and imbecility.

The heaviest brain in the table of small minds is that of Rustan, an ignorant and entirely unknown laborer. He was a healthy man, and his brain, when it was weighed, was in a healthy condition. Its weight was recorded by Dr. Carl A. Rudolphi, a Swedish naturalist [249] and physiologist of Stockholm, who became professor of anatomy and physiology at Berlin in 1810. It reached the unexampled figure of 78.3 ounces; while the brain of Turgenieff, the heaviest among famous men, was 71 ounces—showing a difference of 7.3 ounces in behalf of the inferior mind.

The heaviest brain on the list of small minds belongs to Rustan, an uneducated and completely unknown laborer. He was a healthy man, and his brain was in good condition when it was weighed. Dr. Carl A. Rudolphi, a Swedish naturalist and physiologist from Stockholm who became a professor of anatomy and physiology in Berlin in 1810, recorded its weight. It reached an extraordinary 78.3 ounces, while Turgenieff, the heaviest among well-known individuals, had a brain that weighed 71 ounces—showing a difference of 7.3 ounces in favor of the lesser mind. [249]

Since writing the above, the following appeared in Tit-Bits, a weekly paper published in London, England, March 19, 1898:

Since writing the above, the following appeared in Tit-Bits, a weekly publication based in London, England, on March 19, 1898:

"It must not be assumed, however, that intellect is in direct ratio to the weight of the brain; for while the brains of certain intellectual men, such as ... Dr. Abercromby, weighed more than 60 ounces, a certain Strand newspaper-boy, who was in intelligence almost an idiot, had a brain which weighed no less than 80 ounces."

"It shouldn't be assumed, though, that intelligence directly correlates with brain weight; while the brains of some intelligent people, like Dr. Abercromby, weighed more than 60 ounces, a particular newspaper boy from the Strand, who was nearly an idiot in terms of intelligence, had a brain that weighed at least 80 ounces."

Dr. Austin Flint, of New York, in his Physiology, gives the average weight of the brains of men as 50.2 ounces. Dr. Peacock, of Great Britain, makes it 50 ounces 3 drachms between twenty-five and fifty years of age. Dr. Thurman gives 49 ounces as the average throughout Europe, while Dr. F. Tiedemann, a famous naturalist of Germany, reckons it at 53.2 ounces.[43] Dr. Krause, a learned German, places it still higher, at 55.4 ounces.[44] Now, if we strike a balance between the highest and the lowest of these estimates, the mean will be 52.2. Then, recalling the average of our sixty famous men, which we found to be 51.3 ounces, it is shown to be nine tenths of an ounce below the average of ordinary men.

Dr. Austin Flint from New York states in his Physiology that the average weight of men's brains is 50.2 ounces. Dr. Peacock from Great Britain puts it at 50 ounces and 3 drachms for men aged between twenty-five and fifty years. Dr. Thurman claims the average across Europe is 49 ounces, while Dr. F. Tiedemann, a well-known naturalist from Germany, estimates it to be 53.2 ounces.[43] Dr. Krause, a knowledgeable German scholar, states an even higher figure of 55.4 ounces.[44] If we average the highest and lowest of these estimates, we get a mean of 52.2. Considering that the average weight of the sixty famous men we analyzed is 51.3 ounces, this shows that their average is nine-tenths of an ounce below that of typical men.

Our tables of national average brain weights do not quite agree, because some of the subjects had been wasted by disease for many months before death, whereby the brain was diminished along with other parts of the body. Those who, like Dr. Boyd's subjects, died in hospital, showed too light an average for healthy Englishmen. Dr. Krause's subjects may have been healthy men killed in battle, and those of Tiedemann persons who died suddenly. Executed criminals show a fairly high average of brain weight, because there has been in their case no diminution through long-continued illness.[45] We should recollect that Whewell, the famous English philosopher and head master of Trinity College, Cambridge, England, was in good health when killed by a fall from his horse; so was Gambetta, when his life was ended by a pistol shot. The brain, however, suffers less from the power of disease than the general bodily form. One month under the most wasting sickness would probably not [250] diminish the brain more than an ounce or two, but a year or more would make a considerable difference.

Our tables of national average brain weights don't completely align, because some of the subjects had been severely affected by illness for many months before death, causing the brain to shrink along with other parts of the body. Those who, like Dr. Boyd's subjects, died in a hospital showed a lighter average than healthy Englishmen. Dr. Krause's subjects might have been healthy men who were killed in battle, and Tiedemann's subjects were people who died suddenly. Executed criminals show a fairly high average brain weight because, in their cases, there was no reduction due to long-lasting illness.[45] We should remember that Whewell, the well-known English philosopher and headmaster of Trinity College, Cambridge, England, was in good health when he died from a fall off his horse; the same goes for Gambetta, who was shot. However, the brain is less affected by disease than the overall physique. A month of severe illness would likely not reduce the brain weight by more than an ounce or two, but a year or more could lead to a significant difference.

Taking, now, the sixty heaviest brains of persons not noted for intellectual greatness, we find the averages to be 63.2 ounces. Comparing this with the average of sixty famous men, 51.3 ounces, we find a difference in favor of imbeciles, idiots, criminals, and men of ordinary mind of 11.9 ounces. George Combe estimated that about 53.5 ounces was the average weight of the adult brain. Thus the average brain weight of all the eminent men whom we have brought into the comparison, 51.3 ounces, is below Combe's estimate of that of mankind in general. Again, the ten heaviest brains of our list of famous men give an average weight of 61.1 ounces, while the average given by the ten heaviest of the opposite class is 70.4 ounces, or 9.3 ounces greater. While our list of eminent men shows only five whose brains exceeded 58.6 ounces in weight, those of seventy-six of the common throng—seven of them idiots or imbeciles—rise above that figure. These figures augur badly for the doctrine that would attach importance to heavy brains for giving force and depth of individual character.

Taking now the sixty heaviest brains of individuals not known for their intellectual prowess, we find the average weight to be 63.2 ounces. When we compare this to the average of sixty famous individuals, which is 51.3 ounces, there is a notable difference of 11.9 ounces in favor of those considered imbeciles, idiots, criminals, and ordinary-minded people. George Combe estimated that the average weight of an adult brain is about 53.5 ounces. Therefore, the average brain weight of the eminent men we've analyzed, at 51.3 ounces, is below Combe's estimate for humanity as a whole. Additionally, the ten heaviest brains from our list of famous individuals average 61.1 ounces, while the average for the ten heaviest brains from the other group is 70.4 ounces, or 9.3 ounces more. Our list of notable men includes only five whose brains weigh more than 58.6 ounces, whereas seventy-six ordinary individuals—seven of whom are idiots or imbeciles—exceed that weight. These statistics cast doubt on the idea that heavier brains are essential for strength and depth of individual character.

Phrenologists assert that each organ of a mental faculty occupies a certain position perceptible on the outside of the brain, with a definite area which they have mapped out. They also hold that each of these organs extends to the center of the base of the brain, tapering to it somewhat like a cone, having its base turned toward the outer world. They make no account of the fissures, the intervening sulci and anfractuosities that must cut many of these supposed cones, some at right and some at oblique angles. Then the large, long cavities or ventricles intercept and would hinder many of them from reaching the central, basilar part of the brain. The anatomical structure of the brain thus appears fatal to this theory of the organs.

Phrenologists claim that each part of a mental function is located in a specific area on the surface of the brain, which they've mapped out. They believe that each of these parts extends down to the center of the base of the brain, tapering like a cone, with the wider end facing outward. They ignore the grooves, the spaces, and the twists that must cut through many of these supposed cones, some at right angles and some at slanted angles. Additionally, the large cavities or ventricles would block many of these from reaching the central base of the brain. Therefore, the brain's anatomical structure seems to undermine this theory of mental organs.

Large and complicated convolutions of the brain with deep sulci have been regarded by some persons as inseparable from superior powers of mind. The supposition is erroneous and groundless. The rodents, such as beavers, squirrels, rats, mice, etc., have but little brain and no convolutions whatsoever;[46] yet the beaver exhibits great foresight, economy, industry, and mechanical skill in building his dam, erecting his house, and storing up bark as food for the winter. Moreover, these animals live in societies and labor in union by ingenious methods for a common purpose, with nice judgment. "So great a variety of labors," says Dr. Leuret, "is needed for the constructions carried on by the beaver; they include so many instances of well-made choice, so many accidental difficulties are surmounted [251] by these animals, that it is impossible not to recognize in their actions the characteristics of a rather high intelligence."[47] The sheep has a much larger brain than the beaver, with numerous and complete convolutions, yet it is one of the most stupid of domestic animals. Again, though birds have convolutions in the cerebellum, they have none in the cerebrum, and yet they are more capable of education than any living beings except the human race. The eagle is complete master of the lamb; the magpie, the hawk, the raven, and the parrot with his talking powers, are not excelled in sagacity by the dog, the horse, or the elephant, notwithstanding the latter animals have brains of superior size and elaborate convolutions.

Large and complex folds in the brain with deep grooves have been seen by some as essential for higher mental abilities. This assumption is wrong and unfounded. Rodents like beavers, squirrels, rats, and mice have small brains with no folds at all;[46] yet beavers show remarkable foresight, resourcefulness, hard work, and mechanical skill in building their dams, constructing their homes, and storing bark for winter food. Furthermore, these animals live in groups and work together using clever methods toward a common goal, demonstrating good judgment. "Such a wide range of tasks," says Dr. Leuret, "is necessary for the constructions performed by the beaver; they involve many examples of well-made choices, and many unexpected challenges that these animals overcome, making it impossible not to see in their actions signs of quite advanced intelligence."[47] The sheep has a much larger brain than the beaver, with many complete folds, yet it is one of the dullest domestic animals. Additionally, while birds have folds in the cerebellum, they have none in the cerebrum, but they are more capable of learning than any other living creatures besides humans. The eagle easily dominates the lamb; the magpie, hawk, raven, and talking parrot are just as wise as the dog, horse, or elephant, even though the latter animals have larger brains and more complex folds.

Squirrels manifest foresight and economy in storing nuts for the winter's use; yet they have no brain convolutions. The cetacea, especially whales, have much larger brains than men, with more numerous and more complex convolutions and deeper sulci; yet their intelligence bears no comparison with that of the human race.

Squirrels show foresight and resourcefulness by storing nuts for the winter, even though they don’t have brain folds. Cetaceans, especially whales, have much larger brains than humans, with more folds and deeper grooves; however, their intelligence isn’t comparable to that of humans.

Three eminent men are known to have had very small convolutions of the brain—viz., Louis Asseline, Dr. Tiedemann, and Baron von Liebig. We have to add to this remarkable list two, not named, but described by Dr. Wagner as having been very intelligent, who yet possessed very few convolutions in their very small brains.[48] As Wagner's book was printed before Liebig died, he could not have been one of the two to whom the author referred.

Three prominent men are known to have very small brain convolutions—namely, Louis Asseline, Dr. Tiedemann, and Baron von Liebig. We must also add to this notable list two individuals, not named, but described by Dr. Wagner as being quite intelligent, who also had very few convolutions in their small brains.[48] As Wagner's book was published before Liebig passed away, he could not be one of the two individuals the author mentioned.

Idiots often possess as large brains as men distinguished for intellectual power, and their brains have as deep sulci, and convolutions as fine, as large, and as complex. Our table of the common and weak-minded contains a mention of an idiot whose brain weighed 53 ounces, or exactly as much as Napoleon's, and had fine convolutions and a large frontal lobe, but who could never learn to speak.

Idiots often have brains that are just as large as those of people renowned for their intelligence, and their brains have as deep grooves and as fine, large, and complex folds. Our table of common and weak-minded individuals includes a note about an idiot whose brain weighed 53 ounces, which is exactly the same as Napoleon's. This brain also had fine folds and a large frontal lobe, but the person could never learn to speak.

The elephant carries a far larger brain than man, finely formed, broad and high in front, with much more numerous and complex convolutions and deeper anfractuosities, and yet no intelligent person would for a moment claim that its mind excels or even equals that of man.

The elephant has a much larger brain than humans, well-structured, wide and tall at the front, with many more complex folds and deeper grooves, yet no intelligent person would ever claim that its mind is better or even on par with that of humans.

It may be well here to allow some eminent physiologists to give their views on this subject. "The researches of anatomists have disposed of every point advanced by Gall. Curiously enough, M. Camille Dareste has placed beyond dispute the fact that the number and depth of the convolutions bear no direct proportion to the development of intelligence, whereas they do bear a direct proportion [252] to the size of the animal.... It is notorious that the instinct of propagation, the instinct of destructiveness, the instinct of constructiveness, and other qualities are manifested by animals having no brains, nothing but simple ganglia."[49]

It might be helpful to let some prominent physiologists share their thoughts on this topic. "The studies conducted by anatomists have addressed every argument made by Gall. Interestingly, M. Camille Dareste has proven that the number and depth of brain convolutions do not directly correlate with intelligence development, but they do correlate with the size of the animal.... It's well-known that instincts like reproduction, destruction, construction, and other traits are shown by animals that don't have brains, just simple ganglia."[252]

Dr. Bastian demonstrates the convolutional theory thus: "In animals of the same group or order, the number and complexity of the convolutions increase with the size of the animal.... There can not, therefore, be among animals of the same order any simple or definite relation between the degree of intelligence of the creature and the number or disposition of its cerebral convolutions."[50]

Dr. Bastian explains the convolutional theory like this: "In animals of the same group or order, the number and complexity of the convolutions increase with the size of the animal.... Therefore, there can't be any simple or clear relationship among animals of the same order between the level of intelligence of the creature and the number or arrangement of its brain convolutions."[50]

We have the following testimony in our favor from Dr. Rudolph Wagner, of Göttingen: "Examples of highly complicated convolutions I have never seen, even among eminent men whose brains I have examined.... Many convolutions and great brain weight often go together. Higher intelligence appears in both kinds of brains, where there are many or where there are few convolutions. It is not proved that special mental gifts go with many convolutions."[51]

We have this testimony in our favor from Dr. Rudolph Wagner of Göttingen: "I've never seen examples of highly complicated brain convolutions, even among notable individuals whose brains I’ve examined... Many convolutions and a large brain weight often go hand in hand. Higher intelligence can be found in both types of brains, whether they have a lot or just a few convolutions. It's not proven that particular mental abilities are associated with many convolutions." [51]

Another theory of mind is based on the gray matter of the brain, the amount of which has been supposed to be proportionate to mental capacity. As this gray matter, however, averages only about one fifth of an inch in thickness, it seems rather a thin foundation for the human intellect if the condition is good that "size is a measure of power."

Another theory of the mind is based on the gray matter of the brain, which is thought to be linked to mental capacity. However, since this gray matter is only about one-fifth of an inch thick on average, it seems like a pretty flimsy basis for human intellect if we accept the idea that "size is a measure of power."

The late Dr. W. B. Carpenter stated the matter thus: "The cortical substance or gray matter of the hemispheres essentially consists of that vesicular nerve substance which, in the spinal cord as in the ganglionic masses generally, is found to occupy the interior. The usual thickness is about one fifth of an inch; but considerable variations present themselves in this respect, as also in the depth of the convolutions."[52]

The late Dr. W. B. Carpenter put it this way: "The cortical substance, or gray matter, of the hemispheres mainly consists of that vesicular nerve substance which, like in the spinal cord and other ganglionic masses, is found in the interior. The typical thickness is about one-fifth of an inch, but there are significant variations in this regard, as well as in the depth of the convolutions."[52]

Daniel Webster's brain had gray substance to the depth only of one sixteenth of an inch.[53] It thus appears that his brain had a thinner layer of gray matter than the average of common-minded men—one among the many proofs that facts are against all theories that connect brain conditions with intellectual power.

Daniel Webster's brain had gray matter only one sixteenth of an inch deep.[53] This shows that his brain had a thinner layer of gray matter than the average person, which is just one of many pieces of evidence that contradicts theories linking brain conditions to intellectual ability.

Dr. Ireland thus describes an idiot boy who, though thirteen or fourteen years of age, was only three feet eight inches in height: "In expression he was dull and inanimate, with an old face and a short, [253] squat figure.... The convolutions were broad and simple, but not shallow. The gray matter was as broad as usual."[54]

Dr. Ireland describes a boy with an intellectual disability who, despite being thirteen or fourteen years old, was only three feet eight inches tall: "His expression was blank and lifeless, with an aged face and a short, chunky body.... The brain folds were wide and simple, but not shallow. The gray matter was as wide as normal."[253]

The writer has examined many brains of persons morally or intellectually below the average—such as murderers, negroes, and others sunk in ignorance. He has invariably found the layer of vesicular or gray matter to be thicker than that of Daniel Webster's brain. Elephants, porpoises, whales, dolphins, and the grampus all have this layer thicker than the most intellectual men. Another great objection to locating mind in the gray matter of the brain is that this substance is found in the interior part of the spinal cord, and in all the nerve centers throughout the body; so that, if mind is situated in it, it is not confined to the brain, but dwells in the spine also, and is distributed all through the human frame. Still another objection lies in the fact that wherever the gray matter exists near the surface of the brain, it consists of three distinct layers, separated by a white substance, and the outermost layer is white, not gray.[55]

The writer has looked at many brains of people who are morally or intellectually below average—like murderers, criminals, and others who are deeply ignorant. He has consistently found that the layer of vesicular or gray matter is thicker than that of Daniel Webster's brain. Elephants, porpoises, whales, dolphins, and the grampus all have this layer thicker than the most intellectual men. Another significant issue with identifying the mind in the gray matter of the brain is that this substance is also found in the inner part of the spinal cord and in all the nerve centers throughout the body; so, if the mind is located there, it isn't just in the brain but also in the spine and distributed throughout the human body. Yet another problem is that wherever gray matter is located near the surface of the brain, it consists of three distinct layers, separated by a white substance, and the outermost layer is white, not gray.[55]

The septum lucidum consists of gray matter. The corpus striatum, situated at the base of the lateral ventricles, nearly in the center of the brain, was from three eighths to half an inch in diameter in an ox which was dissected in Edinburgh. This is about the same amount as is found in the corpus striatum of the human brain. There would be lively times if it were possible for a mental faculty to occupy at once all the localities where gray matter is found!

The septum lucidum is made up of gray matter. The corpus striatum, located at the base of the lateral ventricles, almost in the center of the brain, measured about three-eighths to half an inch in diameter in an ox that was dissected in Edinburgh. This is roughly the same size as what is found in the corpus striatum of the human brain. It would be quite a scene if a mental faculty could simultaneously inhabit all the areas where gray matter is located!

None of the suppositions about certain qualities of mind inhering in particular portions of the brain have been proved, nor have they stood the tests of science.

None of the assumptions about specific mental qualities linked to particular parts of the brain have been proven, nor have they withstood scientific scrutiny.

The theories which have assumed that the cultivation of the intellect gives shape and size to the brain within and consequently to the skull without, advocates of which have not been wanting, have been disproved by the collected facts. "There is no proof," says Dr. J. C. Nott, in his Types of Mankind, "of the theory that the cultivation of the mind or of one set of faculties can give expansion or increased size of brain. The Teutonic races, in their barbarous state, two thousand years ago, possessed brains as large as now, and so with other races."

The theories suggesting that developing the intellect shapes and enlarges the brain and, in turn, the skull have been refuted by the gathered evidence. "There is no proof," says Dr. J. C. Nott in his Types of Mankind, "that cultivating the mind or specific faculties can increase the size of the brain. The Teutonic races, in their primitive state two thousand years ago, had brains as large as they do now, and the same goes for other races."

The St. Louis Globe Democrat of November 13, 1885, gives an account of some excavations on the Mount Ararat farm, east of Carrollton, Illinois, where the bones of thirty-two Indians or mound builders were unearthed. "They were not a diminutive race, as some people have supposed, some of the thigh bones being sixteen inches long, and some of the skulls twenty-four inches in circumference." [254] A skull having a circumference of twenty-four inches means a head that measured from twenty-five to twenty-six and a half in life, when the cranium was covered with skin and muscles. The average head of white men in New York to-day is only twenty-two and a half inches round. So the culture of the white race for centuries has not developed their heads to near the size of those of the uncultured mound builders who inhabited America many centuries ago. Our own opinion is that cultivation by means of a thorough classical education, where the appetite is restrained, as usually occurs, tends rather to diminish the size of the head, by reducing the temporal muscles and the adipose tissue under the scalp.

The St. Louis Globe Democrat from November 13, 1885, reports on some excavations at the Mount Ararat farm, east of Carrollton, Illinois, where the bones of thirty-two Native Americans or mound builders were uncovered. "They were not a small race, as some have believed, with some thigh bones measuring sixteen inches long and some skulls having a circumference of twenty-four inches." [254] A skull with a circumference of twenty-four inches suggests a head that measured between twenty-five and twenty-six and a half inches when covered with skin and muscles. The average head size for white men in New York today is only twenty-two and a half inches around. This indicates that the culture of the white race over the centuries hasn't resulted in head sizes approaching those of the uncultured mound builders who lived in America many centuries ago. We believe that rigorous classical education, which often involves some level of restraint on appetite, tends to reduce head size by decreasing the size of the temporal muscles and the fat tissue under the scalp.

The Engis skull is one of the most ancient known to exist, and belonged to the stone age, or about the same time as the Neanderthal skull. Professor Huxley describes it as being well formed, and considerably larger than the average of European skulls to-day in the width and height of the forehead and in the cubic capacity of the whole.

The Engis skull is one of the oldest known skulls and dates back to the Stone Age, around the same time as the Neanderthal skull. Professor Huxley describes it as well-formed and significantly larger than the average European skulls today, considering the width and height of the forehead and the overall volume.

Quatrefages, in The Human Species, p. 312, says: "This skull (the Engis or Cro-Magnon), so remarkable for its fine proportion, is also remarkable for its capacity. According to M. Broca, who could only work under precautions calculated to diminish the amount, it is equal to at least 1,590 cubic centimetres (96.99 cubic inches). I have already remarked that this number is far higher than the mean taken from modern Parisians; it is equally so in comparison with other European nations."

Quatrefages, in The Human Species, p. 312, says: "This skull (the Engis or Cro-Magnon), notable for its fine proportions, is also notable for its size. According to M. Broca, who could only work in ways that minimized the measurement, it has a volume of at least 1,590 cubic centimeters (96.99 cubic inches). I've already pointed out that this number is much higher than the average from modern Parisians; it is also significantly higher compared to other European nations."

These facts all conspire to prove that the cultivation of thousands of years has not increased the size of human skulls. In 1886, we measured many of the skulls unearthed at Pompeii, the remains of Romans who lived nearly two thousand years ago, and we found them on the average larger in every way, but especially in the forehead, than the skulls of Romans of this century.

These facts all come together to show that thousands of years of cultivation haven't increased the size of human skulls. In 1886, we measured many of the skulls excavated at Pompeii, the remains of Romans who lived almost two thousand years ago, and we found them to be larger on average in every way, particularly in the forehead, compared to the skulls of Romans from this century.

In the museums of Switzerland we measured in 1887 several skulls of the ancient lake dwellers of that country, and found them larger in all respects, but particularly in the forehead, than those of the Swiss people of the last fifty years. The average circumference of the skulls we measured in the catacombs of Paris was twenty-one inches and a half, which is about an inch more than that of Parisians who have died within the past fifty years.

In the museums of Switzerland, we measured several skulls of the ancient lake dwellers in 1887 and discovered they were larger in every aspect, especially in the forehead, compared to those of Swiss people from the last fifty years. The average circumference of the skulls we examined in the catacombs of Paris was twenty-one and a half inches, which is about an inch more than that of Parisians who have died in the last fifty years.

"The average internal capacity of the Peruvian skull is only seventy-three cubic inches; that of Toltec skulls, seventy-seven inches, and that of barbarous tribes, eighty-two inches; so that the extraordinary anomaly is presented of a larger brain being possessed by the barbarous tribes than by the nations who achieved no mean degree of civilization in Central America and Peru. The average[255] European skull is ninety-three inches in bulk."[56] The author was informed by Mr. Lucien Carr, of the Ethnological Museum of Harvard University, that the capacity of the Peruvian skulls was about one hundred centimetres smaller than that of the skulls of any other people living in America at the same time. Yet that small-headed people was the most highly civilized of all.

"The average internal capacity of the Peruvian skull is only seventy-three cubic inches, compared to seventy-seven inches for Toltec skulls and eighty-two inches for barbarous tribes. This presents the unusual situation where barbarous tribes have larger brains than the nations that developed a significant level of civilization in Central America and Peru. The average European skull is ninety-three inches in size.[255] The author was informed by Mr. Lucien Carr from the Ethnological Museum of Harvard University that the capacity of the Peruvian skulls was about one hundred centimeters smaller than that of any other people living in America at the same time. Yet, that group with smaller heads was the most highly civilized of all."


SPELEOLOGY, OR CAVE EXPLORATION.[57]

By M. E. A. MARTEL.

By M. E. A. MARTEL.

The not very graceful word speleology was composed a few years ago by M. Émile Rivière out of Greek elements, as a translation of the German Höhlenkunde, to signify the study of caves. The study claims a place among the sciences, and is, I believe, able to justify its claim. Caves have been subjects of interest and curiosity in all times and countries. In the primitive ages, when palæolithic man was obliged to defend himself against the large Quaternary wild beasts, and did not yet know how to construct cabins, he lived in the most inaccessible caves, or those easiest to close, which he could find. Afterward, when man had advanced in civilization to the neolithic stage, and had somewhat improved tools and arms, having learned to build huts and villages, caves became simply burial places. In the historical periods of antiquity they were transformed into pagan sanctuaries or temporary hiding places in times of revolt, civil war, or invasion. Down to the middle ages and the renascence, they shared this function with abandoned quarries. Through these changes they gradually became objects of popular fear and absurd legend. I have nearly everywhere in France found legendary and profound belief in some monstrous basilisk or dragon in the depths of dark caverns, guarding immense treasures; and woe to the rash adventurer who tried to steal these riches!

The awkward word speleology was created a few years ago by M. Émile Rivière using Greek elements, as a translation of the German Höhlenkunde, meaning the study of caves. This field holds a place among the sciences, and I believe it can justify that status. Caves have fascinated people throughout history and across cultures. In ancient times, when Paleolithic humans had to defend themselves against large Quaternary wild animals and didn’t yet know how to build shelters, they lived in the most inaccessible caves or those that were easiest to hide. Later, as humans progressed to the Neolithic era and improved their tools and weapons, learning to build huts and villages, caves became primarily burial sites. In ancient historical periods, they were used as pagan sanctuaries or temporary hideouts during times of rebellion, civil war, or invasion. Up until the Middle Ages and the Renaissance, they shared this role with abandoned quarries. Throughout these changes, caves gradually became objects of popular fear and bizarre legends. I have often encountered legends and deep-seated beliefs in France about some monstrous basilisk or dragon lurking in the depths of dark caverns, guarding vast treasures; and beware the daring adventurer who attempts to steal these riches!

In short, caves have suffered their vicissitudes; their use as habitations seems to be inversely proportioned to the degree of civilization. The miserable aborigines of Australia have not yet quite abandoned them; and in France the present occupation of the grottoes of Ezy, in the Eure, by some outcast families, who lead a sordid existence in them, indifferent to all social conventions, has recently been cited as an extremely curious anthropological phenomenon.

In short, caves have experienced many ups and downs; their use as homes seems to be directly related to the level of civilization. The unfortunate indigenous people of Australia have not completely given them up yet; and in France, the current use of the Ezy caves in the Eure by some marginalized families, who live in squalor and disregard all social norms, has recently been noted as a very interesting anthropological phenomenon.

Science, too, has laid its hold on caves only within a little more than a century; for it was not till 1774 that Esper recognized that [256] the large bones taken from the caverns near Baireuth, in Bavaria, were not those of human giants, but of extinct animals, and he called them, they being petrified by limestone, zoöliths, or animal-stones; and it was his remarks upon them that drew Cuvier's attention to paleontology.

Science has only really focused on caves for just over a century. It wasn't until 1774 that Esper realized that the large bones found in the caves near Baireuth, in Bavaria, weren't from human giants, but from extinct animals. He named them, as they were fossilized by limestone, zoöliths, or animal-stones. His observations on these bones caught Cuvier's interest in paleontology.

Three sciences have of late years been advanced by the explorations of caves: paleontology; prehistory, or research among the remains of primitive men and their industries; and zoölogy, or the study of living beings. The animals of caverns—crustaceans, insects, batrachians, and fishes—constitute a special fauna, which has been for fifty years a subject of study to naturalists of various nations, and to the anatomy of which M. Armand Viré, of the Natural History Museum of Paris, has been giving special attention for five years past.

Recently, three fields of science have advanced thanks to cave explorations: paleontology; prehistory, which involves studying the remains of early humans and their tools; and zoology, the study of living organisms. The creatures found in caves—such as crustaceans, insects, amphibians, and fish—make up a unique fauna that has been studied by naturalists from various countries for the past fifty years. M. Armand Viré from the Natural History Museum in Paris has been focusing on the anatomy of these cave animals for the last five years.

There are other sciences the study of which in connection with caves, while capable of yielding valuable fruits, has been too long neglected: geology, for their origin and formation; mineralogy, for their relations to metallic veins; meteorology, for thermometrical and barometrical variations and the formation of carbonic acid; terrestrial physics, for the experiments on gravity that might be carried on in deep vertical pits, supplementing the observations of Foucault in the Pantheon at Paris, and Airy in the English mines; hydrology, which has hardly yet perceived that caves are predominantly great laboratories of springs; agriculture, which might transform them into reservoirs for times of drought or storage basins in case of flood; and public hygiene, which is just beginning to discover that they may harbor in their fissures hitherto unsuspected causes of contamination of the water of the springs that issue from them. The number and importance of these new problems that have arisen from the recent extension of underground investigations seem fully to justify the specialization of the science of caves—another creation of the Speleological Society, now four years old. This special interest in the science of caves began about fifteen years ago, when, in 1883, three members of the Austro-German Alpine Club—Herren Harske, Marinitsch, and Müller—resumed in the limestone plateaus of Istria and Carniola called the Karst, explorations which had been actively and profitably carried on in the middle of the century, from 1850 to 1857, by Dr. Adolf Schmidt, whose discoveries in the caves of Adelsberg, Planina, and St. Canzion won him a membership in the Vienna Academy of Sciences. Their efforts and those of Herr F. Kraus, who died last year, had the result of interesting the Austrian Government in the subject; and since 1886 various engineers have been commissioned by the Minister of Agriculture to make official explorations and construct economical works in the caves and underground[257] rivers of Istria, Carniola, and Herzegovina. Credits are granted every year for enterprises which prove to be more useful than would at first be thought.

There are other sciences related to the study of caves that, while capable of providing valuable insights, have been overlooked for too long: geology, for their origin and formation; mineralogy, for their connections to metal deposits; meteorology, for temperature and pressure changes and the formation of carbon dioxide; terrestrial physics, for conducting gravity experiments in deep vertical shafts, adding to the observations made by Foucault in the Pantheon in Paris and Airy in the English mines; hydrology, which has only recently recognized that caves are primarily large laboratories for springs; agriculture, which could turn them into reservoirs during droughts or storage basins in case of floods; and public health, which is just starting to realize that they may harbor unexpected sources of contamination in the spring waters that flow from them. The number and significance of these new issues that have emerged from recent underground investigations fully justify the specialization of cave science—another initiative of the Speleological Society, which is now four years old. This specific interest in cave science began about fifteen years ago, when, in 1883, three members of the Austro-German Alpine Club—Herren Harske, Marinitsch, and Müller—picked up explorations in the limestone plateaus of Istria and Carniola known as the Karst, which had been actively and fruitfully conducted in the mid-19th century, from 1850 to 1857, by Dr. Adolf Schmidt, whose findings in the caves of Adelsberg, Planina, and St. Canzion earned him a spot in the Vienna Academy of Sciences. Their efforts, along with those of Herr F. Kraus, who passed away last year, caught the interest of the Austrian Government; since 1886, various engineers have been assigned by the Minister of Agriculture to carry out official explorations and develop cost-effective projects in the caves and underground rivers of Istria, Carniola, and Herzegovina. Funds are allocated each year for projects that turn out to be more beneficial than initially expected.

It was at the same time, between 1883 and 1885, that I made my first investigation in the Causses of Lozère, Aveyron, and the adjoining departments of France, the results of which were to reveal for the first time to the public, and even to geographers, the picturesque beauties, then unknown, and now becoming the fashion, of the gorges of the Tarn, Jenta, and Dourbie, the rocks of Montpelier le Vieux, etc. In my excursions over the plateaus of the Causses I frequently met, at the level of the surface, open, dark holes, and mouths of vertical wells—avens—the depths of which no one had ever looked into, unsoundable, they said, which the peasants naturally took to be real mouths of hell. Recollecting what I had admired at Adelsberg and in various caves of the Pyrenees, I guessed these avens might also be doorways to subterranean splendors and scientific treasures. So I began in 1888 the methodical exploration of the unexamined natural cavities of my own land first, and then of other countries of Europe; and since then I have devoted several weeks every year to this work.

It was during the years between 1883 and 1885 that I conducted my first research in the Causses of Lozère, Aveyron, and the nearby regions of France. The findings from this research revealed, for the first time to the public and even to geographers, the previously unknown and now trendy scenic wonders of the gorges of the Tarn, Jenta, and Dourbie, as well as the rocks of Montpelier le Vieux, among others. While exploring the plateaus of the Causses, I often came across open, dark holes and entrances to vertical wells—avens—which nobody had ever investigated, as they were said to be unfathomable, and the local farmers naturally assumed these were true entrances to hell. Remembering the beauty I had seen in Adelsberg and various caves in the Pyrenees, I suspected that these avens could also lead to hidden wonders and scientific discoveries beneath the surface. So, in 1888, I began a systematic exploration of the unexplored natural cavities in my own country, followed by investigations in other parts of Europe; since then, I've devoted several weeks each year to this work.

These pits are simply horizontal holes opening upon the surface of the ground, of very different forms and dimensions. Herdsmen are very careful not to let their cattle go too near them, for they sometimes fall in.

These pits are just horizontal holes on the surface of the ground, varying widely in shape and size. Herdsmen are very cautious not to let their cattle get too close to them, as they sometimes fall in.

The diameter of these pits varies from a few inches to several hundred yards, and they are sometimes more than six hundred feet deep. It is not easy to go down into them, especially when they are on high levels away from habitations and roads. In such cases a considerable apparatus of ropes, rope ladders, telephone, portable boat, tent, etc., has to be taken along. The first measurement with the sounding line gives the depth only of the first pit—and there are often several succeeding one another. A rope ladder long enough to reach the bottom is then let down, and the man who descends has a rope tied about him for additional security, which is held by the people above. A great many pits are narrower at the top than lower down, forming something like a reversed speaking trumpet, so that the explorer finds it very difficult to make himself heard at the top; hence I have adopted the practice of taking a telephone along. The interior shapes of the pits are very diverse. The narrower ones are easiest to go down, because they permit one partly to support himself against their walls. The wider ones leave him hanging loose, in a position which he feels to be very precarious. When there is a second or third pit, and we have not ladders enough, we have to trust ourselves to a simple rope with a board[258] fastened at the end of it for a seat. The gouffre of Vigne Close, in Ardèche, which is about six hundred feet deep, has five successive pits, and its complete exploration required three days. The bottom of the pit may be a simple cleft in the rock, or an immense cathedral-like chamber; as at Rabanel, near Ganges, and Hérault, the deepest abyss in France, the vault of which expands into a gigantic nave, five hundred feet high, which is lighted by the beam of light that falls through the opening, presenting a grand and indescribable spectacle. Some pits of less depth, as the Tin doul de la Vayssière, in Aveyron, and the Padirac well, in Lot, both leading to underground rivers, enjoy a still more complete illumination. Considerable talus banks close the ends of these broad pits, and are generally produced by the caving in of the roofs of caves.

The diameter of these pits ranges from a few inches to several hundred yards, and they can be more than six hundred feet deep. It's not easy to descend into them, especially when they’re situated high up and away from homes and roads. In those cases, a lot of gear like ropes, rope ladders, phones, portable boats, tents, etc., needs to be brought along. The first measurement with the sounding line only provides the depth of the first pit—and there are often several following each other. A rope ladder long enough to reach the bottom is then lowered, and the person going down has a rope tied around them for extra safety, held by people above. Many pits are narrower at the top than they are lower down, creating a shape similar to an upside-down trumpet, making it tough for the explorer to be heard at the top; that’s why I’ve started bringing a phone with me. The interior shapes of the pits vary greatly. The narrower ones are easier to descend because they allow one to brace against the walls. The wider ones leave a person dangling loose, which feels very unstable. When there’s a second or third pit and we don’t have enough ladders, we have to rely on a simple rope with a board attached at the end for a seat. The gouffre of Vigne Close in Ardèche, which is about six hundred feet deep, has five successive pits, and exploring it fully took three days. The bottom of the pit can be just a simple crack in the rock, or it might open up into a massive, cathedral-like chamber, like at Rabanel, near Ganges, and Hérault, which is the deepest abyss in France. Its ceiling expands into a gigantic nave five hundred feet high, lit by a beam of light that comes through the opening, creating a grand and indescribable sight. Some shallower pits, like the Tin doul de la Vayssière in Aveyron and the Padirac well in Lot, both lead to underground rivers and have even better illumination. Significant talus banks close the ends of these wide pits and are usually formed by the roofs of caves collapsing.

Lively controversies and gross errors have prevailed concerning the geological formation of abysses. The abyss of Jean Nouveau, Vaucluse, among others, furnishes evidence against the false hypothesis that such pits are as a rule the results of cave-ins, whereas pits of that origin are rare and exceptional. These pits are for the most part fissures, the principal feature of which is their narrowness. At Jean Nouveau the greatest breadth is not more than about sixteen feet. It is the deepest vertical pit of a single shaft without intermediate terraces that we know of, and is about five hundred and thirty feet from the surface of the ground to its floor. The mass of stone rubbish at the bottom prevented our descending into a second pit.

Lively debates and serious mistakes have occurred regarding the geological formation of abysses. The abyss of Jean Nouveau in Vaucluse, among others, provides evidence against the incorrect theory that such pits are usually caused by cave-ins; in reality, pits formed this way are rare and unusual. Instead, these pits are mostly fissures, characterized by their narrowness. At Jean Nouveau, the widest point is just about sixteen feet across. It is the deepest vertical pit with a single shaft and no intermediate terraces that we know of, measuring around five hundred and thirty feet from the ground surface to its floor. The pile of stone debris at the bottom kept us from descending into a second pit.

Pits composed, like Vigne Close, of several successive wells, destroy another hypothesis—that of the formation of gouffres by the emissions from thermal springs.

Pits made up, like Vigne Close, of several sequential wells, disprove another theory—that of the creation of gouffres by the discharges from thermal springs.

The greatest danger in descending these pits arises from the showers of stones that sometimes come down upon the head of the explorer. These are often started by his friends the hunters, or by their dogs gamboling around at will.

The biggest risk when going down these pits comes from the rocks that can fall on the explorer's head. These often get dislodged by his friends the hunters, or by their dogs playing around freely.

While some of the caverns I have explored were stopped up by obstacles of one kind or another that prevented further progress, in others we found considerable rivers running a nearly free course. We rarely found pits formed by the collapse of the roofs of the cave in cases where the distance from the subterranean river which by its work of erosion provoked the catastrophe to the surface was more than one hundred metres. The pit of the Mas Raynal, Aveyron, is one hundred and six metres deep, and abuts upon a large subterranean river, which supplies the Sorgues of Saint-Affrique, one of the finest springs of France. When we explored it, in 1889, we could not pass the low chambers which occur in it because the water was too high, and we have not visited it since. Its[259] exploration in a dry season might reveal many very interesting chambers.

While some of the caves I explored were blocked by various obstacles that stopped us from moving forward, in others we found significant rivers flowing freely. We rarely encountered pits caused by the ceiling of the cave collapsing if the distance from the underground river that eroded it to the surface was more than one hundred meters. The pit of Mas Raynal in Aveyron is one hundred and six meters deep and is adjacent to a large underground river that feeds the Sorgues of Saint-Affrique, one of the best springs in France. When we explored it in 1889, we couldn't pass through the low chambers inside because the water level was too high, and we haven't returned since. Its[259] exploration during a dry season might uncover many interesting chambers.

In the cave of Rabanel, the first well, which ends in a talus of fallen stones, furnishes an instance of a vertical fissure grafted, if we may use the word, upon an interior grotto that already existed. A stream runs through this grotto which falls into a second well twenty-six metres, and is then lost in smaller passages so nearly stopped up with earth that we were not able to follow it through its course of about a mile till it comes out at the Brissac spring.

In the cave of Rabanel, the first well, which ends in a pile of fallen stones, shows an example of a vertical crack attached, if we can call it that, to an existing interior grotto. A stream flows through this grotto, dropping into a second well twenty-six meters deep, and then disappears into smaller passages nearly blocked with dirt, making it impossible for us to trace its route of about a mile until it reaches the Brissac spring.

The cave of Trebiciano, in Istria, near Trieste, the deepest known, has a total depth of more than a thousand feet. It is not, however, entirely natural, but is composed of numerous vertical fissures which lead, at about eight hundred and fifty feet below the surface, to a large cavern, at the bottom of which flows the subterranean river Recca. The fissures do not naturally communicate directly with one another, but the engineer Lindner was commissioned in 1840-'41 by the city of Trieste to construct for the municipality a supply of potable water from the underground streams, and after eleven months of labor made artificial connections between the different parts of the chasm.

The Trebiciano cave in Istria, near Trieste, is the deepest known cave, with a total depth of over a thousand feet. However, it isn't entirely natural; it consists of many vertical cracks that lead to a large cavern about eight hundred and fifty feet below the surface, where the underground river Recca flows at the bottom. The cracks don't naturally connect with each other, but the engineer Lindner was hired by the city of Trieste in 1840-1841 to create a supply of drinking water from the underground streams. After eleven months of work, he made artificial connections between the different parts of the chasm.

These vertical pits are formed by the wearing down, from the top, by the waters which become ingulfed in them. This mode of their formation was demonstrated to me in 1895, when I was in Great Britain under a commission from the French Minister of Instruction. I then explored several caves in which the rivers were still running, and satisfied myself that the pits were simply absorbing wells. Such wells are not effective now in southern France and Austria, but in northern Europe, where rain is more abundant, they are still operative. I found the plainest evidence of this fact in Yorkshire, at the Gaping Ghyll, Ingleborough, where a river precipitates itself at one leap one hundred metres under the earth. English investigators and travelers had tried without success to descend into it in 1845, 1870, and 1894, having conquered only about one hundred and ninety-five feet of its total depth of two hundred and twenty-nine feet. It took me twenty-five minutes to go down upon a rope ladder which was suspended in the midst of the cascade. Fortunately, the pit had the daylight to the very bottom—a wonderful spectacle, compensating me for all my trouble and the long douche bath which greeted me at the end of the descent, where stretched an immense Roman nave nearly five hundred feet long, eighty feet wide, and ninety feet high, without any sustaining pillar. From the middle of the roof of this colossal cavern fell the cascade in a great nimbus of vapor and light—a wonderful fantastic scene, such as Gustave Doré or Jules Verne could never have imagined.[260] The most pleasant feature of the whole of it, however, to me was the thought that I had succeeded where the English had failed, and on their own ground. The people were nevertheless very pleasant to me, and at my instance have continued the exploration and made some new discoveries.—Translated for the Popular Science Monthly from the Revue Scientifique.

These vertical pits are created by the erosion from above, as water flows into them. I first learned about this process in 1895 while I was in Great Britain on a mission from the French Minister of Instruction. I explored several caves where rivers were still flowing and confirmed that the pits were simply wells absorbing the water. These wells are no longer effective in southern France and Austria, but they still function in northern Europe where rainfall is more plentiful. I found clear evidence of this in Yorkshire, at Gaping Ghyll, Ingleborough, where a river plunges one hundred meters underground in a single drop. English researchers and travelers had attempted to descend there in 1845, 1870, and 1894, but they only made it about one hundred and ninety-five feet down of the total depth of two hundred and twenty-nine feet. It took me twenty-five minutes to climb down a rope ladder hanging in the middle of the waterfall. Luckily, the pit had natural light reaching the very bottom—a stunning sight that made up for all the trouble and the soaking I got at the end of the descent, where I found a massive Roman-style nave nearly five hundred feet long, eighty feet wide, and ninety feet high, without any supporting pillars. From the center of the roof of this enormous cavern, the waterfall cascaded down in a magnificent cloud of mist and light—a truly amazing scene that even Gustave Doré or Jules Verne could never have imagined. [260] The most satisfying part for me was knowing I had succeeded where the English had failed, on their own turf. However, the locals were really nice to me, and at my suggestion, they continued the exploration and made some new discoveries. —Translated for the Popular Science Monthly from the Revue Scientifique.


SKETCH OF CHARLES HENRY HITCHCOCK.

The name of Prof. Charles H. Hitchcock is closely associated with the progress of New England geology, especially with the discovery of the great terminal glacial moraine, and, in connection with the name of his father, Dr. Edward Hitchcock, with the study of the fossil bird tracks of the Connecticut River Valley.

The name Prof. Charles H. Hitchcock is closely tied to the advancement of New England geology, particularly the discovery of the major terminal glacial moraine, and, along with his father Dr. Edward Hitchcock, the research on the fossilized bird tracks of the Connecticut River Valley.

Charles Henry Hitchcock was born in Amherst, Massachusetts, August 23, 1836, the son of Prof. Edward Hitchcock, the eminent geologist, who was afterward president of Amherst College. The family is of English origin, and was planted in America by two brothers who came over at nearly the same time and made homes for themselves in New Haven, removing later to towns near by. Luke Hitchcock, the ancestor of the subject of this sketch, came in 1695, and finally settled at Wethersfield, Connecticut. His descendants in the direct line lived at Springfield, Granville, Deerfield, and Amherst, Massachusetts. Professor Hitchcock is in the seventh generation from Luke, and is equally removed from Elder John White, his maternal ancestor, who came to Canton, Massachusetts, toward the end of the seventeenth century, and removed thence to the Connecticut Valley. Both lines of ancestry were purely English, and all the progenitors were men of integrity, regarded in their times as worthy to fill offices of trust in church and town. Two of them served in the Revolutionary army.

Charles Henry Hitchcock was born in Amherst, Massachusetts, on August 23, 1836. He was the son of Prof. Edward Hitchcock, a distinguished geologist who later became president of Amherst College. The family has English roots, brought to America by two brothers who arrived around the same time and established homes in New Haven before moving to nearby towns. Luke Hitchcock, the ancestor of the person in this profile, came in 1695 and eventually settled in Wethersfield, Connecticut. His direct descendants lived in Springfield, Granville, Deerfield, and Amherst, Massachusetts. Professor Hitchcock is the seventh generation from Luke, and he is also connected to Elder John White, his maternal ancestor, who settled in Canton, Massachusetts, towards the end of the seventeenth century before moving to the Connecticut Valley. Both lines of ancestry are entirely English, and all of their forefathers were men of integrity, well-respected in their times for holding trusted positions in their communities. Two of them served in the Revolutionary army.

The father of Professor Hitchcock was one of the most distinguished geologists and educators of his time, and his services, especially as State Geologist of Massachusetts, have already been described in the Popular Science Monthly.[58] His mother was the daughter of Jacob White, a well-to-do farmer of Amherst, who, believing in the education of women, had given her the best opportunities for study available at the time. She could read the Greek Testament and calculate eclipses, and was a gifted artist with pencil and brush. She prepared with her own hands many of the numerous illustrations in her husband's reports, and also diagrams for the [261] lecture room. She took indefatigable pains with the education of her children, placing their moral and religious welfare first. Of the eight children of the family, six of whom reached maturity, the surviving brother is professor of physical culture, and, for the time being, acting president at Amherst College, and one of the two surviving sisters, the widow of the Rev. C. M. Terry, has been for several years matron of the Hubbard Cottage, Smith College, Northampton, Massachusetts.

The father of Professor Hitchcock was one of the most respected geologists and educators of his time, and his contributions, especially as State Geologist of Massachusetts, have already been covered in the Popular Science Monthly.[58] His mother was the daughter of Jacob White, a prosperous farmer from Amherst, who, believing in women's education, provided her with the best study opportunities available at the time. She could read the Greek Testament and calculate eclipses, and she was a talented artist with pencil and brush. She personally created many of the illustrations in her husband's reports, along with diagrams for the lecture room. She worked tirelessly to educate her children, prioritizing their moral and religious development. Of the eight children in the family, six of whom reached adulthood, the surviving brother is a professor of physical culture and currently the acting president of Amherst College, and one of the two surviving sisters, the widow of Rev. C. M. Terry, has been the matron of Hubbard Cottage at Smith College in Northampton, Massachusetts, for several years.

Beginning with 1835, the year before Professor Hitchcock was born, his father, Professor Edward Hitchcock, was largely occupied with the study of the "fossil bird tracks" in the New Red Sandstone of the Connecticut Valley, and with the discussions to which the investigation gave rise, the story of which has been told by Prof. C. H. Hitchcock himself in the Popular Science Monthly (vol. iii, August, 1873). Besides the search for the fossils and their collection and comparison, and the examination of the literature that might throw light on the subject, there were studies into the proper interpretation of the early chapters of Genesis, the debate with Prof. Moses Stewart, of Andover, and the gradual approach of the American clergy to general acquiescence in the belief that geology is not at variance with Scripture. Professor Hitchcock's childhood was largely spent under the influence of these studies and discussions. The boy seemed to be full of promise, and because of his observing ways and proneness to speculation was called "the young philosopher." He used to bring his mother the very small flowers of Spergula rubra, which are so obscure that older eyes often fail to notice them. He seemed to be fonder of his father than the other children, and was never so happy as with him. Through this constant intercourse Charles became absorbed in his father's pursuits, and grew up into a knowledge of geology from Nature and from verbal explanations—a more satisfactory method than that of learning from books; and he was associated with his father in all his geological work from the time when he was first old enough to be of service. Thus, before 1856 he was acquainted, from inspection, with the terraces and reputed beaches and drift phenomena of all western Massachusetts; he had handled every specimen of a foot mark in the Appleton Cabinet, and by 1861 was the principal assistant on the Vermont Survey, having prepared for the press the greater part of the matter of the report. He had enjoyed the best educational advantages of his day, having completed the classical and preparatory courses of Williston Seminary, and been graduated thence in 1852, then graduated from Amherst College in 1856, a short time before his twentieth birthday. Among his early classmates and college friends were Dr. Cyrus Northrup, president of[262] Minnesota University; Dr. Richard Mather, professor of Greek at Amherst College; the Rev. Dr. Goodwin, of Chicago; and Dr. William Hayes Ward, editor of The Independent. After graduation he spent a year in special study of Hebrew and chemistry at Yale College, two years at Andover Theological Seminary, and one year in Europe, studying in the Royal School of Mines under Professor Huxley, and in the British Museum investigating the crustacea and trilobites. Here he enjoyed the friendship of Professor Richard Owen, and had the guidance of Dr. H. Woodward.

Starting in 1835, the year before Professor Hitchcock was born, his father, Professor Edward Hitchcock, was heavily involved in studying the "fossil bird tracks" in the New Red Sandstone of the Connecticut Valley. This work led to discussions that Prof. C. H. Hitchcock later detailed in the Popular Science Monthly (vol. iii, August, 1873). Along with searching for fossils, collecting and comparing them, and reviewing literature that could provide insights on the topic, there were also explorations into interpreting the early chapters of Genesis, debates with Prof. Moses Stewart from Andover, and the gradual acceptance by American clergy that geology does not conflict with the Bible. Much of Professor Hitchcock's childhood was influenced by these studies and discussions. The boy showed great potential, and due to his observant nature and tendency to ponder deeply, he was nicknamed "the young philosopher." He would bring his mother tiny flowers of Spergula rubra, which are so small that many adults often overlook them. He seemed to have a stronger bond with his father than his siblings and was happiest when spending time with him. This close relationship led Charles to become deeply engaged in his father's work, learning about geology directly from nature and verbal explanations— a more effective method than just reading books. He assisted his father with geological work from the time he was old enough to help. By 1856, he was already familiar, through personal observation, with the terraces, supposed beaches, and drift features of all western Massachusetts. He had physically handled every footmark specimen in the Appleton Cabinet, and by 1861, he was the primary assistant on the Vermont Survey, preparing most of the report materials for publication. He received the best educational opportunities available at the time, completing classical and preparatory courses at Williston Seminary, graduating in 1852, and then graduating from Amherst College in 1856, shortly before his twentieth birthday. Among his early classmates and college friends were Dr. Cyrus Northrup, president of [262] Minnesota University; Dr. Richard Mather, professor of Greek at Amherst College; Rev. Dr. Goodwin from Chicago; and Dr. William Hayes Ward, editor of The Independent. After graduation, he spent a year at Yale College for specialized studies in Hebrew and chemistry, followed by two years at Andover Theological Seminary, and then a year in Europe, where he studied at the Royal School of Mines under Professor Huxley and researched crustaceans and trilobites at the British Museum. During this time, he became friends with Professor Richard Owen and was mentored by Dr. H. Woodward.

In 1857 Mr. Hitchcock was appointed assistant geologist to the Geological Survey of Vermont. He served the full term of the survey, and had charge of the preparation of the report relating to the stratigraphical geology, the measurement and delineation of the sections, and the compilation of the geological map.

In 1857, Mr. Hitchcock was appointed as an assistant geologist for the Geological Survey of Vermont. He completed the entire term of the survey and was responsible for preparing the report on stratigraphical geology, measuring and outlining the sections, and compiling the geological map.

In 1861 he received the appointment of State Geologist of Maine, in which service he spent two summers in field work, preparing two reports of progress, which were published in connection with the report of the secretary of the Board of Agriculture. Besides the general reconnoissance, he discovered the existence of large areas of Upper Silurian and Devonian terranes. He has embodied his views of the distribution of the formations in his general map of the United States.

In 1861, he was appointed as the State Geologist of Maine, where he spent two summers working in the field and prepared two progress reports, which were published alongside the report from the secretary of the Board of Agriculture. In addition to the general survey, he found large areas of Upper Silurian and Devonian rock formations. He included his insights on the distribution of these formations in his general map of the United States.

Having chosen the ministry for his profession, Mr. Hitchcock studied theology under Dr. E. A. Park, of Andover, and the Rev. Dr. Taylor, of New Haven. Questions of the relations of theology and science were attracting much attention, and he treated of them in two papers in the Bibliotheca Sacra, one of which was afterward used for the guidance of theological students in several seminaries. As more opportunities were offered for scientific work, the ministry was given up. This was the time when the doctrine of natural selection came to the front for investigation, and the early history of mankind was receiving increased attention. Mr. Hitchcock came home from Europe in 1867 convinced of the truth of some form of evolution, of a considerable antiquity of man, and of the probability of a plural origin of the human race. Finding that some of his views on these subjects were not acceptable to his associates, he ceased to make them prominent in his class instructions, and devoted his attention to the more technical details of geology. Since then general opinion has advanced so far on these subjects that the views he held at that time seem now really conservative.

Having chosen the ministry as his career, Mr. Hitchcock studied theology under Dr. E. A. Park from Andover and Rev. Dr. Taylor from New Haven. The relationship between theology and science was becoming a hot topic, and he addressed these issues in two papers published in the Bibliotheca Sacra, one of which was later used to guide theology students in varias seminaries. As more chances for scientific work arose, he decided to leave the ministry. This was also when the theory of natural selection started to gain traction and the early history of humanity was getting more focus. Mr. Hitchcock returned from Europe in 1867 convinced of the validity of some form of evolution, the significant antiquity of humans, and the likelihood of multiple origins of the human race. Since some of his ideas on these topics were not well received by his colleagues, he stopped highlighting them in his class and shifted his focus to the more technical aspects of geology. Since then, general opinions have progressed so much that his views from that time now seem rather conservative.

In 1868 he was appointed State Geologist for New Hampshire, and spent ten years in the survey of that State. The results of his work there were published in three large quarto volumes, with a folio atlas of maps, profiles, and sections. The rocks described consist[263] principally of crystalline schists and marine igneous ejections. The geology of New Hampshire is of peculiar importance, because the situation of the State is such that a correct knowledge of its rocks promotes the understanding of many obscure terranes in the adjacent regions of Maine, Quebec, Vermont, and Massachusetts. Professor Hitchcock's report of the survey may justly be styled his chief work. The part best studied relates to the White Mountains and the Ammonoosuc mining district. Connected with the survey was the maintenance of a meteorological station throughout the year on the summit of Mount Washington. Daily statements of the weather conditions of this station during the winter of 1870-'71 were sent by telegraph to the principal newspapers, and called out much interest—before the United States Signal Service began its weather predictions.

In 1868, he was appointed State Geologist for New Hampshire and spent ten years surveying the state. The findings from his work were published in three large quarto volumes, along with a folio atlas of maps, profiles, and sections. The described rocks are mainly crystalline schists and marine igneous ejections. The geology of New Hampshire is particularly significant because the state's location allows for a better understanding of the many obscure terrains in the neighboring regions of Maine, Quebec, Vermont, and Massachusetts. Professor Hitchcock's report on the survey can rightly be considered his most important work. The most thoroughly studied areas relate to the White Mountains and the Ammonoosuc mining district. As part of the survey, a meteorological station was operated year-round on the summit of Mount Washington. Daily weather reports from this station during the winter of 1870-’71 were sent by telegraph to major newspapers, generating a lot of interest—well before the United States Signal Service began making weather predictions.

The catalogue of Professor Hitchcock's publications comprises more than one hundred and fifty titles of papers, reports, and books. Perhaps the earliest thorough study represented among them was that of the fossil footmarks. The first of the published papers on this subject related to the tracks of animals in alluvial clay, and was published in the American Journal of Science in 1855. For several years after this he assisted his father in arranging the museum and compiling tables for the Ichnology. He made a complete catalogue descriptive of the more than twenty thousand individual impressions preserved in the Appleton Cabinet, which was printed, with descriptions of a few new species of footmarks, in the Supplement to the Ichnology of Massachusetts, edited by him after the death of his father in 1865. Although circumstances have prevented him from paying much attention to ichnology in later years, he has prepared several papers on the subject, the most important of which was one on the Recent Progress of Ichnology, which was read before the Boston Society of Natural History about twelve years ago. In it the ichnites were carefully catalogued anew and classified in the light of our knowledge of the numerous dinosaurs of the West; and the results of some studies of the slabs exhumed at Wethersfield, Connecticut, are well known. The list of the Connecticut footmarks was increased from one hundred and nineteen in the Ichnology to one hundred and seventy; and facts were cited to show that the Grallator, the three-toed animal most allied to birds, possessed a caudal appendage of a reptilian nature. The Trias of New Jersey had been found to illustrate new features in the Otozoum, whose tracks are often ornithic in aspect. A comparison of the features of the Triassic skeletons described by Marsh from Connecticut (Anchisaurus) shows that the creatures were rather allied to the Plesiornis than to the Anomœpus of the Ichnology, because of the great size of the fore feet. Notes upon footmarks have been gathered also from[264] illustrations in Pennsylvania, Nova Scotia, Kansas, Nevada, and Florida.

The catalog of Professor Hitchcock's publications includes over one hundred and fifty titles of papers, reports, and books. One of the earliest comprehensive studies among them focused on fossil footprints. The first published paper on this topic examined animal tracks in alluvial clay and appeared in the American Journal of Science in 1855. For several years afterward, he helped his father organize the museum and compile tables for Ichnology. He created a complete catalog describing more than twenty thousand individual impressions preserved in the Appleton Cabinet, which was printed along with descriptions of a few new species of footprints in the Supplement to the Ichnology of Massachusetts, which he edited after his father's death in 1865. Although circumstances have limited his focus on ichnology in recent years, he has prepared several papers on the topic, the most important of which was one on the Recent Progress of Ichnology, presented to the Boston Society of Natural History about twelve years ago. In this paper, the ichnites were carefully re-cataloged and classified based on our knowledge of the various dinosaurs in the West; and the results of some studies of the slabs excavated at Wethersfield, Connecticut, are well known. The list of Connecticut footprints increased from one hundred and nineteen in the Ichnology to one hundred and seventy; and evidence was provided to show that the Grallator, the three-toed creature most closely related to birds, had a tail similar to that of reptiles. The Triassic formations of New Jersey revealed new characteristics in Otozoum, whose tracks often resemble those of birds. A comparison of the features of the Triassic skeletons described by Marsh from Connecticut (Anchisaurus) indicates that these creatures were more closely related to Plesiornis than to Anomœpus from the Ichnology, due to the large size of their front feet. Notes on footprints have also been collected from [264] illustrations in Pennsylvania, Nova Scotia, Kansas, Nevada, and Florida.

Professor Hitchcock has studied the Quaternary or glacial deposits with great success. His first publication upon the terraces and allied phenomena of Vermont appeared while the old views of a submergence, with icebergs, prevailed, to account for the phenomena. A study of the glaciers of Switzerland in 1866 satisfied him of the truth of Agassiz's theory; and whenever the opportunity came for re-examination of the surface geology of northern New England, the facts were found to require a different theoretical explanation. He caused a thorough examination to be made of the Connecticut River terranes by Warren Upham in the New Hampshire Survey, and proved that all the high mountains of Vermont, New Hampshire, and Maine had been glaciated by a southeasterly movement. The ice came from the Laurentian highlands, pushed in a southern direction down the Champlain-Hudson Valley, with a southeasterly flow over New England and southwesterly over the Adirondacks; the last two courses having been subordinate to the first. At present the Laurentian hills are lower than the New England and New York mountains overridden by the ice, and probably the same was the case in the Glacial period. The best explanation of these paths is afforded by the suggestion that a gigantic ice cap accumulated north of the St. Lawrence, towering into the clouds so much that its overflow naturally descended over the White and Adirondack Mountains.

Professor Hitchcock has successfully studied the Quaternary or glacial deposits. His first publication on the terraces and related phenomena in Vermont came out when the dominant belief was that submersion, along with icebergs, explained these phenomena. A study of Switzerland's glaciers in 1866 convinced him of the validity of Agassiz's theory; and whenever he had the chance to re-examine the surface geology of northern New England, he found that the facts demanded a different theoretical explanation. He arranged for a thorough examination of the Connecticut River terraces by Warren Upham during the New Hampshire Survey, proving that all the high mountains in Vermont, New Hampshire, and Maine had been shaped by glaciation moving southeastward. The ice originated from the Laurentian highlands, flowing southward down the Champlain-Hudson Valley, with a southeastern direction over New England and a southwesterly path over the Adirondacks, the latter two being secondary to the first. Currently, the Laurentian hills are lower than the mountains of New England and New York that were covered by the ice, and it's likely that this was also true during the Glacial period. The best explanation for these pathways is that a massive ice cap formed north of the St. Lawrence, rising so high into the clouds that its overflow naturally flowed over the White and Adirondack Mountains.

That glaciers should accumulate terminal moraines is axiomatic, but no geologist before 1868 had ventured to suggest where moraines might be located in the United States. In that year Professor Hitchcock delivered a lecture before the Lyceum of Natural History in New York and the Long Island Historical Society in Brooklyn, in which he affirmed that the drift deposits from Prospect Park along the backbone of Long Island for its entire length constituted the terminal moraine of the great continental ice sheet. This declaration inaugurated a new era in the study of the age of ice. The geologists in their several States found the terminal moraines, and the various phenomena began to be classified according to new laws. The search for moraines has resulted in a restatement of the incident of the age of ice; more than a dozen successive terminal moraines have been mapped between New York and Montana, which suggest to us the existence of several glacial periods. In compiling a catalogue of observations of the course of glacial striæ by the United States Geological Survey, it was found that Professor Hitchcock had recorded for New England as many as all other geologists had observed for the whole country.

That glaciers accumulate terminal moraines is a given, but before 1868, no geologist had dared to propose where moraines might be found in the United States. In that year, Professor Hitchcock gave a lecture at the Lyceum of Natural History in New York and the Long Island Historical Society in Brooklyn, where he stated that the drift deposits from Prospect Park along the spine of Long Island for its entire length made up the terminal moraine of the massive continental ice sheet. This announcement marked the beginning of a new era in the study of the ice age. Geologists across various states discovered the terminal moraines, and different phenomena began to be categorized according to new principles. The effort to find moraines led to a revision of the events of the ice age; more than a dozen separate terminal moraines have been mapped between New York and Montana, suggesting the occurrence of multiple glacial periods. While compiling a catalog of observations of glacial striations by the United States Geological Survey, it was found that Professor Hitchcock had documented as many for New England as all other geologists had for the entire country.

Eskers are another interesting class of phenomena, and were[265] first described as horsebacks in Maine, about seventy of them having been described in the report of 1861 and 1862. It was not till after the description of the Swedish Ösar that the nature of these lines or ridges was understood; and now they were found in every prominent valley in New England, as attendant upon the recession of the ice sheet. Professor Hitchcock gave the correct name of these ridges in his Elementary Geology, 1860; while for many years subsequently they were erroneously called kames, even in the geology of New Hampshire.

Eskers are another fascinating type of landform, first referred to as horsebacks in Maine, with around seventy of them detailed in the reports from 1861 and 1862. It wasn't until after the Swedish Ösar were described that the nature of these lines or ridges became clear; now they can be found in every major valley in New England, appearing as the ice sheet retreated. Professor Hitchcock correctly named these ridges in his *Elementary Geology*, published in 1860; however, for many years after that, they were mistakenly called kames, even in the geology of New Hampshire.

Professor Hitchcock gave the name of Champlain to the fossiliferous clays associated with the till of the Atlantic coast. The term has come into general use as connected with the melting of the ice in the latter part of the period. Because of the presence of boreal species, and of analogies with similar deposits in Europe, Professor Hitchcock has asked the question whether there may not have been a Champlain glacial epoch posterior to those named farther in the interior of the country, the Kansan, Iowan, and Illinoisian epochs.

Professor Hitchcock named the fossil-rich clays found with the till on the Atlantic coast as Champlain. This term has become widely used in connection with the melting of ice during the later part of that period. Due to the presence of northern species and similarities with similar deposits in Europe, Professor Hitchcock has raised the question of whether there might have been a Champlain glacial period after the ones named further inland, known as the Kansan, Iowan, and Illinoisian periods.

Those who explore the geology of northern New England have to deal with crystalline rocks of various ages, and the opinions of our best geologists have not been in agreement respecting them. Professor Hitchcock was the first to make a geological map of New Hampshire, and he also demonstrated the anticlinal nature of the Green Mountains of Vermont. His teachers had inculcated the view that these eminences belonged to a synclinal disposition, coupling this with theoretical assertions as to their age and metamorphism. Finding their main principle to be erroneous, he naturally disparaged their theories, though more recent studies are eliminating many of the schists from the Archæan. All the later explorers in the field—Canadians and members of the Geological Survey—accept a pre-Cambrian anticlinal in the heart of the Green Mountains.

Those who study the geology of northern New England encounter crystalline rocks of different ages, and even our top geologists haven't agreed about them. Professor Hitchcock was the first to create a geological map of New Hampshire, and he also proved that the Green Mountains of Vermont have an anticlinal structure. His teachers had taught that these highlands were part of a synclinal structure, linking this with theoretical claims about their age and metamorphism. Realizing that their main principle was incorrect, he criticized their theories, although more recent research is removing many of the schists from the Archæan. All the later explorers in the field—Canadians and members of the Geological Survey—now recognize a pre-Cambrian anticlinal at the center of the Green Mountains.

The distribution of the New Hampshire formations was made out for the most part before any assistance was derived from the labors of Dr. G. W. Hawes and other petrographers. Twenty years ago, at the date of the final publication of the New Hampshire maps, the doctrine of an igneous origin of the crystalline schist had hardly been hinted at. What seems elemental to the modern petrographer who has acquired his technical education since 1890 was unknown then, and the classification given in the report may not agree with that now taught. In the midst of the diverse views entertained, Professor Hitchcock classified the rocks of northern New England according to this principle: rocks that are identical in petrographical composition are assumed to have had the same origin, and to be synchronous. Professor Hitchcock was almost the first of American geologists to employ the petrographer as a help to the understanding of the crystallines—as[266] was evident by the very valuable contributions to knowledge in Part IV of the New Hampshire Report as prepared by Dr. Hawes.

The distribution of the New Hampshire formations was mostly established before any help came from the work of Dr. G. W. Hawes and other petrographers. Twenty years ago, at the time of the final publication of the New Hampshire maps, the idea of an igneous origin for crystalline schist had barely been mentioned. What seems basic to today's petrographers, who have received their technical training since 1890, was not known back then, and the classification in the report might not match what is taught now. Amid the various opinions, Professor Hitchcock classified the rocks of northern New England based on this principle: rocks that are the same in petrographic composition are assumed to have come from the same origin and to be synchronous. Professor Hitchcock was one of the first American geologists to use petrographers to help understand the crystalline rocks—as[266] was clear from the very valuable contributions to knowledge in Part IV of the New Hampshire Report prepared by Dr. Hawes.

A vexing question concerning what are now called Cambrian terranes divided geologists for a quarter of a century after 1857, and had to be considered in preparing the geology of Vermont in 1861. This was the Taconic controversy. Trilobites had been discovered in Vermont, which were misunderstood by most of the American geologists following Hall, Logan, Dana, and others. In giving the species the technical name first of Barrandesi and then Olenellus, Prof. James Hall asserted its derivation from the Hudson River group—relying upon the stratigraphical determinations of Sir W. E. Logan. As soon as Barrandes's attention was called to these trilobites and the attendant publication, he wrote his famous letter to Logan in 1860, declaring that there must be a mistake somewhere. That error was discovered in time to be eliminated from the Vermont report of the following year. Professor Hitchcock had charge of the field work in this Cambrian district, and his views of the arrangement of the formations are in agreement with those of the latest workers in the field. He applied the term of Georgia to one division of the terrane in 1860; and the designation has been generally adopted since that time. Jules Marcou claimed priority in the suggestion of the application of the term, but upon the publication of Professor Hitchcock's statement on the subject the credit of priority was awarded to him by Director Walcott, of the United States Geological Survey.

A frustrating question about what we now call Cambrian terranes split geologists for 25 years after 1857 and had to be taken into account when preparing Vermont's geology in 1861. This was the Taconic controversy. Trilobites had been found in Vermont, which most American geologists following Hall, Logan, Dana, and others misunderstood. When assigning the species the technical names first of Barrandesi and later Olenellus, Prof. James Hall claimed it came from the Hudson River group—based on the stratigraphical assessments of Sir W. E. Logan. As soon as Barrande learned about these trilobites and the related publication, he wrote his famous letter to Logan in 1860, stating that there must be a mistake somewhere. That error was identified and corrected in the Vermont report the following year. Professor Hitchcock oversaw the fieldwork in this Cambrian area, and his views on the formations' arrangement align with those of the latest researchers in the field. He named one division of the terrane Georgia in 1860, and that name has been widely adopted since then. Jules Marcou claimed he was the first to suggest this name, but after Professor Hitchcock's statement on the topic was published, Director Walcott of the United States Geological Survey credited him with priority.

Between 1860 and 1870 Professor Hitchcock was occupied largely as a mining geologist in the estimation of mineral deposits for mining companies, with his office in New York. In the prosecution of this business he traveled in Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Quebec, Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Maryland, Virginia, Ohio, Kentucky, and Alabama. Subsequently, the study of the phosphate beds led him to the island of Redonda in the West Indies. He further visited the phosphate beds of South Carolina and Florida, the gold fields of eastern Oregon, the Chalcedony Park of Arizona, the Grand Cañon of the Colorado, and the Yosemite and Yellowstone Parks. Studies made in the Hawaiian Islands and their volcanoes in 1883 and 1886 resulted in the contribution of important observations respecting those regions. At the present writing Professor Hitchcock is spending a year of further observations in those islands.

Between 1860 and 1870, Professor Hitchcock spent a lot of time as a mining geologist, estimating mineral deposits for mining companies, with his office in New York. In the course of this work, he traveled to Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Quebec, Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, Maryland, Virginia, Ohio, Kentucky, and Alabama. Later, the study of phosphate beds took him to the island of Redonda in the West Indies. He also visited the phosphate beds in South Carolina and Florida, the gold fields in eastern Oregon, the Chalcedony Park in Arizona, the Grand Canyon in Colorado, and the Yosemite and Yellowstone Parks. His studies in the Hawaiian Islands and their volcanoes in 1883 and 1886 led to important observations about those regions. Currently, Professor Hitchcock is spending a year conducting further observations in those islands.

Mr. Hitchcock was appointed, in 1858, lecturer in zoölogy and curator of the cabinet in Amherst College; an office which he filled for seven years, retiring after the death of his father. In 1866[267] he was elected professor of geology in Lafayette College, where he gave short courses of instruction to five successive classes. In 1868 he was called to the chair of geology in Dartmouth College, a position which he still occupies, receiving a year's leave of absence for 1898-'99 in consideration of thirty years of service. He taught geology and zoölogy as a provisional professor at Williams College in 1881, and in the following year in the Virginia College of Agriculture and the Mechanic Arts, Blacksbury. He received the degree of M. A. in course at Amherst in 1859, the honorary degree of Ph. D. from Lafayette College in 1870, and that of LL. D. from Amherst College in 1896.

Mr. Hitchcock was appointed in 1858 as a lecturer in zoology and curator of the cabinet at Amherst College, a position he held for seven years before retiring after his father's death. In 1866[267], he was elected professor of geology at Lafayette College, where he taught short courses to five consecutive classes. In 1868, he was appointed to the geology chair at Dartmouth College, a role he still holds, taking a year-long leave of absence for 1898-’99 in recognition of thirty years of service. He taught geology and zoology as a visiting professor at Williams College in 1881, and the following year at the Virginia College of Agriculture and Mechanic Arts in Blacksburg. He earned his M.A. at Amherst in 1859, received an honorary Ph.D. from Lafayette College in 1870, and an LL.D. from Amherst College in 1896.

Professor Hitchcock has been connected with the American Association for the Advancement of Science since 1856, and a nearly constant attendant upon its meetings and participant in the proceedings. He is a member of local scientific societies in Portland, Me., Boston, Mass., New York, Philadelphia, and St. Louis, and also of the Imperial Geological Institute of Vienna. He was one of the most prominent movers in the inception and early history of the Geological Society of America, and had much to do with the organization of the International Congress of Geologists, and with the preparation of special reports for the several meetings between 1876 and 1890. The handsome geological map of small scale compiled for the United States was prepared by him and published in the Transactions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers (1887), to illustrate the nomenclature and color scheme of the International Congress.

Professor Hitchcock has been involved with the American Association for the Advancement of Science since 1856 and has consistently attended its meetings and participated in its activities. He is a member of local scientific societies in Portland, ME, Boston, MA, New York, Philadelphia, and St. Louis, as well as the Imperial Geological Institute of Vienna. He played a significant role in the founding and early development of the Geological Society of America and was heavily involved in organizing the International Congress of Geologists, as well as preparing special reports for various meetings between 1876 and 1890. The detailed geological map compiled for the United States was created by him and published in the Transactions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers (1887) to showcase the nomenclature and color scheme of the International Congress.

Professor Hitchcock is best known to many by his geological maps. The first efforts at mapping the geology of the United States were made independently by Edward Hitchcock and Jules Marcou in 1883—the work of Mr. Marcou extending only to the plains. Prof. H. D. Rogers, five or six years later, prepared a map for Johnston's Physical Atlas. In 1872 Prof. C. H. Hitchcock and Prof. W. P. Blake compiled a map for the ninth census of the United States, and for R. W. Raymond's report upon the mineral resources of the country. The success of his small scale map led Professor Hitchcock to undertake the preparation of a map on a scale of twenty-five miles to the inch for the whole country. For this he consulted every work that had been printed upon the geology of the United States, and obtained the privilege of using many unpublished data collected by geologists of States and Territories in which the work had never been carried to actual completion. The map prepared by the General Land Office was used as the basis for the geological coloration, and the work appeared in 1881, of a size adapted to use in the classroom. Its compiler has never seen any criticism of[268] its accuracy. The edition prepared for the Mining Institute embodies all the information acquired for the large map, with such additional facts as had been learned since that map was published. Prof. Hitchcock's services were called into requisition in the compilation of a similar map for the United States Geological Survey, which was published in its annual report for 1886, under the editorship of W. J. McGee; in fact, the two maps were printed from the same plates, but Dr. Hitchcock's contained certain features not found in the other one—the result of different interpretations—and was more complete. In the Government edition a system of coloration devised by Major J. W. Powell, which was afterward abandoned, was employed.

Professor Hitchcock is best known by many for his geological maps. The first attempts to map the geology of the United States were made independently by Edward Hitchcock and Jules Marcou in 1883, with Mr. Marcou's work only covering the plains. About five or six years later, Prof. H. D. Rogers created a map for Johnston's Physical Atlas. In 1872, Prof. C. H. Hitchcock and Prof. W. P. Blake put together a map for the ninth census of the United States, as well as for R. W. Raymond's report on the mineral resources of the country. The success of his small-scale map inspired Professor Hitchcock to create a map on a scale of twenty-five miles to the inch for the entire country. To do this, he reviewed every published work on the geology of the United States and gained access to various unpublished data collected by geologists in States and Territories where the work had not been fully completed. The map made by the General Land Office served as the foundation for the geological coloring, and the work was released in 1881, sized for classroom use. The compiler has never encountered any criticism regarding its accuracy. The edition prepared for the Mining Institute included all the information gathered for the large map, along with any new facts learned since that map was published. Prof. Hitchcock was also called on to help compile a similar map for the United States Geological Survey, which was published in its annual report for 1886, edited by W. J. McGee; in fact, the two maps were printed from the same plates, but Dr. Hitchcock's version included details not found in the other, resulting from different interpretations, and was more comprehensive. In the Government edition, a coloring system created by Major J. W. Powell, which was later abandoned, was used.

Professor Hitchcock contributed extensively to the collection of State geological maps in the Centennial Exhibition of 1876, when large scale sheets of New England, and a large copy of the Hitchcock and Blake map of 1872, were exhibited. A medal was awarded for a sheet of thirteen sections illustrating the stratigraphy of Vermont and New Hampshire. The beginning of the measurement of sections was made for the Vermont Geological Report under the direction of Dr. Edward Hitchcock in 1861. Twelve lines of exploration across the entire State were determined upon, and specimens were collected to illustrate all the varieties of rock seen upon each. The specimens were arranged in the State Museum at Montpelier in geographical order. A similar plan of collection and arrangement was projected for the New Hampshire survey, but it was made to extend across the two States, from Maine to New York. Besides the two State reports, later publications were issued, descriptive of explorations and collections for the Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History in New York, and the New Hampshire Agricultural Report for 1883. The work did not cease with these publications, for after the transfer of the collection of sections from the New Hampshire College of Agriculture and the Mechanic Arts to Dartmouth College in 1894, additional explorations were made; the number of sections was increased to eighteen; improved drawings of the profiles, colored geologically, were prepared for the cases in the new Butterfield Museum; and the explanation of the details was further facilitated by the construction of a large relief map on the scale of one mile to the inch horizontally, twice as much vertically, and having colors corresponding to those on the profiles between the shelves. About five thousand specimens have been gathered to illustrate the profiles.

Professor Hitchcock made significant contributions to the collection of state geological maps at the Centennial Exhibition of 1876. Large-scale sheets of New England and a sizable copy of the Hitchcock and Blake map from 1872 were showcased. A medal was awarded for a sheet of thirteen sections that illustrated the geology of Vermont and New Hampshire. The initial measurements of sections began for the Vermont Geological Report under Dr. Edward Hitchcock's direction in 1861. Twelve exploration lines were set across the entire state, and specimens were collected to represent all the different types of rock found along each line. These specimens were organized in the State Museum in Montpelier in geographical order. A similar collection and arrangement plan was proposed for the New Hampshire survey, but it was intended to span both states, from Maine to New York. In addition to the two state reports, further publications were released, detailing explorations and collections for the Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History in New York and the New Hampshire Agricultural Report for 1883. The work continued beyond these publications; after the collection of sections was moved from the New Hampshire College of Agriculture and the Mechanic Arts to Dartmouth College in 1894, more explorations were conducted. The number of sections grew to eighteen, improved colored geological drawings of the profiles were created for display in the new Butterfield Museum, and the explanation of the details was enhanced by the construction of a large relief map scaled at one mile to the inch horizontally and twice that vertically, with colors matching those on the profiles between the shelves. About five thousand specimens have been collected to illustrate the profiles.

The Dartmouth College Museum is filled with specimens accumulated by the energy of Professor Hitchcock. They concern geology, paleontology, petrography, economic botany, and conchology.

The Dartmouth College Museum is filled with specimens gathered through the efforts of Professor Hitchcock. They relate to geology, paleontology, petrography, economic botany, and conchology.


Editor's Table.

EVOLUTION AND EDUCATION.

Our attention has been drawn to a lively discussion that has lately taken place in the St. Paul papers over the utterances, on the subject of the doctrine of evolution in its relation to education, of a certain Mr. Smith, who was appointed not long since superintendent of the public schools of that city. What seems clear is that Mr. Smith is a very ignorant man, whose views in regard to education are of an altogether retrograde character. How he came to be appointed to his present position is a question which is being gravely pondered by many of the citizens; but probably the explanation is not very far to seek. The dispensers of patronage in State and municipal affairs are not always competent to make the best nominations to offices calling for high qualifications; and sometimes they do not even act up to their own indifferent lights. The man that has the pull is very apt to be the man that gets the office, and it is not often that the strongest pull goes with the highest professional fitness.

Our attention has been caught by an engaging discussion that recently took place in the St. Paul papers about the comments from a Mr. Smith regarding the doctrine of evolution and its connection to education. Mr. Smith was appointed as the superintendent of the public schools in that city not long ago. It seems clear that Mr. Smith is quite uninformed and that his views on education are entirely regressive. Many citizens are seriously questioning how he got this position, but the answer probably isn’t too hard to find. Those in charge of appointments in state and local government don’t always have the best judgment when it comes to making qualified nominations for important roles, and sometimes they don’t even follow their own limited understanding. Typically, the person who has the connections tends to be the one who lands the job, and it’s rare that the strongest connections come with the highest level of professional qualifications.

However this may be, there Mr. Smith is, and what kind of a man he is may be judged from his utterances. It is thus that he refers to Mr. Spencer: "There is an old man in England who for years has spent all his time and devoted all his energies to the attempt to create a system which shall entirely ignore the name of the Deity. He will shortly die, and it shall not be remembered that he ever performed an act or said a word that blessed or comforted or relieved his suffering fellows." To further darken the picture, he contrasts Spencer with the late Cardinal Newman, who wrote the hymn "Lead, kindly light," and who, we are told, if he had done nothing more, would have been "followed by the blessings and the prayers of those whom he had comforted and saved." Again, dealing with the modern scientific view that, in the development of the human individual all antecedent stages of human development are, in a manner, passed through, he says: "Let us discard the primitive-man theory. You do not believe it. Rather shall we not hold with Emerson that every child born into the world is a new Messiah given into the arms of fallen humanity to lead them back to paradise?"

However this may be, there Mr. Smith is, and you can judge what kind of man he is by what he says. He talks about Mr. Spencer: "There is an old man in England who has spent years of his life and devoted all his energy to creating a system that completely ignores the existence of God. He will soon die, and no one will remember that he ever did anything or said a word that blessed, comforted, or relieved his suffering fellow humans." To make the situation even grimmer, he compares Spencer to the late Cardinal Newman, who wrote the hymn "Lead, kindly light," and who, we are told, if he had done nothing else, would have been "followed by the blessings and prayers of those he comforted and saved." Furthermore, discussing the modern scientific view that suggests all previous stages of human development are somehow experienced by each individual, he says: "Let's forget the primitive-man theory. You don't believe in it. Instead, shouldn't we agree with Emerson that every child born into the world is a new Messiah given to fallen humanity to lead them back to paradise?"

It is no part of our purpose to defend Mr. Spencer against the attacks of so negligible an assailant as Mr. Smith, of Minnesota. The words that Mr. Spencer has spoken for truth, for justice, for humanity, for peace, are his sufficient commendation and vindication—were vindication needed—in the eyes of all who have any competent knowledge of contemporary thought. If these words do not help to make the world better we should feel little inclined to put our trust in the most skillfully constructed sacred lyric. Men do not always know their benefactors; and it is altogether possible, nay probable, that thousands who perhaps never heard Mr. Spencer's name have benefited through the greater consideration with which they have been treated by others, owing to his teaching. It is quite possible for men, yes, and women too, to sing "Lead, kindly light" with great unction, and yet to be the ardent abettors of warlike sentiments and warlike acts—to revel in a ruthless and immoral jingoism.[270] Dryden was not referring to the adherents of any evolutionist philosophy when he wrote:

It's not our goal to defend Mr. Spencer from the attacks of such an insignificant critic like Mr. Smith from Minnesota. The things Mr. Spencer has said about truth, justice, humanity, and peace are more than enough to commend and vindicate him—if vindication is even necessary—in the eyes of anyone who has a proper understanding of modern thought. If these words don't contribute to making the world a better place, we would be less inclined to trust the most beautifully crafted sacred song. People don't always recognize their benefactors; it's entirely possible, even likely, that thousands who may not have heard Mr. Spencer's name have benefited from the greater respect they've received from others, thanks to his teachings. It's also possible for people, both men and women, to sing "Lead, kindly light" with great emotion, yet be strong supporters of aggressive attitudes and actions—delighting in a ruthless and immoral nationalism.[270] Dryden wasn't referring to the followers of any evolutionist philosophy when he wrote:

"We indulge in our desires, and we puff ourselves up with pride,
And injuries repel injuries; Driven by the urge for revenge, unwilling to forgive,
"Our lives contradict the beliefs we hold."

"Not daring to forgive" is good, and nearly as true in the nineteenth century as it was in the seventeenth. The one English statesman who dared to forgive a defeat inflicted on English arms and to acknowledge an error, incurred by that single act a deeper hatred and contempt than he earned by anything else, or all else, in his long and storm-tossed career. We refer to the action taken by Gladstone after the battle of Majuba Hill. And we are much mistaken if the majority of those who execrated him most deeply for not crushing the Boers under England's overwhelming force were not immense admirers of the cardinal's hymn. What is certain is that they were not immense admirers of Spencer, and that Spencer did not immensely admire them.

"Not daring to forgive" is a good thing, and it was just as true in the nineteenth century as it was in the seventeenth. The one English statesman who dared to forgive a defeat suffered by English forces and to admit a mistake faced a deeper hatred and contempt from his peers than he earned from anything else in his long and tumultuous career. We're talking about the actions taken by Gladstone after the battle of Majuba Hill. We're mistaken if we think that the majority of those who criticized him most harshly for not defeating the Boers under England's overwhelming force weren't also huge admirers of the cardinal's hymn. What’s clear is that they didn’t greatly admire Spencer, and Spencer didn’t think much of them either.

Superintendent Smith has quoted Emerson, but he does not occupy the standpoint that enables him to see Emerson in true perspective, or to feel what his philosophy lacks when confronted with the newer knowledge of the century. Mr. J. J. Chapman, in his recent memorable book of essays, gives us a better view. "A critic in the modern sense," Mr. Chapman says, "he (Emerson) was not. He lived too early and at too great a distance from the forum of European thought to absorb the ideas of evolution, and give place to them in his philosophy.... We miss in Emerson the underlying conception of growth, of development, so characteristic of the thought of our own day, and which, for instance, is found everywhere latent in Browning's poetry.... He is probably the last great writer to look at life from a stationary standpoint."

Superintendent Smith has quoted Emerson, but he doesn't have the perspective to see Emerson clearly or to understand what his philosophy lacks when faced with the newer knowledge of our century. Mr. J. J. Chapman, in his recent notable collection of essays, offers us a better perspective. "In the modern sense," Mr. Chapman says, "he (Emerson) was not a critic. He lived too early and was too distant from the European intellectual scene to fully grasp the ideas of evolution and incorporate them into his philosophy... We notice a lack of the foundational idea of growth and development in Emerson, which is so typical of today's thinking, and which, for example, is subtly present throughout Browning's poetry... He is likely the last major writer to view life from a fixed standpoint."

That the doctrine of evolution constitutes to-day a most important guiding principle in education no competent educationist could be found to deny. It teaches us to deal with the young as in a very true sense the heirs of all the ages, to make due allowance in childhood for instincts and habits which partake of the earlier stages of human development, and to look forward with confidence to later and higher manifestations. We have less faith than our ancestors had in the rod, and more in the gradual unfolding of the powers and capacities of the mind, and therewith the enlargement and improvement of the moral nature. We do not believe as our forefathers did in breaking children's wills; nor do we view their peccadilloes in the lurid light of a gloomy theological creed. We recognize that veracity, in the sense of strict accuracy of speech, purged of all imaginative elements, is a virtue which not all adults are able to practice, and which is not a natural product of the child mind. We can not accept Emerson's doctrine of infant Messiahs, and yet we can recognize very fully the mission of the child in the home, the demand it makes for tenderness, for patience, for thoughtfulness on the part of parents, the hopes and fears and heart-searchings that it calls into play, the aspirations that it promotes toward the realization, if for its sake only, of a higher life. Froebel grasped a large measure of truth in regard to children, but too much of sentiment, in our opinion, entered into his treatment of them. In the full light of the doctrine of evolution we take them as they are, and help them to work out under favorable conditions that development of which they are capable. We are not imposed upon by childish imitations of[271] mature virtues, and are rather disposed to repress recognized tendencies to precocity; but we believe that the germs of good are sown in every normal human being, and that, unless killed by most unwise treatment, they will fructify in due time.

The idea of evolution is now a crucial guiding principle in education, and no knowledgeable educator would dispute that. It teaches us to view young people as the true heirs of all history, allowing for the instincts and behaviors that reflect earlier stages of human development during childhood, while confidently anticipating later and greater achievements. We have less faith in strict discipline than our ancestors did, and more confidence in the gradual progress of the mind's abilities and the growth of moral character. We don’t subscribe to the belief of our forefathers in breaking children's will; nor do we see their minor misdeeds through the dark lens of a strict religious doctrine. We understand that honesty, in the sense of precise accuracy in speech, free from imaginative embellishments, is a virtue not all adults can master, and it is not something that comes naturally to children. We cannot embrace Emerson's idea of child prodigies, but we fully acknowledge the important role children play at home, the tenderness, patience, and thoughtfulness they require from parents, the hopes and fears they evoke, and the aspirations they inspire for a better life, even if it’s just for their benefit. Froebel understood a lot about children, but we believe his approach was overly sentimental. In light of evolution, we accept children as they are and support them in reaching their potential under positive conditions. We aren’t fooled by childish imitations of adult virtues and tend to discourage any signs of precociousness; however, we believe that every normal human being has potential for goodness, and as long as it isn’t stifled by poor treatment, it will flourish in due time.

What we may well consider seriously is whether our modern modes of life enable us to do that justice to children which evolutionary teaching requires. Can true health of body and mind be conciliated with social ambition or with commercial ambition? Are we not hampered at every turn by false schemes of education, the object of which is to turn out certain conventional products? How many of us can rise up in effective rebellion against the very fashions that in our hearts we most condemn? Before there can be anything like a perfect education for the young there must be a much more fully developed sense of duty than we see as yet in the older generation. The doctrine of evolution is putting the key to a true system into our hands; but to use that key aright requires courage and high purpose—qualities that are not of everyday occurrence. Still, it is matter of congratulation that the truth is not far from us. It is well established in our theories, and one of these days we may hope it will gain a wide and secure footing in our practice.

What we should seriously consider is whether our modern lifestyles allow us to give children the justice that evolutionary teachings demand. Can true health of body and mind coexist with social or commercial ambitions? Are we not held back at every turn by misguided education systems that aim to produce standard outcomes? How many of us can effectively rebel against the very trends we secretly disapprove of? Before we can achieve anything close to a perfect education for the young, we need a much stronger sense of duty than we see in the older generation today. The theory of evolution offers us the key to a genuine education system; however, using that key properly takes courage and a strong sense of purpose—qualities that aren't common. Still, it’s encouraging to know that the truth is within our reach. It’s well established in our theories, and one day we can hope it will become firmly rooted in our practices.

DAVID AMES WELLS.

In the death of David A. Wells, which occurred at his home in Norwich, Connecticut, on the 5th of November, 1898, America has lost one of her ablest and most productive men of letters and science a distinguished representative. Out of a life of seventy years it may fairly be said that Mr. Wells gave fifty of them to intellectual pursuits, which were mainly devoted to the advance of science and its application to practical affairs. After passing the period of early study, and particularly since he became interested in economic questions, much of his work was in the line of original investigation, the results of which have from time to time been given to the public either through his books or in the magazines. Another and more conspicuous feature of his career, the one perhaps that made him best known at home and first gave him reputation abroad, was the valuable service that he rendered the country at large in straightening out the financial tangle the Government had got itself into during and after the civil war. In this undertaking his great store of learning, rare practical sagacity, and unwavering confidence in the final result, carried him through to a brilliant success, earning for him in high quarters the most flattering testimonials of admiration and respect.

In the death of David A. Wells, which took place at his home in Norwich, Connecticut, on November 5, 1898, America has lost one of its most talented and productive writers and scientists, a distinguished representative. Out of a life spanning seventy years, it can fairly be said that Mr. Wells dedicated fifty of them to intellectual pursuits, primarily focused on advancing science and its practical applications. After completing his early studies, and particularly after he became interested in economic issues, much of his work involved original research, the results of which he shared with the public through his books and magazines. Another, more prominent aspect of his career, which perhaps made him best known domestically and first established his reputation internationally, was the valuable service he provided to the country by helping resolve the financial chaos the Government encountered during and after the Civil War. In this endeavor, his immense knowledge, exceptional practical insight, and unwavering belief in a successful outcome guided him to remarkable success, earning him high praise and respect from many esteemed sources.

Looked at in the light of what he actually achieved, Mr. Wells's preparation for his life work seems to have been almost an ideal one. Gifted with a strong love of Nature and having a decidedly practical turn of mind, he early showed a fondness for the study of science. This led him, soon after graduating from Williams College in 1847, to enter the Lawrence Scientific School of Harvard University. Here he completed the course with the first class that was graduated by that institution in 1852. While studying in the scientific school young Wells became the special pupil of Agassiz, and, as the sequel shows, caught the enthusiasm with which that great master was wont to inspire the young men who were fortunate enough to come within the range of his influence. During this period Mr. Wells, in association with Mr. George Bliss,[272] began the compilation and publication of the Annual of Scientific Discovery, which he continued for some sixteen years. That he was a clever student with quite exceptional endowments is seen in the circumstance that immediately after graduation he was appointed assistant professor in the scientific school and lecturer on physics and chemistry in Groton Academy, Massachusetts. He also, between 1857 and 1863, prepared a series of scientific school books embracing the subjects of physics, chemistry, and geology, and a volume on the Science of Common Things, all of which attained a wide circulation.

Looking at what he actually accomplished, Mr. Wells's preparation for his life's work seems almost perfect. With a strong love for nature and a practical mindset, he showed an early interest in studying science. This led him, shortly after graduating from Williams College in 1847, to attend the Lawrence Scientific School at Harvard University. He completed the program with the first class that graduated from that institution in 1852. While at the scientific school, young Wells became a special pupil of Agassiz, and, as later events show, he caught the enthusiasm that this great teacher was known to inspire in the fortunate young men who came into his sphere of influence. During this time, Mr. Wells, along with Mr. George Bliss,[272] began compiling and publishing the Annual of Scientific Discovery, which he continued for about sixteen years. His capabilities as a clever student with exceptional talents are evident in the fact that immediately after graduation, he was appointed assistant professor at the scientific school and lecturer on physics and chemistry at Groton Academy in Massachusetts. Additionally, between 1857 and 1863, he prepared a series of science textbooks covering physics, chemistry, and geology, as well as a volume on the Science of Common Things, all of which became widely circulated.

Thus for a period of nearly fifteen years Mr. Wells had devoted himself assiduously to the cultivation of the physical sciences. Beginning with the practical operations of the laboratory, where the value of experiment and observation is made apparent, his work was continued in the strengthening and developing experiences of the teacher, and thence led up to that wider knowledge and that clearness of exposition which a bright mind would acquire in the preparation of a number of successful scientific class books. It may be presumed that by this time he was thoroughly acquainted with scientific method in its applications to the investigation and explanation of physical phenomena. With the results this had yielded in building up the great body of verified knowledge composing the several sciences he must also have been familiar. Mentally alert and with sharpened powers of observation, he was able to seize and classify the facts bearing upon the problem in hand, and subject them to systematic processes of scientific reasoning.

For almost fifteen years, Mr. Wells dedicated himself to the study of the physical sciences. Starting with hands-on work in the lab, where the importance of experiments and observations becomes clear, he progressed through teaching experiences that enhanced his skills. This journey led him to gain broader insights and clarity in explaining concepts, which he showcased in a series of successful scientific textbooks. By this point, he was likely well-versed in the scientific method and its role in exploring and explaining physical phenomena. He must have also been familiar with the extensive body of verified knowledge that makes up various scientific fields. With a keen mind and sharp observational skills, he was able to identify and categorize relevant facts related to the issue at hand, applying systematic scientific reasoning to them.

Such, in brief, was the training and such the equipment brought by Mr. Wells to the study of economic questions when he first began to write upon them in 1864. A better preparation for the work to which he was to give the next thirty years of his life can scarcely be imagined. While it is quite true that in entering this new field he was to encounter a class of facts and variety of phenomena that were of a very different order from those with which he had previously been dealing, their apparently haphazard character did not deceive him. Well versed in the practice of tracing effects to causes, gifted with remarkable powers of insight, and thoroughly believing that the methods of science would prove as available in the study of economics as in other fields, he began his investigations without misgiving, patiently accumulated and studied the facts, and when conclusions were arrived at, no matter how contrary they might be to current teaching, fearlessly announced and defended them. Though half his life a firm believer in the doctrine of protection, when Mr. Wells went to Europe for the Government in 1867 to investigate the subject of tariff taxation, high and low tariff countries alike were visited, with the determination to leave nothing undone that would aid to a better understanding of the question. All the varied aspects of the problem were carefully studied in connection with the principal industries of the respective countries, and, finding reason in the facts thus obtained to revise his opinions, he came home a convert to free trade. For an account of what he had observed during the course of his investigations, and of the conclusions based thereon, the reader is referred to the fourth volume of his reports as commissioner of internal revenue, published in 1869. His book on Recent Economic Changes, and the papers on The Principles of Taxation,[273] that have appeared in this magazine during the last two years, are records of equally painstaking research. Moreover, they are both excellent examples of what a strict adherence to scientific method has done and may yet be expected to do toward clearing up the knotty problems in economics that are now engaging public attention.

This is a brief overview of the training and background that Mr. Wells brought to the study of economic issues when he started writing about them in 1864. It's hard to imagine a better preparation for the work he dedicated the next thirty years of his life to. While it’s true that entering this new area would expose him to facts and phenomena that were quite different from what he had dealt with before, their seemingly random nature didn’t fool him. With a strong ability to trace effects back to their causes, remarkable insight, and a firm belief that scientific methods would be just as effective in studying economics as they are in other fields, he began his research without hesitation, meticulously gathering and analyzing data. When he reached conclusions, even if they went against popular belief, he confidently stated and defended them. Though he had spent half his life strongly supporting the idea of protectionism, when Mr. Wells traveled to Europe for the Government in 1867 to research tariff taxation, he visited both high and low tariff countries, determined to explore every avenue that could lead to a better understanding of the issue. He carefully investigated all aspects of the problem in relation to the main industries in each country, and after finding evidence that led him to rethink his views, he returned home as a supporter of free trade. For a detailed account of his observations during this research and the conclusions he drew from them, the reader can refer to the fourth volume of his reports as commissioner of internal revenue, published in 1869. His book on Recent Economic Changes and the papers on The Principles of Taxation, which have been published in this magazine over the past two years, reflect equally thorough research. Furthermore, they are excellent examples of what strict adherence to scientific method has achieved and what it may further accomplish in addressing the complex economic issues currently receiving public attention.

United with his great learning, and a rare power of generalization, Mr. Wells possessed in full measure that intellectual honesty which is the indispensable characteristic of the true man of science. This enabled him to follow without doubt or hesitation wherever the facts might lead; and with his clear perception of their real import, joined to his habit of independent thought, traits that are displayed throughout all his more formal writings, they are what in our opinion constitute his title to distinction. They give to his teachings, which have already done more than any other agency that we know toward placing the subject of political economy on a sound scientific basis, a high and enduring character.

Combined with his extensive knowledge and a unique ability to generalize, Mr. Wells embodied the intellectual honesty that is essential for a true scientist. This trait allowed him to follow the facts wherever they led without doubt or hesitation. His clear understanding of their true meaning, along with his independent thinking, which is evident in all his formal writings, is what we believe gives him his distinguished status. These qualities lend a lasting and significant value to his teachings, which have, more than any other influence we know, helped to place the field of political economy on a solid scientific foundation.

A BORROWED FOUNDATION.

"The central idea of Professor Giddings's Principles of Sociology, a work that has the honor of being the first independent attempt in English to treat of sociology as such, is that we must postulate on the part of human beings what he calls a consciousness of kind. Critics of his volume have naturally told him that this is essentially a philosophical idea, found in Hegel and in British ethical writers of the eighteenth century."

The main idea of Professor Giddings's *Principles of Sociology*, which is the first significant attempt in English to discuss sociology on its own, is that we need to assume that humans possess what he refers to as a consciousness of kind. Critics of his work have pointed out that this is essentially a philosophical concept, seen in Hegel and in British ethical writers of the eighteenth century.

We quote the above from an article by Professor Caldwell, entitled Philosophy and the Newer Sociology, in the October Contemporary. We are not prepared to dispute Professor Caldwell's statement that the idea of the "consciousness of kind" may be found in the writers to whom he refers; but it would have been very much to the point if he had mentioned that it is to be found most clearly enunciated in Mr. Herbert Spencer's Principles of Sociology. In an article contributed to this magazine in December, 1896, Mr. Spencer took occasion to point out that what Professor Giddings seemed to regard as an aperçu peculiar to himself had been distinctly formulated years before in his own writings. In proof of this he quoted the following passages:

We quote the above from an article by Professor Caldwell, titled Philosophy and the Newer Sociology, in the October Contemporary. We aren’t ready to challenge Professor Caldwell’s claim that the idea of the "consciousness of kind" can be found in the authors he mentions; however, it would have been highly relevant if he had pointed out that it is most clearly articulated in Mr. Herbert Spencer's Principles of Sociology. In an article contributed to this magazine in December 1896, Mr. Spencer took the opportunity to highlight that what Professor Giddings seemed to consider as a unique insight had been clearly expressed years earlier in his own writings. To demonstrate this, he quoted the following passages:

"Sociality having thus commenced, and survival of the fittest tending ever to maintain and increase it, it will be further strengthened by the inherited effects of habit. The perception of kindred beings, perpetually seen, heard, and smelt, will come to form a predominant part of consciousness--so predominant that absence of it will inevitably cause discomfort." "Among creatures led step by step into gregariousness, there will little by little be established a pleasure in being together—a pleasure in the consciousness of one another's presence—a pleasure simpler than, and quite distinct from, those higher ones which it makes possible."

"With social interaction starting to develop, and survival of the fittest working to maintain and enhance it, this will be further supported by the lasting effects of habits. The awareness of similar beings, constantly seen, heard, and smelled, will begin to dominate our consciousness—so much so that the lack of it will inevitably create discomfort. Among creatures gradually moving toward social living, a growing enjoyment in being together will emerge—a joy in being aware of each other's presence—a joy that is simpler and quite different from the more complex pleasures it allows."

The fact is that there is much more in Spencer than most recent writers have ever explored; and the newer sociologists would do well, before putting forward claims to originality, to make sure that they have not been anticipated by the veteran philosopher.

The truth is that there's a lot more in Spencer than most recent writers have explored; and newer sociologists should take the time, before claiming originality, to ensure that they haven't been preempted by the seasoned philosopher.


Scientific Literature.

SPECIAL BOOKS.

In The Play of Animals[59] we are offered a book upon an essentially new topic; for, although much has been written concerning the habits and intelligence of animals, no special consideration has been given to their play or its psychic significance. The survey of this virgin territory seems to the critical reader to have disclosed such limitless area to Professor Groos that he fails to indicate its legitimate boundaries. He confesses himself overcome by a sense of its vastness, stating that the "versatility needed for a thorough investigation is so comprehensive that it is unattainable by an ordinary mortal."

In The Play of Animals[59] we are presented with a book on a fundamentally new topic; while a lot has been said about the behaviors and intelligence of animals, little attention has been paid to their play and its psychological significance. The exploration of this untouched area appears to be so extensive to Professor Groos that he doesn't clearly define its appropriate limits. He admits he's overwhelmed by its enormity, saying that the "versatility required for a thorough investigation is so broad that it's beyond the reach of an ordinary person."

Play, he finds, is not "an aimless activity carried on for its own sake"; neither is it the product of surplus physical energy, as Mr. Spencer defines it, for in youth there is playfulness without this condition. Instincts useful in preserving the species appear before they are seriously needed, and are utilized in play, which serves as preparation for the tasks of life. "Animals do not play because they are young, but have a period of youth in order to play."

Play, he discovers, isn't just "an aimless activity done for its own sake"; nor is it merely the result of extra physical energy, as Mr. Spencer suggests, since young people can be playful without that excess. Instincts that are important for the survival of the species emerge before they are truly necessary and are expressed through play, which acts as practice for life's challenges. "Animals don't play because they're young; they have a period of youth so they can play."

The special ends accomplished by play are control of the body, command of the means of locomotion, agility in pursuit of prey and in escaping danger, and prowess in fighting. The games pursued in attaining these ends are classified in nine groups, beginning with those of experimentation and ending with those referred to curiosity. They include plays of movement, hunting, fighting, love, construction, nursing, and imitation. For all of these Professor Groos finds but one instinct of play responsible, supplemented by the instinct of imitation. He enters into an elaborate discussion of instinct, giving an outline of Weismann's theory of heredity and the views of various writers. He adopts Herbert Spencer's definition of instinct as a complex reflex act, referring its origin to the operation of natural selection, acknowledging the process to be beyond our grasp. In seeking to explain bird song and the love play of animals, the theory of sexual selection is not accepted by him without qualification; a modification of the Darwinian principle is suggested in which the female exerts an unconscious choice. The psychic characteristics of play are the pleasure following satisfaction of instinct, energetic action and joy in the acquirement of power. The animal at first masters its own bodily movements, then seeks the conquest of other animals and inanimate objects. When a certain facility in play has been gained a higher intellectual stage is entered upon, that of make-believe, or playing a part. This state of conscious self-illusion is reached by many of the higher animals. Psychically, it indicates a divided consciousness, and occupies a place between the ordinary state and the abnormal ones of hypnosis and hysteria. To this condition Professor Groos ascribes the genesis of artistic production, an hypothesis that he has elaborated more fully in Einleitung in die Aesthetik.

The specific goals achieved through play are mastering the body, controlling movement, being quick in chasing prey and avoiding danger, and skill in fighting. The types of games played to achieve these goals are divided into nine categories, starting with experimentation and ending with curiosity. They include movement games, hunting, fighting, love, building, nurturing, and imitation. Professor Groos identifies one main instinct of play behind all these activities, with the instinct of imitation as a supplement. He discusses instinct in detail, outlining Weismann's heredity theory and various authors' perspectives. He adopts Herbert Spencer's definition of instinct as a complex reflex action, tracing its origins to natural selection, recognizing that the process is beyond our understanding. In trying to explain bird songs and animal courtship, he doesn't fully accept the theory of sexual selection; instead, he suggests a revised version of Darwin's principle where the female makes an unconscious choice. The psychological aspects of play include the pleasure that follows instinct satisfaction, vigorous activity, and joy in gaining power. Animals start by mastering their movements and then aim to dominate other animals and objects. Once they achieve a certain level of play, they enter a higher intellectual stage characterized by make-believe or role-playing. This state of conscious self-deception is reached by many higher animals. Psychologically, it signifies a divided consciousness and sits between normal and abnormal states like hypnosis and hysteria. Professor Groos links this condition to the origins of artistic creation, an idea he has expanded in Introduction to Aesthetics.

The experimental plays of animals, divided into those of courtship, imitation, and construction, correspond to the principles of self exhibition, [275] imitation, and decoration, which are claimed to be the motives of human art. The acquirement of power through play develops a feeling of freedom, and this the artist likewise seeks to realize in the world of ideals.

The experimental behaviors of animals, categorized into courtship, imitation, and construction, align with the principles of self-presentation, imitation, and decoration, which are said to drive human art. Gaining power through play fosters a sense of freedom, and the artist aspires to achieve this in the realm of ideals.

Artists will not probably acknowledge that "life is earnest, art is playful," nor moralists agree that "man is only human when he plays, for there is no real freedom in the sphere of experience," yet both may find food for thought in Professor Groos's analysis of play.

Artists probably won't admit that "life is serious, art is fun," nor will moralists agree that "a person is only truly human when they play, because there’s no real freedom in the realm of experience," yet both might find something to ponder in Professor Groos's exploration of play.


In the spasm of unreasoning hostility to Spain which has come over the people of the United States, succeeding a period of effusive admiration, the public are apt to forget that that nation has done anything creditable for the promotion of civilization. Yet, leaving out other fields of culture for the present, it has produced two painters who rank among the great masters, besides numerous secondary artists, rivals of any of that grade in the world, and a voluminous literature which George Ticknor thought it worth while to make the study of his life, and which inspired the pens of Irving, Longfellow and Lockhart. One of the works of this literature ranks among the world's greatest classics, and has been, perhaps, after the Bible and Shakespeare more universally read than any other book; and numerous other works—chiefly romances—have furnished patterns or themes for the poets, novelists, and dramatists of other nations. Mr. Fitz Maurice Kelly's excellent and convenient History of Spanish Literature[60] therefore comes in good time to refresh our memories concerning these facts. One does not have to go very far in the history to find that of the great Latin writers of the age of the Cæsars, the two Senecas, Lucan the poet of Pharsalia, Martial the epigrammatist, and Quintilian the rhetorician—still an authority—and many minor writers, "were Spaniards as well as Romans." It also appears that of what Gibbon declared to have been the happiest epoch of man's history—from the death of Domitian to the accession of Commodus, seventy of the eighty years, if we take the liberty, as Mr. Kelly does, of counting Marcus Aurelius as a Cordovan, were passed beneath the scepter of the Spanish Cæsars. Prudentius, a distinguished Latin Christian writer of a succeeding age, was also a Spaniard. Although there were "archaic" works of trovadors before that time, traditionally preserved by juglars, Spanish literature proper began in the twelfth century. It owed much to French and Italian, and in course of time gave much back to them. Among its earliest signs was the development of the romance (ballad), while Arab writers (whose work Mr. Kelly considers of doubtful value) and Jews, who are better spoken of, were early contributors to it. The earliest works of importance were the Mystery of the Magian Kings, one of the first plays in any modern language, and the great heroic poem of the Cid, both anonymous. The first Castilian poet whose name has reached us was Gonzalo de Berceo, 1198 to 1264, who wrote much, and was, "if not an inventor, the chief of a school." Permanent form was given to Spanish prose by King Alfonso the Learned, 1226 to 1284, who, "like Bacon, took all knowledge for his province, and in every department shone pre-eminent." He had numerous collaborators, and "his example in so many fields was followed"—among others (in some of them) by his son and successor, Sancho IV. The Infanta, Juan Manuel, nephew of Alfonso, in one [276] of the stories of his Conde Lucanor—"one of the books of the world"—created the germ of the Taming of the Shrew. Passing a numerous list of writers of respectable merit, for whose names even we have not room, we come to the age of the Catholic kings and Charles V, when for a hundred and fifty years literature most flourished in Spain. Among the features of this period are the Amadis de Gaul—"the best in that kind"—which inspired Cervantes; Columbus, who, though of Italian birth, "was probably the truest Spaniard in all the Spains," the poet Garcilaso de la Vega, and Bernal Diaz and other historians whose names dot Prescott's books. Passing a large number of writers of mark whose works appeared in this age, and stopping only to mention Alonzo de Ercilla y Zuñiga's Araucana as the first literary work of real merit composed in either American continent, we come to the age of Cervantes, whose story of Don Quixote—"the friendless people's friend," as Browning styles him—is not more distinguished for its satirical wit and humor than for its kindly humanity; and Lope de Vega, that most prolific of all dramatic authors, who "left no achievement unattempted," and died lamented by a hundred and fifty-three Spanish and fifty Italian authors, who sang his praises. Among other of the most distinguished writers of this and succeeding periods are Mariana, "the greatest of all Spanish historians"; Góngora, a famous poet in his day; Quevedo; Tirse de Molina, the creator of Don Juan; Calderon, second as a dramatist among Spaniards, if second, only to Lope de Vega, and Alarcón his compeer; and Velasquez, great in art and not small in letters. An interregnum came in during the reign of Carlos II, and French influence made itself felt. The age of the Bourbons produced among others the Benedictine Sarmiento, who as a botanist "won the admiration and friendship of Linné." The present century has been marked by the names of many authors of merit, novelists known to us in translations, by an active movement of historical composition developing brilliant monographs, and by a marked advance of scholarship and tolerance, led by Marcelino Menéndez y Pelayo; with a tendency to produce "a breed of writers of the German type."

In the sudden burst of irrational hostility towards Spain that has swept over the people of the United States, following a time of enthusiastic admiration, the public tends to forget that Spain has made significant contributions to civilization. Setting aside other cultural areas for now, Spain has produced two painters who are considered among the great masters, alongside many talented artists who can rival any of their kind worldwide, and a rich literature that George Ticknor deemed worthy of dedicating his life to studying. This literature has inspired writers like Irving, Longfellow, and Lockhart. One of these works is regarded as one of the world's greatest classics, having been read more widely than any other book except for the Bible and Shakespeare. Many other works, mainly romances, have served as models or themes for poets, novelists, and playwrights from other nations. Mr. Fitz Maurice Kelly's excellent and accessible History of Spanish Literature[60] comes at the perfect time to remind us of these facts. You don’t have to dig very deep into history to discover that among the great Latin writers from the time of the Caesars, the two Senecas, the poet Lucan of Pharsalia, Martial the epigrammatist, and Quintilian the rhetorician—who is still an authority—were all "Spaniards as well as Romans." It also seems that during what Gibbon called the happiest period in human history—from the death of Domitian to the rise of Commodus, seventy of the eighty years, if we take the liberty, as Mr. Kelly does, of considering Marcus Aurelius as a Cordovan, were under the rule of the Spanish Caesars. Prudentius, a notable Latin Christian writer from a later period, was also Spanish. While there were "archaic" works by trovadors prior to that time, traditionally preserved by juglars, proper Spanish literature began in the twelfth century. It was heavily influenced by French and Italian literature and, in time, contributed back to them. The early signs of this literature included the development of the romance (ballad), with contributions from Arab writers (whom Mr. Kelly considers of dubious value) and Jewish writers, who are mentioned more favorably. Significant early works included the Mystery of the Magian Kings, one of the earliest plays in modern languages, and the great epic poem of the Cid, both of which are anonymous. The first named Castilian poet we know of was Gonzalo de Berceo, who lived from 1198 to 1264, who wrote extensively and was "if not an inventor, the leader of a school." King Alfonso the Learned, who reigned from 1226 to 1284, gave Spanish prose a permanent shape, as he "like Bacon, claimed all knowledge as his domain and excelled in every field." He had numerous collaborators, and "his example across many areas was followed"—including by his son and successor, Sancho IV. The Infanta Juan Manuel, nephew of Alfonso, in one of the stories from his Conde Lucanor—"one of the world’s books"—created the basis for the Taming of the Shrew. Ignoring a long list of writers of respectable merit for whom there isn't enough space to name, we arrive at the era of the Catholic Kings and Charles V, when literature truly flourished in Spain for a hundred and fifty years. Notable features of this period include the Amadis de Gaul—"the best in that genre"—which inspired Cervantes; Columbus, who, despite being of Italian origin, "was probably the truest Spaniard of all the Spains," the poet Garcilaso de la Vega, and historians like Bernal Diaz, among others, whose names appear in Prescott's writings. While numerous influential writers emerged during this time, we’ll highlight Alonzo de Ercilla y Zuñiga's Araucana as the first significant literary work composed on the American continents. We then move to the age of Cervantes, whose tale of Don Quixote—"the friendless people’s friend," as Browning describes him—is noted not only for its satirical wit and humor but also for its kind-heartedness; and Lope de Vega, the most prolific dramatic author, who "never backed down from any challenge" and was mourned by 153 Spanish and 50 Italian authors who praised his achievements. Among the most prominent writers from this and later periods are Mariana, "the greatest of all Spanish historians"; Góngora, a well-known poet of his time; Quevedo; Tirso de Molina, creator of Don Juan; Calderón, who ranks second in drama among Spaniards, only behind Lope de Vega, along with Alarcón; and Velasquez, renowned in both art and literature. An interregnum occurred during the reign of Carlos II, during which French influence became prominent. The Bourbon era produced the Benedictine Sarmiento, who, as a botanist, "earned the admiration and friendship of Linné." The current century has seen the emergence of many authors of note, novelists known to us through translations, a vibrant movement of historical writing resulting in brilliant monographs, and a significant advancement in scholarship and tolerance, led by Marcelino Menéndez y Pelayo, alongside a trend towards producing "a new generation of writers in the German style."

GENERAL NOTICES.

The great importance of the problems of forestry and all that pertains to them can not fail to be appreciated by any one who has seen the devastation wrought in many sections of this country by the "wood chopper." Forestry is one of the subjects where natural science can step in and guide the way to economic success, and where, in default of scientific methods, economically fatal results inevitably ensue. The preservation of forests has been an important problem in Europe for many years, but until quite recently it has received little attention in the United States. One of the pioneers in the field of forestry in this country was Franklin B. Hough, whose Elements of Forestry is still a used and useful manual. Among his many schemes for attracting attention and study to this important subject was one of making actual sections of the wood of American trees, and arranging them in a compact and attractive manner for general distribution. This idea he never carried out, and it has remained for his son, Mr. R. B. Hough, to finally carry out the scheme, by publishing a complete series of such sections, carefully prepared and compactly bound.[61] In Part I of the series there are cuttings representing twenty-five species of American trees. The sections are sufficiently thin to allow of [277] their study by transmitted light. There are three cuttings from each species, transverse, radial, and tangential to the grain. An accompanying text gives a condensed description of each tree, including its physical properties, uses, and habitat. These descriptions are preceded by a useful introduction to the study of general botany, describing the methods of distinguishing and naming the various parts of plants and trees, and giving an account of their structure and methods of growth. The actual wood sections, quite apart from their scientific value, are worthy of attention because of their great beauty. They are substantially mounted on black cardboard, each card containing the three sections of a species, and its common name in English, French, German, and Spanish. The thinness of the cuttings makes it possible to use them as transparencies, thus bringing out the texture of the wood in a very effective way.

The significance of forestry issues and everything related to them is clear to anyone who has witnessed the destruction caused in various parts of the country by "wood choppers." Forestry is an area where natural science can lead to economic success, and without scientific methods, the consequences can be economically disastrous. The preservation of forests has been a crucial issue in Europe for many years, but it has received little attention in the United States until recently. One of the pioneers in forestry in this country was Franklin B. Hough, whose Elements of Forestry remains a useful manual. Among his many initiatives to raise awareness and encourage study on this important topic was his idea to create actual sections of wood from American trees and present them in an organized and appealing way for distribution. He never realized this idea, leaving it to his son, Mr. R. B. Hough, to ultimately bring it to life by publishing a complete series of these sections, carefully prepared and neatly bound.[61] In Part I of the series, there are sections representing twenty-five species of American trees. The sections are thin enough to allow for study through transmitted light. There are three sections from each species: transverse, radial, and tangential to the grain. An accompanying text provides a brief description of each tree, including its physical properties, uses, and habitat. These descriptions are preceded by a helpful introduction to general botany, explaining how to identify and name the different parts of plants and trees, and detailing their structure and growth methods. The actual wood sections, aside from their scientific value, are noteworthy for their striking beauty. They are sturdily mounted on black cardboard, with each card featuring the three sections of a species along with its common name in English, French, German, and Spanish. The thinness of the sections allows them to be used as transparencies, effectively showcasing the texture of the wood.

Prof. Charles Reid Barnes is impressed with the fact that while laboratory work has become nearly universal in botany, and laboratory manuals are numerous, there is still a lack of books giving an elementary account of the form and functions of plants of all groups. To supply this want he offers Plant Life[62] as an attempt to exhibit the variety and progressive complexity of the vegetative body; to discuss the more important functions; to explain the unity of plan in both the structure and action of the reproductive organs; and to give an outline of the more striking ways in which plants adapt themselves to the world about them. He has made the effort to treat these subjects so that, however much the student may still have to learn, he will have little to unlearn. The book is not intended to be memorized and recited, but to be intelligible to pupils from thirteen to eighteen years of age who are engaged in genuine laboratory study under the direction "of a live teacher who has studied far more botany than he is trying to teach." It is adapted to use supplementarily to any laboratory guide or to the directions prepared by the teacher. The directions are made fullest in relation to cryptogams and physiology, because these fields are at present most unfamiliar to teachers.

Prof. Charles Reid Barnes is impressed with the fact that while lab work has become almost universal in botany and lab manuals are plentiful, there is still a shortage of books that provide a basic overview of the structure and functions of plants across all groups. To address this gap, he presents Plant Life[62] as an attempt to showcase the diversity and increasing complexity of plant structures; to discuss the most important functions; to clarify the common design in both the structure and function of reproductive organs; and to outline the most notable ways plants adapt to their surroundings. He has made an effort to cover these topics in a way that, no matter how much the student still needs to learn, they will have little to unlearn. The book is not meant to be memorized or recited but to be clear and understandable for students aged thirteen to eighteen who are participating in genuine lab studies under the guidance of an enthusiastic teacher who has studied much more botany than they are teaching. It is designed to be used as a supplement to any lab guide or the instructions provided by the teacher. The instructions are most detailed regarding cryptogams and physiology, as these areas are currently the least familiar to teachers.

Attaching great importance to Electro-Dynamics, which he thinks will in the near future assume the same relation to the electric motor that the science of thermo-dynamics already bears to the steam engine, Mr. Charles Ashley Carus-Wilson aims in the book of that name[63] to apply the principles of that science to the direct-current motor. Writing for electrical engineers particularly, he takes for granted a certain acquaintance with the use and design of motors, but avoids unexplained technicalities as far as possible. He has not deemed it necessary to deal with self-induction, except in connection with the question of sparking. The numerical accuracy attempted has been limited to that attainable with an ordinary ten-inch slide rule, on which all the examples have been worked out. Importance is attached to the graphic method of solution.

Highlighting the significance of Electro-Dynamics, which he believes will soon have a similar impact on electric motors as thermo-dynamics has had on steam engines, Mr. Charles Ashley Carus-Wilson intends in the book of that name[63] to apply the principles of that science to direct-current motors. Targeting electrical engineers specifically, he assumes the reader has some familiarity with motor use and design, but strives to avoid unexplained technical jargon whenever possible. He has chosen not to discuss self-induction except in relation to sparking issues. The numerical precision aimed for is limited to what can be achieved with a standard ten-inch slide rule, which has been used for all the examples. He places importance on the graphic method of solution.

Of Dr. Frank Overton's three books on Applied Physiology,[64] the first or primary grade follows a natural order of treatment, presenting in each subject elementary anatomical facts in a manner that impresses function rather than form, and from the form described derives the function. The facts and principles are then applied to everyday life. The intermediate grade, besides being an introduction to the study of anatomy and physiology, is intended to be a complete elementary book in itself, giving a clear picture of how each organ of the body performs its work. The advanced grade book was suggested by a series of popular lectures in which the author presented the essential principles of physiology about which a physician is consulted daily. His explanations of many common facts were novel to his auditors, and it was found that the school books were silent upon many of these points, especially with regard to the cells. Throughout the series the fact that [278] the cells are the units in which life exists and acts is emphasized. The author has endeavored to include all the useful points of the older text-books, and to add such new matter as the recent progress of physiological and hygienic science demands. Avoiding technical terms, he has sought to express the truths in simple language, "such as he would use in instructing a mother as to the nature of the sickness of her child." The subjects of alcohol and other narcotics are made prominent in all the books, and are discussed fully in the third of the series. The relation of respiration and oxidation to the disappearance of food, to the production of waste matters, and to the development of heat and force, is dwelt upon. Simple and easy demonstrations, many of them new, are provided at the ends of chapters. A chapter on Repairs of Injuries, or the restoration of the natural functions, when impaired, by the body, is new in a school textbook.

Of Dr. Frank Overton's three books on Applied Physiology,[64] the first or primary level follows a natural progression, presenting basic anatomical facts in a way that highlights function over form, deriving function from the described form. The facts and principles are then connected to everyday life. The intermediate level, in addition to introducing the study of anatomy and physiology, is designed to be a complete elementary book on its own, providing a clear understanding of how each organ in the body does its job. The advanced level book was inspired by a series of popular lectures where the author explained key physiology principles that physicians deal with daily. His explanations of many common facts were new to his audience, and it turned out that school books were quiet on several of these topics, especially regarding cells. Throughout the series, it is emphasized that the cells are the fundamental units of life. The author has tried to include all the useful information from older textbooks while adding new content that modern physiological and hygiene science demands. Steering clear of technical jargon, he aimed to communicate truths in simple language, "like he would use when explaining the nature of a child's illness to a mother." The subjects of alcohol and other narcotics are prominently featured in all the books and are discussed thoroughly in the third book of the series. The connection between respiration and oxidation with the breakdown of food, the production of waste, and the generation of heat and energy is highlighted. Simple, easy demonstrations, many of which are new, are included at the end of each chapter. A chapter on the Repair of Injuries, or how the body restores its natural functions when impaired, is a novel addition in a school textbook.

In Yetta Ségal,[65] a slender thread of a story is used by Mr. Rollin as the vehicle for a theory of "type fusion" or convergence which he thinks has not received sufficient attention from social or scientific students. There are a pair of lovers, one of whom is discovered at a critical period in the courtship to have negro blood in his veins, and a philosopher who comes forward to satisfy the parties (who hardly need it) that this is no serious matter, but is all according to human evolution and the destiny of the race. "You must be impressed," he says, "by the fact that there are a great many people here and there, of mixed blood, and that the number is increasing; ... it is well that not a few are indeed truly admirable specimens of the human race. Such phenomena must be interpreted in a way consistent with man's nature: if he is developmental; if he shall attain a higher status through struggle, or through means that are seemingly, or for the time, degrading; if he is moving from the simple to the complex, as to organization; if universal movement tends to unific existence—then race interchange, with elimination of peculiar characteristics, has probably made its appearance as a phase of infinite order, and for the benefit of future man.... It is presumptuous for the wisest to assert that the man of lower type has no element of strength peculiar to his race which the most advanced does not need in his present organization. It may be needed either for present protection in the way of re-enforcement, or as an element of strength for further advancement." Mr. Rollin does not advocate type fusion or wish to accelerate the movement, but presents it as a fact and factor in human evolution deserving more extensive and thorough study than it has received.

In Yetta Séral,[65] a slim narrative is used by Mr. Rollin to explore a theory of "type fusion" or convergence, which he believes hasn't been sufficiently recognized by social or scientific scholars. There's a couple in love, and at a critical moment in their relationship, it's revealed that one of them has African ancestry. A philosopher steps in to assure everyone (who hardly needs reassurance) that this isn't a big deal—it’s all part of human evolution and the future of the human race. "You have to recognize," he says, "that there are many people here and there of mixed heritage, and that number is growing; ... it's good that many are actually excellent examples of humanity. We need to interpret these phenomena in a way that aligns with human nature: if humans are developmental; if they will reach a higher status through struggle or through experiences that may seem degrading at the moment; if they’re transitioning from simplicity to complexity in organization; if universal progress tends to unify existence—then the mixing of races, along with the reduction of distinct characteristics, is likely emerging as a part of an infinite order, benefiting the future of humanity... It's arrogant for even the wisest to claim that individuals considered to be of a lower type lack strengths unique to their race that even the most advanced people might need for their current state. These strengths may be necessary either for immediate defense through reinforcement, or as a foundation for further progress." Mr. Rollin doesn't promote type fusion or wish to hasten it but presents it as a reality and an element in human evolution that deserves far more in-depth study than it has received.

The increasing attention which of late years has been given to the study of comparative anatomy has finally resulted in what promises to be a complete and detailed account of the structure of a subhuman mammal.[66] The author, Dr. Jayne, believes that a course in mammalian anatomy offers a valuable preliminary to the study of medicine, and this is the purpose for which the book has been made. This is to a certain extent true, especially where, as in the case of the cat, there is so close a similarity to the structure of the human body. But the chief scientific interest and value of such a work must lie in its broader philosophic aspects; in the aid which it can not but give in clearing up some of the many mooted points of evolutional biology, and in the stimulus which it will impart to the study of relationships among the lower animals. The present volume, the first of the series, deals only with the skeleton of the cat, each bone being first studied individually, then in its relations to other bones and to the muscular system and the skeleton as a whole, and finally in comparison with the corresponding portion of the human skeleton. There are 611 extremely good illustrations, and the printing of the volume is unusually clean and attractive.

The growing focus on comparative anatomy in recent years has finally led to what seems to be a complete and detailed examination of the structure of a non-human mammal.[66] The author, Dr. Jayne, believes that taking a course in mammalian anatomy is a valuable foundation for studying medicine, and that’s the purpose of this book. This is somewhat true, especially since, in the case of the cat, there’s a close similarity to human body structure. However, the main scientific interest and value of this work should focus on its broader philosophical implications; it contributes to resolving many debated issues in evolutionary biology and encourages the exploration of relationships among lower animals. This first volume in the series focuses solely on the cat's skeleton, examining each bone individually, as well as its connections to other bones, the muscular system, and the skeleton as a whole, and finally comparing it to the corresponding part of the human skeleton. The book includes 611 high-quality illustrations, and the printing is particularly clean and appealing.

Among the articles of special value in recent numbers of the (bimonthly) Bulletin of the Department of Labor, under the editorial control of Commissioner Carroll D. Wright and Chief Clerk O. D. Weaver, are [279] those on Boarding Houses and Clubs for Working Women, by Mary S. Ferguson, in the March number; The Alaskan Gold Fields and the Opportunities they afford for Capital and Labor, by S. C. Durham, in the May number; Economic Aspects of the Liquor Problem; Brotherhood Relief and Insurance of Railway Employees, by E. R. Johnson, Ph. D.; and The Nations of Antwerp, by J. H. Gore, Ph. D., in the July number. Summaries of reports of labor statistics, of legislation and decisions of courts affecting labor, and of recent Government contracts constitute regular departments of the bulletin. (Washington.)

Among the valuable articles in recent issues of the bimonthly Bulletin of the Department of Labor, overseen by Commissioner Carroll D. Wright and Chief Clerk O. D. Weaver, are [279] those discussing Boarding Houses and Clubs for Working Women, by Mary S. Ferguson, in the March issue; The Alaskan Gold Fields and the Opportunities they Offer for Capital and Labor, by S. C. Durham, in the May issue; Economic Aspects of the Liquor Problem; Brotherhood Relief and Insurance of Railway Employees, by E. R. Johnson, Ph. D.; and The Nations of Antwerp, by J. H. Gore, Ph. D., in the July issue. Summaries of labor statistics reports, legislation, court decisions affecting labor, and recent Government contracts are standard sections of the bulletin. (Washington.)

For delicate humor and refined art of expression few writers can excel Jean Paul Friedrich Richter, but the sources of his rich flow of humor are so deeply hidden and his expression is so very subtle that the generality of those who attempt to read his works fail to appreciate him or even to understand him, and give him up. The pleasure of appreciating him is, however, worth the pains of learning to do so. Those who are willing to undertake this, and who read German, may find help in the Selections from the Works of Jean Paul Friedrich Richter, prepared by George Stuart Collins, and published by the American Book Company. The book is intended for students of German who have attained a certain mastery of the language. Pains have been taken to avoid such passages as might from their mere difficulty discourage the reader, and to choose such as would be complete in themselves. The selections are made from the shorter writings of the author, and each is intended to be representative of some feature of his manifold genius and style.

For subtle humor and refined expression, few writers match Jean Paul Friedrich Richter. However, the sources of his rich humor are deeply buried, and his expression is so nuanced that most readers who try to engage with his work fail to appreciate or even understand him, ultimately giving up. Yet, the joy of truly appreciating his work is worth the effort to learn how. Those willing to take on this challenge, and who read German, may find assistance in the Selections from the Works of Jean Paul Friedrich Richter, compiled by George Stuart Collins, and published by the American Book Company. This book is designed for German language students who have reached a certain level of proficiency. Care has been taken to exclude passages that might discourage readers due to their difficulty and to select those that are complete in themselves. The selections come from the author's shorter writings, each representing a distinct aspect of his diverse genius and style.

A notice of the Stenotypy, or system of shorthand for the typewriter, of D. A. Quinn, was published in the Popular Science Monthly in March, 1896. It is really a system of phonography to be used with the typewriter whenever it is practicable to employ that instrument. A second edition of Mr. Quinn's manual and exercises for the practice of the system is published by the American Book Exchange, Providence, R. I.

A notice about the Stenotypy, or shorthand system for the typewriter, created by D. A. Quinn, was published in Popular Science Monthly in March 1896. It’s essentially a phonography system intended for use with the typewriter whenever it’s feasible to use that equipment. A second edition of Mr. Quinn's manual and practice exercises for the system is published by the American Book Exchange, Providence, R. I.

A paper on Polished-Stone Articles used by the New York Aborigines before and during European Occupation, published as a Bulletin of the New York State Museum, is complementary to a previous bulletin on articles of chipped stone. Both papers are by the Rev. Dr. W. M. Beauchamp, and are illustrated by figures from his large collection of original drawings, made in nearly all parts of New York, but mostly from the central portion. While the chipped implements are more numerous and widespread than those treated of in the present bulletin, the latter show great patience and skill in their higher forms and taste in selecting materials, and they give hints of superstitions and ceremonies not yet thoroughly understood.

A paper on Polished-Stone Articles used by the New York Aborigines before and during European Occupation, published as a Bulletin of the New York State Museum, adds to a previous bulletin on chipped stone articles. Both papers are by the Rev. Dr. W. M. Beauchamp, and they include figures from his extensive collection of original drawings, created in almost every part of New York, but mainly from the central region. While the chipped tools are more numerous and found in more places than those discussed in this bulletin, the polished pieces demonstrate great patience and skill in their more refined forms and show a taste for selecting materials, hinting at superstitions and rituals that are not yet fully understood.

Henry Goldman has invented, in the arithmachine, what he claims is a rapid and reliable computing machine of small dimensions and large capacity, with other advantages. He now offers, as a companion to it, The Arithmachinist, a book intended to serve as a self-instructor in mechanical arithmetic. It gives historical and technical chapters on the calculating machines of the past, describes the principles controlling the construction and operations, and furnishes explanations concerning the author's own device. (Published by the Office Men's Record Company, Chicago, for one dollar.)

Henry Goldman has created an arithmachine, which he claims is a fast and dependable computing device that’s compact yet powerful, along with other benefits. He now offers, as a companion to it, The Arithmachinist, a book designed to be a self-teaching guide in mechanical arithmetic. It includes historical and technical chapters on past calculating machines, explains the principles behind their design and function, and provides details about the author’s own invention. (Published by the Office Men's Record Company, Chicago, for one dollar.)

The Bulletin from the Laboratories of Natural History of the State University of Iowa, Vol. IV, No. 3, contains two technical articles: On the Actinaria, collected by the Bahama Expedition of the University, in 1891, by J. P. McMurrich, and the Brachyura of the Biological Expedition to the Florida Keys and the Bahamas in 1893, by Mary J. Rathbun; and a list of the coleoptera of Southern Arizona, by H. F. Wickham. Mr. Wickham observes that the insects of northern Arizona are widely different from those of the southern part, a fact which he ascribes to difference of altitude, and, consequently, in vegetation. The Bulletin is sold for fifty cents a copy.

The Bulletin from the Laboratories of Natural History of the State University of Iowa, Vol. IV, No. 3, includes two technical articles: "On the Actinaria," collected by the University’s Bahama Expedition in 1891, by J. P. McMurrich, and "The Brachyura of the Biological Expedition to the Florida Keys and the Bahamas in 1893," by Mary J. Rathbun; along with a list of the coleoptera of Southern Arizona, by H. F. Wickham. Mr. Wickham notes that the insects in northern Arizona are quite different from those in the southern region, which he attributes to differences in altitude and, as a result, in vegetation. The Bulletin is available for fifty cents a copy.

Two books in English—Elementary English and Elements of Grammar and Composition—prepared by E. Oram Lyte, and published by the American Book Company, are intended to include and cover a complete graded course in language lessons, grammar, and composition for study in the primary and grammar grades of schools. The endeavor has been made to present the subject[280] in such a way that the pupil shall become interested in the study from the first. The first book, Elementary English, is designed to furnish material for primary language work, and to show how this material can be used to advantage, embodying and representing the natural methods of language teaching. The child is given something to do—easy and practical—at every point, and is not troubled by formal definitions and rules to be committed to memory. The second book is also based on the principle that the best way to gain a working knowledge of the English language is by the working or laboratory method. It is therefore largely made up of exercises, and aims to teach through practice. The subject is unfolded from a psychological rather than a logical point of view. What is to be memorized is reduced to a minimum, and not presented till the pupil is ready for it. The lessons in literature and composition are designed to help the pupil to appreciate worth and beauty of literature, and lead him to fluent and accurate expression.

Two books in English—Elementary English and Elements of Grammar and Composition—created by E. Oram Lyte and published by the American Book Company, are designed to offer a complete graded course in language lessons, grammar, and composition for primary and grammar school students. The aim is to present the subject[280] in a way that engages students from the start. The first book, Elementary English, provides materials for primary language work and demonstrates how these materials can be used effectively, incorporating natural methods of teaching language. Each activity is simple and practical, allowing children to engage without being burdened by formal definitions and memorized rules. The second book is based on the belief that the best way to learn English is through practical experience. It largely consists of exercises and aims to teach through hands-on practice. The approach focuses on psychological understanding rather than strict logic. What needs to be memorized is kept to a minimum and introduced only when students are ready. The lessons in literature and composition are designed to help students appreciate the value and beauty of literature and to encourage fluent and accurate expression.

The Bulletin of the Geological Institution of the University of Upsala presents a series of special papers of much interest to students of that science, on studies in geology, largely of Scandinavia, but of other countries as well. Part 2 of Vol. III, now before us, has such papers on Silurian Coral Reefs in Gothland, by Carl Wiman; the Quaternary Mammalia of Sweden, by Rutger Sernander; Some Ore Deposits of the Atacama Desert, by Otto Nordenskiold; the Structure of some Gothlandish Graphites, by Carl Wiman; the Interglacial Submergence of Great Britain, by H. Munthe; Mechanical Disturbances and Chemical Changes in the Ribbon Clays of Sweden, by P. J. Holmquist; Some Mineral Changes, by A. G. Högborn; and the Proceedings of the Geological Section of the Students' Association of Natural Science, Upsala. The articles are in German, English, and (in previous numbers) French.

The Bulletin of the Geological Institution of the University of Upsala features a collection of special papers that are very interesting to students of geology, focusing on studies from Scandinavia as well as other countries. Part 2 of Vol. III, which we have in front of us, includes papers on Silurian Coral Reefs in Gothland, by Carl Wiman; the Quaternary Mammals of Sweden, by Rutger Sernander; Some Ore Deposits of the Atacama Desert, by Otto Nordenskiold; the Structure of some Gothland Graphites, by Carl Wiman; the Interglacial Submergence of Great Britain, by H. Munthe; Mechanical Disturbances and Chemical Changes in the Ribbon Clays of Sweden, by P. J. Holmquist; Some Mineral Changes, by A. G. Högborn; and the Proceedings of the Geological Section of the Students' Association of Natural Science, Upsala. The articles are in German, English, and (in earlier issues) French.

Two Spanish-American works of very different character have come to us from Valparaiso, Chili. One is entitled Literatura Arcaica—Estudios Criticos, or critical studies of old Spanish literature, by Eduardo de la Barra, of the Royal Spanish Academy, which were communicated to the Latin-American Scientific Congress at Buenos Ayres. The author was invited to present to the congress the fruits of his extensive studies on the Poem of the Cid, but afterward modified his plan and gave these, the results of his more general investigations of the romances of the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries, which Spanish critics regard as the most ancient they have, and other romances attributed to the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, with an article on the Cid. This work is published by K. Newman, Valparaiso.

Two Spanish-American works of very different types have come to us from Valparaiso, Chile. One is titled Ancient Literature—Critical Studies, or critical studies of old Spanish literature, by Eduardo de la Barra from the Royal Spanish Academy, which he presented at the Latin-American Scientific Congress in Buenos Aires. The author was invited to share the results of his extensive studies on the Poem of the Cid, but later changed his plan and presented instead the findings of his broader research on the romances of the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries, which Spanish critics consider the oldest they have, as well as other romances from the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, along with an article on the Cid. This work is published by K. Newman, Valparaiso.

The other book is a volume of Rrimas, or rhymes, by Gustabo Adolfo Béker, published by Carlos Cabezon, at Valparaiso. The ordinary student might think that the Spanish language is one of those least in need of spelling reform, but not so the author and publisher of these poems, which are presented in the most radically "reformed" spelling, and with them comes a pamphlet setting forth the character and principles of "Ortografia Rrazional."

The other book is a collection of Rrimas, or rhymes, by Gustabo Adolfo Béker, published by Carlos Cabezon in Valparaiso. The average student might believe that the Spanish language is one of those least in need of spelling reform, but that's not the case for the author and publisher of these poems, which are presented with the most radically "reformed" spelling. Along with them comes a pamphlet explaining the character and principles of "Ortografia Rrazional."

The report of a study of seventy-three Irish and Irish-American criminals made at the Kings County Penitentiary, Brooklyn, N. Y., by Dr. H. L. Winter, and published as Notes on Criminal Anthropology and Bio-Sociology, contains numerous observations bearing upon the effect of hereditary influences in criminality, but hardly sufficient to justify the drawing of any general conclusions.

The report of a study of seventy-three Irish and Irish-American criminals conducted at the Kings County Penitentiary in Brooklyn, NY, by Dr. H. L. Winter, and published as Notes on Criminal Anthropology and Bio-Sociology, includes many observations on the impact of hereditary factors on criminal behavior, but there isn’t enough evidence to support making any broad conclusions.

The late Mr. Lewis M. Rutherfurd, in developing the art of astronomical photography, naturally gave much attention to the star 61 Cygni—which was the first to yield its parallax, and through which the possibility of measuring stellar distances was shown—and its neighbors. A number of the plates of this series were partially studied by Miss Ida C. Martin more than twenty years ago, and the study has now been carried out by Herman S. Davis, as part of the work of Columbia University Observatory. The results of Mr. Davis's labors are published by the observatory in three papers: Catalogue of Sixty-five Stars near 61 Cygni; The Parallaxes of 611 and 612 Cygni; and Catalogue of Thirty-four Stars near "Bradley 3077"; under a single cover.

The late Mr. Lewis M. Rutherfurd, in developing the art of astronomical photography, naturally focused a lot of attention on the star 61 Cygni—which was the first to show its parallax and through which the possibility of measuring stellar distances was demonstrated—and its neighbors. A number of plates from this series were partially studied by Miss Ida C. Martin over twenty years ago, and the study has now been continued by Herman S. Davis as part of the work at Columbia University Observatory. The results of Mr. Davis's efforts are published by the observatory in three papers: Catalogue of Sixty-five Stars near 61 Cygni; The Parallaxes of 611 and 612 Cygni; and Catalogue of Thirty-four Stars near "Bradley 3077"; all under a single cover.

In a small work entitled A Theory of Life deduced from the Evolution Philosophy[281] a few thoughts are recorded by Sylvan Drey relative to the manner in which, from central doctrines identical with the teachings of Herbert Spencer, a system of religion, an ideal society, a theory of ethics, and a political creed—the doctrine of social individualism—may be built up. The religion is to recognize an inexplicable and inconceivable energy revealing itself in the universe, of which the highest theistic conception possible to human beings, free from the supposition that it represents a likeness, is the only one that can be accepted. "Absolute truth is beyond the grasp of human beings; but for all practical purposes the teachings of the evolution philosophy, relative truths though they may be, may be regarded as final and conclusive." Mr. Drey's paper of thirty-four pages is published by Williams & Norgate, London.

In a small work called A Theory of Life deduced from the Evolution Philosophy[281], a few thoughts by Sylvan Drey are shared about how, based on central ideas similar to those of Herbert Spencer, we can create a system of religion, an ideal society, a theory of ethics, and a political belief—the principle of social individualism. The religion acknowledges an inexplicable and unimaginable energy that reveals itself in the universe, and the highest conception of God that humans can have, free from the idea that it represents an image, is the only one that can be accepted. "Absolute truth is beyond human understanding; but for all practical purposes, the teachings of the evolution philosophy, although they may be relative truths, can be considered as final and conclusive." Mr. Drey's thirty-four-page paper is published by Williams & Norgate, London.

PUBLICATIONS RECEIVED.

Adams, Alexander. Mechanical Flight on Beating Wings. The Solution of the Problem. Pp. 5.

Adams, Alexander. Mechanical Flight on Beating Wings. The Solution to the Problem. Pp. 5.

Agricultural Experiment Stations. Bulletins and Reports. New York: No. 143. A Destructive Beetle and a Remedy. By P. H. Hall and V. H. Lowe; No. 144. Combating Cabbage Pests. By F. H. Hall and F. A. Sirrine. Pp. 8.—Ohio: Newspaper, No. 186. Peach Yellows and Prevention of Smut in Wheat. Pp. 2; No. 24. The Maintenance of Fertility. Pp. 42.—United States Department of Agriculture: No. 9. Cuckoos and Shrikes in their Relation to Agriculture. By F. E. L. Beal and Sylvester D. Judd. Pp. 25; No. 10. Life Zones and Crop Zones of the United States. By C. Hart Merriam. Pp. 79; No. 11. The Geographic Distribution of Cereals in North America. By C. S. Plumb. Pp. 24; Division of Statistics: Crop Circular for October, 1898.—University of Illinois: No. 51. Variations in Milk and Milk Production. Summary. Pp. 40; No. 52. Orchard Cultivation. Pp. 24; No. 53. Abstract. The Chemistry of the Corn Kernel. Pp. 4.

Agricultural Experiment Stations. Bulletins and Reports. New York: No. 143. A Destructive Beetle and a Remedy. By P. H. Hall and V. H. Lowe; No. 144. Combating Cabbage Pests. By F. H. Hall and F. A. Sirrine. Pp. 8.—Ohio: Newspaper, No. 186. Peach Yellows and Prevention of Smut in Wheat. Pp. 2; No. 24. The Maintenance of Fertility. Pp. 42.—United States Department of Agriculture: No. 9. Cuckoos and Shrikes in their Relation to Agriculture. By F. E. L. Beal and Sylvester D. Judd. Pp. 25; No. 10. Life Zones and Crop Zones of the United States. By C. Hart Merriam. Pp. 79; No. 11. The Geographic Distribution of Cereals in North America. By C. S. Plumb. Pp. 24; Division of Statistics: Crop Circular for October, 1898.—University of Illinois: No. 51. Variations in Milk and Milk Production. Summary. Pp. 40; No. 52. Orchard Cultivation. Pp. 24; No. 53. Abstract. The Chemistry of the Corn Kernel. Pp. 4.

Allen, Alfred H. Commercial Organic Analysis. Second edition, revised and enlarged. Proteids and Albuminous Principles. Philadelphia: P. Blakiston's Son & Co. Pp. 584. $4.50.

Allen, Alfred H. Commercial Organic Analysis. Second edition, revised and enlarged. Proteins and Albuminous Principles. Philadelphia: P. Blakiston's Son & Co. Pp. 584. $4.50.

Atkinson, George Francis. Elementary Botany. New York: Henry Holt & Co. Pp. 444. $1.25.

Atkinson, George Francis. Elementary Botany. New York: Henry Holt & Co. Pp. 444. $1.25.

Bulletins, Proceedings, and Reports. American Chemical Society: Directory. Pp. 551.—Field Columbian Museum, Chicago. Publication 28: Ruins of X Kichmook, Yucatan. By Edward H. Thompson. Pp. 16, with 18 plates.—Lake Mohonk Conference on International Arbitration: Report of the Fourth Annual Meeting, 1898. Pp. 116.—Maryland Geological Survey: Report on the Survey of the Boundary Line between Alleghany and Garrett Counties. By L. A. Bauer. Pp. 48, with 6 plates.—New York Academy of Sciences: Annals. Vol. X. Pp. 292, with 5 plates; Vol. XI, Part II. Pp. 168, with 20 plates.—Pennsylvania Society for the Prevention of Tuberculosis: Report for the Year ending April 13, 1898. Pp. 16.—The Philadelphia Museums: The Philadelphia Commercial Museum. Pp. 16.—United States Commissioner of Labor: Twelfth Annual Report, 1897. Economical Aspects of the Liquor Problem. Pp. 275.—University of Wisconsin: Bulletin No. 25. The Action of Solutions on the Sense of Taste. By Louis Kahlenberg. Pp. 82.—University of Chicago: Anthropology. III. The Mapa de Cuauhtlantzinco or Codice Campos. By Frederick Starr. Pp. 38, with plates.—University of Illinois: The New Requirements for Admission. By Stephen A. Forbes. Pp. 22.

Bulletins, Proceedings, and Reports. American Chemical Society: Directory. Pp. 551.—Field Columbian Museum, Chicago. Publication 28: Ruins of X Kichmook, Yucatan. By Edward H. Thompson. Pp. 16, with 18 plates.—Lake Mohonk Conference on International Arbitration: Report of the Fourth Annual Meeting, 1898. Pp. 116.—Maryland Geological Survey: Report on the Survey of the Boundary Line between Alleghany and Garrett Counties. By L. A. Bauer. Pp. 48, with 6 plates.—New York Academy of Sciences: Annals. Vol. X. Pp. 292, with 5 plates; Vol. XI, Part II. Pp. 168, with 20 plates.—Pennsylvania Society for the Prevention of Tuberculosis: Report for the Year ending April 13, 1898. Pp. 16.—The Philadelphia Museums: The Philadelphia Commercial Museum. Pp. 16.—United States Commissioner of Labor: Twelfth Annual Report, 1897. Economical Aspects of the Liquor Problem. Pp. 275.—University of Wisconsin: Bulletin No. 25. The Action of Solutions on the Sense of Taste. By Louis Kahlenberg. Pp. 82.—University of Chicago: Anthropology. III. The Mapa de Cuauhtlantzinco or Codice Campos. By Frederick Starr. Pp. 38, with plates.—University of Illinois: The New Requirements for Admission. By Stephen A. Forbes. Pp. 22.

Bailey, L. H. Sketch of the Evolution of our Native Fruits. New York: The Macmillan Company. Pp. 472. $2.

Bailey, L. H. Sketch of the Evolution of Our Native Fruits. New York: The Macmillan Company. Pp. 472. $2.

Beddard, Frank E. Elementary Zoölogy. New York: Longmans, Green & Co. Pp. 208.

Beddard, Frank E. Elementary Zoology. New York: Longmans, Green & Co. Pp. 208.

Brush, George J., and Penfield, Samuel L. Manual of Determinative Mineralogy, with an Introduction on Blowpipe Analysis. New York: John Wiley & Sons. Fifteenth edition. Pp. 312.

Brush, George J., and Penfield, Samuel L. Manual of Determinative Mineralogy, with an Introduction on Blowpipe Analysis. New York: John Wiley & Sons. Fifteenth edition. Pp. 312.

Bryant, William M. Life, Death, and Immortality, with Kindred Essays. New York: The Baker & Taylor Company. Pp. 450. $1.75.

Bryant, William M. Life, Death, and Immortality, with Related Essays. New York: The Baker & Taylor Company. Pp. 450. $1.75.

Carborundum manufactured under the Acheson Patents. Illustrated Catalogue. Niagara Falls, N. Y.: The Carborundum Company. Pp. 61.

Carborundum made according to the Acheson Patents. Illustrated Catalog. Niagara Falls, N.Y.: The Carborundum Company. Pp. 61.

Carnegie, The, Steel Company, Limited, Pittsburg. Ballistic Tests of Armor Plate. By W. R. Balsinger. Plates and letterpress descriptions.

Carnegie Steel Company, Limited, Pittsburgh. Ballistic Tests of Armor Plate. By W. R. Balsinger. Plates and descriptions in text.

Dana, Edward Salisbury. A Text-Book of Mineralogy, with an Extended Treatise on Crystallography and Physical Mineralogy. New York: John Wiley & Sons. Pp. 593. $4.

Dana, Edward Salisbury. A Textbook of Mineralogy, with a Detailed Discussion on Crystallography and Physical Mineralogy. New York: John Wiley & Sons. Pp. 593. $4.

Darwin, George Howard. The Tides and Kindred Phenomena in the Solar System. Boston and New York: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. Pp. 378. $2.

Darwin, George Howard. The Tides and Kindred Phenomena in the Solar System. Boston and New York: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. Pp. 378. $2.

Giddings, Franklin Henry. The Elements of Sociology. New York: The Macmillan Company. Pp. 353. $1.10.

Giddings, Franklin Henry. The Elements of Sociology. New York: The Macmillan Company. Pp. 353. $1.10.

Guerber. H. A. The Story of the English. American Book Company. Pp. 356.

Guerber, H. A. The Story of the English. American Book Company. Pages 356.

Hough, Romeyn B. The American Woods. Exhibited by Actual Specimens and with Copious Explanatory Text. Part I. Representing twenty-five species. Second edition. Lowville, N. Y.: The author. Pp. 78, text.

Hough, Romeyn B. The American Woods. Shown with Real Examples and Detailed Explanatory Text. Part I. Covering twenty-five species. Second edition. Lowville, N. Y.: The author. Pp. 78, text.

James, William. Human Immortality. Two Supposed Objections to the Doctrine. Boston and New York: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. Pp. 70. $1.

James, William. Human Immortality. Two Supposed Objections to the Doctrine. Boston and New York: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. Pp. 70. $1.

Kunz, George F. The Fresh-Water Pearls and Pearl fisheries of the United States. United States Fish Commission. Pp. 52, with 22 plates.

Kunz, George F. The Fresh-Water Pearls and Pearl Fisheries of the United States. United States Fish Commission. Pp. 52, with 22 plates.

Le Bon, Gustave. The Psychology of Peoples. New York: The Macmillan Company. Pp. 236. $1.50.

Le Bon, Gustave. The Psychology of Peoples. New York: The Macmillan Company. Pp. 236. $1.50.

Miller, Adam. The Sun an Electric Light, Chicago. Pp. 32.

Miller, Adam. The Sun an Electric Light, Chicago. Pp. 32.

Needham, James G. Outdoor Studies. A Reading Book of Nature Study. American Book Company. Pp. 90.

Needham, James G. Outdoor Studies. A Reading Book of Nature Study. American Book Company. Pp. 90.

Newth, G. S. A Manual of Chemical Analysis, Qualitative and Quantitative. New York: Longmans, Green & Co. Pp. 462. $1.75.

Newth, G. S. A Manual of Chemical Analysis, Qualitative and Quantitative. New York: Longmans, Green & Co. Pp. 462. $1.75.

Nipher, Francis E. An Introduction to Graphical Algebra. New York: H. Holt & Co. Pp. 61. 60 cents.

Nipher, Francis E. An Introduction to Graphical Algebra. New York: H. Holt & Co. Pp. 61. 60 cents.

Reprints. Gifford, John. Forestry on the Peninsula of Eastern Virginia. Pp. 3; Forestry in Relation to Physical Geography and Engineering. Pp. 19.—Hester, C. A. An Experimental Study of the Toxic Properties of Indol. Pp. 26, with tables.—Hoffmann, Fred. Fragmentary Notes from the Reports of Two Early Naturalists on North America. Pp. 18.—Johnson, J. B. A Higher Industrial and Commercial Education as an Essential Condition of our Future Material Prosperity. (An address.) Pp. 33.—Kain, Samuel W., and Others. Seismic and Oceanic Noises. Pp. 6.—Mayer, Hermann. Bows and Arrows in Central Brazil. Pp. 36, with plates.—Packard,[282] Alpheus S. A Half Century of Evolution, with Special Reference to the Effect of Geological Changes on Animal Life. (Presidential address to American Association.) Pp. 48.—Rhees, William J. William Bower Taylor. Pp. 12.—Searcy, J. T., M. D. How Education fails. Pp. 81.—Shufeldt, R. W., M. D. On the Alternation of Sex in a Brood of Young Sparrow Hawks. Pp. 4.—Starr, Frederick. Notched Bones from Mexico. A Shell Inscription from Tula, Mexico. Pp. 10.—Woolman, Lewis. Report on Artesian Wells in New Jersey, etc. Pp. 84.

Reprints. Gifford, John. Forestry on the Peninsula of Eastern Virginia. Pp. 3; Forestry in Relation to Physical Geography and Engineering. Pp. 19.—Hester, C. A. An Experimental Study of the Toxic Properties of Indol. Pp. 26, with tables.—Hoffmann, Fred. Fragmentary Notes from the Reports of Two Early Naturalists on North America. Pp. 18.—Johnson, J. B. A Higher Industrial and Commercial Education as an Essential Condition of our Future Material Prosperity. (An address.) Pp. 33.—Kain, Samuel W., and Others. Seismic and Oceanic Noises. Pp. 6.—Mayer, Hermann. Bows and Arrows in Central Brazil. Pp. 36, with plates.—Packard,[282] Alpheus S. A Half Century of Evolution, with Special Reference to the Effect of Geological Changes on Animal Life. (Presidential address to American Association.) Pp. 48.—Rhees, William J. William Bower Taylor. Pp. 12.—Searcy, J. T., M. D. How Education Fails. Pp. 81.—Shufeldt, R. W., M. D. On the Alternation of Sex in a Brood of Young Sparrow Hawks. Pp. 4.—Starr, Frederick. Notched Bones from Mexico. A Shell Inscription from Tula, Mexico. Pp. 10.—Woolman, Lewis. Report on Artesian Wells in New Jersey, etc. Pp. 84.

Smithsonian Institution. United States National Museum. The Fishes of North and Middle America. By D. S. Jordan and B. W. Evermann. Part II. Pp. 942.—The Birds of the Kurile Islands. By Leonhard Stejneger. Pp. 28.—On the Coleopterous Insects of the Galapagos Islands. By Martin L. Linell. Pp. 20.—On Some New Parasitic Insects of the Subfamily Encystinæ. By L. O. Howard. Pp. 18.—Descriptions of the Species of Cycadeoidea, or Fossil Cycadean Trunks, thus far determined from the Lower Cretaceous Rim of the Black Hills. By Lester F. Ward. Pp. 36.

Smithsonian Institution. United States National Museum. The Fishes of North and Middle America. By D. S. Jordan and B. W. Evermann. Part II. Pp. 942.—The Birds of the Kurile Islands. By Leonhard Stejneger. Pp. 28.—On the Beetles of the Galapagos Islands. By Martin L. Linell. Pp. 20.—On Some New Parasitic Insects of the Subfamily Encystinæ. By L. O. Howard. Pp. 18.—Descriptions of the Species of Cycadeoidea, or Fossil Cycadean Trunks, identified so far from the Lower Cretaceous Rim of the Black Hills. By Lester F. Ward. Pp. 36.

Socialist, The, Almanac and Treasury of Facts. New York: Socialistic Co-operative Publishing Association. Prepared by Lucien Sanal. Pp. 232. (The People's Library. Quarterly. 60 cents a year.)

Socialist, The, Almanac and Treasury of Facts. New York: Socialistic Co-operative Publishing Association. Prepared by Lucien Sanal. Pp. 232. (The People's Library. Quarterly. 60 cents a year.)

Thompson, Ernest Seton. Wild Animals I have known, and Two Hundred Drawings. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons. Pp. 359. $2.

Thompson, Ernest Seton. Wild Animals I've Known, and Two Hundred Drawings. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons. Pp. 359. $2.

Todd, Mabel Loomis. Corona and Coronet. Being a Narrative of the Amherst Eclipse Expedition to Japan, 1896, etc. Boston and New York: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. Pp 383. $2.50.

Todd, Mabel Loomis. Corona and Coronet. A Narrative of the Amherst Eclipse Expedition to Japan, 1896, etc. Boston and New York: Houghton, Mifflin & Co. Pp 383. $2.50.

Trowbridge, John. Philip's Experiments, or Physical Science at Home. New York: D. Appleton and Company. Pp. 228. $1.

Trowbridge, John. Philip's Experiments, or Physical Science at Home. New York: D. Appleton and Company. Pp. 228. $1.

United States Geological Survey. Bulletin No. 88. The Cretaceous Foraminifera of New Jersey. By R. M. Bagg, Jr. Pp. 89, with 6 plates.—No. 89. Some Lava Flows from the Western Slope of the Sierra Nevada, California. Pp. 74.—No. 149. Bibliography and Index of North American Geology, Palæontology, Petrology, and Mineralogy for 1898. By F. B. Weeks. Pp. 152.—Monograph. Vol. XXX. Fossil Medusæ. By Charles Doolittle Walcott. Pp. 201, with 47 plates.

United States Geological Survey. Bulletin No. 88. The Cretaceous Foraminifera of New Jersey. By R. M. Bagg, Jr. Pp. 89, with 6 plates.—No. 89. Some Lava Flows from the Western Slope of the Sierra Nevada, California. Pp. 74.—No. 149. Bibliography and Index of North American Geology, Paleontology, Petrology, and Mineralogy for 1898. By F. B. Weeks. Pp. 152.—Monograph. Vol. XXX. Fossil Jellyfish. By Charles Doolittle Walcott. Pp. 201, with 47 plates.

Universalist Register, The, for 1898. Edited by Richard Eddy, D. D. Boston: Universalist Publishing House. Pp. 120. 20 cents.

Universalist Register, The, for 1898. Edited by Richard Eddy, D. D. Boston: Universalist Publishing House. Pp. 120. 20 cents.

Warman, Cy. The Story of the Railroad. New York: D. Appleton and Company. (Story of the West Series.) Pp. 280.

Warman, Cy. The Story of the Railroad. New York: D. Appleton and Company. (Story of the West Series.) Pp. 280.

Waterloo, Stanley. Armageddon. A Tale of Love, War, and Invention. Pp. 259.

Waterloo, Stanley. Armageddon. A Story of Love, War, and Invention. Pp. 259.

Whiting Paper Company, Holyoke, Mass. The Evolution of Paper. Pp. 20. Chicago and New York: Rand, McNally & Co.

Whiting Paper Company, Holyoke, Mass. The Evolution of Paper. Pp. 20. Chicago and New York: Rand, McNally & Co.

Wilson, J. Self-Control, or Life without a Master. New York: Lemcke & Büchner.

Wilson, J. Self-Control, or Life without a Master. New York: Lemcke & Büchner.

Worcester, Dean C. The Philippine Islands and their People. New York: The Macmillan Company. Pp. 529. $4.

Worcester, Dean C. The Philippine Islands and Their People. New York: The Macmillan Company. Pp. 529. $4.

Wyckoff, Walter A. The Workers. An Experiment in Reality. The West. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons. Pp. 378. $1.50.

Wyckoff, Walter A. The Workers. An Experiment in Reality. The West. New York: Charles Scribner's Sons. Pp. 378. $1.50.


Fragments of Science.

Tree Planting in the Arid Regions.—In planting the arid and subarid regions of the country, where no trees are growing naturally, Mr. B. E. Fernow says, in a review of the work of the Department of Forestry, different methods of cultivation from those given in the humid parts are necessary, and the plant material has to be selected with a view to a rigorous climate characterized by extreme ranges of temperature varying from -40° to +120° F. The requirements of the plants for moisture must be of the slightest, and they must be capable of responding to the demands of evaporation. At first, whatever trees will grow successfully from the start under such untoward conditions would have to be chosen, no matter what their qualities otherwise might be. The first settlers have ascertained by trials some of the species that will succeed under such conditions, but unfortunately most of them are of but small economic value, and some of them are only short-lived under the conditions in which they have to grow. A few years ago Mr. Fernow came to the conclusion that the conifers, especially the pines, would furnish more useful and otherwise serviceable material for the arid regions. Besides their superior economical value, they require less moisture than most of the deciduous trees that have been planted, and they would, if once established, persist more readily through seasons of drought and be longer lived. A small trial plantation on the sand hills of Nebraska lent countenance to this theory. It being vastly more difficult to establish the young plants in the first place than in the case of deciduous trees, much attention was given to the provision for protection of the seedlings from sun and winds; and they were planted in mixture with "nurse trees" that would furnish not too much and yet enough shade. "It can not be said that the success in using these species has so far been very encouraging; nevertheless, the failure may be charged rather to our lack of knowledge and to causes that can be overcome than to any inherent incapacity in the species."[283] The experiments should therefore be continued.

Tree Planting in the Arid Regions.—In planting trees in the arid and semi-arid regions of the country, where no trees naturally grow, Mr. B. E. Fernow notes in a review of the work done by the Department of Forestry that different cultivation methods are required compared to those used in wetter areas. The plant material must be chosen to withstand a harsh climate marked by extreme temperature fluctuations ranging from -40° to +120° F. The moisture needs of the plants must be minimal, and they should be able to cope with evaporation demands. Initially, any trees that can thrive under these challenging conditions should be selected, regardless of their other qualities. Early settlers have identified some species that can succeed here, but unfortunately, most have little economic value, and some are only short-lived in these growing conditions. A few years ago, Mr. Fernow concluded that conifers, especially pines, would provide more useful and applicable material for the arid regions. In addition to their greater economic value, they need less moisture than most deciduous trees that have been planted and, once established, can endure droughts better and live longer. A small trial plantation on the sand hills of Nebraska supported this theory. Because it's significantly harder to establish young plants initially than with deciduous trees, considerable attention was given to protecting the seedlings from sun and wind. They were planted alongside "nurse trees" that would provide suitable shade, neither too much nor too little. "It cannot be said that success in using these species has been very encouraging so far; however, any failures are more likely due to our limited knowledge and factors that can be addressed rather than any inherent inability of the species." [283] Therefore, the experiments should continue.

"The Venerable Bede's" Chair.—In an article in a recent issue of Architecture and Building, on Ancient and Modern Furniture, by F. T. Hodgson, the following interesting account of the chair of "the Venerable Bede" occurs: "Perhaps the best-known relic, so far as furniture is concerned of this early period, is the chair of 'the Venerable Bede,' which is still preserved in the vestry of Jassova Church, Northumberland, England. This chair is distinctively an ecclesiastical one—a throne, in fact, of some dignity. It is made of oak and is four feet ten inches high. There are many engravings of it, but I reproduce from one of the best. The chair is now well on to twelve hundred years old, and if cared for as it ought to be is good for several hundred years more. There is a popular tradition concerning this chair that is worthy of notice. It is said that to this ancient relic all the brides repair as soon as the marriage service is over, in order that they may seat themselves in it. This, according to the popular belief, will make them joyful mothers of children; and to omit this custom the expectant mothers would not consider the marriage ceremony complete, and in default thereof of being enthroned in 'the Venerable Bede's chair' barrenness and misery would surely follow. Like all other relics of the sort, it is subject to attacks of the sacrilegious penknives, together with the wanton depredations of relic hunters, and has been so shorn of its fair proportions that very soon there will be little of it left but its attenuated form if stricter watch is not kept over it."

"The Venerable Bede's" Chair.—In an article from a recent issue of Architecture and Building, on Ancient and Modern Furniture, by F. T. Hodgson, the following interesting description of the chair of "the Venerable Bede" appears: "Perhaps the best-known furniture relic from this early period is the chair of 'the Venerable Bede,' which is still kept in the vestry of Jassova Church, Northumberland, England. This chair is distinctly ecclesiastical—a throne, in fact, of some dignity. It is made of oak and stands four feet ten inches tall. There are many engravings of it, but I am reproducing one of the best. The chair is now nearly twelve hundred years old, and if taken care of as it should be, it will last for several hundred years more. There is a popular tradition about this chair that deserves mention. It’s said that after the marriage service, all brides go to this ancient relic to sit in it. According to popular belief, doing so will make them joyful mothers of children; and not participating in this custom means that expectant mothers wouldn’t consider the marriage ceremony complete, believing that failing to be seated in 'the Venerable Bede's chair' would lead to barrenness and misery. Like all other relics of its kind, it is prone to attacks from sacrilegious penknives, as well as the reckless actions of relic hunters, and it has already lost much of its original form. If stricter protection isn’t enforced, there will soon be little left of it but a diminished shape."

The Physics of Smell.—The principal subject of Prof. W. E. Ayrton's vice-presidential address on physics at the British Association was the physics of smell, which was presented as a subject that had been but little studied. In testing the generally accepted idea that metals have smell, based on the fact that a smell is perceived with most of the commercial metals when handled, the author had observed that when these metals were cleaned or made outwardly pure the smell disappeared. Yet it is shown that these metals acquire smells when they are handled or abraded by friction, which are characteristic and serve to distinguish them. This may be ascribed to chemical action, but not all chemical action in which metals may take part produces smell; for when they are rubbed with soda or with sugar no smell but that of soda or of sugar is perceived; nor is the metallic smell observed when dilute nitric acid is rubbed on certain metals, though the chemical action is very marked with some. But mere breathing on certain metals, even when they have been rendered practically odorless by cleaning, produces a very distinct smell, as also does touching them with the tongue. These smells have hitherto been attributed to the metals themselves, but Professor Ayrton looks for their source in the evolution of hydrogen, which carries with it impurities, hydrocarbons, especially paraffin, and "it is probable that no metallic particles, even in the form of vapor, reach the nose or even leave the metal. While smells usually appear to be diffused with great velocity, experiments prove that when the space through which they have to pass is free from draughts their progress is very slow, and it would therefore appear that the passage of a smell is far more due to the actual motion of the air containing it than to the diffusion of the odoriferous substance through the air." The power of a smell to cling to a substance does not appear to depend on its intensity or on the ease with which it travels through a closed space. Experiments to determine whether smells could pass through glass by transpiration either revealed flaws in the glass or ended in the breaking of the very thin bulbs and gave no answer.

The Physics of Smell.—The main topic of Prof. W. E. Ayrton's vice-presidential address on physics at the British Association was the physics of smell, which he described as a subject that has been studied very little. In testing the common belief that metals have a smell, based on the fact that a smell is noticed with most commercial metals when handled, the author observed that when these metals were cleaned or made outwardly pure, the smell vanished. However, it was found that these metals develop distinct smells when they are handled or worn down through friction, which help to identify them. This may be attributed to chemical action, but not all chemical interactions involving metals produce a smell; for instance, when they are rubbed with soda or sugar, only the smell of soda or sugar can be detected, and the metallic smell is absent when dilute nitric acid is rubbed on certain metals, even though the chemical reaction is quite evident in some cases. Just breathing on certain metals, even after they have been made nearly odorless by cleaning, produces a very noticeable smell, as does touching them with the tongue. These smells have traditionally been attributed to the metals themselves, but Professor Ayrton suggests that their source lies in the release of hydrogen, which carries impurities and hydrocarbons, particularly paraffin, and "it is likely that no metallic particles, even in vapor form, reach the nose or leave the metal." While smells generally seem to spread quickly, experiments show that when the surrounding space is free of drafts, their movement is quite slow. Therefore, it appears that the movement of a smell is more about the actual motion of the air carrying it than the diffusion of the smelly substance through the air. The ability of a smell to stick to a substance does not seem to depend on its strength or how easily it travels through a closed space. Experiments to determine whether smells could pass through glass via transpiration either revealed flaws in the glass or resulted in the breaking of the very thin bulbs, providing no conclusive answer.

The Cordillera Region of Canada.—A length of nearly thirteen hundred miles of the great mountainous or Cordillera region of the Pacific coast is included in the western part of Canada. Most of this, Mr. George M. Dawson says, in a paper on the Physical Geography and Geology of Canada, is embraced in the province of British Columbia, where it is about four hundred miles wide between the Great Plains and the Pacific Ocean. To the north it is included in the Yukon district of the Northwest Territory till it reaches, in a less elevated and more[284] widely spread form, the shores of the Arctic Ocean on one side and on the other passes across the one hundred and forty-first meridian of west longitude into Alaska. The orographic features of this region are very complicated in detail. No existing map yet properly represents even the principal physical outlines, and the impression gained by the traveler or explorer may well be one of confusion. There are, however, the two dominant mountain systems of the Rocky Mountains and the Coast Range. As a whole, the area of the Cordillera in Canada may be described as forest-clad, but the growth of trees is more luxuriant on the western slopes of each of the dominant mountain ranges, in correspondence with the greater precipitation occurring on these slopes. This is particularly the case in the coast region and on the seaward side of the Coast Range, where magnificent and dense forests of coniferous trees occupy almost the whole available surface. The interior plateau, however, constitutes the southern part of a notably dry belt, and includes wide stretches of open grass-covered hills and valleys, forming excellent cattle ranges. Farther north, along the same belt, similar open country appears intermittently, but the forest invades the greater part of the region. It is only toward the arctic coast, in relatively very high latitude, that the barren arctic tundra country begins, which, sweeping in wider development to the westward, occupies most of the interior of Alaska. With certain exceptions the farming land of British Columbia is confined to the valleys and tracts below three thousand feet, by reason of the summer frosts occurring at greater heights. There is, however, a considerable area of such land in the aggregate, with a soil generally of great fertility. In the southern valleys of the interior irrigation is necessary for the growth of crops.

The Cordillera Region of Canada.—A length of nearly thirteen hundred miles of the great mountainous Cordillera region on the Pacific coast is found in the western part of Canada. Most of this, according to Mr. George M. Dawson in a paper on the Physical Geography and Geology of Canada, is located in the province of British Columbia, where it spans about four hundred miles wide between the Great Plains and the Pacific Ocean. To the north, it extends into the Yukon district of the Northwest Territory until it reaches the shores of the Arctic Ocean, taking on a less elevated and more widely spread form, while on the other side it crosses the one hundred and forty-first meridian of west longitude into Alaska. The geographic features of this region are very complex in detail. No existing map accurately depicts even the main physical outlines, and travelers or explorers may find their experience quite confusing. However, the two dominant mountain systems are the Rocky Mountains and the Coast Range. Overall, the area of the Cordillera in Canada can be described as covered in forests, but tree growth is more abundant on the western slopes of each major mountain range, corresponding to the increased precipitation these slopes receive. This is especially true in the coastal region and on the ocean-facing side of the Coast Range, where magnificent, dense forests of coniferous trees cover nearly the entire landscape. The interior plateau, however, makes up the southern part of a notably dry area and includes wide expanses of open, grass-covered hills and valleys, creating excellent grazing land for cattle. Further north, along the same belt, similar open country appears intermittently, but forests invade much of the region. Only as you get closer to the arctic coast, in relatively high latitudes, does the barren arctic tundra begin, which, extending wider to the west, occupies most of the interior of Alaska. With certain exceptions, farmland in British Columbia is mainly found in valleys and areas below three thousand feet due to summer frosts occurring at higher elevations. However, there is a significant amount of such land overall, with a soil that is generally very fertile. In the southern valleys of the interior, irrigation is necessary for crop growth.

The "Rabies" Bacillus.—Ever since the discovery of Pasteur that an attenuated virus made from the medulla or spinal cord of a dog affected by rabies was, when administered in graduated doses, a specific against the disease, bacteriologists have been eagerly seeking to isolate the rabies bacillus. A number of observers, among them Toll, Rivolta, and San Felice, have succeeded in staining a bacillus which they claimed to be that of rabies. Memno, of Rome, confirmed the observations of the preceding, and proved the virulent character of the micro-organism, which he described as a blastomycete. He has quite recently succeeded in cultivating the bacillus in artificial media and producing typical rabies in dogs, rodents, and birds by inoculations. He found that the bacillus grew better in fluid than in solid media, the best being bouillon with glucose slightly acidulated with tartaric acid. The growth did not become manifest under a week, and was easily arrested by "air infection." It would thus seem that we have at last certainly established the bacterial origin of rabies.

The "Rabies" Bacillus.—Since Pasteur discovered that a weakened virus made from the spinal cord of a rabid dog could prevent the disease when given in controlled doses, bacteriologists have been eager to isolate the rabies bacillus. Several researchers, including Toll, Rivolta, and San Felice, have claimed to have stained a bacillus that they believe is responsible for rabies. Memno from Rome confirmed these earlier findings and demonstrated the harmful nature of the microorganism, which he referred to as a blastomycete. Recently, he managed to grow the bacillus in artificial media and produce typical rabies in dogs, rodents, and birds through inoculation. He found that the bacillus thrived better in liquid than in solid media, with the optimal medium being bouillon with a bit of glucose slightly acidified with tartaric acid. Growth typically didn’t show up for a week and could easily be halted by "air infection." It seems that we have finally established that rabies has a bacterial origin.

The St. Kildans.—St. Kilda, the farthest out to sea of all the British Isles, is a rounded mountain with "stack rocks" and islets round it, rises twelve hundred and twenty feet in height, and contains a settlement of about seventy-five men, women, and children—almost the only representatives left on the British Islands of man in the hunting age. On one of the subsidiary islands, Boreray, is gathered the main body of the sea birds for which the island is famous; and on a third, Soa, are the diminutive descendants of Viking sheep, left by old sea rovers. Mr. R. Kearton, who has recently visited the islands for recreation among the sea birds, represents that in the little community of its people the ordinary and extraordinary operations of life seem inverted. Sport is a serious work; sheep herding and shearing are an exciting sport. A St. Kildan qualifies for marriage by proving his courage and skill as a fowler, by standing on a dizzy precipice called Lover's Stone, and goes out bird snaring with a serious face. When he wants a sheep for the butcher, he asks his friends to a sheep hunt in the island of Soa, in which dogs and men pursue the animals from rock to rock. An offer made by a factor to supply the people with nets, so that they might catch the sheep with more humanity and less waste of life, was rejected by them. They preferred the old methods, which supplied plenty of danger and excitement. While the sheep are hunted, the cows are thoroughly spoiled. Every day the women are seen hard at work picking[285] dock leaves and storing them in baskets for the cows at milking time, for they will not be milked unless they are fed. The sheep on Soa Island are plucked instead of being sheared, at the time when the wool would naturally be shed, and what wool will not come off in this way is cut off with a pocket knife. When the steamer with Mr. Kearton reached the island, no one came down to meet it till the whistle had been blown two or three times. "It was not etiquette to rush down like a parcel of savages," but the people "retire to tidy themselves, and then row out and call in proper form."

The St. Kildans.—St. Kilda, the most remote of all the British Isles, is a rounded mountain surrounded by "stack rocks" and small islands, rising to twelve hundred and twenty feet. It has a settlement of about seventy-five men, women, and children—almost the last remaining examples of humans in the hunting age in the British Isles. On one of the nearby islands, Boreray, you’ll find the main population of sea birds that the island is known for; on another, Soa, are the tiny descendants of Viking sheep left by ancient seafarers. Mr. R. Kearton, who recently visited the islands for leisure among the sea birds, suggests that in this small community, the normal activities of life seem flipped around. Sports are taken seriously; sheep herding and shearing are exciting sports. A St. Kildan proves he’s ready for marriage by showcasing his bravery and skill as a bird hunter, standing on a steep cliff called Lover's Stone, and heads out to catch birds with a serious expression. When he needs a sheep for the butcher, he invites his friends for a sheep hunt on Soa, where dogs and men chase the animals from rock to rock. A proposal from a factor to provide the people with nets, so they could catch the sheep more humanely and with less waste of life, was turned down. They would rather stick to the old ways, which bring plenty of danger and excitement. While the sheep are hunted, the cows are spoiled. Every day, the women are hard at work picking dock leaves and storing them in baskets for the cows at milking time, since the cows won't be milked unless they’re fed. The sheep on Soa Island are plucked instead of sheared, during the time when they naturally shed their wool, and any wool that doesn’t come off is cut away with a pocket knife. When the steamer with Mr. Kearton arrived at the island, no one came down to greet it until the whistle had been blown two or three times. "It wasn't proper to rush down like a bunch of savages," but the locals "retreat to tidy themselves, and then row out and call in the right way."

The Island of Sakhalin.—Mr. Benjamin Howard, an English visitor at the recent meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, presented before Section E of that body an interesting account of the great but little-known island of Sakhalin, more generally spelled Saghalien in our geographies. Mr. Howard, however, strongly urged the former spelling, as most correctly representing the name, which is always pronounced by the Russians in three syllables, with the accent on the first. It is now used as a penal colony by the Russian Government, and a more hopelessly remote and inaccessible spot for such a purpose can hardly be found. To it are sent the hardest cases among the Siberian prisoners; and Mr. Howard spoke of becoming accustomed, during his stay there, to meeting scarcely any human beings but murderers, except, of course, the guards and officials. The island is extremely inaccessible; there is no commerce, and neither inducement nor opportunity for vessels to touch there, while much of the coast is ice-bound for a large part of the year. Mr. Howard, who was engaged in some scientific work on the island in the service of the Government, is one of the very few foreigners who have traveled or resided there at all. He predicts for Sakhalin, however, a future of considerable importance ultimately, though only after a long period of preliminary development and exploitation as a penal colony, which stage has but lately been begun. It has forest and mining resources—among the latter, coal; the deposits are near the surface, but thus far have been very little examined. He was unable to give any data as to their geological age or actual extent; but the Government will no doubt soon make investigations. The most remarkable possibilities, however, are in the line of fisheries, the coasts swarming with fish to an extent that is scarcely credible by one who has not seen them. Mr. Howard said jocosely that he would hardly dare to relate what he had personally witnessed, in view of the usual reputation of "fish stories." The climate is of course rigorous, under the influence of cold northern currents, and markedly in contrast with that of the same latitude on the American side of the Pacific, where the Japan current carries its modifying influence as the Gulf Stream does to northern Europe. Some agriculture, however, is possible during the short summer, and the penal colonists have made fair beginnings of self-support. He referred further to a remnant of native Aino population as very interesting from the fact that they have preserved their peculiarities of life and manners, and their purity of stock, much more completely through their isolation than the Ainos of the Japanese Islands, who have been modified more or less by association with the latter people.

The Island of Sakhalin.—Mr. Benjamin Howard, an English visitor at the recent meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, shared an engaging account of the great but little-known island of Sakhalin, which is often spelled Saghalien in our maps. However, Mr. Howard strongly advocated for the former spelling, as it correctly reflects the name, pronounced by Russians in three syllables with the emphasis on the first. The island is currently used as a penal colony by the Russian Government, and it’s hard to find a more isolated and remote place for this purpose. The most difficult cases among Siberian prisoners are sent there; Mr. Howard mentioned that, during his time there, he mostly encountered murderers, aside from the guards and officials. The island is extremely hard to reach; there is no trade, and ships have little reason to stop there, as much of the coastline is ice-bound for a significant part of the year. Mr. Howard, who was engaged in some scientific work for the Government on the island, is one of the very few foreigners who have ever traveled or lived there. He predicts that Sakhalin will eventually have considerable importance, but only after a long period of development and exploitation as a penal colony, a stage that has just recently begun. It has forest and mining resources—such as coal; the deposits are close to the surface but have barely been examined so far. He couldn't provide any data regarding their geological age or actual extent, but the Government will likely conduct investigations soon. The most remarkable potential, however, lies in fisheries, with the coasts teeming with fish to an extent that seems unbelievable to anyone who hasn't seen it. Mr. Howard jokingly remarked that he would hardly dare to share what he personally witnessed, given the usual skepticism surrounding "fish stories." The climate is, of course, harsh, influenced by cold northern currents and is notably different from the same latitude on the American side of the Pacific, where the Japan current brings a moderating influence like the Gulf Stream does to northern Europe. Some agriculture is possible during the short summer, and the penal colonists have made decent progress toward self-sufficiency. He also mentioned a remnant of the native Aino population, which is very interesting because they have preserved their distinct way of life and genetic purity much more effectively through their isolation than the Ainos of the Japanese Islands, who have been somewhat influenced by contact with the latter people.

Technical and Popular Names.—In a paper criticising the multiplication of local names in geology, Prof. C. E. Keyes distinguishes between names devised with a conscientious desire to better the condition of a science by clothing the new ideas with simple words and those which are the product of a name-making mania. "The first can not be too highly commended, nor the second too deeply deplored." Every progressive science must discard the names that have served their purpose, and must be prepared to receive all of the new ones demanded. The sciences have each two phases, for each of which a terminology is demanded, in one of which the names must be technical and special, established primarily for the investigator, and in the other general, popular, simple, and free from technical appearance; but the distinction is rarely made. Those who object to the prevalence of technical names in other sciences seldom reflect that they have them in their own art. Yet if a man of science should desire to familiarize himself with the artisan's work, "he would be, after five minutes' talk with a machinist or electrician,[286] confronted by so many unfamiliar terms—technical terms of everyday use—that he would at once cry out for greater simplicity of language." In the geological sciences the technicalities play the same part they do in the arts and in business. Every new name in geology, however, must be properly defined before it can be noticed, and its subsequent career will depend on its utility. It may be said that no greater boon to the working geologist has been devised than the plan of designating geographically geological units irrespective of exact position or age. Since its adoption a vast mass of valuable information has been obtained that was previously unthought of, and is in a shape to be always used; the other departments of geology have been much aided, and stratigraphical geology has been greatly helped.

Technical and Popular Names.—In a paper criticizing the excess of local names in geology, Prof. C. E. Keyes differentiates between names created with a genuine intent to improve the science by using simple words for new ideas and those resulting from a naming obsession. "The first cannot be praised enough, nor the second condemned enough." Every advancing science must eliminate names that have outlived their usefulness and be ready to adopt all the new ones that are needed. Each science has two aspects, each requiring its own terminology: one must have technical and specialized names aimed primarily at researchers, while the other should be general, popular, simple, and free from technical jargon; however, this distinction is rarely made. Those who criticize the dominance of technical names in other fields often fail to realize that their own discipline has its own jargon as well. If a scientist were to try to understand the work of a craftsman, "after just five minutes of talking with a machinist or electrician,[286] he would be confronted with so many unfamiliar terms—everyday technical terms—that he would immediately call for simpler language." In geological sciences, technical terms serve the same role as they do in the arts and in business. However, every new name in geology must be clearly defined before it can be acknowledged, and its future use will depend on its practicality. It can be said that no greater benefit to the working geologist has been created than the method of designating geological units geographically, regardless of their exact position or age. Since this method was adopted, a wealth of valuable information has been gathered that was previously unconsidered and is now available for ongoing use; other areas of geology have greatly benefited, and stratigraphical geology has been significantly enhanced.

The Origin of a Curious Habit.—The following paragraphs are taken from a recent Nature. It is well known that the kea, or mountain parrot of New Zealand, has acquired the habit of attacking sheep, and making holes by means of its sharp and powerful beak in the backs of these animals for the purpose of abstracting the kidney fat, which appears to be esteemed as a luxurious diet. It is supposed that this peculiar habit or instinct was developed by the bird getting the fat from the skins of sheep that had been slaughtered, but this solution is not very satisfactory, as there appears nothing to connect the fat on the skins of sheep with the live animals. In a note published in the Zoölogist (May 16th), Mr. F. R. Godfrey, writing from Melbourne, offers the following solution of the mystery, which seemed to him to be simple and satisfactory, and more rational than the sheepskin theory: In the hilly districts of the middle island of New Zealand there is a great abundance of a white moss, or lichen, which exactly resembles a lump of white wool, at the roots of which are found small white fatty substances, supposed by some to be the seeds of the plant, and by others to be a grub or maggot which infests it, which is the favorite food of the kea. Probably the bird, misled by this resemblance, commenced an exploration in sheep, and this proving satisfactory, originated the new habit. In a note to this suggestion the editor points out that Mr. Godfrey is in agreement with another observer—Mr. F. R. Chapman—who in describing the hills of this island says: "A very interesting raoulia, or vegetable sheep, was very plentiful on steep, rocky places.... It is said that the keas tear them up with their powerful beaks, and that these birds learned to eat mutton through mistaking dead sheep for masses of raoulia."

The Origin of a Curious Habit.—The following paragraphs are taken from a recent issue of Nature. It’s well known that the kea, or mountain parrot of New Zealand, has developed the habit of attacking sheep and making holes in their backs with its sharp and powerful beak to extract the kidney fat, which seems to be regarded as a rich delicacy. It’s believed that this unusual behavior or instinct evolved as the bird learned to get the fat from the hides of slaughtered sheep, but this explanation isn’t very convincing, as there appears to be no direct connection between the fat found on sheep skins and living animals. In a note published in the Zoölogist (May 16th), Mr. F. R. Godfrey, writing from Melbourne, offers what he thinks is a simple and satisfactory explanation that makes more sense than the sheepskin theory: In the hilly regions of New Zealand’s South Island, there's a plentiful supply of a white moss or lichen that looks exactly like a clump of white wool. At the base of this moss are small white fatty substances, which some believe are seeds of the plant, while others think they could be grubs or maggots that infest it, which the kea likes to eat. The bird may have been tricked by this resemblance and started exploring sheep, and since that turned out to be rewarding, it developed this new habit. In a note on this idea, the editor mentions that Mr. Godfrey agrees with another observer—Mr. F. R. Chapman—who describes the hills of this island, stating: "A very interesting raoulia, or vegetable sheep, was very plentiful on steep, rocky places.... It's said that the keas tear them up with their strong beaks, and that these birds learned to eat mutton by mistaking dead sheep for clumps of raoulia."

Changes in Plant Characters.—From experiments upon the cultural evolution of Cyclamen latifolium, W. T. Thiselton Dyer finds that, when once specific stability has been broken down in a plant, morphological changes of great variety and magnitude can be brought about in a comparatively short space of time. It appears that though sudden variations do occur, they are, as far as we know, slight as long as self-fertilization is adhered to. The striking results obtained by cultivators have been due to the patient accumulation by selection of gradual but continuous variation in any desired direction. The size which any variable organ can reach does not appear to be governed by any principle of correlation. Large flowers are not necessarily accompanied by large leaves. The general tendency of a plant varying freely under artificial conditions seems to be atavistic—or to shed adaptive modifications which have ceased to be useful, and to revert to a more generalized type, or to reproduce characters which are already present in other members of the same group. But this statement must be accepted with caution. The most remarkable phenomenon in the cultivation of the Cyclamen is the development of a plume or crest on the inner surface of each corolla segment. This shows that the plant still possesses the power to strike out a new line and to develop characters which would even be regarded as having specific value.

Changes in Plant Characters.—From experiments on the cultural evolution of Cyclamen latifolium, W. T. Thiselton Dyer finds that once a plant's specific stability is disrupted, morphological changes of various kinds and scales can occur in a relatively short time. It seems that even though sudden changes can happen, they tend to be minor as long as self-fertilization is maintained. The impressive results achieved by cultivators have come from the careful and gradual selection of continuous variations in the desired direction. The potential size of any variable organ doesn’t seem to be determined by any correlation principle. Large flowers don’t necessarily mean large leaves. When a plant is allowed to vary freely under artificial conditions, it generally shows a tendency to revert to older traits or shed adaptive features that are no longer useful, moving toward a more generalized type, or reproducing characteristics already found in other plants of the same group. However, this observation should be approached with caution. The most notable phenomenon in cultivating Cyclamen is the development of a plume or crest on the inner surface of each flower segment. This indicates that the plant still has the ability to evolve new traits that could even be seen as having distinct value.

Hanging an Elephant.—One of the elephants in Barnum and Bailey's show, having repeatedly shown signs of insubordination and bad temper, it was finally decided to kill him. From a note in Nature we get the following account of his execution: After considerable discussion it was decided to strangle him. A new Manila rope was loosely wound three times around his neck, and his legs, fully stridden, were securely chained each to a post firmly driven into the[287] ground alongside each limb. The animal was intentionally not isolated from his fellows, as it was feared that if placed by itself it would become restive and ill-tempered. The rope surrounding the beast's neck had one end secured to three strong pillars in the ground, some distance away and slightly in advance of the fore feet; and the other, which terminated in a loop, was hooked to a double series of pulleys, to the tackle of which ninety men were attached. When all was ready, the slack was gently, quietly, and without any apparent annoyance to the elephant—which kept on eating hay—taken in till the coils round its neck were just taut. The word was then given, "Walk away with the rope." Amid perfect silence the ninety men walked away, without apparently any effort. So noiselessly and easily did everything work that, unless with foreknowledge of what was going to take place, one might have been present without realizing what the march of these men meant. The elephant gave no sign of discomfort either by trunk or tail. Its fellows standing close by looked on in pachydermatous unconcern, and at the end of exactly thirty seconds it slowly collapsed and lay down as if of its own accord. There was absolutely no struggle and no motion, violent or otherwise, in any part of the body, nor the slightest indication of pain. In a few seconds more there was no response obtained by touching the eyeball. At the end of thirteen minutes after the order to "walk away" the eye had become rigid and dim. That no more humane, painless, and rapid method of taking the life of a large animal could be devised was the opinion of all the experts who witnessed the execution.

Hanging an Elephant.—One of the elephants in Barnum and Bailey's show had repeatedly shown signs of defiance and aggression, so it was finally decided to put him down. A note in Nature provides the following account of his execution: After much discussion, it was decided to strangle him. A new Manila rope was loosely wrapped three times around his neck, and his legs, fully extended, were securely chained to posts driven into the[287]ground next to each limb. The elephant was intentionally not separated from the others, as it was feared that being alone would make him restless and aggressive. The rope around his neck was secured at one end to three strong pillars in the ground, some distance away and slightly in front of his front feet; the other end, which formed a loop, was attached to a double series of pulleys connected to a tackle that ninety men operated. When everything was set, the slack was carefully taken in, gently and quietly, without causing any apparent disturbance to the elephant, who continued to eat hay. The command was then given, "Walk away with the rope." In complete silence, the ninety men walked away, seemingly without any effort. Everything functioned so smoothly and quietly that, unless someone knew what was about to happen, they could have been present without realizing the significance of these men’s actions. The elephant showed no signs of distress with either its trunk or tail. Its companions nearby watched with indifferent curiosity, and exactly thirty seconds later, it slowly collapsed and lay down as if it had chosen to do so. There was absolutely no struggle or movement, violent or otherwise, in any part of its body, nor was there the slightest sign of pain. Within a few moments, there was no response when the eyeball was touched. Thirteen minutes after the command to "walk away," the eye had become stiff and dull. All the experts who witnessed the execution agreed that no more humane, painless, and rapid method of taking the life of a large animal could be developed.

MINOR PARAGRAPHS.

MINOR PARAGRAPHS.

Count Gleichen relates, in his story of the mission to Menelek, that besides the Maria Theresa 1780 dollars, the people of Abyssinia, for small change, use a bar of hard crystallized salt, about ten inches long and two inches and a half broad and thick, slightly tapered toward the end, five of which go to the dollar at the capital. People are very particular about the standard of fineness of the currency. "If it does not ring like metal when flicked with the finger nail, or if it is cracked or chipped, they won't take it. It is a token of affection also, when friends meet, to give each other a lick of their respective amolis, and in this way the material value of the bar is also decreased. For still smaller change cartridges are used, of which three go to one salt. It does not matter what sort they are. Some sharpers use their cartridges in the ordinary way, and then put in some dust and a dummy bullet to make up the difference, or else they take out the powder and put the bullet in again, so that possibly in the next action the unhappy seller will find that he has only miss-fires in his belt; but this is such a common fraud that no one takes any notice of it, and a bad cartridge seems to serve as readily as a good one."

Count Gleichen shares in his account of the mission to Menelek that, in addition to the Maria Theresa 1780 dollars, the people of Abyssinia use a bar of hard crystallized salt for small change. This bar is about ten inches long and two and a half inches wide and thick, slightly tapered at one end, with five bars equaling one dollar in the capital. People are very particular about the quality of their currency. "If it doesn’t make a sound like metal when flicked with a fingernail, or if it’s cracked or chipped, they won’t accept it. It's also a sign of friendship when friends meet to share a lick of their respective amolis, which further reduces the material value of the bar. For even smaller change, cartridges are used, with three cartridges equaling one salt bar. The type of cartridge doesn’t matter. Some con artists use their cartridges normally but then add some dust and a fake bullet to make up the difference, or they take out the powder and put the bullet back in, so that in the next situation, the unfortunate seller might discover he's only got misfires in his belt. However, this kind of fraud is so common that nobody pays it any mind, and a bad cartridge seems to work just as well as a good one."

A study of problems in the Psychology of Reading, by J. O. Quantz, bore upon the questions of the factors which make a rapid reader, the relations of rapidity to mental capacity and alertness, quickness of visual perception, and amount of practice; and whether those who gain their knowledge principally through the eye or through the ear obtain and retain most from reading. The author finds that colors are more easily perceived than geometrical forms, isolated words than colors, and words in construction than disconnected words; that persons of visual type are slightly more rapid readers than those of the auditory type; that rapid readers, besides doing their work in less time, do superior work, retaining more of the substance of what is read and heard than do slow readers. Lip movement is a serious hindrance to speed, and consequently to intelligence, of reading. The disadvantage extends to reading aloud. Apart from external conditions, such as time of day, physical fatigue, etc., some of the influences contributing to rapidity of reading are largely physiological, as visual perception; others are of mental endowment, as alertness of mind; still others are matters of intellectual equipment rather than intellectual ability, as extent of reading and scholarly attainment.

A study on issues in the Psychology of Reading by J. O. Quantz looked into what makes someone a fast reader, how speed relates to mental ability and alertness, how quickly one perceives visuals, and how much practice plays a role. It also explored whether people who learn mostly through seeing or hearing get more out of reading and retain more information. The author discovered that colors are easier to see than shapes, isolated words are easier to recognize than colors, and words in context are easier to understand than random words. People who are visual learners tend to read slightly faster than those who are auditory learners. Fast readers not only complete their reading in less time, but they also understand and remember more of what they have read and heard compared to slow readers. Moving the lips while reading slows down both speed and comprehension. This disadvantage applies to reading out loud as well. Aside from external factors like the time of day or physical tiredness, some influences on reading speed are largely physical, such as visual perception; others pertain to mental capacities, like alertness; and some relate to knowledge or education level, such as the amount of reading done and academic achievement.

Mr. Merton L. Miller, of the University of Chicago, says, in his preliminary study of the Pueblo of Taos, New Mexico, that he was[288] hampered in his researches there by a circumstance that illustrates very well certain characteristics of the Indian. About fifteen years ago representatives of the Government were at Sia making investigations, and had to ask many questions. Some time after they went away there was much sickness in the pueblo, and many people died. It occurred to the Sia people that the presence of those white men, asking so many questions, was the cause of all their trouble; so they sent men to the other pueblos to warn them against white men who came to find out about their customs and beliefs. These messengers also came to Taos, and the people remembered their warning well. If a Taos Indian is caught now teaching the language or telling any of the traditions to a white man, he is liable to a whipping and a fine. This, Mr. Miller believes, accounts for the fact that he could rarely learn anything from his friend when they were at the pueblo, although when away in the mountains he became much more open and communicative.

Mr. Merton L. Miller, from the University of Chicago, mentions in his initial study of the Pueblo of Taos, New Mexico, that he faced challenges in his research there due to a situation that highlights certain traits of the Native American community. About fifteen years ago, government representatives were at Sia conducting investigations and had to ask many questions. Shortly after they left, there was a significant outbreak of illness in the pueblo, resulting in many deaths. The Sia people connected the presence of those white men, who had asked so many questions, to their misfortunes; thus, they sent messengers to other pueblos to warn them against white men seeking to learn about their customs and beliefs. These messengers also reached Taos, where the people clearly remembered the warning. If a Taos Indian is caught teaching the language or sharing any traditions with a white man, he risks being whipped and fined. Mr. Miller believes this is why he could rarely obtain information from his friend while they were at the pueblo, even though his friend became much more open and talkative when they were away in the mountains.

NOTES.

NOTES.

The cigarette has found friends. The Truth about Cigarettes embodies the substance of papers read and discussed at the Medico-legal Society of New York. The gist of the papers is to the effect that the stories of harm done by cigarettes are fictions or gross exaggerations; that they contain no opium, arsenic, or other poisons, but are the best pure tobacco (1.0926 grammes each) wrapped in pure paper (0.038 gramme); that they never caused a case of insanity; and that they are simply injurious in the same way and to a corresponding extent as other forms of tobacco. These statements are supported by certificates of physicians and by reviews of special cases of insanity charged to cigarettes, showing that the insanity had matured independently of them.

The cigarette has found supporters. The Truth about Cigarettes summarizes the content of papers presented and discussed at the Medico-legal Society of New York. The main point of these papers is that the claims about the harm caused by cigarettes are myths or gross exaggerations; that they contain no opium, arsenic, or other poisons but are made from the best pure tobacco (1.0926 grams each) wrapped in pure paper (0.038 grams); that they have never caused a case of insanity; and that they are simply harmful in the same way and to a similar degree as other forms of tobacco. These claims are backed by endorsements from physicians and reviews of specific cases of insanity attributed to cigarettes, showing that the insanity developed independently of them.

The average annual temperature at Manila is given by Mr. W. F. R. Phillips, in a paper on the subject, as 80° F. April, May, and June are the hottest months, May being the hottest of the three, and December and January are the coolest. The highest thermometer reading recorded is 100° F. in May, and the lowest 74° in January. The average annual rainfall is 75.43 inches, more than 80 per cent of which descends in the months from June to October, inclusive. Departures from the average rainfall are sometimes excessive. For example, as much as 120.98 inches have fallen in one year, and as little as 35.65 inches in another. Still more remarkable were the fall of 61.43 inches in one September, and that of only two inches in another September.

The average annual temperature in Manila is reported by Mr. W. F. R. Phillips in a paper on the topic as 80° F. April, May, and June are the hottest months, with May being the hottest of the three, while December and January are the coolest. The highest temperature recorded is 100° F. in May, and the lowest is 74° in January. The average annual rainfall is 75.43 inches, with more than 80 percent of it occurring between June and October. There are sometimes significant variations in rainfall. For instance, as much as 120.98 inches fell in one year, while another year saw only 35.65 inches. Even more striking were the 61.43 inches that fell in one September and just two inches in another September.

At the observatory of Yale University, as we learn from the annual report, a planned series of twelve measures each has been completed for eighty-four stars of large, proper motion, with a view to determinations of parallax, and it is expected shortly to bring the number up to one hundred. A series of measures on highly colored red stars has been begun, and is in progress for the purpose of testing the possibility of a systematic error due to the lesser refrangibility of their light. The photographic instrument has been put into use at every suitable period of meteorological displays of consequence. Preparations are already making for a more complete observation of the Leonid meteoric shower expected in 1899.

At the Yale University observatory, as stated in the annual report, a planned series of twelve measurements has been completed for eighty-four stars with significant proper motion, aimed at determining their parallax. The number is expected to increase to one hundred soon. A new series of measurements on highly colored red stars has started, aiming to test for any systematic errors caused by the reduced refrangibility of their light. The photographic instrument is being used whenever suitable meteorological conditions arise. Preparations are already underway for a more comprehensive observation of the Leonid meteor shower expected in 1899.

The New York State College of Forestry, in connection with Cornell University, was presented by Professor Fernow, at the Boston meeting of the American Association, as a logical sequence to the policy to which the State of New York was committed in 1885 by the purchase of more than a million acres of forest land in the Adirondack Mountains, to be gradually increased to three million acres. A demonstration area of thirty thousand acres in the Adirondacks has since been provided for it. The courses leading to the degree of Bachelor in Forestry occupy four years, of which the first two are devoted to the studies in which mathematics, physics, chemistry, geology, botany, entomology, political economy, etc., figure as fundamental and supplementary sciences, in addition to the professional courses; besides which two courses of a more or less popular character are contemplated.

The New York State College of Forestry, in partnership with Cornell University, was presented by Professor Fernow at the Boston meeting of the American Association as a natural progression to the policy the State of New York adopted in 1885 by purchasing over a million acres of forest land in the Adirondack Mountains, which is set to gradually increase to three million acres. A demonstration area of thirty thousand acres in the Adirondacks has been established for it. The programs leading to a Bachelor’s degree in Forestry take four years, with the first two years focused on studies that include mathematics, physics, chemistry, geology, botany, entomology, political economy, and other foundational and supplementary sciences, in addition to the professional courses; there are also two courses planned that are more or less popular in nature.

The discovery is announced in a preliminary communication by Dr. Issutschenko, of Russia, of a microbe pathogenic to rats. An epidemic having broken out among the rats kept for experimental purposes in the Government Agricultural Laboratory, a bacillus was isolated from the liver and spleen of affected animals that proved excessively fatal to rats and mice. Experiments in making the organism useful as a living rat poison have not yet, however, had an encouraging success.

The discovery is shared in a preliminary communication by Dr. Issutschenko from Russia about a microbe that is harmful to rats. An epidemic broke out among the rats used for experiments in the Government Agricultural Laboratory, and a bacillus was isolated from the liver and spleen of the affected animals, which turned out to be highly lethal to both rats and mice. However, efforts to develop the organism into an effective living rat poison haven't yet been very successful.

New Zealand has just definitely adopted a scheme of old-age pensions. In future the New Zealand workingman of sixty-five years of age, who has lived a life of honest toil, will be assured an income of one pound a week.

New Zealand has just officially introduced a system for old-age pensions. From now on, a New Zealand worker who is sixty-five years old and has worked hard all his life will receive an income of one pound a week.

The Wilde prize of the French Academy of Sciences has been awarded by that body to Charles A. Schott, chief of the Computation Division of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, for his work on Terrestrial Magnetism.

The Wilde prize from the French Academy of Sciences has been awarded to Charles A. Schott, head of the Computation Division of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, for his work on Terrestrial Magnetism.

FOOTNOTES:

[1] In the preparation of this article I have to acknowledge the courtesy of Mr. Joseph Jacobs, of London, whose works in this line are accepted as an authority. In its illustration I have derived invaluable assistance from Dr. S. Weissenberg, of Elizabethgrad, Russia, and Dr. L. Bertholon, of Tunis. Both these gentlemen have loaned me a large number of original photographs of types from their respective countries. Dr. Bertholon has also taken several especially for use in this way. The more general works upon which we have relied are: R. Andree, Zur Volkskunde der Juden, Bielefeld, 1881; A. Leroy-Beaulieu, Les Juifs et l'antisémitisme, Paris, 3e éd. 1893; and C. Lombroso, Gli Antisemitismo, Torino, 1894. For all other authorities to whom reference is made by name and year, consult our comprehensive Bibliography of the Anthropology and Ethnology of Europe, in a forthcoming Special Bulletin of the Boston Public Library. In its index under "Jews" and "Semites" will be found an exhaustive list of authorities given chronologically.

[1] In preparing this article, I want to thank Mr. Joseph Jacobs from London, whose works in this field are widely regarded as an authority. I received invaluable help in its illustration from Dr. S. Weissenberg of Elizabethgrad, Russia, and Dr. L. Bertholon of Tunis. Both gentlemen provided me with a significant number of original photographs from their respective countries. Dr. Bertholon also took several specifically for this purpose. The broader works we've relied on include: R. Andree, On Jewish Folklore, Bielefeld, 1881; A. Leroy-Beaulieu, Jewish people and antisemitism, Paris, 3e éd. 1893; and C. Lombroso, Gli Antisemitismo, Torino, 1894. For all other authorities mentioned by name and year, please refer to our comprehensive Bibliography of the Anthropology and Ethnology of Europe, which will be available in a forthcoming Special Bulletin of the Boston Public Library. You can find an exhaustive chronological list of authorities under "Jews" and "Semites" in the index.

[2] Andree, 1881, pp. 194 et seq., with tables appended; Jacobs, 1886 a, p. 24; and quite recently A. Leroy-Beaulieu, 1893, chapter i, are best on this. Tschubinsky, 1877, gives much detail at first hand on western Russia. In the Seventeenth Annual Report of the Anglo-Jewish Association, London, 1888, is a convenient census, together with a map of distribution for Europe. On America, no official data of any kind exist. The censuses have never attempted an enumeration of the Jews. Schimmer's results from the census of 1880 in Austria-Hungary are given in Statistische Monatsschrift, vii, p. 489 et seq.

[2] Andree, 1881, pp. 194 et seq., with attached tables; Jacobs, 1886 a, p. 24; and most recently A. Leroy-Beaulieu, 1893, chapter i, provide the best information on this. Tschubinsky, 1877, offers a lot of firsthand detail about western Russia. The Seventeenth Annual Report of the Anglo-Jewish Association, London, 1888, includes a handy census along with a map showing distribution across Europe. As for America, there are no official statistics whatsoever. The censuses have never included a count of the Jews. Schimmer's findings from the 1880 census in Austria-Hungary can be found in Statistical Monthly Journal, vii, p. 489 et seq.

[3] This is clearly shown by Schimmer in Statistische Monatsschrift, vii, pp. 489 et seq.

[3] This is clearly shown by Schimmer in Statistical Monthly Journal, vii, pp. 489 et seq.

[4] See also map in Kettler, 1880.

[4] See also the map in Kettler, 1880.

[5] J. C. Majer (1862) ascribes the shortness of stature in Furth to this Jewish influence.

[5] J. C. Majer (1862) attributes the short stature in Furth to Jewish influence.

[6] 1892.

1892.

[7] 1895, p. 577.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ 1895, p. 577.

[8] 1891.

1891.

[9] Glück, 1896; and Weisbach, 1877 and 1895 a.

[9] Glück, 1896; and Weisbach, 1877 and 1895 a.

[10] Majer and Kopernicki, 1877, p. 36, for Ruthenia; Stieda, 1883, p. 70; Anutchin, 1889, p. 114, etc.

[10] Majer and Kopernicki, 1877, p. 36, for Ruthenia; Stieda, 1883, p. 70; Anutchin, 1889, p. 114, etc.

[11] Zakrezewski, 1891, p. 38. In the October Monthly our stature map of all Russia brings out the contrast very strongly.

[11] Zakrezewski, 1891, p. 38. In the October Monthly, our height map of all Russia highlights the contrast very clearly.

[12] Centralblatt für Anthropologie, iii, p. 66. Uke, cited by Andree, 1881, p. 32, agrees.

[12] Anthropology Central Journal, iii, p. 66. Uke, cited by Andree, 1881, p. 32, agrees.

[13] Popular Science Monthly, vol. li, p. 20 et seq. (May, 1897), and vol. lii, p. 602 (March, 1898).

[13] Popular Science Monthly, vol. 51, p. 20 et seq. (May, 1897), and vol. 52, p. 602 (March, 1898).

[14] Jacobs, 1889, p. 81.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Jacobs, 1889, p. 81.

[15] Talko-Hryncewicz, 1892, pp. 7 and 58.

[15] Talko-Hryncewicz, 1892, pp. 7 and 58.

[16] Collignon, 1887 a, pp. 211 and 326; and Bertholon, 1892, p. 41.

[16] Collignon, 1887 a, pp. 211 and 326; and Bertholon, 1892, p. 41.

[17] Jacobs, 1891, p. 50, shows it to be less common in other parts of Europe. In the United States, Dr. Billings finds the marriage rate to be only 7.4 per 1,000—about one third that of the Northeastern States.

[17] Jacobs, 1891, p. 50, shows that it's less common in other parts of Europe. In the United States, Dr. Billings finds the marriage rate to be only 7.4 per 1,000—about one-third that of the Northeastern States.

[18] 1877, p. 59.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ 1877, p. 59.

[19] 1883, p. 71.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ 1883, p. 71.

[20] 1889, p. 84.

1889, p. 84.

[21] 1896, p. 591.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ 1896, p. 591.

[22] 1895, p. 374.

1895, p. 374.

[23] On Jewish demography, consult the special appendix in Lombroso, 1874; Andree, 1881, p. 70; Jacobs, 1891, p. 49. Dr. Billings, in Eleventh United States Census, 1890, Bulletin No. 19, gives data for our country. On pathology, see Buschan, 1895.

[23] For information on Jewish demographics, check the special appendix in Lombroso, 1874; Andree, 1881, p. 70; Jacobs, 1891, p. 49. Dr. Billings provides data for our country in the Eleventh United States Census, 1890, Bulletin No. 19. For pathology, refer to Buschan, 1895.

[24] The Jew as a Life Risk. The Spectator (an actuarial journal) 1895, pp. 222-224, and 233, 234. Lagneau, 1861, p. 411, speaks of a viability in Algeria even lower than that of the natives.

[24] The Jewish Population as a Life Risk. The Spectator (an insurance journal) 1895, pp. 222-224, and 233, 234. Lagneau, 1861, p. 411, mentions a survival rate in Algeria that is even lower than that of the local population.

[25] From a lecture delivered at the Field Columbian Museum, November 13, 1897.

[25] From a lecture given at the Field Columbian Museum, November 13, 1897.

[26] Löwenstimm's studies, printed originally in the Journal of the Ministry of Justice in St. Petersburg, have been made accessible to a larger class of readers by being collected and translated into German in a volume entitled Aberglaube und Strafrecht (Berlin: Räde, 1897), with an introduction by Prof. Joseph Kohler, of the University of Berlin.

[26] Löwenstimm's studies, which were first published in the Journal of the Ministry of Justice in St. Petersburg, have been made available to a wider audience by being compiled and translated into German in a book titled Superstition and Criminal Law (Berlin: Räde, 1897), featuring an introduction by Prof. Joseph Kohler from the University of Berlin.

[27] As the Siberian Railway approached the northern boundaries of the Chinese Empire and surveys were made for its extension through Manchuria to the sea, great excitement was produced in Pekin by the rumor that the Russian minister had applied to the Empress of China for two thousand children to be buried in the roadbed under the rails in order to strengthen it. Some years ago, in rebuilding a large bridge, which had been swept away several times by inundations in the Yarkand, eight children, purchased from poor people at a high price, were immured alive in the foundations. As the new bridge was firmly constructed out of excellent materials, it has hitherto withstood the force of the strongest floods, a result which the Chinese attribute, not to the solid masonry, but to the propitiation of the river god by an offering of infants.

[27] As the Siberian Railway neared the northern borders of the Chinese Empire and plans were being drawn up for its extension through Manchuria to the sea, a lot of excitement stirred in Beijing due to rumors that the Russian minister had requested the Empress of China for two thousand children to be buried in the roadbed under the tracks to make it stronger. A few years ago, when rebuilding a large bridge that had repeatedly been washed away by floods in the Yarkand, eight children were bought from poor families at a high price and sealed alive in the foundations. Since the new bridge was built solidly with high-quality materials, it has so far withstood the impact of the most severe floods, a success that the Chinese credit not to the strong masonry, but to the appeasement of the river god through the sacrifice of infants.

[28] See the case of Bridget Cleary, reported in Appletons' Popular Science Monthly for November, 1895, p. 86. We may add that her husband, Michael Cleary, was tried for murder and sentenced to twenty years' penal servitude.

[28] See the case of Bridget Cleary, reported in Appletons' Popular Science Monthly for November 1895, p. 86. We should also mention that her husband, Michael Cleary, was tried for murder and sentenced to twenty years in prison.

[29] General Code, vol. xiii, edition of 1892, cited by Löwenstimm.

[29] General Code, vol. xiii, 1892 edition, referenced by Löwenstimm.

[30] A full account of the trial is given in a Latin manuscript preserved in the city archives of Nantes.

[30] A complete record of the trial is found in a Latin manuscript kept in the city archives of Nantes.

[31] Dr. Samuel Aughey, Physical Geography of Nebraska, 1880. Prof. J. E. Todd, Science, April 23, 1886, and January 8, 1897. E. H. Barbour, Publication No. V, Nebraska Academy of Sciences. J. A. Udden, The American Geologist, June, 1891, and April, 1893. R. D. Salisbury, Science, December 4, 1896. G. P. Merril, Proceedings of the United States National Museum, 1885.

[31] Dr. Samuel Aughey, Physical Geography of Nebraska, 1880. Prof. J. E. Todd, Science, April 23, 1886, and January 8, 1897. E. H. Barbour, Publication No. V, Nebraska Academy of Sciences. J. A. Udden, The American Geologist, June 1891, and April 1893. R. D. Salisbury, Science, December 4, 1896. G. P. Merril, Proceedings of the United States National Museum, 1885.

[32] Medical Times and Gazette, London, England, November 17, 1883.

[32] Medical Times and Gazette, London, England, November 17, 1883.

[33] Whewell also had "the scalp and skull thick." Brain weighed 49 ounces. The Lancet, London, England, March 17, 1866, p. 280.

[33] Whewell also had a "thick scalp and skull." The brain weighed 49 ounces. The Lancet, London, England, March 17, 1866, p. 280.

[34] Medical Times and Gazette, London, England, May 12, 1883, p. 525.

[34] Medical Times and Gazette, London, England, May 12, 1883, p. 525.

[35] London Medical Gazette, London, England, September 13, 1828, p. 478.

[35] London Medical Gazette, London, England, September 13, 1828, p. 478.

[36] Brain Weight of Man. By Dr. Bischoff. Bonn, Germany, 1880, p. 137.

[36] Brain Weight of Man. By Dr. Bischoff. Bonn, Germany, 1880, p. 137.

[37] Authority for this weight is the Medical Army Museum, Washington,D. C.

[37] The source for this weight is the Medical Army Museum in Washington, D.C.

[38] This brain is kept in and its weight is recorded on the glass jar in the Pathological Museum at Munich, Germany.

[38] This brain is stored in a glass jar at the Pathological Museum in Munich, Germany, and its weight is noted on the jar.

[39] Idiocy and Imbecility. By Dr. Ireland. London, 1877, p. 75.

[39] Idiocy and Imbecility. By Dr. Ireland. London, 1877, p. 75.

[40] The Human Species. By A. De Quatrefages. D. Appleton and Company, New York, 1884, p. 380.

[40] The Human Species. By A. De Quatrefages. D. Appleton and Company, New York, 1884, p. 380.

[41] Dr. Gall's works, Boston, Massachusetts, vol. i, p. 36.

[41] Dr. Gall's works, Boston, Massachusetts, vol. 1, p. 36.

[42] Life of George Combe, London, 1878, vol. ii, p. 381.

[42] Life of George Combe, London, 1878, vol. ii, p. 381.

[43] Medical News and Gazette, London, June 16, 1888, p. 521.

[43] Medical News and Gazette, London, June 16, 1888, p. 521.

[44] Morning Herald, Sydney, Australia, February 23, 1884.

[44] Morning Herald, Sydney, Australia, February 23, 1884.

[45] Eleven Chinamen, found by Dr. C. Clapham to afford an average of 50.4 ounces, had been killed in a typhoon, and were therefore in no wise wasted by disease. (Journal of the Anthropological Institute, London, England, vol. vii, p. 90.)

[45] Eleven Chinese men, discovered by Dr. C. Clapham to have an average weight of 50.4 ounces, had died in a typhoon and were therefore not wasted by illness. (Journal of the Anthropological Institute, London, England, vol. vii, p. 90.)

[46] The Nervous System, London, 1834, p. 447.

[46] The Nervous System, London, 1834, p. 447.

[47] Anatomie comparative du système nerveux, tome i, 1839, p. 506.

[47] Comparative Anatomy of the Nervous System, volume 1, 1839, p. 506.

[48] Ueber die typischen Verschiedenheiten der Windungen der Hemisphären und über die Lehre vom Hirngewicht, Göttingen, 1860. Also see Pathology and Therapeutics of Mental Diseases, London, 1870, p. 23.

[48] Regarding the usual differences in the convolutions of the brain hemispheres and the theory of brain weight, Göttingen, 1860. Also see Pathology and Therapeutics of Mental Diseases, London, 1870, p. 23.

[49] History of Philosophy, London, 1867, vol. ii, p. 433.

[49] History of Philosophy, London, 1867, vol. ii, p. 433.

[50] The Brain as an Organ of Mind, London, 1880, pp. 276, 277.

[50] The Brain as an Organ of Mind, London, 1880, pp. 276, 277.

[51] Nachrichten, Göttingen, February 29, 1860, p. 75.

[51] News, Göttingen, February 29, 1860, p. 75.

[52] Carpenter's Principles of Human Physiology, London, 1881, p. 659.

[52] Carpenter's Principles of Human Physiology, London, 1881, p. 659.

[53] Edinburgh Medical and Surgical Journal, 1853, vol. lxxix, p. 360.

[53] Edinburgh Medical and Surgical Journal, 1853, vol. 79, p. 360.

[54] Idiocy and Imbecility, London, 1877, pp. 216-219.

[54] Idiocy and Imbecility, London, 1877, pp. 216-219.

[55] See The Brain as an Organ of Mind, London, 1880, p. 465; also, The Human Brain, London, 1847, pp. 288, 289.

[55] See The Brain as an Organ of Mind, London, 1880, p. 465; also, The Human Brain, London, 1847, pp. 288, 289.

[56] Eclectic Magazine, December 14, 1863, p. 428.

[56] Eclectic Magazine, December 14, 1863, p. 428.

[57] From an address before the Société des Amis des Sciences.

[57] From a speech given to the Friends of Science Society.

[58] Vol. xlvii, September, 1895.

Vol. 47, September 1895.

[59] The Play of Animals. By Karl Groos. Translated by Elizabeth L. Baldwin. New York: D. Appleton and Company. Pp. 341. Price, $1.75.

[59] The Play of Animals. By Karl Groos. Translated by Elizabeth L. Baldwin. New York: D. Appleton and Company. Pp. 341. Price, $1.75.

[60] A History of Spanish Literature. By James Fitz Maurice-Kelly. New York: D. Appleton and Company. (Literature of the World Series. Edited by Edmund Gosse.) Pp. 433. Price, $1.50.

[60] A History of Spanish Literature. By James Fitz Maurice-Kelly. New York: D. Appleton and Company. (Literature of the World Series. Edited by Edmund Gosse.) Pp. 433. Price, $1.50.

[61] The American Woods. Exhibited by Actual Specimens. Part I, representing Twenty-five Species. By Romeyn B. Hough: Lowville, N. Y. The Author.

[61] The American Woods. Showcased Through Real Specimens. Part I, featuring Twenty-five Species. By Romeyn B. Hough: Lowville, N. Y. The Author.

[62] Plant Life considered with Special Reference to Form and Function. By Charles Reid Barnes. New York: Henry Holt & Co. Pp. 428. Price, $1.12.

[62] Plant Life looked at through the lens of Form and Function. By Charles Reid Barnes. New York: Henry Holt & Co. Pp. 428. Price, $1.12.

[63] Electro-Dynamics. The Direct-Current Motor. By Charles Ashley Carus-Wilson. New York: Longmans, Green & Co. Pp. 298.

[63] Electro-Dynamics. The Direct-Current Motor. By Charles Ashley Carus-Wilson. New York: Longmans, Green & Co. Pp. 298.

[64] Applied Physiology. Including the Effects of Alcohol and Narcotics. By Frank Overton, M. D. Primary Grade. Pp. 128. Intermediate Grade. Pp. 188. Advanced Grade. Pp. 432. American Book Company.

[64] Applied Physiology. Covering the Effects of Alcohol and Drugs. By Frank Overton, M.D. Primary Level. 128 pages. Intermediate Level. 188 pages. Advanced Level. 432 pages. American Book Company.

[65] Yetta Ségal. By Horace J. Rollin. New York: G. W. Dillingham & Co. Pp. 174.

[65] Yetta Ségal. By Horace J. Rollin. New York: G. W. Dillingham & Co. Pp. 174.

[66] The Mammalian Anatomy of the Cat. By Horace Jayne, M. D. Philadelphia: J. B. Lippincott Company. Illustrated. Pp. 816. Price, $5.00.

[66] The Anatomy of the Cat. By Horace Jayne, M.D. Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott Company. Illustrated. 816 pages. Price: $5.00.

Transcriber's Notes:

Transcriber's Notes:

Obvious typographical errors were repaired. Archaic spellings retained.

Obvious typos were fixed. Old-fashioned spellings kept.

Illustrations were relocated to correspond to their references in the text.

Illustrations were moved to match their references in the text.




        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!